S-Class

Digital – in the vehicle Vehicle document wallet

Familiarize yourself with the con‐ Here you can find comprehen‐
tents of the Operator's Manual sive information about operating
directly via the vehicle's multi‐ your vehicle and about services
media system (menu item "Vehi‐ and guarantees in printed form.
cle information"). Start with the
quick guide or broaden your
knowledge with practical tips.

S-Class
É2235845404YËÍ

Mercedes-Benz
Operator's Manual
2235845404
Order no. P223 0181 13 Part no. 223 584 54 04
Edition F 2021 Mercedes-Benz
Front passenger airbag warning & WARNING Risk of injury or death if the Publication details
co-driver airbag is enabled Internet
If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi‐
the co-driver seat may be struck by the co- cles and about Mercedes‑Benz AG can be found
driver airbag during an accident. on the following websites:
NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint https://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT https://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)
AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the
CHILD can occur. Documentation team
©Mercedes‑Benz AG: Not to be reprinted, trans‐
Observe the chapter "Children in the vehicle". lated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in
part, without written permission from
Mercedes‑Benz AG.
Vehicle manufacturer
Mercedes‑Benz AG
Mercedesstraße 120
70372 Stuttgart
Germany

Airbag warning sticker for USA and Canada

As at 06.07.20
 Thank you for purchasing a Mercedes-Benz R Technical features
Before you first drive off, read this Operator's The equipment in your vehicle may therefore dif‐
Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with fer from that shown in the descriptions and illus‐
your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer trations.
operating lifespan of the vehicle, follow the The following documents are integral parts of
instructions and warning notices in this Opera‐ the vehicle:
tor's Manual. Disregarding them may lead to
R Printed Operator's Manual
damage to the vehicle or injury to people.
R Maintenance Booklet
Damage to the vehicle resulting from the disre‐
gard of the instructions is not covered by the R Equipment-dependent Supplements
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all
The standard equipment and product description times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all of
of your vehicle may vary and depends on the fol‐ the documents on to the new owner.
lowing factors:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
R Model
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
R Order
A Daimler Company
R National version
R Availability

Mercedes-Benz reserves the right to introduce

changes in the following areas:
R Design
2235845404
R Equipment

2235845404
2 Contents

Declaration of conformity for wireless

Symbols ........................................................ 5 vehicle components ..................................... 30 Opening and closing .................................. 75
Diagnostics connection ................................ 31 SmartKey ...................................................... 75
Qualified specialist workshop ....................... 32 Doors ............................................................ 80
At a glance .................................................... 6 Trunk ............................................................ 84
Cockpit ........................................................... 6 Correct use of the vehicle ............................ 33
Notes for persons with electronic medi‐ Side windows ................................................ 91
Indicator and warning lamps (standard) ......... 8 Sliding sunroof ............................................. 95
Indicator and warning lamps (with driver cal aids ......................................................... 33
Problems with your vehicle ........................... 33 Roller sun blinds ......................................... 100
camera): ....................................................... 12 Anti-theft protection ................................... 102
Overhead control panel ................................ 16 Reporting safety defects ............................... 34
Door operating unit and seat adjustment ..... 18 Limited Warranty .......................................... 35
Control settings in the rear passenger QR code for rescue card ............................... 35 Seats and stowing ................................... 105
compartment ................................................ 20 Data storage ................................................. 35 Notes on the correct driver's seat posi‐
Emergencies and breakdowns ...................... 22 Copyright ...................................................... 40 tion ............................................................. 105
Seats .......................................................... 105
Occupant safety ......................................... 41 Steering wheel ............................................ 125
Digital Operator's Manual ......................... 24 Easy entry and exit feature ......................... 127
Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual ...... 24 Restraint system ........................................... 41
Seat belts ..................................................... 43 Memory function ........................................ 128
Airbags ......................................................... 48 Memory function in the rear passenger
compartment .............................................. 130
General notes ............................................. 25 PRE-SAFE® system ....................................... 58 Stowage areas ............................................ 133
Protection of the environment ...................... 25 Automatic measures after an accident ......... 60 Cup holder .................................................. 144
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ...................... 25 Safely transporting children in the vehi‐ Sockets ....................................................... 144
Operator's Manual ........................................ 26 cle ................................................................ 60 Refrigerator box .......................................... 147
Touch-sensitive controls ............................... 27 Notes on pets in the vehicle .......................... 74 Wireless charging of the mobile phone
Service and vehicle operation ....................... 27 and connection with the exterior antenna .. 149
Operating safety ........................................... 28
 Contents 3

Installing and removing the floor mats ........ 152 Driving and driving safety systems .............. 215
Vehicle towing instructions ......................... 272 Maintenance and care ............................. 324
ASSYST PLUS service interval display ......... 324
Light and visibility ................................... 154 Engine compartment .................................. 325
Exterior lighting .......................................... 154 Driver display ........................................... 273 Cleaning and care ....................................... 330
Interior lighting ........................................... 164 Notes on the driver display ......................... 273
Windshield wiper and windshield washer Notes on the 3D driver display ................... 273
system ........................................................ 167 Operating the driver display ........................ 273 Breakdown assistance ............................ 337
Mirrors ........................................................ 171 Menus on the driver display ........................ 274 Emergency .................................................. 337
Area permeable to radio waves on the Head-up Display ......................................... 275 Flat tire ....................................................... 338
windshield ................................................... 174 Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical Battery (vehicle) ......................................... 344
Infrared-reflective windshield function ........ 174 system (EQ Boost technology) .................... 278 Tow starting or towing away ....................... 350
Overview of status displays on the driver Electrical fuses ........................................... 354
display ........................................................ 279
Climate control ......................................... 175
Overview of climate control systems .......... 175 Wheels and tires ...................................... 358
Operating the climate control system ......... 176 MBUX multimedia system ...................... 280 Notes on noise or unusual handling char‐
Overview and operation .............................. 280 acteristics ................................................... 358
System settings .......................................... 294 Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and
Driving and parking ................................. 187 Navigation and traffic ................................. 297 tires ............................................................ 358
Driving ........................................................ 187 Telephone ................................................... 304 Notes on snow chains ................................ 359
DYNAMIC SELECT switch ............................ 198 Mercedes me and apps .............................. 307 Activating or deactivating snow chain
Automatic transmission .............................. 201 Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ...... 314 mode .......................................................... 359
Function of the 4MATIC .............................. 205 Radio & media ............................................. 317 Tire pressure .............................................. 360
Refueling .................................................... 205 Sound settings ........................................... 323 Loading the vehicle .................................... 365
Parking ....................................................... 207 Tire labeling ................................................ 369
Definition of terms for tires and loading ..... 374
4 Contents

Changing a wheel ....................................... 377

Emergency spare wheel .............................. 386

Technical data .......................................... 387

Notes on technical data .............................. 387
Vehicle electronics ..................................... 387
Radio operating permits for vehicle com‐
ponents ...................................................... 389
Vehicle identification plate, VIN and
engine number overview ............................ 466
Operating fluids .......................................... 468
Vehicle data ................................................ 476

Display messages and warning/indi‐

cator lamps ............................................... 478
Display messages ....................................... 478
Warning and indicator lamps ...................... 530

Index ......................................................... 548

 Symbols 5

In this Operator's Manual, you will find the fol‐ # Observe notes on material damage.
lowing symbols:
% These symbols indicate useful instructions
& DANGER Danger due to not observing or further information that could be helpful
the warning notices to you.
Warning notices draw your attention to haz‐ # Instruction
ards that may endanger your health or life, or (/ page) Further information on a topic
the health or life of others.
Display Messages in the central display
# Observe the warning notices.
4 Highest menu level, which is to be
selected in the multimedia system
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to failure to observe envi‐ 5 Relevant submenus, which are to be
ronmental notes selected in the multimedia system
* Indicates a cause
Environmental notes include information on
environmentally responsible behavior or envi‐
ronmentally responsible disposal.
# Observe environmental notes.

* NOTE Damage to property due to failure

to observe notes on material damage
Notes on material damage inform you of
risks which may lead to your vehicle being
damaged.
6 At a glance – Cockpit

Left-hand-drive vehicles
 At a glance – Cockpit 7

1 Light switch → 154 Ü Switching the MBUX multimedia system → 280

→ on/off
2 Steering wheel gearshift paddles 203
a Switching sound on/off → 280
3 Combination switch → 155
ø Adjusting the volume → 280
4 Driver display → 273
B £ Hazard warning light system → 156
5 DIRECT SELECT lever → 201
C Control panel for the MBUX multimedia sys‐ → 282
6 ü Start/stop button → 188
tem
è ECO start/stop function → 196
D Adjusting the steering wheel → 125
7 Central display → 280
ý Switching the steering wheel heater → 126
8 Glove box → 135 on/off
9 Storage compartment → 135 E Control panel:
A Control panel for: Driver display → 273
÷ DYNAMIC SELECT switch → 199 H Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC → 226
c Active Parking Assist → 267 F Diagnostics connection → 31
\ Quick vehicle access G M Opening the hood → 325
ú Fingerprint sensor → 280 H ! Electric parking brake → 211
8 At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps (standard)

Driver display (standard)

 At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps (standard) 9

1 #! Turn signal lights → 155 C H Mercedes me connect → 546

2 ä Suspension (red) → 542 D ÿ Coolant temperature → 535
ä Suspension (yellow) → 542 E Coolant temperature display
3 # Electrical malfunction → 535 F ! Electric parking brake (yellow) → 539
4 Ù Power steering (red) → 533 G Electric parking brake (red) → 539
Ù Power steering (yellow) → 533 F USA only
Ù Rear-axle steering (red) → 533 ! Canada only
Ù Rear-axle steering (yellow) → 533 H Brakes (red) → 539
5 6 Restraint system → 531 $ USA only
6 ü Seat belt → 531 J Canada only
7 L Distance warning → 542 é Recuperative Brake System, USA only → 539
8 ! ABS → 543 J Brakes (yellow), Canada only → 539
9 h Tire pressure monitoring system → 546 I 8 Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap location → 535
→ indicator
A ; Check Engine 535
→ J Fuel level
B å ESP® OFF 543
K K High beam → 155
÷ ESP® → 543
L Low beam → 154
10 At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps (standard)

T Parking lamps → 154 L R Rear fog light → 155

12 At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps (with driver camera):

Driver display with driver camera

 At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps (with driver camera): 13

1 #! Turn signal lights → 155 $ USA only

2 ü Seat belt → 531 J Canada only
3 L Distance warning → 542 é Recuperative Brake System, USA only → 539
4 6 Restraint system → 531 J Brakes (yellow), Canada only → 539
5 h Tire pressure monitoring system → 546 E 8 Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap location → 535
→ indicator
6 å ESP® OFF 543
F Fuel level
÷ ESP® → 543
G R Rear fog lamp → 155
7 ! ABS → 543
H K High beam → 155
8 H Mercedes me connect → 546
L Low beam → 154
9 ÿ Coolant temperature → 535
T Parking lamps → 154
A Coolant temperature display
I # Electrical malfunction → 535
B ! Electric parking brake (yellow) → 539
J ; Check Engine → 535
C Electric parking brake (red) → 539
K Ù Power steering (red) → 533
F USA only
Ù Power steering (yellow) → 533
! Canada only
Ù Rear axle steering (red) → 533
D Brakes (red) → 539
Ù Rear axle steering (yellow) → 533
14 At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps (with driver camera):

L ä Suspension (red) → 542 ä Suspension (yellow) → 542

16 At a glance – Overhead control panel
 At a glance – Overhead control panel 17

1 Sun visors 9 3 Opens/closes the panorama roof with → 95

→ power tilt/sliding panel
2 c Switches the front interior lighting 164
on/off 3 Opens/closes the panorama roof with → 95
→ power tilt/sliding panel front roller sunblind
3 u Switches the rear interior lighting 164
on/off A Indicator lamps:
4 ; me button → 309 PASSENGER AIR BAG → 53
5 D Opens/closes the panorama roof with → 95 REAR SEAT AIR BAG → 58
power tilt/sliding panel rear roller sunblind →
B Inside rearview mirror 172
6 | Switches automatic interior lighting con‐ → 164
C p Switches the left-hand reading lamp → 164
trol on/off
on/off
7 G SOS button → 309
8 p Switches the right-hand reading lamp → 164
on/off
18 At a glance – Door operating unit and seat adjustment
 At a glance – Door operating unit and seat adjustment 19

1 ß Ü Locks/unlocks the vehicle → 80 A p Opens/closes the trunk lid → 84

2 Adjusts the seats electrically → 105 B D Rear window roller sunblind → 100
3 w Switches the seat heating on/off → 123 C S Child safety lock for the rear side win‐ → 73
→ dows
4 s Switches the seat ventilation on/off 125
D Opens the door → 80
5 w Adjusts the front passenger seat from → 108
the driver's seat E W Opens/closes the rear left side window → 91
6 Operates the memory function → 129 F W Opens/closes the left side window → 91
7 Í Operates the outside mirrors → 171 G Adjusts the head restraints → 117
8 W Opens/closes the right side window → 91 H Seat adjustment using the multimedia system → 121
9 W Opens/closes the rear right side win‐ → 91
dow
20 At a glance – Control settings in the rear passenger compartment

Vehicles with a reclining rear seat

 At a glance – Control settings in the rear passenger compartment 21

1 Climate control rear operating unit → 176 8 a Resets the standard seat adjustment → 112
settings
2 Electronics compartment in the center con‐
sole 9 Memory function in the rear passenger com‐ → 131
→ partment
115 V socket 145
→ A Storage box in the seat backrest
3 j Sets the fully reclined position 112
Refrigerator box → 147
4 V Selects the front passenger seat → 109
→ B Storage compartment in the rear armrest
5 s Switches the rear seat ventilation 125
on/off C MBUX rear tablet bracket
6 w Switches the rear seat heating on/off → 123 D Cup holder
7 Adjusts the reclining rear seats electrically → 111
22 At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns
 At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns 23

1 B-pillar with: 7 £ Hazard warning light system → 156

QR code for accessing the rescue card → 35 8 Fuel filler flap with:
2 Safety vests → 337 information label on fuel type → 205
3 ; me button → 309 Information label for tire pressure → 361
G SOS button → 309 QR code for accessing the rescue card → 35
4 Checking and refilling operating fluids → 468 9 Tow-starting or towing away → 351
Starting assistance → 348 A First-aid kit → 338
5 Tow-starting or towing away → 351 B TIREFIT kit → 340
6 Flat tire → 338 C Warning triangle → 338
24 Digital Operator's Manual

Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual You can search for keywords using the search Some sections in the Digital Operator's Manual,
field Search, in order to find quick answers to such as warning notes, can be expanded and
Multimedia system: questions about the operation of the vehicle. collapsed.
4 © 5 Settings 5 Info
Additional methods of calling up the Digital
5 Operator's Manual
Operator's Manual:
5 Open Digital Operator's Manual
Driver display: call up brief information as dis‐
The Digital Operator's Manual describes the play messages in the instrument cluster
functions and operation of the vehicle and the
multimedia system. MBUX Voice Assistant: call up via the voice
control system
# Select one of the following menu items in the
Digital Operator's Manual: Global search: call up search results for con‐
R Quick start: find the first steps towards set‐ tents of the Digital Operator's Manual in the
ting up your vehicle. home screen
R Tips: find information that prepares you for
For safety reasons, the Digital Operator's Man‐
certain everyday situations with your vehicle. ual is deactivated while driving.
R Animations: watch animations of the vehicle
% With automatic content updates, you can
functions. always keep the Digital Operator's Manual
up to date. This function is country-depend‐
R Messages: receive additional information ent.
about the messages in the driver display. 1 Menu
R Language: select the language for the Digital 2 Search
Operator's Manual. 3 Back
4 Contents section
 General notes 25

Protection of the environment # Always have maintenance work carried Environmental issues and recommendations
out at a qualified specialist workshop. It is recommended that you re-use or recycle
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental materials instead of just disposing of them.
damage due to operating conditions and Personal driving style: The relevant environmental guidelines and regu‐
personal driving style # Do not depress the accelerator pedal lations serve to protect the environment and
when starting the engine. must be strictly observed.
The pollutant emission of the vehicle is
directly related to the way you operate the # Do not warm up the engine while the
vehicle. vehicle is stationary. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
Operate your vehicle in an environmentally # Drive carefully and maintain a suitable
responsible manner to help protect the envi‐ distance from the vehicle in front. + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
ronment. Please observe the following rec‐ # Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration damage due to not using recycled recon‐
ommendations on operating conditions and and braking. ditioned components
personal driving style. # Change gear in good time and use each Mercedes‑Benz AG offers recycled recondi‐
Operating conditions: gear only up to Ô of its maximum tioned components and parts with the same
# Make sure that the tire pressure is cor‐ engine speed. quality as new parts. The same entitlement
rect. # Switch off the engine in stationary traf‐ from the Limited Warranty is valid as for new
# Do not carry any unnecessary weight fic, e.g. by using the ECO start/stop parts.
(e.g. roof luggage racks once you no function. # Use recycled reconditioned compo‐
longer need them). # Drive fuel-efficiently. Observe the ECO nents and parts from
# Adhere to the service intervals. display for a fuel-efficient driving style. Mercedes‑Benz AG.
A regularly serviced vehicle will contrib‐
ute to environmental protection.
26 General notes

* NOTE Impairment of the operating effi‐ # Have aftermarket installation of acces‐ necessary service and repair work. In addition,
ciency of the restraint systems from sories carried out at a qualified special‐ strategically located parts delivery centers pro‐
installing accessory parts or from repairs ist workshop. vide for quick and reliable parts service.
or welding Always specify the vehicle identification number
You could jeopardize the operating safety of your (VIN) (/ page 466) when ordering Mercedes-
Airbags and Emergency Tensioning Devices, vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as well Benz GenuineParts.
as well as control units and sensors for the as accessories relevant to safety which have not
restraint systems, may be installed in the fol‐ been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-rele‐
lowing areas of your vehicle: vant systems, e.g. the brake system, may mal‐ Operator's Manual
R Doors function. Only use Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts This Operator's Manual describes all models and
R Door pillars or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels all standard and optional equipment available for
and accessories that have been specifically your vehicle at the time of this Operator's Man‐
R Door sills
approved for your vehicle model. ual going to press. Country-specific differences
R Seats are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be
Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts are subject to
R Cockpit strict quality inspections. Each part has been equipped with all features described. This is also
R Instrument cluster specially developed, manufactured or selected the case for systems and functions relevant to
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and adapted to safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle
R Center console
them. Therefore, only Mercedes-Benz Genuine‐ may differ from that in the descriptions and illus‐
R Lateral roof frame Parts should be used. trations.
# Do not install accessory parts such as More than 300,000 different Mercedes-Benz The original purchase agreement for your vehicle
audio systems in these areas. GenuineParts are available for Mercedes-Benz contains a list of all of the systems in your vehi‐
models. cle.
# Do not carry out repairs or welding.
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain Should you have any questions concerning
a supply of Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts for equipment and operation, please consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
 General notes 27

The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Booklet touch-sensitive user interface surface, for exam‐ Service and vehicle operation
are important documents and should be kept in ple.
the vehicle. Vehicle operation outside the USA or Canada
You receive haptic feedback in the following sit‐
uations, for example: When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe
R When pressing a button on the user interface
the following points:
Touch-sensitive controls
surface R Service points or replacement parts may not
In addition to conventional switches and but‐ be available immediately.
tons, your vehicle is equipped with touch-sensi‐ R When scrolling in a list or table
R Unleaded fuel may not be available for vehi‐
tive controls. R When reaching a new area on the user inter‐
face surface, e.g. a pop-up window cles with a catalytic converter. Leaded fuel
These are located in the following areas of your may cause damage to the catalytic converter.
vehicle: When handling touch-sensitive user interface R The fuel may have an extremely low octane
R Roof and door control panel surfaces, observe the following points to avoid number. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine
R Climate control problems operating: damage.
R Steering wheel R Do not affix stickers or similar objects on the
surfaces. Some Mercedes-Benz models are available in
R MBUX multimedia system Europe through our European Delivery Program.
R Keep the surfaces protected from moisture For more information, please consult an author‐
The controls have touch-sensitive user interface and wet conditions. ized Mercedes‑Benz service center, or write to
surfaces. The surfaces are controlled by press‐ R Keep the surfaces free of dust and dirt. one of the following address:
ing or swiping to adjust settings or to trigger
functions, for example. Some touch-sensitive control elements have a In the USA:
In the area of the touchscreen, you also receive symbol and integrated indicator lamps. When Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
haptic feedback in the form of a pulse or a vibra‐ operating, make sure to press on the symbol of European Delivery Department
tion, or the surface structure changes on the the control element.
One Mercedes-Benz Drive
Sandy Springs, GA 30328
28 General notes

In Canada: section in the Service and Warranty booklet Possible danger due to substances hazard‐
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. (Canada). You will find both in the vehicle docu‐ ous to health
ment wallet.
European Delivery Department In compliance with Proposition 65 ("Prop65"),
98 Vanderhoof Avenue the following detachable label has been added to
Change of address or change of ownership each vehicle sold in California:
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
In the event of a change of address, please send
us the "Notification of address change" in the
Maintenance Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the
Your customer advisor confirms the service in Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
the service report. (USA) on the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Cus‐
tomer Service (Canada) on 1-800-387-0100. We
Roadside Assistance can then reach you in a timely fashion, if neces‐
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro‐ sary.
gram offers technical help in the case of a If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all litera‐
breakdown. Your calls to the toll-free Roadside ture in the vehicle so that it is available to the
Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents next owner. If you have purchased a used vehi‐ Operating safety
24 hours a day, 365 days a year. cle, please send us the "Notice of Purchase of
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) (USA) Used Car" in the Service and Guarantee booklet & WARNING Risk of accident due to mal‐
or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer functions or system failures
1-800-387-0100 (Canada)
Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number
You can find further information in the 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Cus‐ To avoid malfunctions or system failures:
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program tomer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. # Always have the prescribed service and
brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" maintenance work as well any required
 General notes 29

repairs carried out at a qualified spe‐ & WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to driv‐
cialist workshop. materials on hot parts of the exhaust ing too fast and due to impacts to the
system vehicle underbody or suspension compo‐
& WARNING Risk of accident or injury due Flammable material such as leaves, grass or nents
to incorrect modifications on electronic twigs may ignite if they come into contact In the following situations, in particular, there
component parts with hot parts of the exhaust system. is a risk of damage to the vehicle:
Modification of electronic components, their # When driving on unpaved roads or off- R The vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a
software or wiring could impair their function road, regularly check the vehicle under‐ high curb or an unpaved road
and/or the function of other networked com‐ side. R The vehicle is driven too fast over an
ponent parts or safety-relevant systems. # Remove trapped plants or other flam‐ obstacle, e.g. a curb, speed bump or pot‐
This can endanger the operating safety of the mable material, in particular. hole
vehicle. # If there is damage, consult a qualified R A heavy object strikes the underbody or
# Never tamper with the wiring and elec‐ specialist workshop immediately. suspension components
tronic component parts or their soft‐
ware. In situations such as these, damage to the
body, underbody, suspension components,
# You should have all work on electrical
wheels or tires may not be visible. Compo‐
and electronic components carried out nents damaged in this way can unexpectedly
at a qualified specialist workshop. fail or, in the case of an accident, may no lon‐
ger absorb the resulting force as intended.
Observe the "On-board electronics" section in
"Technical data". If the underbody paneling is damaged, flam‐
mable materials such as leaves, grass or
twigs can collect between the underbody and
30 General notes

the underbody paneling. These materials may If you modify component parts of these high-
ignite if they come into contact with hot voltage components or touch damaged com‐
parts of the exhaust system. ponent parts, you may be electrocuted.
# Have the vehicle checked and repaired High voltage components may be damaged
immediately at a qualified specialist in an accident, although the damage may not
workshop. be visible.
or # Never perform modifications to compo‐

# If driving safety is impaired while con‐ nent parts of high-voltage components.

tinuing your journey, pull over and stop # Never touch damaged component parts
the vehicle immediately, while paying of high-voltage components. All work on high voltage components must be
attention to road and traffic conditions, # Never touch component parts of high- carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
and contact a qualified specialist work‐ voltage components after an accident.
shop.
Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system Declaration of conformity for wireless vehi‐
Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical sys‐ contain high voltage components. These compo‐ cle components
tem (EQ Boost technology) nents are marked with a high voltage label: USA: "Radio based devices of this vehicle com‐
ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is
& DANGER Risk of fatal injury by touching subject to the following two conditions: 1) These
damaged high-voltage components devices may not cause harmful interference, and
Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical sys‐ 2) These devices must accept any interference
tem contain individual high-voltage compo‐ received, including interference that may cause
nents. These high-voltage components are undesired operation. Changes or modifications
under high voltage. not expressly approved by the party responsible
 General notes 31

for compliance could void the user's authority to The name and address of the party responsible # For safety reasons, we recommend that
operate the equipment." is: you only use and connect products
Canada: "This vehicle contains license-exempt Continental Automotive Systems US Inc. approved by your authorized Mercedes-
transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Inno‐ 2400 Executive Hills Drive Benz Center.
vation, Science and Economic Development Can‐
ada’s RSS(s). Operation is subject to the follow‐ Auburn Hills, MI 48326-2980
& WARNING Risk of accident due to
ing two conditions: (1) These devices may not United States of America
objects in the driver's footwell
cause interference, and (2) These devices must
accept any interference, including interference Objects in the driver's footwell may impede
that may cause undesired operation of the Diagnostics connection pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
device." The diagnostics connection is a technical inter‐ This jeopardizes the operating and road
face in the vehicle. It is used, for example, within safety of the vehicle.
Charging unit for wireless charging of mobile the scope of repair and maintenance work or for
devices (WMI) # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
reading out vehicle data by a specialist work‐ so that they cannot get into the driver's
This equipment complies with FCC and IC radia‐ shop. Diagnostic devices should therefore only
tion exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled footwell.
be connected by a qualified specialist workshop.
environment. This equipment should be installed # Always install the floor mats securely
and operated with a minimum distance of 0 cm & WARNING Risk of accident due to con‐ and as prescribed in order to ensure
(in contact) between the radiator and your necting devices to the diagnostics con‐ that there is always sufficient room for
body. This transmitter must not be co-located or nection the pedals.
operating with any other antenna or transmitter. # Do not use loose floor mats and do not
If you connect devices to the diagnostics
USA: "Wireless charging system for mobile devi‐ connection of the vehicle, the function of place floor mats on top of one another.
ces (Model: D-WMI2015A): This Device complies vehicle systems and operating safety may be
with Part 18 of the FCC Rules." impaired.
32 General notes

* NOTE Battery discharging from using Moreover, connecting equipment to the diagnos‐
devices connected to the diagnostics tics connection can lead to emissions monitor‐
connection ing information being reset, for example. This
may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the
Using devices at the diagnostics connection requirements of the next emissions inspection
drains the battery. during the main inspection.
# Check the charge level of the battery.

# If the charge level is low, charge the Qualified specialist workshop

battery, e.g. by driving a considerable
distance. An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali‐
fied specialist workshop. It has the necessary
special skills, tools and qualifications to cor‐
rectly carry out the work required on your vehi‐
cle. This particularly applies to safety-relevant
works.
Always have the following work carried out on
Connecting and using another device with the your vehicle at a qualified specialist workshop:
diagnostics connection can have the following
R Safety-relevant works
effects:
R Service and maintenance work
R Malfunctions in the vehicle system
R Repair work
R Permanent damage to vehicle components
R Modifications as well as installations and
Please refer to the warranty terms and condi‐ conversions
tions for this matter.
R Work on electronic components
 General notes 33

R Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical Notes for persons with electronic medical Mercedes‑Benz AG recommends using only few
system (EQ boost technology): work on aids electrical vehicle systems and/or maintaining a
high voltage components of the 48 V on- distance from the components.
board electrical system Mercedes‑Benz AG cannot, despite carefully
developing vehicle systems, completely rule out Only have repairs and maintenance work in the
Mercedes‑Benz recommends an authorized the interaction of vehicle systems with electronic area of the following components carried out by
Mercedes‑Benz Center. medical aids such as cardiac pacemakers. a qualified specialist workshop:
In addition, there are components installed in R Vehicle components carrying live voltage
the vehicle that, regardless of the operating sta‐ R Transmission antenna
Correct use of the vehicle
tus of the vehicle, can generate magnetic fields R Multimedia system and sound system
If you remove any warning stickers, you or others on a par with permanent magnets. These fields
could fail to recognize certain dangers. Leave can be found, for example, in the area around If you have any queries or suggestions, consult a
warning stickers in position. the multimedia and sound system or also in the qualified specialist workshop.
Observe the following information in particular area of the seats, depending on the vehicle
when driving your vehicle: equipment.
Problems with your vehicle
R the safety notes in this manual For this reason, the following can occur in isola‐
ted cases, depending on the aids used: If you should experience a problem with your
R technical data for the vehicle vehicle, particularly one that you believe may
R Medical aids malfunctioning
R traffic rules and regulations affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact
R Adverse health effects an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi‐
R laws and safety standards pertaining to
motor vehicles ately to have the problem diagnosed and recti‐
Observe the notes and warnings of the manufac‐
fied. If the problem is not resolved to your satis‐
turer of the medical aids; if in doubt, contact the
faction, please discuss the problem again with
device manufacturer and/or your doctor. If there
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or, if nec‐
is continuing uncertainty concerning the possi‐
essary, contact us at one of the following
bility of medical aids malfunctioning,
addresses:
34 General notes

In the USA: National Highway Traffic Safety Administration If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz which could cause a crash or could cause injury
USA, LLC. or death, you should immediately inform Trans‐
Customer Assistance Center port Canada in addition to notifying Mercedes-
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
One Mercedes-Benz Drive open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety Benz Canada Inc.
Sandy Springs, GA 30328 defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order If Transport Canada received similar complaints,
In Canada: a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a
cannot become involved in individual problems safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz order a recall and remedy campaign. However,
Customer Relations Department USA, LLC. Transport Canada cannot become involved in
98 Vanderhoof Avenue To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle individual problems between you, your dealer or
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc.
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to the https:// To contact Transport Canada, you may call the
www.safercar.gov/; or write to: Administrator, Defect Investigations and Recalls Division toll-
Reporting safety defects NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, free in Canada at 1-800-333-0510 or
USA only: DC 20590,: USA. 819-994-3328in the Gatineau-Ottawa area or
You can also obtain other information about internationally; you may also go to the following
The following text is published as required of
motor vehicle safety from: https:// websites for more information:
manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Fed‐
eral Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the www.safercar.gov R English: https://www.tc.gc.ca/recalls
"National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of Canada only: R French: https://www.tc.gc.ca/rappels
1966". The following text is published as required of
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect manufacturers under subsection 18.4 (4) of the
which could cause a crash or could cause injury Motor Vehicle Safety Regulations.
or death, you should immediately inform the
 General notes 35

Limited Warranty vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the related to the functional characteristics in ques‐
electric lines. tion in their respective operating instructions.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising Further information can be obtained at https:// This information is also available online and,
from violation of these operating instruc‐ www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code. depending on the vehicle equipment, digitally.
tions. Personal data
Damage to the vehicle can arise from viola‐ Data storage Every vehicle is identified by a unique vehicle
tion of these operating instructions. identification number. Depending on the coun‐
Data processing in the vehicle try, this vehicle identification number can be
This damage is not covered either by the used by, for example, governmental authorities
Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the Electronic control units
Electronic control units are installed in your vehi‐ to determine the identity of the owner. There are
New‑ or Used-Vehicle Warranty. other possibilities to use data collected from the
# Follow the instructions in these operat‐ cle. Control units process data which, for exam‐
ple, they receive from vehicle sensors, generate vehicle to identify the owner or driver, such as
ing instructions on proper operation of the license plate number.
your vehicle as well as on possible vehi‐ themselves or exchange between themselves.
Some control units are required for the safe Therefore, data generated or processed by con‐
cle damage. trol units may be attributable to a person or,
operation of your vehicle, some assist you when
driving, such as driver assistance systems, while under certain conditions, become attributable to
others enable convenience or infotainment func‐ a person. Depending on which vehicle data are
QR code for rescue card available, it may be possible to make inferences
tions.
QR codes are attached in the fuel filler flap and The following provides you with general informa‐ about, for example, your driving behavior, your
on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event tion regarding data processing in the vehicle. location, your route or your use patterns.
of an accident, rescue services can use the QR Additional information regarding exactly which
code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card Legal requirements regarding the disclosure
data in your vehicle are collected, saved and of data
for your vehicle. The current rescue card con‐ transmitted to third parties and for what pur‐
tains the most important information about your If legally required to do so, manufacturers are, in
pose, can be found in the information directly individual cases, legally obliged to provide gov‐
36 General notes

ernmental entities, upon request and to the vehicle itself. Control units often contain data If you use services, such as repair services and
extent required, data stored by the manufac‐ memories for vehicle SmartKeys, for example. maintenance work, stored operational data as
turer. For example, this may be the case during Their use permits the temporary or permanent well as the vehicle identification number can be
the investigation of a criminal offense. documentation of technical information about read out and used. They can be read out by
Governmental entities are themselves, in individ‐ the vehicle's operating state, component loads, service network employees, such as workshops
ual cases and within the applicable legal frame‐ maintenance requirements and technical events and manufacturers or third parties, such as
work, authorized to read out data from the vehi‐ or malfunctions. breakdown services. The same is true in the
cle. In the case of an accident, information that Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow‐ case of warranty claims and quality assurance
can help with an investigation can, therefore, be ing data are stored: measures.
taken from the airbag control unit, for example. R Operating status of system components, In general, the readout is performed via the
such as fill levels, tire pressure or battery legally prescribed port for the diagnostics con‐
Operational data in the vehicle nection in the vehicle. The operational data that
This is data regarding the operation of the vehi‐ status
are read out document technical states of the
cle, which have been processed by control units. R Malfunctions or faults in important system
vehicle or of individual components and assist in
This includes the following data, for example: components, such as lights or brakes the diagnosis of malfunctions, compliance with
R Vehicle status information such as the speed, R System reactions in special driving situa‐ warranty obligations and quality improvement.
longitudinal acceleration, lateral accelera‐ tions, such as airbag deployment or the inter‐ To that end, these data, in particular information
tion, number of wheel revolutions or the fas‐ vention of stability control systems about component loads, technical events, mal‐
tened seat belts display R Information on events leading to vehicle functions and other faults may be transmitted
R Ambient conditions, such as temperature, damage along with the vehicle identification number to
the manufacturer. Furthermore, the manufac‐
rain sensor or distance sensor In certain cases, it may be required to store data turer is subject to product liability. For this rea‐
Generally, the use of these data is temporary; that would have otherwise been used only tem‐ son the manufacturer also uses operational data
they will not be stored beyond the period of porarily. This may be the case if the vehicle has from the vehicle, for example, for recalls. These
operation and will only be processed within the detected a malfunction, for example.
 General notes 37

data can also be used to examine the custom‐ R Address book data for use in connection with phone can be output via the multimedia system.
er's warranty and guarantee claims. an integrated hands-free system or an inte‐ Certain information is simultaneously transfer‐
Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by a grated navigation system red to your smartphone. Depending on the type
service outlet or at your request as part of repair R Entered navigation destinations and integration, this includes position data, day/
or maintenance work. night mode and other general vehicle statuses.
R Data about the use of Internet services For more information please consult the Opera‐
Convenience and infotainment functions These data for convenience and infotainment tor's Manual of the vehicle/infotainment system.
You can store convenience settings and individ‐ functions may be saved locally in the vehicle or This integration allows the use of selected
ual settings in the vehicle and change or reset they may be located on a device which you have smartphone apps, such as navigation or music
them at any time. connected to the vehicle, such as a smartphone, player apps. There is no further interaction
Depending on the vehicle equipment, this USB flash drive or MP3 player. If you have between the smartphone and the vehicle; in par‐
includes the following settings, for example: entered these data yourself, you can delete them ticular, vehicle data is not directly accessible.
R Seat and steering wheel positions at any time. The type of additional data processing is deter‐
R Suspension and climate control settings This data is transmitted from the vehicle to third mined by the provider of the app being used.
parties only at your request. This applies, in par‐ Which settings you can make, if any, depends on
R Individual settings, such as interior lighting the specific app and the operating system of
ticular, when you use online services in accord‐
Depending on the selected equipment, you can ance with the settings that you have selected. your smartphone.
import data into vehicle infotainment functions Smartphone integration (e.g. Android Auto or
yourself. Online services
Apple CarPlay®)
Depending on the vehicle equipment, this If your vehicle is accordingly equipped, you can Wireless network connection
includes the following data, for example: connect your smartphone or another mobile end If your vehicle has a wireless network connec‐
R Multimedia data, such as music, films or pho‐ device to the vehicle. You can then control them tion, it enables data to be exchanged between
tos for playback in an integrated multimedia by means of the control elements integrated in your vehicle and additional systems. The wire‐
system the vehicle. Images and audio from the smart‐ less network connection is made possible by the
38 General notes

vehicle's own transmitter and receiver or by a You can have services and functions, some of and your data protection rights can either be
mobile end device that you have brought into the which are subject to a fee, activated or deactiva‐ found on the manufacturer's website or you will
vehicle, for example, a smartphone. Online func‐ ted. This excludes legally prescribed functions receive this information as part of the various
tions can be used via the wireless network con‐ and services, such as an emergency call system. services and service offers. There you will also
nection. This includes online services and appli‐ find the contact information for the manufac‐
cations/apps provided to you by the manufac‐ Third party services turer and its data protection officers.
turer or by other providers. If you use online services from other providers
(third parties), these services are the responsi‐ At a workshop, for example, with the support of
Manufacturer's services bility of the provider in question and subject to a specialist and possibly for a fee, you can have
Regarding the manufacturer's online services, that provider's data protection conditions and data read out which is stored only locally in the
the individual functions are described by the terms of use. As a general rule, the manufac‐ vehicle.
manufacturer in a suitable place, for example, in turer has no influence on the content
the Operator's Manual or on the manufacturer's exchanged. MBUX multimedia system/Mercedes me
website, where the relevant data protection For this reason, when services are provided by connect
information is also given. Personal data may be third parties, please ask the service provider in
used for the provision of online services. Data If the vehicle is equipped with the MBUX multi‐
question for information about the type, extent media system or Mercedes me connect, addi‐
are exchanged via a secure connection, such as and purpose of the collection and use of per‐
the manufacturer's designated IT systems. Any tional data about the vehicle's operation, the use
sonal data. of the vehicle in certain situations, and the loca‐
personal data which are collected, processed
and used, other than for the provision of serv‐ tion of the vehicle may be compiled by the
ices, is done so exclusively on the basis of legal Data protection rights MBUX multimedia system or Mercedes me con‐
permission. This is the case, for example, for a nect.
Depending on your country or the equipment
legally prescribed emergency call system, a con‐ and range of functions of your vehicle as well as For additional information, please refer to the
tractual agreement or when consent has been the services you use and the services on offer, "MBUX multimedia system" section and/or the
given. you are entitled to different data protection Mercedes me connect Terms and Conditions.
rights. Further information on data protection
 General notes 39

Event data recorders your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation MBUSA will not share EDR data with others with‐
occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under out the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
USA only:
normal driving conditions and no personal data vehicle is leased, without the consent of the les‐
This vehicle is equipped with an event data (e.g. name, gender, age and accident location) is see. Exceptions to this representation include
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is recorded. However, other parties, such as law responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like sit‐ enforcement, could combine EDR data with the federal, state or local government; in connection
uations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting type of personally identifying data routinely with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐ acquired during a crash investigation. or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required
standing how a vehicle's systems performed. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip‐ by law.
The EDR is designed to record data related to ment is required, and access to the vehicle or Warning: The EDR is a component of the
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle Restraint System Module. Tampering with, alter‐
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. manufacturer, other parties that have the special ing, modifying or removing the EDR component
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record equipment, such as law enforcement, can read may result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys‐
such data as: the information by accessing the vehicle or the tem Module and other systems.
R How various systems in your vehicle were EDR. State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that
operating EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat‐ conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted.
R Whether or not the driver and front ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci‐ This means that in the event of such conflict, the
passenger seat belts were buckled/fastened dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash federal regulation governs. As of December
R How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
Data Retrieval (CDR) tool that is used to extract 2016, 17 states have enacted laws relating to
the accelerator and/or brake pedal and data from the EDR is commercially available, EDRs.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly
R How fast the vehicle was traveling disclaims any and all liability arising from the
This data can help provide a better understand‐ extraction of this information by unauthorized
ing of the circumstances in which accidents and Mercedes-Benz personnel.
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is recorded by
40 General notes

Copyright R Burmester® is a registered trademark of

Free and open source software Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH.
R Microsoft® and Windows Media® are regis‐
Information on license for free and open-source tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
software used in your vehicle can be found on
the data carrier in your vehicle document wallet R SIRIUS® is a registered trademark of Sirius
and with updates on the following website: XM Radio Inc.
https://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource R HD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiq‐
uity Digital Corporation.
Registered trademarks R Gracenote® is a registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc.
R Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue‐ R ZAGAT Survey® and related brands are regis‐
tooth SIG, Inc. tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.
R DTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.
R Dolby® and MLP™ are registered trademarks
of DOLBY Laboratories.
R ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are registered trade‐
marks of Daimler AG.
R HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Gen‐
tex Corporation.
R iPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks
of Apple Inc.
 Occupant safety 41

Restraint system In order for the restraint system to provide the Reduced restraint system protection
intended level of protection, each vehicle occu‐
Protection provided by the restraint system pant must observe the following information: & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
The restraint system includes the following com‐ R Fasten seat belts correctly. modifications to the restraint system
ponents: R Sit in an almost upright seat position with Vehicle occupants may no longer be protec‐
R Seat belt system their back against the seat backrest. ted as intended if alterations are made to the
R Airbags R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos‐ restraint system.
R Child restraint system sible. # Never alter the parts of the restraint

R Child seat securing systems R Always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) system.
tall in an additional restraint system suitable # Never tamper with the wiring or any
The restraint system can help prevent the vehi‐ for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. electronic component parts or their
cle occupants from coming into contact with software.
parts of the vehicle interior in the event of an However, no system available today can com‐
accident. In the event of an accident, the pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accom‐
restraint system can also reduce the forces to accident situation. In particular, the seat belt modate a person with disabilities, contact an
which the vehicle occupants are subjected. and airbag generally do not protect against authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details.
A seat belt can only provide the best level of pro‐ objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside.
It is also not possible to completely rule out the USA only: for details, contact our Customer
tection if it is worn correctly. Depending on the Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
detected accident situation, Emergency Tension‐ risk of injury caused by the airbag deploying.
(1‑800‑367‑6372).
ing Devices and/or airbags supplement the pro‐
tection offered by a correctly worn seat belt.
Emergency Tensioning Devices and/or airbags Restraint system functionality
are not deployed in every accident. When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is
performed, during which the 6 restraint sys‐
42 Occupant safety

tem warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later Function of the restraint system in an acci‐ only parts which are relatively easily deformed
than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. dent are affected and the rate of vehicle deceleration
The components of the restraint system are then is not high. Conversely, an airbag may be
functional. How the restraint system works depends on the deployed even though the vehicle suffers only
severity of the impact detected and the apparent minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts
type of accident: such as longitudinal members are hit, this may
Malfunctioning restraint system R Frontal impact result in sufficiently high levels of vehicle decel‐
A malfunction has occurred in the restraint sys‐ R Rear impact eration.
tem if: R Side impact Depending on the detected deployment situa‐
R The 6 restraint system warning lamp
R Rollover
tion, the components of the restraint system can
does not light up when the ignition is be activated or deployed independently of each
switched on The activation thresholds for the components of other:
R The 6 restraint system warning lamp the restraint system are determined based on R Emergency Tensioning Device: frontal
lights up continuously or repeatedly during a the evaluation of the sensor values measured at impact, rear impact, side impact, rollover
journey various points in the vehicle. This process is pre-
R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: fron‐
emptive in nature. The triggering/deployment of
the components of the restraint system must tal impact
& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc‐
take place in good time at the start of the colli‐ R Knee airbag: frontal impact
tions in the restraint system
sion. R Side airbag: side impact
Components in the restraint system may be
Factors which can only be seen and measured R Window curtain airbag: side impact, rollover,
activated unintentionally or not deploy as
after a collision has occurred cannot play a deci‐ frontal impact
planned in an accident.
sive role in airbag deployment. Nor do they pro‐ R Rear airbag: frontal impact
# Have the restraint system checked and vide an indication of airbag deployment.
repaired immediately at a qualified spe‐ R Belt airbag: frontal impact
The vehicle may be deformed significantly with‐
cialist workshop. R Cushionbag: frontal impact
out an airbag being deployed. This is the case if
 Occupant safety 43

R PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side: side impact If the Emergency Tensioning Devices are trig‐ Seat belts
gered or an airbag is deployed, you will hear a
The front passenger airbag can only be deployed bang, and a small amount of powder may also be Protection provided by the seat belt
in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF released: Always fasten your seat belt correctly before
indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat starting a journey. A seat belt can only provide
R The bang will not generally affect your hear‐
is occupied, make sure, both before and during the best level of protection if it is worn correctly.
the journey, that the status of the front ing.
passenger airbag is correct (/ page 53). R In general, the powder released is not haz‐
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
ardous to health but may cause short-term
breathing difficulties to persons suffering incorrectly fastened seat belt
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot air bag
components from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can‐
Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle not perform its intended protective function.
The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has
been deployed. immediately or open the window in order to In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt
prevent breathing difficulties. can also cause injuries, for example, in the
# Do not touch the air bag parts.
event of an accident or when braking or
# Have a deployed air bag replaced at a Airbags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning changing direction suddenly.
qualified specialist workshop as soon Devices contain perchlorate material, which may
# Always ensure that all vehicle occu‐
as possible. require special handling or environmental pro‐
tection measures. National guidelines regarding pants have their seat belts fastened
waste disposal must be observed. In California, correctly and are sitting properly.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop see https://dtsc.ca.gov/. Using the search
function, you will find information on perchlo‐ Always observe the instructions about the cor‐
after an accident. Take this into account, partic‐ rect driver's seat position and adjusting the seat
ularly if an Emergency Tensioning Device is trig‐ rate, for example.
(/ page 105).
gered or an airbag deployed.
44 Occupant safety

In order for the correctly worn seat belt to pro‐ R Only one person should use each seat belt at Limitations of the protection provided by the
vide the intended level of protection, each vehi‐ any one time. Never allow babies and chil‐ seat belt
cle occupant must observe the following infor‐ dren to travel sitting on the lap of another
mation: vehicle occupant. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
R The seat belt must not be twisted and must R Never secure objects with a seat belt if the an incorrect seat position
fit tightly and snugly across the body. seat belt is also being used by one of the The seat belt does not offer the intended
R The seat belt must be routed across the cen‐ vehicle's occupants. Always observe the level of protection if you have not moved the
ter of the shoulder and as low down across instructions for loading the vehicle when seat backrest to an almost vertical position.
the hips as possible. securing objects, luggage or loads
(/ page 133). In particular, you could slip beneath the seat‐
R The shoulder section of the seat belt should belt and become injured.
not touch your neck nor be routed under Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion, # Adjust the seat properly before begin‐
your arm or behind your back. are ever placed between a person and the
seat. ning your journey.
R Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter # Always ensure that the seat backrest is
coat. The seat belts on the following seats are equip‐ in an almost vertical position and that
R Push the lap belt down as far as possible ped with a special seat belt retractor: the shoulder belt is routed across the
across your hips and pull tight with the shoul‐ R Front passenger seat center of your shoulder.
der section of the belt. Never route the lap R Rear seats
belt across your abdomen. & WARNING Risk of injury or death when
Pregnant women must also take particular Activate or deactivate the special seatbelt additional restraint systems are not used
care with this. retractor (/ page 65). for persons with a smaller stature
R Never route the seat belt across sharp, poin‐ If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to
observe the instructions and safety notes on Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m ) tall cannot wear
ted, abrasive or fragile objects. the seat belt correctly without a suitable
"Children in the vehicle" (/ page 61).
additional restraint system.
 Occupant safety 45

# Always secure persons under 5 ft R The seat belt buckle is damaged or Only use seat belts which have been approved
(1.50 m) tall in a suitable restraint sys‐ extremely dirty for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
tem. R Modifications have been made to the & WARNING Risk of injury or death from
Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt deployed pyrotechnic Emergency Ten‐
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to anchorage or seat belt retractor sioning Devices
blocked seat belt buckle or seat belt
Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices
anchorage
an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. that have been deployed are no longer opera‐
Objects next to the front seat that block the Modified or damaged seat belts could tear or tional and are unable to perform their inten‐
seat belt buckle or the moving seat belt fail in the event of an accident, for example. ded protective function.
anchorage on the front seat impair the func‐
Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices # Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic
tion of the Emergency Tensioning Devices.
could accidentally trigger or fail to function Emergency Tensioning Devices immedi‐
# Before starting the journey, make sure
as intended. ately replaced at a qualified specialist
that there are no objects around the workshop.
# Never modify the seat belt system, for
seat belt buckle or between the front
seat and door. example the seat belt, seat belt buckle,
Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
anchorage and seat belt retractor. vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to after an accident.
# Make sure that the seat belts are
damaged or modified seat belts
undamaged, not worn and clean. * NOTE Damage caused by trapping the
Seat belts cannot provide protection in the # Always have the seat belts checked seat belt
following situations: immediately after an accident at a
R The seat belt is damaged, has been modi‐ qualified specialist workshop. If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it
fied, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed may become trapped in the door or in the
seat mechanism.
46 Occupant safety

# Always ensure that an unused seat belt use a Mercedes-Benz approved booster
is fully retracted. seat with integrated backrest.
# Never use an airbag equipped seat belt
to fasten a front- or rear-facing child
Information on the beltbag in the rear seat seat or a non-approved booster seat.
belt
# Please contact an authorized
The BELTBAG identification indicates that a rear Mercedes-Benz Center for information
seat belt is equipped with a beltbag. on approved child restraint systems.
When activated, the beltbag increases the pro‐
tected area of the vehicle occupant's ribcage.
Fastening and adjusting seat belts
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the
use of a non-approved child restraint sys‐ seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap can‐
tem not be pulled out any further.
In an accident, the beltbag may damage a Vehicles with illuminated design seat belt
non-approved child restraint system or a # Always engage seat belt tongue 2 of the
buckles: the illuminated seat belt buckle makes
child restraint system which has not been seat belt into seat belt buckle 1 of the cor‐
fastening your seat belt easier in certain situa‐
approved for use in conjunction with the belt‐ responding seat.
tions, for example, when ambient light condi‐
bag. tions are poor. # Press and hold the seat belt outlet release
# Therefore, always use LATCH or ISOFIX and slide seat belt outlet 3 into the desired
% The illumination on the seat belt buckle does
to fasten a child seat equipped with an position.
not indicate that the seat belt buckle is func‐
integrated restraint system. tioning correctly. # Let go of the seat belt outlet release and
# For vehicles equipped with the optional ensure that seat belt outlet 3 locks into
rear seat-belt airbags ("beltbag"), only position.
 Occupant safety 47

% A seat belt can only provide the best level of You can activate and deactivate the seat belt The ü seat belt warning lamp lights up for six
protection if it is worn correctly. Observe the adjustment function using the multimedia sys‐ seconds every time the vehicle is started.
notes on fastening the seat belt tem (/ page 47). In addition, a warning tone may sound.
(/ page 43).
When the driver's and front passenger's doors
Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment are closed and the driver and front passenger
* NOTE Deployment of the Emergency via the multimedia system
Tensioning Device and side air bag when have fastened their seat belts, the seat belt
the front passenger seat is unoccupied Multimedia system: warning goes out.
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle In the following cases, the seat belt warning
If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat lights up during a journey if:
belt buckle of the unoccupied front 5 Occupant Protection

passenger seat, the Emergency Tensioning R The vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph
# Activate or deactivate Belt adjustment.
Device and the side air bag may also deploy (25 km/h) and the driver's or front
in the event of an accident along with other passenger seat belt is not fastened.
systems. Releasing seat belts R The driver or front passenger unfastens their
# Only one person should use each seat # Press the release button in the seat belt seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.
belt at any one time. buckle and guide the seat belt back with the
seat belt tongue.

Seat belt adjustment function

Seat belt warning function for the driver and
Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: After a front seat front passenger
belt has been fastened, the automatic seat belt The ü seat belt warning lamp in the driver's
adjustment may apply a certain tightening force. display is a reminder that all vehicle occupants
Do not hold the seat belt tightly while it is must wear their seat belts correctly.
adjusting.
48 Occupant safety

Airbags R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: head

and ribcage
Overview of airbags
R Window curtain airbag: head
R Side airbag: ribcage, also pelvis for front seat
occupants
R Rear airbag: head
Information on child restraint systems on
the front passenger seat

Rear seats: & WARNING Risk of injury or death if the

4 Window curtain airbag co-driver airbag is enabled
6 Side airbag If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on
Driver's/front passenger seat: 7 Rear airbag the co-driver seat may be struck by the co-
1 Knee airbag driver airbag during an accident.
2 Driver's airbag
The installation location of an airbag is identified
by the AIRBAG symbol. An additional arrow sym‐ NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint
3 Front passenger airbag bol M indicates the installation location for cer‐ system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT
4 Window curtain airbag tain airbags. AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the
5 Side airbag CHILD can occur.
When enabled, an airbag can provide additional
protection for the respective vehicle occupant.
When installing a child restraint system on the
Potential protection provided by each airbag: front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe‐
R Knee airbag: thigh, knee and lower leg cific information (/ page 70). Also, always
observe the notes on rearward-facing or
 Occupant safety 49

forward-facing child restraint systems on the # Only one person should use each seat Information on the cushionbag in the reclin‐
front passenger seat. belt at any one time. ing rear seat
The cushionbag offers additional occupant pro‐
Information on automatic front passenger tection in the event of frontal impacts. When
airbag shutoff Depending on the detected accident situation,
the window curtain airbag on the front enabled, the cushionbag deploys under the seat
The front passenger airbag can only be deployed cushion. This helps prevent the vehicle occupant
in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF passenger side may deploy. The airbag is
deployed regardless of whether the front from slipping off the seat cushion.
indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat
is occupied, make sure, both before and during passenger seat is occupied. If you install a child restraint system on the
the journey, that the status of the front reclining rear seat, always observe the additional
Information on the rear airbag notes (/ page 64).
passenger airbag is correct (/ page 53).
Always observe the information on the rear air‐
* NOTE Important points to remember if bag, especially in the following situations:
Protective capacity of the airbags
the front passenger seat is unoccupied R A person is sitting on the outer rear seat.
R You install a child restraint system on the
Depending on the accident situation, an airbag
In an accident, the components of the may supplement the protection offered by a cor‐
restraint system may deploy unnecessarily outer rear seat.
rectly fastened seat belt.
on the front passenger side if: R You stow objects behind the front seats.
R There are heavy objects on the front Before beginning the journey, observe the infor‐ & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
passenger seat. mation on the rear airbag (/ page 56). Be an incorrect seat position
R The seat belt tongue is engaged in the aware of the status of the respective rear airbag If you deviate from the correct seat position,
seat belt buckle of the front passenger depending on the situation both before and dur‐ the airbag cannot perform its intended pro‐
seat and the front passenger seat is ing the journey (/ page 58). tective function.
unoccupied.
# Stow objects in a suitable place.
50 Occupant safety

Each vehicle occupant must make sure of the Vehicles with rear airbag: always observe Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an
following: the information on the rear airbag when the airbag from functioning correctly. Each vehicle
rear seat is occupied (/ page 56). The occupant must always make sure of the follow‐
R Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant
vehicle occupants should sit as far back from ing in particular:
women must take particular care to the airbags as possible and keep an equal
ensure that the lap belt never lies across R There are no people, animals or objects
distance to them. between the vehicle occupants and an air‐
the abdomen.
R Only hold the steering wheel by the steering bag.
R Adopt the correct seat position and keep
wheel rim. This allows the airbag to be fully Vehicles with rear airbag: also observe the
as far away as possible from the airbags. deployed. information on the rear airbag (/ page 56).
R Observe the following information.
R Always lean against the seat backrest when R There are no objects between the seat, door
# Always make sure that there are no the vehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwards and door pillar (B-pillar).
objects between the airbag and vehicle or against the door or side window. You may
R There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers,
occupant. otherwise be in the deployment area of the
airbags. hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks.
To avoid the risks resulting from the deployment R There are no accessory parts, such as mobile
R The occupants must always keep their feet
of an airbag, each vehicle occupant must on the floor. Do not put your feet on the navigation devices, mobile phones or cup
observe the following information in particular: cockpit, for example. Your feet may other‐ holders, within the deployment area of an air‐
wise be in the deployment area of the airbag. bag, e.g. on the cockpit, on the door, on the
R Before starting your journey, adjust your seat
side window or on the side trim.
correctly; the driver's seat and front Vehicles with rear airbag: always observe
passenger seat should be moved as far back the information on the rear airbag when the In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning
as possible. rear seat is occupied (/ page 56). straps or retaining straps must be routed or
attached to the vehicle within the deploy‐
When doing so, always observe the informa‐ R If children are traveling in the vehicle, ment area of an airbag. Always comply with
tion on the correct driver's seat position observe the additional notes (/ page 61). the accessory manufacturer's installation
(/ page 105). R Always store and secure objects correctly.
 Occupant safety 51

instructions and, in particular, the notes on & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to # Always have work on the doors or door
suitable places for installation. the use of unsuitable seat covers trim carried out at a qualified specialist
R There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile workshop.
objects in the pockets of your clothing. Store Due to unsuitable seat covers, the airbags
such objects in a suitable place. cannot protect vehicle occupants as inten‐
ded. & WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed
In addition, the operation of the automatic airbag
Limited protection provided by airbags front passenger airbag shutoff could be A deployed airbag no longer offers any pro‐
restricted. tection.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to modifi‐
# You should only use seat covers that # Have the vehicle towed to a qualified
cations to the cover of an airbag
have been approved for the correspond‐ specialist workshop in order to have the
If you modify the cover of an airbag or affix ing seats by Mercedes-Benz. deployed airbag replaced.
objects such as stickers to it, the airbag may
no longer function correctly. & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc‐ Have deployed airbags replaced immediately.
# Never modify the cover of an airbag and tioning sensors in the door
do not affix objects to it. Status of the front passenger front airbag
The function of the airbags can be impaired
The installation location of an airbag is identified due to modifications or incorrect work per‐ Function of the automatic front passenger
by the AIRBAG symbol (/ page 48). formed on the doors or door trim, or if the airbag shutoff
doors are damaged. The automatic front passenger airbag shutoff is
# Never modify the doors or parts of the able to detect whether the front passenger seat
doors. is occupied by a person or a child restraint sys‐
tem. The front passenger airbag is enabled or
disabled accordingly.
52 Occupant safety

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to R The entire base of the child restraint system # The entire base of the child restraint
objects under the co-driver seat must always rest on the sitting surface of the system must always rest on the sitting
front passenger seat. surface of the co-driver seat.
Objects trapped under the co-driver seat can R The backrest of the forward-facing child
interfere with the function of the automatic # The backrest of the forward-facing child
restraint system must, as far as possible, be restraint system must, as far as possi‐
co-driver airbag shutoff or damage the sys‐ resting on the seat backrest of the front
tem. ble, be resting on the seat backrest of
passenger seat. the co-driver seat.
# Do not store any objects under the co-
R The child restraint system must not touch the # Always comply with the child restraint
driver seat. roof or be put under strain by the head system manufacturer's installation
# When the co-driver seat is occupied, restraints. Adjust the seat backrest inclina‐ instructions.
make sure that no objects are trapped tion and the head restraint setting accord‐
under the co-driver seat. ingly. A person on the front passenger seat must
observe the following information:
When installing a child restraint system on the & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
front passenger seat, always make sure of the R Fasten seat belts correctly (/ page 43).
objects between the seat surface and
following: the child restraint system R Sit in an almost upright seat position with
R Ensure that the child restraint system is posi‐ their back against the seat backrest.
Objects between the sitting surface and the
tioned correctly (/ page 60). child restraint system could affect the func‐ R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos‐
R Always comply with the child restraint sys‐ tion of the automatic co-driver airbag shut‐ sible.
tem manufacturer's installation instructions. off. The front passenger airbag may otherwise be
R Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or # Do not place any objects between the disabled by mistake, for example, in the follow‐
behind the child restraint system. sitting surface and the child restraint ing situations:
R Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust‐ system. R The front passenger transfers their weight by
ment. supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest.
 Occupant safety 53

R The front passenger sits in such a way that # Both before and during the journey, Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indica‐
their weight is raised from the sitting sur‐ ensure that the status of the front tor lamps
face. passenger airbag is correct.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to If the front passenger seat is occupied, the clas‐
a disabled front passenger airbag sification of the person or child restraint system
The front passenger airbag is disabled when on the front passenger seat takes place after the
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp front passenger airbag shutoff self-test. The
is lit. PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the
status of the front passenger airbag.
A person in the front passenger seat could
then, for example, come into contact with Always observe the notes on the function of the
the vehicle interior, especially if the person is PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps
sitting too close to the cockpit. (/ page 53).
If the front passenger seat is occupied,
always ensure that:
R The classification of the person in the
front passenger seat is correct and the
front passenger airbag is enabled or disa‐ Self-test of automatic front passenger airbag
bled in accordance with the person in the shutoff
front passenger seat. When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is
R The front passenger seat has been moved performed during which the two PASSENGER
as far back as possible. AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps light up
R The person is seated correctly. simultaneously.
54 Occupant safety

The status of the front passenger airbag is dis‐ shutoff checked and repaired immediately at a Always ensure that the front passenger air‐
played via the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator qualified specialist workshop. bag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG
lamps after the self-test: OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
Status display
R ON is lit: the front passenger airbag may If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint
deploy during an accident. both before and during the journey, that the sta‐ system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT
The indicator lamp goes out after approx‐ tus of the front passenger airbag is correct for AIRBAG. This can result in the DEATH of or
imately 60 seconds. the current situation. SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD.
R ON and OFF are not lit: the front passenger After installing a rearward-facing child
airbag may deploy during an accident. restraint system on the front passenger When installing a child restraint system on the
seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit con‐ front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe‐
R OFF is lit: the front passenger airbag is disa‐ cific information (/ page 70).
bled. It will then not be deployed in the event tinuously.
of an accident. Depending on the child restraint system and the
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when stature of the child, the PASSENGER AIR BAG
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is using a rearward-facing child restraint OFF indicator lamp may be off. In this case, do
off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator system while the front passenger airbag not install the rearward-facing child restraint
lamp shows the status of the front passenger is enabled system on the front passenger seat.
airbag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator Instead, install the rearward-facing child
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing
lamp may be lit continuously or be off. restraint system on a suitable rear seat.
child restraint system on the front passenger
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi‐ After installing a forward-facing child
and the 6 restraint system warning lamp cator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag restraint system on the front passenger
light up simultaneously, the front passenger seat can deploy in the event of an accident. seat: depending on the child restraint system
may not be used. Also in this case, do not install and the stature of the child, PASSENGER AIR
The child could be struck by the airbag.
a child restraint system on the front passenger BAG OFF may be lit continuously or be off.
seat. Have the automatic front passenger airbag Always observe the following information.
 Occupant safety 55

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to and the front passenger seat accord‐ with a build corresponding to that of an adult
incorrect positioning of the forward- ingly. must not use the front passenger seat.
facing child restraint system # Always comply with the child restraint Instead, they should use a rear seat.
If you secure a child in a forward-facing child system manufacturer's installation R If the front passenger seat is occupied by a
restraint system on the front passenger seat instructions. person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or
that is positioned too close to the cockpit, in small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
the event of an accident, the child could: When installing a child restraint system on the indicator lamp is either lit continuously or
front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe‐ remains off, depending on the classification.
R come into contact with the vehicle inte‐
cific information (/ page 70). - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi‐
cator lamp is lit, for example If a person is sitting on the front passenger lamp is off: move the front passenger
seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit con‐ seat as far back as possible, or the per‐
R be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER
tinuously or be off, depending on the person's son of smaller stature should use a rear
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. stature. seat.
# Always move the front passenger seat A person on the front passenger seat must - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
as far back as possible and fully retract always observe the following information: lamp is lit continuously: the person of
the seat cushion length adjustment. R If the front passenger seat is occupied by an smaller stature should not use the front
While doing so, always make sure that adult or a person with a stature correspond‐ passenger seat.
the shoulder belt strap is correctly ing to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR
routed from the seat belt outlet of the BAG OFF indicator lamp must be off. This & WARNING Risk of injury or death when
vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on indicates that the front passenger airbag is the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
the child restraint system. The shoulder enabled. lamp is lit
belt strap must be routed forwards and
downwards from the seat belt outlet. If If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet lamp is lit continuously, an adult or person lamp remains lit after the self-test, the front
passenger airbag is disabled.
56 Occupant safety

If the front passenger seat is occupied, When triggered, the rear airbag deploys between To avoid risks resulting from the deployment of
always ensure that: the rear seat occupant and the front seat. The the airbag, vehicle occupants on the outer rear
rear airbag can help prevent the occupants on seats must observe the following information in
R The classification of the person in the
the rear seats from coming into contact with particular:
front passenger seat is correct and the parts of the vehicle interior in the event of an
front passenger airbag is enabled or disa‐ R The occupants must always keep their feet
accident. on the floor. Otherwise, feet and legs of
bled in accordance with the person in the
front passenger seat. To avoid the risks resulting from the deployment occupants may be in the deployment area of
of an airbag, observe the following information: the rear airbag.
R The person is seated properly with a cor‐
rectly fastened seat belt. R Inform persons on the rear seats about the If an occupant's feet cannot reach the floor,
rear airbag in the front seat. they must adopt the correct seat position
R The front passenger seat has been moved
R A person sitting on the rear seat must adopt and let their legs hang down the front of the
as far back as possible. seat.
the correct seat position and sit as far back
from the rear airbag as possible. Adjust the R The feet or legs of the person on the rear
Be sure to also observe the following further front seats when necessary so that vehicle seat must not rest against the seat backrest
related subjects: occupants are sitting as far back from the of the front seat, for example. Otherwise,
R Child restraint system on the front passenger airbag as possible and at an equal distance their feet and legs are in the deployment
seat (/ page 70) to them. area of the rear airbag. This should be taken
R Observe the notes on airbag protection into consideration especially if you are travel‐
Information on the rear airbag (/ page 49). ing with a child on the rear seat.
If you are traveling with a child in the left or
Points to remember when the rear seat is right rear seat, observe the vehicle-specific
occupied information: (/ page 69). Also, always
The rear airbag offers the occupants on the observe the notes on rearward-facing or
outer rear seats additional occupant protection
in the event of certain types frontal impacts.
 Occupant safety 57

forward-facing child restraint systems on the Objects behind the front seat rear airbag unnecessary, the rear airbag can be
left and right rear seats. Objects in the deployment area of the rear air‐ disabled.
R Make sure that the covers for the rear air‐ bags may prevent the rear airbags from function‐ The rear airbags should be disabled in the follow‐
bags are not damaged. ing correctly. ing situations in particular:
R Observe the notes on limitations to the pro‐ & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects R A rearward-facing child restraint system is
tection provided by airbags (/ page 51). placed in front of the rear airbag cover secured on the left or right rear seat.
R The person in the rear seat, for example a
& WARNING Risk of injury due to a dam‐ Objects in front of the rear airbag cover can child, cannot sit in the correct seat position.
aged rear airbag cover hinder or prevent the correct deployment of Their feet and legs are potentially in the
the rear airbag which is integrated into the deployment area of the rear airbag.
If a rear airbag cover is damaged, the rear front seat.
airbag can no longer function correctly and R Due to the position of the front seats, an
can even cause additional injuries when The rear airbag can potentially deploy in an occupant's legs, for example, are in the
deployed. uncontrolled manner and can cause addi‐ deployment area of the rear airbag.
tional injury to the person on the front seat.
# Before starting a journey, make sure the R Objects are stored behind the front seat
# Always stow and secure objects cor‐
covers for the rear airbags are not dam‐ which are in the deployment area of the rear
aged. If a rear airbag cover is damaged, rectly. airbags.
disable the rear airbag. Have a dam‐
aged rear airbag cover replaced at a Observe the notes on loading the vehicle You can disable or enable the rear airbag via the
qualified specialist workshop as soon (/ page 133). multimedia system (/ page 58).
as possible. Disabling/enabling the rear airbag
If, after consideration of the notes and instruc‐
You can disable or enable the rear airbag via the tions in this Operator's Manual, you deem the
multimedia system (/ page 58). additional occupant protection provided by the
58 Occupant safety

Function of the REAR SEAT AIR BAG indicator After the self-test, the status of the rear airbag Enabling/disabling the rear airbag via the
lamps for the left and right rear seat is displayed via multimedia system
the REAR SEAT AIR BAG indicator lamps: Multimedia system:
R ON is lit: the rear airbag may deploy during 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle
an accident. 5 Occupant Protection

The indicator lamp goes out after approx‐ # Enable or disable the desired rear airbag
imately 60 seconds. under Rear Airbags.
R ON and OFF are off: the rear airbag may
deploy during an accident.
PRE-SAFE® system
R OFF is lit: the rear airbag is disabled. It will
then not be deployed in the event of an acci‐ PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protec‐
dent. tion)

If the REAR SEAT AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is PRE-SAFE® is able to detect certain critical driv‐
off, only the REAR SEAT AIR BAG OFF indicator ing situations and implement pre-emptive meas‐
lamp shows the status of the rear airbag. The ures to protect the vehicle occupants.
REAR SEAT AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be PRE-SAFE® can implement the following meas‐
lit continuously or be off. ures independently of each other:
l Left rear seat
R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat
k Right rear seat and front passenger seat.
When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is R Closing the side windows.
performed during which the REAR SEAT AIR BAG R Vehicles with sliding sunroof: Close the
ON and OFF indicator lamps light up simultane‐ sliding sunroof.
ously.
 Occupant safety 59

R Vehicles with memory function: move the Reversing the PRE-SAFE® system measures celed automatically when the vehicle pulls
front passenger seat to a more favorable away.
seat position. If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive
measures that were taken are reversed. If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive
R Vehicles with memory function in the measures that were taken are reversed.
rear passenger compartment: move the You will need to perform certain settings your‐
outer rear seats to a more favorable seat self. System limits
position. # If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced,
The system will not initiate any action in the fol‐
R Vehicles with multicontour seat: increase move the seat backrest back slightly. lowing situations:
the air pressure in the seat side bolsters of The locking mechanism releases.
R When backing up
the seat backrest.
Function of PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory The system will not initiate any braking applica‐
R PRE-SAFE® Sound: provided that the multi‐ tion in the following situations:
media system is switched on, generates a occupant protection plus)
R Whilst driving
brief noise signal to stimulate the innate pro‐ PRE-SAFE® PLUS can detect certain impacts,
tective mechanism of a person's hearing. or
particularly an imminent rear impact, and take
pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle R When entering or exiting a parking space
* NOTE Damage caused by objects in the occupants. These measures cannot necessarily while using Active Parking Assist
footwell or behind the seat prevent an imminent impact.
The automatic adjustment of the seat posi‐ PRE-SAFE® PLUS can implement the following Function of PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side
tion may result in damage to the seat and/or measures independently of each other:
the object. If an imminent side impact is detected, PRE-
R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat
# Stow objects in a suitable place.
SAFE® Impulse Side can pre-emptively move the
and front passenger seat. front seat vehicle occupant's upper body
R Increasing brake pressure when the vehicle towards the center of the vehicle. It does this by
is stationary. This brake application is can‐ rapidly inflating an air cushion in the outer seat
60 Occupant safety

side bolster of the seat backrest on the side on accident, it is possible that the vehicle can Safely transporting children in the vehicle
which the impact is anticipated. This increases no longer be started.
the distance between the door and the vehicle Always observe when children are traveling
R Switching off the fuel supply in the vehicle
occupant.
R Unlocking the vehicle doors
If PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side has been deployed or % Also strictly observe the safety notes for the
R Lowering the side windows specific situation. In this way you can recog‐
is faulty, the PRE-SAFE Impulse Side Inoperative
See Operator's Manual(/ page 479) display R Displaying the emergency guide in the cen‐ nize potential risks and avoid dangers if chil‐
message appears. tral display dren are traveling in the vehicle
R Switching on the interior lighting (/ page 61).

Function of the post-collision brake Be diligent

Automatic measures after an accident
Depending on the accident situation, the post- Bear in mind that negligence when securing a
Depending on the type and severity of the acci‐ child in the child restraint system may have seri‐
dent, and depending on the vehicle's equipment, collision brake can minimize the severity of a fur‐
ther collision or even avoid it. ous consequences. Always be diligent in secur‐
the following measures can be implemented, for ing a child carefully before every journey.
example: If an accident is detected, the post-collision
brake can implement automatic braking. When To improve protection for children younger than
R Automatic braking (post-collision brake) 12 years old or under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height,
the vehicle has come to a standstill, the electric
R Activating the hazard warning lights parking brake is automatically applied. Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the
R Triggering an automatic emergency call following information:
The driver can cancel automatic braking by tak‐
(/ page 314) R Always secure the child in a child restraint
ing the following actions:
R Switching off the engine system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi‐
R Braking more strongly than automatic brak‐
cle.
To restart the vehicle, switch the ignition off ing
R The child restraint system must be appropri‐
and switch it back on (/ page 188). R Fully depressing the accelerator pedal with
Depending on the type and severity of the ate to the age, weight and size of the child.
force
 Occupant safety 61

R The vehicle seat must be suitable for instal‐ Observe laws and legal requirements Detecting risks, avoiding danger
ling a child restraint system. Always observe the legal requirements when
using a child restraint system in the vehicle. Securing systems for child restraint systems
Accident statistics show that children secured in the vehicle
on the rear seats are generally safer than chil‐ Observe standards for child restraint sys‐ Only use the following securing systems for child
dren secured on the front seats. For this reason, tems restraint systems:
Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install All child restraint systems must meet the follow‐
a child restraint system on a rear seat. R The LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings
ing standards:
R The vehicle's seat belt system
The generic term child restraint system R U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 225 R The Top Tether anchorages
The generic term child restraint system is used
in this Operator's Manual. A child restraint sys‐ R Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
tem is, for example: 213 and 210.2 system is preferred.
R a baby car seat Confirmation that the child restraint system Simply attaching to the securing rings on the
R a rearward-facing child seat complies with the standards can be found on an vehicle can reduce the risk of installing the child
instruction label on the child restraint system. restraint system incorrectly.
R a forward-facing child seat
This confirmation can also be found in the instal‐ When securing a child with the integrated seat
R a child booster seat with a backrest and seat
lation instructions that are included with the belt of the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
belt guide child restraint system. system, always comply with the permissible
Mercedes-Benz recommends using a child gross weight for the child and child restraint sys‐
booster seat with a backrest. tem (/ page 66).
The child restraint system must be appropriate A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
to the age, weight and size of the child. proper seat belt positioning for children over
40 lbs (18 kg) in weight or until they reach a
62 Occupant safety

height where a three-point seat belt can be Always secure a child restraint system cor‐ & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
installed properly without a booster seat. rectly unsecured child restraint systems in the
Mercedes-Benz recommends a suitable child vehicle
booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guide. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
incorrect installation of the child If the child restraint system is incorrectly
Advantage of a rearward-facing child restraint system installed or not secured, it can come loose.
restraint system The child restraint system could be flung
It is preferable to transport a baby or a small The child can then not be protected or
restrained as intended. around and hit vehicle occupants.
child in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint
# Be sure to comply with the manufactur‐ # Always install child restraint systems
system. In this case, the child sits in the oppo‐
site direction to the direction of travel and faces er's installation instructions for the correctly, even when not in use.
backwards. child restraint system and its correct # Always comply with the child restraint

Babies and small children have comparatively use. system manufacturer's installation
weak neck muscles in relation to the size and # Make sure that the entire base of the instructions.
weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cer‐ child restraint system always rests on
vical spine during an accident can be reduced in the sitting surface of the seat. R Always observe the child restraint system
a rearward-facing child restraint system. manufacturer's installation and operating
# Never place objects (e.g. cushions)
instructions as well as the vehicle-specific
under or behind the child restraint sys‐ information:
tem.
- Installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
# Use child restraint systems only with
restraint system on the rear seat
the original cover designed for them. (/ page 66).
# Always replace damaged covers with
- Securing the child restraint system with
genuine covers. the seat belt on the rear seat
(/ page 69).
 Occupant safety 63

- Securing the child restraint system with # Only affix accessories which have been Avoid direct sunlight
the seat belt on the front passenger seat specially approved for this child
(/ page 71). Observe the specific restraint system by the child restraint & WARNING Risk of burns when the child
instructions for the rearward-facing and system's manufacturer. seat is exposed to direct sunlight
forward-facing child restraint systems If the child restraint system is exposed to
(/ page 70). Only use child restraint systems which are in direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up.
If the front passenger seat is occupied, proper working condition
Children could suffer burns from these parts,
ensure, both before and during the jour‐ particularly on the metallic parts of the child
ney, that the status of the front & WARNING Risk of injury or death caused
restraint system.
passenger airbag is correct for the cur‐ by the use of damaged child restraint
systems # Always make sure that the child
rent situation (/ page 53).
restraint system is not exposed to
R Observe the warning labels in the vehicle Child restraint systems or their retaining sys‐ direct sunlight.
interior and on the child restraint system. tems that have been subjected to stress in
# Protect the child restraint system, e.g.
R Also secure Top Tether if present. an accident may not be able to perform their
intended protective function. with a blanket.
Do not modify the child restraint system # If the child restraint system has been
It may be the case that the child cannot be
properly restrained. exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to
& WARNING Risk of injury due to modifi‐ cool before securing a child in it.
cations to the child restraint system # Always immediately replace child
# Never leave children unattended in the
restraint systems that have been dam‐
The child restraint system can no longer aged or involved in an accident. vehicle.
function properly. This poses an increased
# Have the securing systems for the child
risk of injury.
restraint systems checked at a qualified
# Never modify a child restraint system.
specialist workshop before installing a
child restraint system again.
64 Occupant safety

Observe when stopping or parking # When leaving the vehicle, always take ¯ Also secure Top Tether if present
the SmartKey with you and lock the (/ page 68).
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury vehicle.
due to children left unattended in the Alternative securing system:
vehicle
# Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach 7 Vehicle seat belt
of children.
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi‐ Be sure to observe:
cle, they could, in particular: & WARNING Danger to life due to expo‐ R If the rear seat is occupied, ensure, both
R open doors, thereby endangering other sure to extreme heat or cold in the vehi‐ before and during the journey, that the status
persons or road users. cle of the rear airbag is correct for the current
R get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐ situation (/ page 58).
If people, particularly children, are exposed
fic. to extreme temperatures over an extended Front passenger seat
R operate vehicle equipment and become period of time, there is a risk of serious Securing system:
trapped, for example. injury or danger to life.
7 Vehicle seat belt
In addition, the children could also set the # Never leave persons, children in partic‐

vehicle in motion, for example by: ular, unattended in the vehicle. Be sure to observe:
R releasing the parking brake. R If the front passenger seat is occupied,
ensure, both before and during the journey,
R changing the transmission position. Overview of suitable seats in the vehicle for that the status of the front passenger airbag
R starting the vehicle. installing a child restraint system is correct for the current situation
Left/right rear seat (/ page 53).
# Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle. R Observe the notes on automatic front
Preferred securing system:
passenger airbag shutoff (/ page 51)
® LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchor
 Occupant safety 65

Center rear seat # Activate the special seal belt retractor Activating the special seat belt retractor:
Securing system: again and correctly secure the child # Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia

7 Vehicle seat belt restraint system. reel retract it again.

When the special seat belt retractor is activa‐
¯ Also secure Top Tether if present When enabled, the special seat belt retractor ted, you will hear a ratcheting sound.
(/ page 68). ensures that the seat belts of the front # Push the child restraint system down until
passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken the seat belt sits tightly.
Activating or deactivating the special seat once the child restraint system is secured.
The seat belts on the following seats are equip‐ Deactivating the special seat belt retractor:
belt retractor
ped with a special seat belt retractor: # Press the release button of the seat belt

& WARNING Risk of injury or death if a R Front passenger seat buckle.

seat belt is unfastened while the vehicle R Rear seats
# Hold the seat belt tongue and guide back to
is in motion the seat belt outlet.
Installing a child restraint system:
If the seat belt is released while the vehicle is
in motion, the child safety lock is deactivated # When installing a child restraint system,
and the child restraint system is no longer always observe the manufacturer's installa‐
correctly secured. The seat belt is drawn in tion and operating instructions as well as the
slightly by the inertia reel and cannot be information in this Operator's Manual.
immediately closed again. # Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat belt
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accord‐ outlet.
ance with the traffic conditions. # Engage the seat belt tongue in the seat belt
buckle.
66 Occupant safety

Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child Always comply with the information about the ® When installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX)
restraint system on the rear seat mass of the child restraint system: child restraint system, also observe the follow‐
R in the manufacturer's installation and operat‐ ing:
Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system on the rear seat ing instructions for the child restraint system O When using a baby car seat in weight
used group 0/0+ and a rearward-facing child
& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the R on a label on the child restraint system, if restraint system in weight group I on a
permissible gross mass of the child and present rear seat: adjust the front seat so that the
child restraint system together is excee‐ seat does not touch the child restraint sys‐
ded. Regularly check that the permissible gross mass tem.
of the child and child restraint system is still O When using a forward-facing child
Too much load may be placed on the LATCH- complied with.
type (ISOFIX) child restraint system and the restraint system in weight group I:
When installing a child restraint system, observe remove the head restraint from the respec‐
child may not be restrained correctly in the
the following: tive seat, if possible. In addition, the back‐
event of an accident, for example.
O Always observe the correct use of the seats rest of the child restraint system must lie as
# If the child and the child restraint sys‐
and consider their suitability for attaching a flat as possible against the backrest of the
tem together weigh more than the per‐ vehicle seat.
child restraint system.
missible gross mass of 73 lb (33 kg ),
only use a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child O Always comply with the manufacturer's After the child restraint system has been
restraint system with which the child is installation and operating instructions for removed, replace the head restraints again
secured with the vehicle seat belt. the child restraint system used. immediately and adjust them correctly.
# Also secure the child restraint system O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot
with the Top Tether belt, if available. the front seat. If necessary, move the front be fully extended when it is installed in the
seat slightly forwards. vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the
maximum size setting for child restraint sys‐
tems in weight group 2 or 3.
 Occupant safety 67

Contact with the roof when the head * NOTE Damage to the seat belt for the
restraint is fully extended and locked in center seat during installation of the
place will not result in any restrictions on child restraint system
use.
O The child restraint system must not be put # Make sure that the seat belt is not trap‐
under strain between the roof and the seat ped.
cushion and/or be installed facing the
wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the # Vehicles with reclining rear seats: Tilt the
seat cushion inclination accordingly. backrest of the reclining rear seat back
slightly before the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
O The child restraint system must not be put restraint system is installed.
under strain by the head restraint. Adjust
the head restraints as appropriate. # Fold upholstered lining 1 upwards.
# Pull the tab on upholstered lining 1
upwards and position it on the supporting
surface.
Upholstered lining 1 will remain folded
Before every journey, make sure that the LATCH- upwards.
type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged
correctly in both mounting brackets in the vehi‐ # Attach the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
cle. restraint system to both mounting brackets
2 in the vehicle.
# To close, fold upholstered lining 1 upwards.
# Lift the tab from the support surface and
slide it back into the upholstery slot between
68 Occupant safety

the seat backrest and seat cushion. Close # Never adjust the seat after the child
the upholstery flap. restraint system has been installed.
# Vehicles with reclining rear seats: Return
the reclining rear seat backrest to an upright ¯ If the child restraint system is equipped
position. with a Top Tether belt:
The reclining rear seat backrest must be in The risk of injury may be reduced by Top
contact with the child restraint system. Tether. The Top Tether belt enables an
additional connection between the child
Securing Top Tether restraint system attached with LATCH-
type (ISOFIX) and the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death from
adjusting the seat after installing a child
restraint system
Vehicles with electrically adjustable rear
bench seats:
# If necessary, slide head restraint 1 upwards
The following may occur: (/ page 118).
R The Top Tether belt may sit either too
# Remove cover 2 of Top Tether anchorage
loose or too tight 3.
R The child restraint system may be loose,
# Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
incorrectly positioned or damaged and system with Top Tether. In doing so, comply
then not perform its intended protective with the child restraint system manufactur‐
function. er's installation instructions.
 Occupant safety 69

Vehicles with rear airbag If using a forward-facing child restraint sys‐

tem with enabled rear airbag: make sure that
Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing the child's feet are not placed in front of the rear
child restraint systems on the left and right airbag cover or on the seat backrest. The child's
rear seat legs can otherwise be thrown up if the rear air‐
bag is deployed.
Enabling/disabling the rear airbag
The rear airbag can be enabled or disabled via
the multimedia display (/ page 58).
# Guide Top Tether belt 4 under head
restraint 1 between the two head restraint Securing the child restraint system with the
bars. seat belt
# Hook Top Tether hook 5 of Top Tether belt Securing the child restraint system with the
4 into Top Tether anchorage 3 without seat belt on the rear seat
twisting.
When installing a belt-secured child
# Tension Top Tether belt 4. In doing so, com‐ restraint system, observe the following:
ply with the child restraint system manufac‐ O Always comply with the manufacturer's
turer's installation instructions. installation and operating instructions for
# If necessary, slide head restraint 1 down‐ the child restraint system used.
wards (/ page 118). Make sure that you do Sticker visible when the rear door is open O When using a weight category 0/0+
not interfere with the correct routing of Top baby car seat and a weight category I
Tether belt 4. When installing a child restraint system, the rear
airbag can be disabled. rearward-facing child restraint system
on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that
70 Occupant safety

the seat does not touch the child restraint cushion and/or be installed facing the # Always make sure that the shoulder belt
system. wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the strap is correctly routed from the seat belt
O When using a weight category I forward- seat cushion inclination accordingly. outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt
facing child restraint system: remove the O The child restraint system must not be put guide on the child restraint system.
head restraint from the respective seat, if under strain by the head restraint. Adjust The shoulder belt strap must be routed
possible. the head restraints as appropriate. forward from the seat belt outlet.
After the child restraint system has been O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing
removed, replace the head restraints again the front seat. If necessary, move the front child restraint systems on the front
immediately and adjust them correctly. seat slightly forwards. passenger seat
O The backrest of the forward-facing child The seat belts on the following seats are equip‐
restraint system must, as far as possible, be & WARNING Risk of injury or death when
ped with a child seat safety feature: using a rearward-facing child restraint
resting on the seat backrest of the rear
R Front passenger seat system while the front passenger airbag
seat.
R Rear seats is enabled
O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot
be fully extended when it is installed in the When enabled, the child seat safety feature If you secure a child in a rearward-facing
vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the ensures that the seat belts of the front child restraint system on the front passenger
maximum size setting for child restraint sys‐ passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi‐
tems in weight category 2 or 3. once the child restraint system is secured cator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag
Contact with the roof when the head (/ page 65). can deploy in the event of an accident.
restraint is fully extended and locked in # Install the child restraint system. The child could be struck by the airbag.
place will not result in any restrictions on The entire base of the child restraint system Always ensure that the front passenger air‐
use. must always rest on the sitting surface of the bag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG
O The child restraint system must not be put rear seat. OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
under strain between the roof and the seat
 Occupant safety 71

NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint Securing the child restraint system with the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the
system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT seat belt on the front passenger seat maximum size setting for child restraint sys‐
AIRBAG. This can result in the DEATH of or When installing a belt-secured child restraint tems in weight category II or III.
SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD. system on the front passenger seat, always Contact with the roof when the head
observe the following: restraint is fully extended and locked in
Observe the specific instructions for the rear‐ O Observe the notes on rearward-facing and place will not result in any restrictions on
ward-facing and forward-facing child restraint forward-facing child restraint systems on use.
systems (/ page 71). the front passenger seat (/ page 70). O The child restraint system must not be put
Always observe the status of the front passenger O Observe the child restraint system manufac‐ under strain between the roof and the seat
airbag on the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica‐ turer's installation and operating instruc‐ cushion and/or be installed facing the
tor lamp: tions. wrong direction.
R When using a rearward-facing child restraint O The child restraint system must not be put
O When using a forward-facing child restraint
system on the front passenger seat, the front system in weight category I: remove the under strain by the head restraint. Adjust
passenger airbag must always be disabled. head restraint from the respective seat, if the head restraints as appropriate.
This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR possible. O Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or
BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously behind the child restraint system.
(/ page 53). After the child restraint system has been
removed, replace the head restraints again The seat belt on the front passenger side is
R If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator immediately and adjust them correctly.
lamp is off, the front passenger airbag is ena‐ equipped with a special seat belt retractor.
bled. The front passenger airbag may deploy O The backrest of the forward-facing child When enabled, the special seat belt retractor
during an accident. restraint system must, as far as possible, be ensures that the seat belt does not slacken once
resting on the seat backrest of the front the child seat is secured (/ page 65).
passenger seat.
O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot
be fully extended when it is installed in the
72 Occupant safety

# Set the front passenger seat as far back as Child safety locks # Never leave children unattended in the
possible and move the seat into the highest vehicle.
Activating/deactivating the child safety lock
position if possible.
for the rear doors # When leaving the vehicle, always take
# Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust‐ the SmartKey with you and lock the
ment. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury vehicle.
# Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that due to children left unattended in the # Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach
the front edge of the seat cushion is in the vehicle of children.
highest position and the back edge of the If children are left unsupervised in the vehi‐
seat cushion is in the lowest position. cle, they could, in particular: & WARNING Danger to life due to expo‐
# Set the seat backrest to the most vertical R Open doors, thereby endangering other sure to extreme heat or cold in the vehi‐
position possible. persons or road users. cle
# Install the child restraint system. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐
The entire base of the child restraint system If people, particularly children, are exposed
fic. to extreme temperatures over an extended
must always rest on the sitting surface of the
front passenger seat. R Operate vehicle equipment and become period of time, there is a risk of serious
trapped, for example. injury or danger to life.
# Always make sure that the shoulder belt # Never leave persons, children in partic‐
strap is correctly routed from the seat belt In addition, the children could also set the
outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt vehicle in motion, for example by: ular, unattended in the vehicle.
guide on the child restraint system. R Releasing the parking brake.
The shoulder belt strap must be routed for‐
R Changing the transmission position.
wards and downwards from the seat belt out‐
let. R Starting the vehicle.
# If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and
the front passenger seat accordingly.
 Occupant safety 73

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury The child safety lock on the rear doors secures Activating/deactivating the child safety lock
due to children left unattended in the each door separately. The doors can no longer for the rear side windows
vehicle be opened from the inside.
If children are traveling in the vehicle, they
could, in particular:
R Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users
R Get out and be struck by oncoming traffic
R Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example
# Always activate the child safety locks
installed if children are traveling in the
vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the # To activate/deactivate: press button 2.
vehicle. # Press the lever in direction 1 (activate) or The rear side window can be opened or
2 (deactivate). closed as follows:
There are child safety locks for the rear doors # Make sure that the child safety locks are R Indicator lamp 1 is lit: via the switch on
and the rear side windows. working properly. the driver's door
74 Occupant safety

R Indicator lamp 1 is off: via the switch on An animal may:

the corresponding rear door or driver's
R Activate vehicle equipment and become
door
trapped, for example
When the child safety lock is activated, the con‐
R Switch systems on or off and endanger
trols in the rear compartment are disabled for:
other road users
R The rear side windows
R The adjustment of the front passenger seat
Unsecured animals may be thrown around in
from the rear compartment the vehicle in the event of an accident or
sudden steering and braking maneuvers and
R The roller sunblinds: injure vehicle occupants in the process.
- of the rear side windows # Never leave animals in the vehicle unat‐
- of the rear window tended.
- in the roof # Always correctly secure animals while
driving, e.g. using a suitable animal car‐
rier.
Notes on pets in the vehicle

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury

due to animals left unsecured or unat‐
tended in the vehicle
If you leave animals in the vehicle unatten‐
ded or unsecured, they could possibly press
buttons or switches.
 Opening and closing 75

SmartKey # When leaving the vehicle, always take 2 Unlocks (with embossed surface)
Overview of SmartKey functions the SmartKey with you and lock the 3 Locks
vehicle. 4 Indicator lamp
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury # Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach 5 Panic alarm
due to children left unattended in the of children.
vehicle % If indicator lamp 4 does not light up after
pressing the Ü or s button, the bat‐
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi‐ * NOTE Damage to the SmartKey caused tery is weak or possibly discharged. Replace
cle, they could, in particular: by magnetic fields the battery as soon as possible.
R open doors, thereby endangering other # Keep the SmartKey away from strong Replace the SmartKey battery (/ page 77).
persons or road users. magnetic fields. The SmartKey locks and unlocks the following
R get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐ components:
fic. R Doors
R operate vehicle equipment and become
R Fuel filler flap
trapped, for example.
R Trunk lid
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for example by: If the vehicle is not opened within approximately
40 seconds after unlocking, it locks again. Anti-
R releasing the parking brake.
theft protection is armed again.
R changing the transmission position.
Do not keep the SmartKey together with elec‐
R starting the vehicle. tronic devices or metal objects. This can affect
SmartKey with panic alarm the SmartKey's functionality.
# Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle. 1 Opens/closes the trunk lid
76 Opening and closing

Indicator lamp of the vehicle locking system Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking # To activate: press button 1 for approx‐
verification signal imately one second.
A visual and audible alarm is triggered.
Multimedia system: # To deactivate: briefly press button 1 again.
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle
5 Opening/closing
or
# Activate or deactivate Acoustic Lock.
# Press the start/stop button on the cockpit,
with the SmartKey inside the vehicle.

Activating/deactivating the panic alarm Changing the unlocking settings

Requirements: Possible unlocking functions of the SmartKey:
R The ignition is switched off.
R Central unlocking
R Unlocking the driver's door and fuel filler flap

# To switch between settings: press the

Ü and s buttons simultaneously for
approximately six seconds until the indicator
Indicator lamp 1 in the trim on the driver's side lamp flashes twice.
flashes when the vehicle is locked from outside.
Options if the unlocking function for the driver's
Indicator lamp 1 remains off if the vehicle is
door and fuel filler flap has been selected:
locked from inside or while the vehicle is in
motion. R To unlock the vehicle centrally: press the
Ü button twice.
R Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch
the inner surface of the door handle on the
 Opening and closing 77

driver's door, only the driver's door and fuel sole, the SmartKey functions are automati‐ Inserting the emergency key
filler flap are unlocked. cally activated (/ page 188).

Deactivating the SmartKey functions Removing/inserting the emergency key

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Deactivate the Removing the emergency key
SmartKey functions to protect your vehicle from
unauthorized access. This can be useful when
you park your vehicle on busy streets or in park‐
ing spaces not in plain view, for example. You
must reactivate the key functions to use KEY‐
LESS-GO again.
If you do not use the vehicle or a SmartKey for # Insert emergency key 2 at marking 3 until
an extended period of time, you can reduce the it engages.
energy consumption of the respective SmartKey. % You can use emergency key 2 to attach the
To do so, deactivate the SmartKey functions. SmartKey to a key ring.
# To deactivate: press the s button on the
# Press release button 1.
SmartKey twice in quick succession. Replacing the SmartKey battery
Emergency key 2 is pushed out slightly.
The SmartKey indicator lamp flashes twice
briefly and lights up once. # Fully remove emergency key 2. & DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to
# To activate: press any button on the Smart‐ swallowing batteries
Key. Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub‐
% When the vehicle is started with the Smart‐ stances. Swallowing batteries may cause
Key in the marked space of the center con‐
78 Opening and closing

severe internal burns to occur within two #

hours.
There is a risk of fatal injury.
Dispose of batteries in an
# Keep batteries out of the reach of chil‐
environmentally responsible manner.
dren. Take discharged batteries to a qualified
# If the cover and/or cap of the battery specialist workshop or to a collection
compartment does not close securely, point for used batteries.
do not use the SmartKey any longer and
keep out of the reach of children. Requirements:
# If batteries are swallowed, seek medical R You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery. # Press emergency key 2 into the opening in
attention immediately. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the the SmartKey in the direction of the arrow
battery replaced at a qualified specialist work‐ until cover 1 opens. When doing so, do not
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental shop. hold cover 1 closed.
damage due to improper disposal of bat‐ # Remove the emergency key (/ page 77).
teries

Batteries contain pollutants. It is

illegal to dispose of them with the household
rubbish.
 Opening and closing 79

# Insert emergency key 2 into the opening Problems with the SmartKey, troubleshoot‐ R Shielding due to metal objects or induction
and lift up covering 3 and remove it. ing loops for electrical gate systems or auto‐
# Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your matic barriers
You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle
palm until battery 4 falls out of the Smart‐ # Make sure that there is sufficient distance
Key. Possible causes:
between the SmartKey and the potential
R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged. source of interference.
# Insert the new battery with the positive pole
facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so. # Check the battery using the battery check You have lost a SmartKey
# Make sure that the surface of the battery is lamp (/ page 75).
# Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified
free of lint, grease and other impurities. # Replace the SmartKey battery, if necessary specialist workshop.
# Insert the front tabs of covering 3 into the (/ page 77).
# If necessary, have the mechanical lock
housing and then press on both sides to # Use the replacement SmartKey.
close it. replaced as well.
# Use the emergency key to lock or unlock
# Make sure that covering 3 is completely (/ page 83).
closed. # Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified
# Insert the front tabs of cover 1 into the specialist workshop.
housing and then press until it is completely
closed. There is interference from a powerful radio
signal source
# Insert the emergency key again (/ page 77).
The SmartKey function is impaired by, for exam‐
ple:
R High voltage power lines
R Mobile phones
R Electronic devices (notebooks, tablets)
80 Opening and closing

Doors Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap.
from the inside The vehicle is not unlocked:
Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside
R If you have locked the vehicle using the
SmartKey.
R If you have locked the vehicle using KEY‐
LESS-GO.

Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEY‐

LESS-GO
Requirements:
R The SmartKey is outside the vehicle.
# To unlock and open a front door: pull door R The distance between the SmartKey and the
handle 1. vehicle does not exceed 3 ft (1 m).
R The driver's door and the door at which the
# To unlock a rear door: pull the rear door
handle. door handle is used are closed.
# To open a rear door: pull the rear door han‐ In the following cases, the door handles are
# To unlock: press button 1.
dle again. extended:
# To lock: press button 2.
R When the vehicle is unlocked
The red indicator lamp on button 2 lights
up once the vehicle is locked. R When the vehicle SmartKey is detected

% The buttons are also on the front passenger R When a door is opened
and rear doors.
 Opening and closing 81

In the following cases, the door handles are R Notes on using a power washer
retracted: (/ page 331)
R When the vehicle is locked
R When pulling away
R After waiting for a time

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle caused by

unintentionally opening the trunk lid or a
door
R When using an automatic car wash
R When using a high pressure cleaner
# Deactivate the SmartKey functions in
these situations.
or % If the door handle is not extended, touch
# Make sure that the SmartKey is at a sensor surface 2 to unlock.
minimum distance of 10 ft (3 m) (power # To lock the vehicle: touch recessed sensor
washer) or 20 ft (6 m) (automatic car # To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur‐
face of door handle 1. surface 3.
wash) away from the vehicle.
# Convenience closing: touch recessed sen‐
Observe the following information: sor surface 3 for an extended period.
R Information on washing the vehicle in a car % Further information on convenience closing
wash (/ page 330) (/ page 93).
82 Opening and closing

Problems with KEYLESS-GO, troubleshooting There is interference from a powerful radio # Switch Automatic Door Lock on or off.
signal source. In the following situations, there is a danger of
You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle
using KEYLESS-GO The KEYLESS-GO function is impaired by, for being locked out when the function is activated:
example: R While the vehicle is being tow-started or
Possible causes:
R High voltage power lines pushed
R The SmartKey functions have been deactiva‐
R Mobile phones R If the vehicle is being tested on a roller dyna‐
ted.
R Electronic devices (notebooks, tablets) mometer
R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged.
R Shielding due to metal objects or induction
# Activate the SmartKey functions loops for electrical gate systems or auto‐ Power closing function
(/ page 77). matic barriers
# Check the battery using the indicator lamp & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
(/ page 75). # Make sure that there is sufficient distance when the doors close automatically
between the SmartKey and the potential
# Replace the SmartKey battery, if necessary source of interference. Body parts or objects can become trapped,
(/ page 77). causing injuries.
# Use the replacement SmartKey. # Ensure that no body parts or objects
Activating or deactivating the automatic
# Use the emergency key to lock or unlock locking feature are in the closing area.
(/ page 83). # Automatic closing of the doors can be
Multimedia system: canceled by pulling the outer or inner
# Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle
qualified specialist workshop. door handle.
5 Locking Function

% The vehicle is locked automatically when the If you push the door into the lock to the first
ignition is switched on and the wheels are detent position, the power closing function will
turning faster than walking pace. automatically pull the door into the lock.
 Opening and closing 83

% If the vehicle is locked from the outside, or # Remove the emergency key (/ page 77).
while pulling away, an automatic closing of
the doors can be triggered.

Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the

emergency key
Unlocking a left-hand vehicle door with the
emergency key
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO
# Remove the emergency key (/ page 77).

# Pull and hold the door handle.

# To unlock: insert the emergency key into the
lock cylinder.
# If the door handle is retracted: press the
front area of door handle 1.
# Turn the emergency key counter-clockwise to The door handle folds slightly outward.
position 1.
# Pull and hold the door handle.
# Remove the emergency key and release the
door handle.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO
84 Opening and closing

Locking the doors # To lock the right-hand side of the vehicle:

turn the emergency key counter-clockwise as
far as it will go.
If the locked door is then closed, it can no longer
be opened from the outside.

Trunk
Opening the trunk lid

& DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
trunk lid is open when the engine is running,
# If the door handle is extended: slightly pull especially if the vehicle is in motion.
and hold the door handle. # Always switch off the engine before
# Insert a suitable object, e.g. the emergency
# To unlock: insert the emergency key into the key, into opening 1 on the door lock. opening the trunk lid.
lock cylinder. # Never drive with the trunk lid open.
# To lock the left-hand side of the vehicle:
# Turn the emergency key counter-clockwise to turn the emergency key clockwise as far as it
position 1. will go.
# Remove the emergency key and release the
door handle.
 Opening and closing 85

* NOTE Damage to the trunk lid by obsta‐ Vehicles with trunk lid convenience closing # If the trunk lid is stopped in an intermediate
cles above the vehicle position, pull it upwards. Release it as soon
as it begins to open.
The trunk lid swings upwards when it is With the trunk lid opening height restriction
opened. activated, manually pull the stopped trunk lid
# Therefore, make sure that there is suffi‐ upwards.
cient clearance above the trunk lid. If an obstacle obstructs the trunk lid during the
automatic opening process, blockage detection
# Pull the trunk lid handle. will stop the trunk lid. The automatic blockage
# Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: Make detection function is only an aid and is not a
a kicking movement with your foot below the substitute for your attentiveness.
bumper (/ page 88).
Closing the trunk lid

& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured

items in the vehicle
# Pull trunk lid remote operating switch 1. If objects, luggage or loads are not secured
# Press and hold the H button on the or not secured sufficiently, they could slip,
SmartKey. tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit
vehicle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
86 Opening and closing

# Always stow objects in such a way that # Before locking, ensure that at least one R Press the closing or locking button
they cannot be thrown around. SmartKey belonging to the vehicle is outside on the trunk lid.
the vehicle.
# Before the journey, secure objects, lug‐ R Pull the trunk lid handle.
# Pull the trunk lid downwards using the han‐
gage or loads against slipping or tipping
over. dle recess and push it closed. # Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is
% If you lightly push the trunk lid closed, the also possible to stop the closing process by
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. power closing function will automatically pull making a kicking movement below the rear
Note on closing the trunk lid: your vehicle is the trunk lid into the lock. bumper.
equipped with automatic SmartKey recognition. # Pull the trunk lid handle. Release it as soon
If a SmartKey belonging to the vehicle is detec‐ Vehicles with trunk lid convenience closing
as it begins to close.
ted in the vehicle, the trunk lid will not be
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped # If the trunk lid is stopped in an intermediate
locked.
during automatic closing of the trunk lid position, push it downwards.
This depends on the following conditions: The trunk lid will continue to close.
Parts of the body could become trapped.
R You have closed the trunk lid and the vehicle
There may be people in the closing area.
was locked beforehand.
# Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity
R A second SmartKey belonging to the vehicle
of the closing area.
is not detected outside the vehicle.
# Use one of the following options to stop
The trunk lid will then not be locked and will pop the closing process:
open again. R Press the H button on the
Automatic SmartKey recognition is only an aid SmartKey.
and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. R Press or pull the remote operating
switch on the driver's door.
 Opening and closing 87

SmartKey must be in the vicinity of the vehi‐

cle.
Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS
# With the trunk lid completely open, make a
kicking movement with your foot below the
bumper (/ page 88).
Trunk lid automatic reversing function
The trunk lid is equipped with automatic block‐
age detection with a reversing function. If an
obstacle obstructs the trunk lid during the auto‐
matic closing process, it will automatically open
again. The automatic reversing function is only
an aid and is not a substitute for your attentive‐
ness.
# During the closing process, make sure that
# Press trunk lid remote operating switch 1. # Press closing button 1 on the trunk lid.
no body parts are in the closing area.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO
# Press locking button 2 on the trunk lid. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
If a SmartKey is detected outside the vehicle, despite reversing function
the trunk lid will close and the vehicle will be The reversing function will not react:
locked.
R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
# With the trunk lid completely open, press and
R towards the end of the closing procedure
hold the H button on the SmartKey. The
88 Opening and closing

In these situations in particular, the reversing HANDS-FREE ACCESS function % A warning tone sounds while the trunk lid is
function cannot prevent someone being trap‐ opening or closing.
ped.
& WARNING Risk of burns caused by a hot
# Ensure that no body parts are in the
exhaust system
closing area.
# If someone is trapped, use one of the
The vehicle exhaust system can become very
following options: hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you
R Press the H button on the
could burn yourself by touching the exhaust
SmartKey. system.
# Always ensure that you only make a
R Press the remote operating switch
on the driver's door. kicking movement within the detection
range of the sensors.
R Press the closing or locking button
on the trunk lid.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle caused by
R Pull the trunk lid handle.
unintentionally opening the trunk lid or a
door
With HANDS-FREE ACCESS you can open, close R When using an automatic car wash
or interrupt trunk lid movement by performing a R When using a high pressure cleaner
kicking movement under the rear bumper.
# Deactivate the SmartKey functions in
The kicking movement triggers the opening or
these situations.
closing process alternately.
or
Observe the notes when opening (/ page 84)
and closing (/ page 85) the trunk lid.
 Opening and closing 89

# Make sure that the SmartKey is at a The trunk lid could be opened or closed uninten‐
minimum distance of 10 ft (3 m) (power tionally, in the following situations:
washer) or 20 ft (6 m) (automatic car R A person's arms or legs are moving in the
wash) away from the vehicle. sensor detection range, e.g. when polishing
the vehicle or picking up objects.
When making the kicking movement, make sure R Objects are moved or placed behind the vehi‐
that you are standing firmly on the ground. You cle, e.g. tensioning straps or luggage.
could otherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice.
R Clamping straps, tarps or other coverings are
Observe the following notes: pulled over the bumper.
R The SmartKey is behind the vehicle. R A protective mat with a length reaching over
1 Detection range of the sensors
R Stand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the the trunk sill down into the detection range
vehicle while performing the kicking move‐ If several consecutive kicking movements are of the sensors is used.
ment. not successful, wait ten seconds. R The protective mat is not secured correctly.
R Do not come into contact with the bumper System limits
while making the kicking movement. Deactivate the SmartKey functions (/ page 77)
The system may be impaired or may not function or do not carry the SmartKey about your person
R Do not carry out the kicking movement too in the following cases: in such situations.
slowly.
R The sensors are dirty, e.g. due to road salt or
R The kicking movement must be towards the snow.
vehicle and back again.
R The kicking movement is made using a pros‐
thetic leg.
90 Opening and closing

Switching separate trunk locking on and off # Enter the PIN.

If the PIN is correct, separate trunk locking
Multimedia system: will be switched off and the PIN deleted.
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle
5 Opening/closing Resetting the PIN
If you have forgotten the PIN, you can switch off
Switching separate trunk locking on separate trunk locking with the emergency key.
# Select Block Trunk Access. # Select Block Trunk Access.
# Create a PIN. # Confirm Forget PIN?.
# Press OK to confirm the PIN. # Unlock the trunk within 3 minutes with the
# Enter the PIN again and confirm it. emergency key.
The trunk will remain locked if you unlock the Separate trunk locking will be switched off
vehicle centrally. and the PIN deleted.
% If an accident has been detected, the trunk
will unlock even if separate locking is Unlocking and opening the trunk from inside
switched on. with the emergency release # Press emergency release button 1 briefly.
% You can open the trunk with the emergency Requirements:
key even while trunk lock is active. Separate R The 12 V vehicle battery is connected and Unlocking the trunk lid using the emergency
trunk locking will remain active. charged. key
Switching separate trunk locking off # Take the emergency key out of the SmartKey
# Select Block Trunk Access. (/ page 77).
# Insert the emergency key into the trunk lock
as far as it will go.
 Opening and closing 91

Activating/deactivating the trunk lid opening # If someone is trapped, release the but‐
height restriction ton immediately or pull it in order to
Multimedia system: close the side window again.
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle
5 Opening/closing & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
# Activate or deactivate the Opening Height
when closing a side window
Limiter. When closing a side window, body parts
could be trapped in the closing area in the
This function prevents the trunk lid from hitting a process.
low garage ceiling, for example.
# When closing, make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area.
Side windows # If someone is trapped, release the but‐

Opening and closing the side windows ton immediately or press the button in
order to reopen the side window.
# Turn the emergency key counter-clockwise & WARNING Risk of entrapment when
from position 1 to position 2. opening a side window & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
# Turn the emergency key back to position 1 When opening a side window, parts of the when children operate the side windows
and remove it. body could be drawn in or become trapped Children could become trapped if they oper‐
% If you use the emergency key to unlock and between the side window and window frame. ate the side windows, particularly when unat‐
open the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm sys‐ # When opening, make sure that nobody tended.
tem will be triggered. is touching the side window.
92 Opening and closing

# Activate the child safety lock for the # To interrupt automatic operation: press or
rear passenger compartment side win‐ pull the W button again.
dows. When the vehicle is switched off, you can con‐
# When leaving the vehicle, always take tinue to operate the side windows.
the SmartKey with you and lock the This function is available for around four minutes
vehicle. or until a front door is opened.
# Never leave children unattended in the % Vehicles with electric roller sunblinds on
vehicle. rear doors on the left and right: The but‐
tons for the rear side windows also open and
Requirements: close the roller sunblinds (/ page 100).
R The power supply or the ignition is switched
on. Automatic reversing function of the side win‐
dows
If an obstacle impedes a side window during the
closing process, the side window will open again
1 Closes automatically. The automatic reversing function
2 Opens
is only an aid and is not a substitute for your
attentiveness.
The buttons on the driver's door take prece‐ # During the closing process, make sure that
dence. no body parts are in the closing area.
# To start automatic operation: press the
W button beyond the point of resistance
or pull and release it.
 Opening and closing 93

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped Convenience opening (ventilating the vehicle % If the roller sunblinds of the panoramic slid‐
despite there being reversing protection before starting a journey) ing sunroof are closed, the roller sunblinds
on the side window are opened first.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment when % If the roller sunblinds of the rear doors are
The reversing function does not react: opening a side window closed, the roller sunblinds are opened first.
R To soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fin‐
When opening a side window, parts of the # To interrupt convenience opening: release
gers. body could be drawn in or become trapped the Ü button.
R During resetting. between the side window and window frame. # To continue convenience opening: press
The reversing function cannot prevent some‐ # When opening, make sure that nobody and hold the Ü button again.
one from becoming trapped in these situa‐ is touching the side window.
tions. # Release the button immediately if
Convenience closing (closing the vehicle
# During the closing process, make sure somebody becomes trapped. from outside)
that no body parts are in the closing
area. # Press and hold the Ü button on the & WARNING Risk of entrapment due to not
# If someone becomes trapped, press the
SmartKey. paying attention during convenience
W button to open the side window The following functions are performed: closing
again. R The vehicle is unlocked. When the convenience closing feature is
R The side windows are opened. operating, parts of the body could become
R The panoramic sliding roof is opened. trapped in the closing area of the side win‐
dow and the sliding sunroof.
R The seat ventilation of the driver's seat is
# When the convenience closing feature
switched on.
is operating, monitor the entire closing
94 Opening and closing

process and make sure that no body Resolving problems with the side windows If a side window is obstructed during closing and
parts are in the closing area. reopens again immediately:
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or # Immediately after this, pull and hold the cor‐
# Press and hold the s button on the fatally injured if reversing protection is responding button again until the side win‐
SmartKey. not activated dow has closed and hold the button for at
The following functions are performed: If you close a side window again immediately least one more second (re-adjustment).
after it has been blocked, the side window The side window will be closed without the
R The vehicle is locked.
will close with increased or maximum force. automatic reversing function.
R The side windows are closed.
The reversing function is then not active and
R The panoramic sliding roof is closed. body parts may become trapped. If the side window is obstructed again and
reopens again immediately:
# To interrupt convenience closing: release # Make sure that no parts of the body are
# Immediately after this, pull and hold the cor‐
the s button. in the closing area.
responding button again until the side win‐
# To continue convenience closing: press # To stop the closing process, release the
dow has closed and hold the button for at
and hold the s button again. button or press the button again to least one more second (follow-up adjust‐
% Convenience closing also functions with reopen the side window. ment).
KEYLESS-GO (/ page 80). The side window will be closed without the
A side window cannot be closed and you can‐ automatic reversing function.
not see the cause.
# Check to see whether any objects are in the The side windows cannot be opened or
window guide. closed using the convenience opening fea‐
ture.
# Adjust the side windows.
Possible cause:
Adjusting the side windows R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged.
 Opening and closing 95

# Check the battery using the indicator lamp # Touch the control panel during auto‐ # During the opening or closing process,
(/ page 75). matic operation. make sure that no body parts are in the
# Replace the SmartKey battery, if necessary The opening/closing process will be roller sunblind's range of movement.
(/ page 77). stopped. # If someone is trapped, release the con‐
trol panel immediately.
Sliding sunroof & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if or
the sliding sunroof is operated by chil‐ # Touch the control panel during auto‐
Opening and closing the sliding sunroof dren matic operation.
% The term "sliding sunroof" refers to the pan‐ Children operating the sliding sunroof could The opening/closing process will be
orama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. get caught in the moving parts, particularly if stopped.
unattended.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped * NOTE Malfunction due to snow and ice
# Never leave children unattended in the
when the sliding sunroof is being opened
vehicle. Snow and ice may cause the sliding sunroof
and closed
# When leaving the vehicle, always take to malfunction.
Body parts may become trapped in the range the key with you and lock the vehicle. # Open the sliding sunroof only if it is free
of movement.
of snow and ice.
# During the opening and closing proc‐
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
ess, make sure that no body parts are when the roller sunblind is being opened
in the sweep of the sliding sunroof. * NOTE Damage caused by protruding
# If someone is trapped, release the con‐
and closed objects
trol panel immediately. Body parts may become trapped between Objects that protrude from the sliding sun‐
or the roller sunblind and frame or sliding roof. roof may damage the sealing strips.
96 Opening and closing

# Do not allow anything to protrude from # To close: swipe forwards across control
the sliding sunroof. panel 1 and hold.
# To raise or lower: press control panel 1
* NOTE Damage to panorama roof with briefly.
power tilt/sliding panel caused by roof # To start automatic operation: swipe for‐
luggage rack wards or backwards across control panel 1.
If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding # To cancel automatic operation: press con‐
panel is opened when a roof luggage rack is trol panel 1 again.
installed, the panorama roof with power tilt/ The opening/closing process will be stop‐
sliding panel may be damaged by the roof ped.
luggage rack.
# Do not open the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel if a roof luggage
rack is installed.
The sliding sunroof and the front roller sunblind
are operated using control panel 1.
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
can be operated only when the roller sunblind is
open.
# To open: swipe backwards across control
panel 1 and hold.
 Opening and closing 97

Operating the rear roller sunblind from the Operating the rear roller sunblind from the Automatic reversing function of the sliding
front rear passenger compartment sunroof
If an obstacle obstructs the sliding sunroof dur‐
ing the closing process, the sliding sunroof will
open again automatically. The automatic revers‐
ing function is only an aid and is not a substitute
for your attentiveness.
# During the closing process, make sure that
no body parts are in the closing area.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped

despite reversing function
The reversing function will not react:
R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers.
R towards the end of the closing procedure.
R during resetting.
R when you close the sliding sunroof again
# To open or close: press button 1. # To open/close manually: push or pull but‐ manually immediately after automatic
# To stop: press button 1 again. ton 1 to the point of resistance and hold it reversing.
until the roller sunblind has reached the
If you stop the opening or closing process, the desired position. # During the closing process, make sure
roller sunblind will first be closed again when the that no body parts are in the closing
# To open/close fully: push or pull button 1
process is resumed. area.
beyond the point of resistance and release it.
98 Opening and closing

# If someone is trapped, release the con‐ # When closing the roller sunblind, make slightly at higher speeds. At low speeds, it will
trol panel immediately. sure that no body parts are in the range be raised again automatically.
or of movement.
# If someone is trapped, release the con‐ & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped by
# Touch the control panel during auto‐ trol panel immediately. automatic lowering of the sliding sunroof
matic closing.
The closing process will be stopped. or At higher speeds, the raised sliding sunroof
# Touch the control panel during auto‐ will automatically be lowered slightly at the
Automatic reversing function of the roller matic closing. rear.
sunblinds The closing process will be stopped. # Make sure that nobody reaches into the
If an obstacle obstructs a roller sunblind during sliding sunroof's range of movement
the closing process, the roller sunblind will open while the vehicle is in motion.
again automatically. The automatic reversing Automatic functions of the sliding sunroof # If somebody becomes trapped, briefly
function is only an aid and is not a substitute for % The term "sliding sunroof" refers to the pan‐ push the sliding sunroof button for‐
your attentiveness. orama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. wards or backwards.
# When closing the roller sunblinds, make sure
that no body parts are in the range of move‐ Rain closing function when driving
ment. Vehicles with a panorama roof with power Rectifying problems with the sliding sunroof
tilt/sliding panel: If it starts to rain, the raised
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or
despite reversing function while the vehicle is in motion. fatal injuries when the sliding sunroof is
closed again
In particular, the reversing function does not Automatic lowering function
react to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fin‐ Vehicles with a panorama roof with power If you close the sliding sunroof again immedi‐
gers. tilt/sliding panel: If the sliding sunroof is raised ately after it has been blocked or reset, the
at the rear, it will automatically be lowered
 Opening and closing 99

sliding sunroof closes with increased or max‐ If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and The rear roller sunblind is not operating
imum force. opens again slightly: smoothly.
# Make sure that no parts of the body are # Repeat the previous step. # Reset the rear roller sunblind.

in the closing area. The sliding sunroof will be closed again with
# If someone is trapped, release the con‐ increased force. Resetting the rear roller sunblind
trol panel immediately. The sliding sunroof or the front roller sun‐
or blind is not operating smoothly.
# Touch the control panel during auto‐ # Reset the sliding sunroof and the roller sun‐
matic closing. blind.
The closing process will be stopped.
Resetting the sliding sunroof and the roller
The sliding sunroof cannot be closed and you sunblind
cannot see the cause. # Repeatedly swipe forwards across the con‐
% The term "sliding sunroof" refers to the pan‐ trol panel (/ page 95) and hold until the
orama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. sliding sunroof is completely closed.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing # Press and hold the control panel for another
and reopens again slightly: second.
# Immediately after automatic reversing, swipe # Press and hold the control panel until the
forwards across the control panel front roller sunblind is completely closed.
(/ page 95) and hold until the sliding sun‐ # Press and hold the control panel for another
roof is closed. second.
# Pull and hold button 1 repeatedly until the
The sliding sunroof will be closed with rear roller sunblind is fully closed.
# Use automatic operation to fully open and
increased force. # Pull button 1 for another second.
then close the sliding sunroof.
100 Opening and closing

# Use automatic operation to fully open and Extending or retracting the rear window
then close the rear roller sunblind. roller sunblind

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped

Roller sun blinds when extending or retracting the roller
Extending or retracting the roller sunblinds sunblind
on the rear side windows
Body parts may become trapped in the roller
The roller sunblinds for the rear side windows sunblind's range of movement.
can be operated with the buttons for the side # Ensure there are no body parts in the
windows. range of movement.
# If someone becomes trapped, briefly
press the button again.
The opening or closing process will
briefly be stopped. The roller sunblind
will then return to its starting position.
1 Rear left side window/roller sunblind
2 Rear right side window/roller sunblind Extending or retracting from the driver's
seat
# To close fully: pull the corresponding button
when the side window is closed or is in the * NOTE Damage caused by objects
process of closing.
Objects can cause the roller sunblind to mal‐
# To open fully: press the corresponding but‐ function.
ton.
# Do not store objects on the rear shelf.
 Opening and closing 101

# Ensure that the roller sunblind can Extending or retracting from the rear
move freely. passenger compartment

* NOTE Damage caused by objects

Objects can cause the roller sunblind to mal‐
function.
# Do not store objects on the rear shelf.

# Ensure that the roller sunblind can

move freely.

# To extend: pull switch 1.

# To retract: press switch 1.
# Press button 1. When the child safety lock for the rear side win‐
dows is activated, switch 1 cannot be oper‐
% Depending on the model, button 1 is loca‐ ated.
ted on the door control panel on the driver's
side.
102 Opening and closing

Anti-theft protection ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

Function of the immobilizer Function of the ATA system
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being If the ATA system is armed, a visual and audible
started without the correct SmartKey. alarm is triggered in the following situations:
The immobilizer is automatically activated when R when a door is opened
the ignition is switched off and deactivated when R when the trunk lid is opened
the ignition is switched on. R when the hood is opened
When leaving the vehicle, always take the Smart‐ R when interior protection is triggered
Key with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can (/ page 103)
start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been left
R when the tow-away alarm is triggered
inside the vehicle.
(/ page 103)
% In the event the engine cannot be started
(yet the vehicle’s battery is charged), the The ATA system is armed automatically after
system is not operational. Contact an approximately ten seconds in the following situa‐
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call tions: Indicator lamp 1 flashes when the ATA system
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or R after locking the vehicle with the SmartKey is armed.
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). R after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO The ATA system is deactivated automatically in
the following situations:
R after unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey
R after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-
GO
 Opening and closing 103

R after pressing the start/stop button with the Function of the tow-away alarm R After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-
SmartKey in the storage compartment GO
% This function may not be available in all
(/ page 188) R When using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
countries.
% When the Mercedes‑Benz emergency call An audible and visual alarm is triggered if an Information on collision detection on a parked
system is active and the alarm stays on for alteration to your vehicle's angle of inclination is vehicle (/ page 213).
more than 30 seconds, a message is auto‐ detected while the tow-away alarm is armed.
matically sent to the Customer Assistance
Center (/ page 315). The tow-away alarm is automatically armed after Arming/disarming the tow-away alarm
approximately 60 seconds:
% In the case of severe battery discharging, Multimedia system:
R After locking the vehicle with the SmartKey
the anti-theft alarm system is automatically 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle
deactivated to facilitate the next engine R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
5 Opening/closing 5 Vehicle Protection
start. The tow-away alarm is only armed when the fol‐ # Arm or disarm Tow-away Protection.
Deactivating the ATA lowing components are closed:
# Press the Ü, s or H button on the
The tow-away alarm is armed again in the follow‐
R Doors ing cases:
SmartKey. R Trunk lid R The vehicle is unlocked again.
or
The tow-away alarm is automatically deactiva‐ R A door is opened.
# Press the start/stop button with the Smart‐
ted: R The vehicle is locked again.
Key in the marked space (/ page 188)
R After pressing the Ü or H button on
Deactivating the alarm using KEYLESS-GO the SmartKey
Function of the interior motion sensor
# With the SmartKey outside the vehicle, touch R After pressing the start/stop button with the
the inner surface of the door handle. SmartKey in the storage compartment % This function may not be available in all
(/ page 188) countries.
104 Opening and closing

When the interior motion sensor is activated, a The following situations can lead to a false
visual and audible alarm is triggered if move‐ alarm:
ment is detected in the vehicle interior. R Moving objects such as mascots in the vehi‐
The interior motion sensor is activated automati‐ cle interior
cally after approximately ten seconds: R When a side window is open
R After locking the vehicle with the SmartKey R When a panoramic sliding sunroof is open
R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

The interior motion sensor is only activated Activating/deactivating the interior motion
when the following components are closed: sensor
R Doors Multimedia system:
R Trunk lid 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle
5 Opening/closing 5 Vehicle Protection
The interior motion sensor is automatically deac‐
tivated: # Activate or deactivate Interior Motion Sen-

R After pressing the Ü or H button on sor.

the SmartKey The Interior motion sensor is activated again in
R After pressing the start/stop button with the the following cases:
SmartKey in the marked space (/ page 188) R The vehicle is unlocked again.
R After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS- R A door is opened.
GO R The vehicle is locked again.
R When using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
 Seats and stowing 105

Notes on the correct driver's seat position R You can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent
& WARNING Risk of accident due to R You can move your legs freely
adjusting the vehicle settings while the R You can see all the displays on the instru‐
vehicle is in motion ment cluster clearly
You could lose control of the vehicle in the R You have a good overview of the traffic con‐
following situations in particular: ditions
R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head R Your seat belt sits snugly against your body
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror and passes across the center of your shoul‐
while the vehicle is in motion Ensure the following when adjusting steering der and across your hips in the pelvic area
R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐ wheel 1, seat belt 2 and driver's seat 3:
cle is in motion R You are sitting as far away from the driver's Seats
# Before starting the engine: In particular, airbag as possible, taking the following
points into consideration: Adjusting the front seat electrically
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror, and fasten R You are sitting in an upright position & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if
your seat belt. R Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat the seats are adjusted by children
cushion
Children could become trapped if they adjust
R Your legs are not fully extended and you can the seats, particularly when unattended.
depress the pedals properly # When leaving the vehicle, always take
R The back of your head is supported at eye the SmartKey with you and lock the
level by the center of the head restraint vehicle.
106 Seats and stowing

# Never leave children unattended in the & WARNING Risk of accident due to Children in particular could accidentally
vehicle. adjusting the vehicle settings while the press the electrical seat adjustment buttons
vehicle is in motion and become trapped.
You can adjust the seats when the ignition is # While moving the seats, make sure that
switched off. You could lose control of the vehicle in the
following situations in particular: hands or other body parts do not get
under the lever assembly of the seat
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head
adjustment system.
when adjusting the seat restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
while the vehicle is in motion
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle & WARNING Risk of injury due to incor‐
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐
cle is in motion rectly adjusted head restraints
seat guide rail.
If head restraints have not been adjusted
# When adjusting a seat, make sure that # Before starting the engine: In particular, correctly, there is an increased risk of injury
no one has any part of their body within adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event
the sweep of the seat. steering wheel and mirror, and fasten of an accident or sudden braking.
your seat belt.
# Before driving off, make sure for every
Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Chil‐
dren in the vehicle". vehicle occupant that the center of the
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if head restraint supports the back of the
the seat height is adjusted carelessly head at about eye level.
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you
or other vehicle occupants could be trapped Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so
and thereby injured. that it is as close as possible to the back of your
head.
 Seats and stowing 107

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to # Use the grab handles only to stabilize # When moving the seats back, make
an incorrect seat position the seating position or to assist in get‐ sure that there are no objects in the
ting in and out of the seat. footwell, under or behind the seats.
The seat belt does not offer the intended
level of protection if you have not moved the The switches for adjusting the seats do not
seat backrest to an almost vertical position. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
objects under the co-driver seat move. You will therefore receive no direct feed‐
In particular, you could slip beneath the seat‐ back on the switch while pressing the switch.
belt and become injured. Objects trapped under the co-driver seat can Feedback is provided only by the movement of
# Adjust the seat properly before begin‐ interfere with the function of the automatic the seat.
ning your journey. co-driver airbag shutoff or damage the sys‐
tem.
# Always ensure that the seat backrest is
# Do not store any objects under the co-
in an almost vertical position and that
the shoulder belt is routed across the driver seat.
center of your shoulder. # When the co-driver seat is occupied,
make sure that no objects are trapped
& WARNING Risk of injury due to exces‐ under the co-driver seat.
sive strain on the grab handle
* NOTE Damage to the seats when moving
If you apply your full body weight to the grab
handle or pull it abruptly, the grab handle the seats back
may be damaged or become loose from its The seats may be damaged by objects when
anchorage. moving the seats back.
108 Seats and stowing

# Save the settings with the memory function Adjusting the front passenger seat electri‐
(/ page 129). cally from the driver's seat
% The head restraint height will be adjusted
automatically when you adjust the seat
height or the seat fore-and-aft position.
% Vehicles with EASY ADJUST luxury head
restraints: The fore-and-aft position of the
head restraint will be adjusted automatically
when you adjust the backrest angle.

1 Head restraint fore-and-aft position (vehicles

with an EASY ADJUST luxury head restraint)
2 Head restraint height You can call up the following functions for the
3 Seat height front passenger seat:
4 Seat cushion inclination R Seat adjustment
5 Seat cushion length R Seat heating
6 Seat fore-and-aft position
R Seat ventilation
7 Seat backrest inclination
R Memory function
 Seats and stowing 109

# To select the front passenger seat: press Adjusting the front passenger seat electri‐
button 1. cally from the rear passenger compartment
When the indicator lamp lights up, the front
passenger seat is selected.
# Adjust the front passenger seat using the
buttons on the driver's side door control
panel.

Vehicles with an EASY ADJUST luxury head restraint

1 Selects the front passenger seat
Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer seats 2 Head restraint fore-and-aft position
1 Selects the front passenger seat 3 Head restraint height
2 Head restraint height 4 Seat backrest inclination
3 Seat backrest inclination 5 Seat height
4 Seat height 6 Seat fore-and-aft position
5 Seat fore-and-aft position
110 Seats and stowing

The footrest can be adjusted only when one of % You can use the rear-compartment child
the following conditions has been fulfilled: safety lock to disable this function
R Depending on the equipment, the front (/ page 73).
passenger seat is in one of the following
positions: Adjusting the rear seats electrically
- Vehicles without leg rest: the front
passenger seat has moved into a random & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
position. an incorrect seat position
- Vehicles with leg rest: the front The seat belt does not offer the intended
passenger seat has been moved fully level of protection if you have not moved the
forward. seat backrest to an almost vertical position.
R The front passenger seat is in the position for In particular, you could slip beneath the seat‐
chauffeur mode. belt and become injured.
# Adjust the rear seat (/ page 110). # Adjust the seat properly before begin‐

Vehicles with seat for chauffeur mode and long # Adjust the reclining rear seat (/ page 111). ning your journey.
wheelbase # To select the front passenger seat: press # Always ensure that the seat backrest is
1 Selects the front passenger seat button 1. in an almost vertical position and that
2 Head restraint fore-and-aft position When the indicator lamp lights up, the front the shoulder belt is routed across the
3 Head restraint height passenger seat is selected. center of your shoulder.
4 Seat backrest inclination # Adjust the front passenger seat using the The switches for adjusting the seats do not
5 Seat height buttons on the door operating unit in the rear move. You will therefore receive no direct feed‐
6 Front passenger seat footrest passenger compartment. back on the switch while pressing the switch.
7 Seat fore-and-aft position
 Seats and stowing 111

Feedback is provided only by the movement of 3 Seat backrest inclination

the seat. 4 Combined seat cushion inclination and
You can electrically adjust only the outer seats in length
the rear passenger compartment.
# Save the settings with the memory function
(/ page 131).

Adjusting the reclining rear seats electrically

The reclining rear seat is available in long-wheel‐
base vehicles equipped with "Executive seats".
In vehicles without a reclining rear seat, the but‐
ton for setting the angle and fore-and-aft posi‐
tion of the leg rest has no function.
The reclining rear seat is on the front passenger
side.
1 Fore-and-aft position of the head restraint
(vehicles with active multicontour seat)
2 Head restraint height
3 Seat backrest inclination
1 Fore-and-aft position of the head restraint 4 Combined seat cushion inclination and
(vehicles with active multicontour seat) length
2 Head restraint height 5 Fore-and-aft position of the leg rest
6 Angle of the leg rest
112 Seats and stowing

# Save the settings with the memory function Setting the fully reclined position R The footrest will move out from under the
(/ page 131). front passenger seat.
% The leg rest will fold down if overloaded. If R If available, the leg rest will rise.
this is the case, fold up the leg rest and
engage it.
% Vehicles with a long wheelbase and the
Chauffeur/Rear Seat Memory Package also
have a footrest. This is located on the lower
part of the front passenger seat backrest
(/ page 115).

# To set the fully reclined position: press

button 1.
R The rear seat will move into the fully
# To restore the standard seat settings:
reclined position.
press button 1.
R The front passenger seat will move into
% You can use the rear-compartment child
the position for chauffeur mode.
safety lock to disable this function
(/ page 73).
 Seats and stowing 113

% The leg rest will fold down if overloaded. If & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to * NOTE Damage to the seats when moving
this is the case, fold up the leg rest and objects under the co-driver seat the seats back
engage it.
Objects trapped under the co-driver seat can The seats may be damaged by objects when
interfere with the function of the automatic moving the seats back.
Chauffeur mode co-driver airbag shutoff or damage the sys‐ # When moving the seats back, make
Information on chauffeur mode tem. sure that there are no objects in the
# Do not store any objects under the co- footwell, under or behind the seats.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to incor‐ driver seat.
rectly adjusted head restraints # When the co-driver seat is occupied, The switches for adjusting the seats do not
If head restraints have not been adjusted make sure that no objects are trapped move. You will therefore receive no direct feed‐
correctly, there is an increased risk of injury under the co-driver seat. back on the switch while pressing the switch.
in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event Feedback is provided only by the movement of
of an accident or sudden braking. the seat.
* NOTE Damage to objects in the luggage
# Before driving off, make sure for every net of the front passenger footwell when Observe the following:
vehicle occupant that the center of the adjusting the front passenger seat to the R Adjust the front passenger seat for chauffeur
head restraint supports the back of the chauffeur position mode before the journey
head at about eye level.
Objects in the luggage net in the front For chauffeur mode, the following settings are
Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so passenger footwell can become damaged made for the front passenger seat:
that it is as close as possible to the back of your when the front passenger seat is adjusted to R The seat is moved forwards
head. the chauffeur position.
R The backrest is tilted forwards
# Remove the objects from the luggage
R The head restraint is folded forwards
net.
114 Seats and stowing

The front passenger seat will automatically move

from the chauffeur position back into the normal
position in the following situations:
R The front passenger seat is adjusted using
the buttons in the door operating unit on the
front passenger side
R The front passenger seat belt is fastened
R An occupant is detected on the front
passenger seat
R The front passenger seat backrest is adjus‐
ted rearwards.
R The front passenger seat is moved in the
fore-and-aft direction out of the chauffeur
area
Positioning the front passenger seat for 1 Selects the front passenger seat
chauffeur mode 2 Sets the seat fore-and-aft position
Requirements: # To select the front passenger seat: press
R The front passenger seat is not occupied.
button 1.
R The front passenger seat belt is not inserted When the indicator lamp lights up, the front
in the buckle. passenger seat is selected.
 Seats and stowing 115

Setting the chauffeur position Using the footrest on the front passenger
# Push button 2 forwards and hold it in this seat
position. Requirements:
The front passenger seat will move forward R Depending on the equipment, the front
and stop at the threshold of the area for passenger seat is in one of the following
chauffeur mode. positions:
# Release button 2.
- Vehicles without leg rest: the front
# Push button 2 forward and hold it again passenger seat has moved into a random
until the front passenger seat is in the posi‐ position.
tion for chauffeur mode. - Vehicles with leg rest: the front
The front passenger seat head restraint will passenger seat has been moved fully
fold forwards. The front passenger seat will forward.
move forward.
R The front passenger seat is in the position for
% If the front passenger seat is already at the chauffeur mode.
threshold to the area for chauffeur mode,
the position for chauffeur mode will be set Using the footrest # Push button 1 towards the rear.
immediately. The footrest is located on the lower part of the The footrest will move out from under the
# Save the settings with the memory function
front passenger seat backrest. front passenger seat.
(/ page 131). # Push the extended footrest upwards with
% You can use the rear passenger compart‐ your foot until it releases.
ment child safety lock to disable this func‐ # Allow the footrest to lower.
tion (/ page 73). The footrest will position itself on the floor.
116 Seats and stowing

Storing the footrest Moving the front passenger seat into the
normal position (chauffeur mode)

# Push the footrest upwards with your foot

until it engages.
# Push button 1 forwards.
The footrest will retract underneath the front
passenger seat. # To select the front passenger seat: press
button 1.
When the indicator lamp lights up, the front
passenger seat is selected.
Setting the normal position
# Push button 3 towards the rear and hold it
in this position.
The front passenger seat will move to the
threshold of the area for chauffeur mode.
 Seats and stowing 117

The head restraint on the front passenger Head restraints & WARNING Risk of injury due to incor‐
side will be moved into the upright position. rectly adjusted head restraints
Adjusting the front seat luxury head
The front passenger seat will then move fur‐ restraints mechanically
ther towards the rear. If head restraints have not been adjusted
correctly, there is an increased risk of injury
or & WARNING Risk of accident due to in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event
# Briefly push button 2 towards the rear. adjusting the vehicle settings while the of an accident or sudden braking.
The front passenger seat will move automati‐ vehicle is in motion
# Before driving off, make sure for every
cally to the threshold of the area for chauf‐ You could lose control of the vehicle in the vehicle occupant that the center of the
feur mode. The head restraint on the front following situations in particular: head restraint supports the back of the
passenger side will be moved into the upright R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head head at about eye level.
position. restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
% You can also set the normal position from while the vehicle is in motion Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so
the front passenger seat. To do so, press any R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐
that it is as close as possible to the back of your
button on the door operating unit on the cle is in motion head.
front passenger side.
# Call up the settings with the memory func‐
# Before starting the engine: In particular,
tion (/ page 131). adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror, and fasten
% You can use the rear-compartment child your seat belt.
safety lock to disable this function
(/ page 73).
118 Seats and stowing

# To move forwards: pull the head restraint # To attach the additional cushion: open Vel‐ Adjusting the outer rear seat head restraints
forwards. cro strip 4 on the back of additional cush‐ manually
# To move backwards: press release knob 1 ion 1.
and push the head restraint backwards. # Guide Velcro strip 4 between head restraint
2 and strip 3.
Attaching and removing the additional cush‐
ion of the front-seat luxury head restraint # Close Velcro strip 4.
# Change the position of the additional
cushion: move additional cushion 1 up or
down.
# To remove additional cushion: open Velcro
strip 4 of additional cushion 1.
# Remove additional cushion 1.
Lowering the rear seat head restraints elec‐
trically from the front compartment
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 ß 5 y

# Press ü. # To raise: pull the head restraint upwards and

let it engage.
# To lower: press release knob 1 in the direc‐
tion of the arrow.
# Position head restraint 2 as far forwards as # Push the head restraint down and let it
possible. engage.
 Seats and stowing 119

Adjusting the outer luxury head restraints of Attaching and removing the additional cush‐ # Guide Velcro strip 4 between head restraint
the rear seats manually ion of the head restraint in the rear 2 and strip 3.
passenger compartment (individual seats) # Close Velcro strip 4.
# To change the position of the additional
cushion: move additional cushion 1 up or
down.
# To remove additional cushion: open Velcro
strip 4 of additional cushion 1.
# Remove additional cushion 1.
Attaching heated additional cushion
In vehicles with electrically adjustable head
# To adjust the angle of the head restraint: restraints, you can heat the additional cushion.
pull or push the head restraint in the direc‐ # Attach the additional cushion to the head
tion of arrow 1. restraint as described.
# Move the head restraint to the very top.

# Position head restraint 2 as far forwards as

possible.
# To attach the additional cushion: open Vel‐
cro strip 4 on the back of additional cush‐
ion 1.
120 Seats and stowing

Folding the center head restraint into posi‐

tion and folding it back manually

# Push press-studs 2 on the additional strip

into counterpieces 1 on the head restraint.
# Move the head restraint to the desired # To fold into position: pull the head restraint
height. upwards until it engages.
# To switch neck heating from the addi‐
tional cushion on/off: make sure that # To fold back: press button 1.
press-studs 2 on the additional strip are # Fold down the head restraint completely.
correctly pushed into counterpieces 1 on
the head restraint. The center head restraint has a usage position
# Ensure that the "Couple neck heat to seat and a non-usage position. The usage position is
heating" function is active (/ page 121). the upright position in which the head restraint
is locked; the non-usage position is the position
# Activate or deactivate the seat heating in which the head restraint is folded downwards.
(/ page 123). When the center seat is used, the head restraint
must be in the upright, locked usage position.
 Seats and stowing 121

Configuring the seat settings # Switch the function for the desired seat on or
off. If there is a risk of someone becoming trap‐
Multimedia system: If the function is active, the neck heat of the ped, stop the adjustment process immedi‐
4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat additional cushion has been coupled to the ately:
seat heating. # a) Tap the warning message on the cen‐
Adjusting the air cushions.
tral display.
# On the corresponding menu, adjust the air
Setting automatic seat adjustment or
cushions for Lumbar, Shoulders or Side Bol-
# b) Press a memory position button or a
sters.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped seat adjustment switch on the driver's
Setting the seat heating balance during adjustment of the driver's seat door.
# Select Heating Settings. after calling up a driver profile The adjustment process will be stop‐
# Select Seat Heating Balance.
ped.
Selecting a user profile may trigger an
# Adjust the heat distribution for the desired adjustment of the driver's seat to the posi‐ Multimedia system:
seat. tion saved under the user profile. You or
4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat
other vehicle occupants could be injured in
% The seat heating balance can be set in the the process. 5 Automatic Seat Positioning
Seat Climate Control menu in the rear
# Make sure that when the position of Adjusting driver's seat and steering wheel
passenger compartment.
driver's seat is being adjusted using the position to body size
Coupling neck heat to seat heating multimedia system, no people or body The vehicle calculates a suitable driver's seat
# Select Additional Neck Warmer. parts are in the seat's range of move‐ and steering wheel position on the basis of the
ment. driver's body size and sets this directly.
# To set the unit of measurement: select cm
or ft/in.
122 Seats and stowing

# Set the size using the scale. Setting automatic adjustment of the lateral R Activating Massage Activating massage with
# Select Start Positioning. support (active multicontour seat) upward-moving massage waves.
The driver's seat and steering wheel position Multimedia system: R Classic Massage Relaxing back massage.
is adjusted to the body size that has been 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat R Wave Massage Regenerating massage via
set. massage waves across the back and in the
# Select Dynamic Multicontour Seat.
% If the driver's seat and steering wheel posi‐ seat cushion.
tion calculated by the vehicle is not practical With this function, the lateral support of the R Mobilizing Massage Mobilizing Massage with
or comfortable, it can be manually changed active multicontour seat is automatically adjus‐ upward-moving massage waves. Can pro‐
at any time via the control buttons. ted to the driving and cornering dynamics of the mote slower, deeper respiration. This can
The exterior mirrors are not set via this func‐ vehicle. improve the supply of oxygen to cells and the
tion. Instead, they have to be set manually brain.
# Select the desired setting.
via the operating switches.
R Workout, Backrest and Workout, Cushion
% You can also configure these settings via the These programs require your cooperation.
Mercedes me user account for your user Overview of massage programs
Alternating between tensing and releasing
profile. By synchronizing the profiles in the R Hot Relaxing Back: Based on hot stone mas‐ helps to improve blood flow to your muscles.
vehicle and the Mercedes me connect pro‐ sage, the program combines heat and mas‐ Press against a pressure point as soon as
files, you can carry over these settings for sage. It starts by massaging the back. In you feel it to activate back, abdominal and
your vehicle. Further information about syn‐ addition, warm pressure points become leg muscles.
chronizing user profiles . noticeable, starting in the pelvic area. R Deep Waves: Wave-like movements in the
R Hot Relaxing Shoulders Combination of heat cushion can promote blood flow and meta‐
and massage. It starts by massaging the bolic processes in the lower back and legs.
shoulders. In addition, warm pressure points R Deep Workout: Connect the Workout, Back-
become noticeable, starting in the pelvic rest to the Workout, Cushion. The vibrating
area. massage in the cushion intensifies the effec‐
 Seats and stowing 123

tiveness of tensing and releasing muscles % For the rear seats, the massage program can In particular, the health of persons with limi‐
when you tense against the pressure point. be selected on the following devices (if avail‐ ted temperature sensitivity or a limited ability
This supports metabolic processes and blood able): to react to high temperatures may be affec‐
flow in the seat area and legs. R On the rear displays ted or they may even suffer burn-like injuries.
R Calf Massage (rear passenger compartment): R On the MBUX rear tablet # Do not repeatedly switch on the seat
calf massage using vibration. Can support heating.
metabolic processes and the reverse flow of The selection is made in the same way as
blood. on the rear displays for the rear seats on
the second row of seats. To protect against overheating, the seat heating
R Wave Massage (rear passenger compart‐ may be temporarily deactivated after it is
ment): Combines the vibration of the calf switched on repeatedly.
massage with the Classic Massage from the Resetting seat settings
backrest in the rear passenger compartment. Multimedia system: * NOTE Damage to the seats caused by
4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat
objects or documents when the seat
heating is switched on
Selecting the massage program for the front # Select Reset.
seats When the seat heating is switched on, over‐
# Select ß for the desired seat.
heating may occur due to objects or docu‐
Multimedia system: ments placed on the seats, e.g. seat cush‐
4 © 5 Comfort 5 Massage
Switching the seat heating on/off ions or child seats. This could cause damage
# Select a massage program (/ page 122). to the seat surface.
# Start the program for the desired seat ;. & WARNING Risk of burns due to repeat‐ # Make sure that no objects or docu‐

# To set the massage intensity: switch Inten-

edly switching on the seat heating ments are on the seats when the seat
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can heating is switched on.
sive on or off .
cause the seat cushion and seat backrest
padding to become very hot.
124 Seats and stowing

Requirements: 10 and 20 minutes until the seat heating

R The power supply is switched on. switches off.
% If you switch the power supply off and on
again within 20 minutes, the previous setting
of the seat heating for the driver's seat will
remain active.
% You can set the distribution of the heated
sections among the seat cushions and seat
backrests on the front and rear seats using
the multimedia system (/ page 124).
% Vehicles with the Warmth Comfort Package:
you can adjust the heating of the center con‐
sole and door armrests using the multimedia
system (/ page 124).

# Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired Setting the panel heating
heating level is set.
Depending on the heating level, up to three Multimedia system:
indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat
lamps are off, the seat heating is switched 5 Heating Settings 5 Panel Heating
off.
When the seat heating is switched on, the armr‐
% The seat heating will automatically switch ests, the center panels of the doors and the cen‐
down from the three heating levels after 8, ter console can be heated.
 Seats and stowing 125

# Switch the function for the desired seats on ventilation setting for the driver's seat will
or off. remain active.

Switching the seat ventilation on/off Steering wheel

Requirements: Adjusting the steering wheel electrically
R The power supply is switched on.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to
adjusting the vehicle settings while the
vehicle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the
following situations in particular:
R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
while the vehicle is in motion
# Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐
blower setting has been reached. cle is in motion
Depending on the blower setting, up to three
indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator # Before starting the engine: In particular,
lamps are off, the seat ventilation is switched adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
off. steering wheel and mirror, and fasten
your seat belt.
% If you switch the power supply off and on
again within 20 minutes, the previous seat
126 Seats and stowing

& WARNING Risk of entrapment for chil‐ Switching the steering wheel heater on/off
dren when adjusting the steering wheel Requirements:
Children could injure themselves if they R The power supply or the ignition is switched
adjust the steering wheel. on.
# Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle.

The steering wheel can be adjusted when the

power supply is disconnected.

1 To move up
2 To move back
3 To move down
4 To move forward
# Save the settings with the memory function # Push the switch into position 1 or 2.
(/ page 129). If indicator lamp 3 lights up, the steering
wheel heater is switched on.
 Seats and stowing 127

When you switch the ignition off, the steering Easy entry and exit feature # If there is a risk of becoming trapped by
wheel heater will switch off. the driver's seat, press the seat adjust‐
Using the easy entry and exit feature
ment switches.
Coupling the steering wheel heater to the & WARNING Risk of accident when pulling The adjustment process is stopped.
seat heating away during the adjustment process for
the easy exit feature You can stop the adjustment process by press‐
Requirements: ing one of the memory function position
R The power supply or the ignition is switched You could lose control of the vehicle. switches.
on. # Always wait until the adjustment proc‐
ess is complete before pulling away. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if
Multimedia system:
children activate the easy entry and exit
4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped feature‑
5 Heating Settings
during adjustment of the easy entry and Children could become trapped if they acti‐
# Tap on Additional Steering Wheel Heating.
exit feature vate the easy entry‑ and exit feature, particu‐
The steering wheel heater will be coupled to larly when unattended.
the seat heating. You and other vehicle occupants could
# Never leave children unattended in the
become trapped.
When the function has been activated, the steer‐ # Ensure that no one has a body part in
vehicle.
ing wheel heater is automatically activated and # When leaving the vehicle, always take
the sweep of the seat or steering wheel.
deactivated when you switch the switch the seat the SmartKey with you and lock the
heating on and off. # Move the adjustment lever of the steer‐
vehicle.
ing wheel if there is a risk of becoming
trapped by the steering wheel. In order to use the easy entry and exit feature,
The adjustment process is stopped. the automatic seat adjustment function must
have been switched on (/ page 121).
128 Seats and stowing

If the easy entry and exit feature is active, the R You call up the seat settings via the memory Memory function
steering wheel will move upwards and the driv‐ function.
er's seat will move back in the following situa‐ Function of the memory function
R you save the seat settings via the memory
tions: function. & WARNING Risk of an accident if the
R You switch the ignition off with the driver's
If you press one of the memory function memory memory function is used while driving
door open
position switches, the adjustment process will If you use the memory function on the driv‐
R You open the driver's door with the ignition be stopped.
switched off er's side while driving, you could lose control
of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments
% The steering wheel will then move upwards Setting the easy entry and exit feature being made.
only if it is not already as high as it will go. # Only use the memory function on the
The driver's seat will then move backwards Requirements: driver's side when the vehicle is station‐
only if it is not already at the rear of the seat R The automatic seat adjustment has been ary.
adjustment range. activated (/ page 121).
The steering wheel and the driver's seat will Multimedia system: & WARNING Risk of entrapment when
move back to the last drive position in the fol‐ 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Comfort adjusting the seat with the memory func‐
lowing cases: 5 Easy Entry And Exit Feature tion
R You switch the power supply or the ignition
# Select Steering Wheel & Seat, Steering When the memory function adjusts the seat,
on when the driver's door is closed you and other vehicle occupants – particu‐
Wheel Only or Off.
R You close the driver's door with the ignition larly children – could become trapped.
switched on % If you are using an individual user profile,
this information is used for the easy entry # During the adjusting process of the
The last drive position will be saved when: and exit feature. This will cause the driver's memory function, ensure that no body
R You switch the ignition off. seat and steering wheel to move into the
correct position automatically .
 Seats and stowing 129

parts are in the area of movement of You can save the following settings for the front Operating the memory function
the seat or the steering wheel. seat:
Storing
# If someone becomes trapped, press a R Seat, backrest, head restraint position and
preset position button or seat adjust‐ contour of the seat backrest in the lumbar
ment switch immediately. region
The adjustment process is stopped. R Vehicles with an active multicontour
seat:
& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the - Side bolsters of the seat backrest
memory function is activated by children - Shoulder of the seat backrest
Children could become trapped if they acti‐ - Contour of the seat backrest
vate the memory function, particularly when - Dynamic function level
unattended.
R Seat heating: distribution of the heated sec‐
# Never leave children unattended in the
tions of the seat cushion and seat backrest
vehicle.
R Driver's side: steering wheel position and
# When leaving the vehicle, always take
position of the outside mirrors on the driver's
the SmartKey with you and lock the and front passenger sides
vehicle.
R Head-up Display (depending on vehicle
equipment) # Set the seat, the steering wheel, the Head-up
You can use the memory function when the igni‐ Display and the outside mirror to the desired
tion is switched off. position.
Seat adjustments for up to three people can be
stored and called up using the memory function. # Press the V button and then release it.
130 Seats and stowing

# Press one of the preset position buttons You can save the following settings for the rear You can save the following settings for the rear
4, T or U within three seconds. seat: seat:
An acoustic signal sounds. The settings are R Position of the seat, backrest and head R Position of the seat, backrest and head
stored. restraint restraint
# To call up: press the preset position button
R Vehicles with active multicontour seats: R Vehicles with active multicontour seats:
4, T or U.
The seat side bolsters of the seat backrest as The seat side bolsters of the seat backrest as
The seat is moved to the stored position.
well as the contour of the seat backrest in well as the contour of the seat backrest in
After releasing the button, the front seat,
the lumbar region the lumbar region
outside mirror, Head-up Display and steering
column continue to move into the stored R Seat heating: distribution of the heated sec‐ R Seat heating: distribution of the heated sec‐
position automatically. tions of the seat cushion and seat backrest tions of the seat cushion and seat backrest
% Driver's seat: to call up a stored position Operating the front passenger seat and rear The following settings are also stored to a mem‐
while driving, you must press and hold the seat ory position, if the indicator lamp in the v
preset position button. Front passenger seat adjustments and rear seat button lights up:
adjustments for up to three people can be R Position of the footrest of the front
stored and called up using the memory function passenger seat, if available
Memory function in the rear passenger in the rear compartment.
compartment R Position of the screen, if available
You can save the following settings for the front
Function of the memory function in the rear passenger seat: Using the preset position buttons, you always
passenger compartment store the current setting of each seat.
R Position of the seat, backrest and head
Operating the rear seat restraint
Rear seat settings for up to three people can be
stored and called up using the memory function
in the rear compartment.
 Seats and stowing 131

Operating the rear seat via the memory func‐ # Vehicles with reclining rear seat: Press
tion in the rear passenger compartment one of the preset position buttons 4 or
T within three seconds.
Storing The settings are stored.
% Vehicles with reclining rear seat: You can‐
not store any settings on the j and a
buttons for adjusting the reclined and stand‐
ard positions.
Calling up
# Press button 1.
The rear seat is selected if the indicator lamp
in the button does not light up.
# Vehicles without reclining rear seat: Press
preset position button 4, T or U.
Example: vehicles without a reclining rear seat The seat is moved to the stored position.
After releasing the button, the rear seat is
# Press the V button and then release it. automatically moved into the stored position.
# Vehicles without reclining rear seat: Press # Vehicles with reclining rear seat: Press

# Press button 1. one of the preset position buttons 4, one of preset position buttons 4 or T.
The rear seat is selected if the indicator lamp T or U within three seconds. The seat is moved to the stored position.
in the button does not light up. The settings are stored. After releasing the button, the rear seat is
automatically moved into the stored position.
# Adjust the rear seat using the buttons in the
door control panel (/ page 110).
132 Seats and stowing

Operating the front passenger seat and rear # Adjust the rear seat using the buttons in the
seats via the memory function in the rear door control panel (/ page 110).
compartment # Press button 1.
Storing When the indicator lamp lights up, the front
passenger seat is selected.
# Adjust the front passenger seat using the
buttons on the door control panel in the rear
passenger compartment (/ page 105).
# Ensure that the indicator lamp in button 1
lights up.

Example: vehicles without a reclining rear seat

# Press the V button and then release it.
# Vehicles without reclining rear seat: Press
one of the preset position buttons 4,
# Press button 1. T or U within three seconds.
The rear seat is selected if the indicator lamp The settings for the front passenger seat and
in the button does not light up. the rear seat are stored in the selected pre‐
set position.
 Seats and stowing 133

# Vehicles with reclining rear seat: Press # Vehicles with reclining rear seat: Press # Always switch off the engine before
one of the preset position buttons 4 or one of preset position buttons 4 or T. opening the trunk lid.
T within three seconds. The seat is moved to the stored position.
The settings for the front passenger seat and After releasing the button, the front seat and
# Never drive with the trunk lid open.
the rear seat are stored in the selected pre‐ rear seat are moved automatically into the
Objects in the deployment area of an airbag may
set position. stored position.
prevent the airbag from functioning correctly.
% Vehicles with reclining rear seat: You can‐ % The preset positions in the area for chauffeur
Observe the notes on protection provided by the
not store any settings on the j and a mode can only be set when the conditions
airbag (/ page 49).
buttons for adjusting the reclined and stand‐ for chauffeur mode are fulfilled
ard positions. (/ page 113). Vehicles with rear airbag: Also observe the
% You can use the rear-compartment child notes on the rear airbag (/ page 56).
Calling up
safety lock to disable this function
# Press button 1. & WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured
(/ page 73).
When the indicator lamp lights up, the front items in the vehicle
passenger seat is selected. If objects, luggage or loads are not secured
# Vehicles without reclining rear seat: Press Stowage areas or not secured sufficiently, they could slip,
one of preset position buttons 4, T or Notes on loading the vehicle tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit
U. vehicle occupants.
The seat is moved to the stored position. & DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
After releasing the button, the front seat and event of sudden braking or a sudden change
rear seat are moved automatically into the Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust in direction.
stored position.
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the # Always stow objects in such a way that
trunk lid is open when the engine is running, they cannot be thrown around.
especially if the vehicle is in motion.
134 Seats and stowing

# Before the journey, secure objects, lug‐ # Always stow and secure heavy, hard, & WARNING ‑ Risk of accident or injury
gage or loads against slipping or tipping pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky when using the cup holder while the
over. objects in the trunk. vehicle is moving
Observe the notes on the cup holders. The cup holder cannot secure containers
& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects while the vehicle is moving.
being stowed incorrectly Vehicles with automatic front passenger air‐
bag shutoff: Objects trapped under the front If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed passenger seat may interfere with the function moving, the container may be flung around
incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff and liquids may be spilled. The vehicle occu‐
around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi‐ or damage the system. Please observe the notes pants may come into contact with the liquid
tion, cup holders, open storage spaces and on the function of the automatic front passenger and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You
mobile phone brackets cannot always retain airbag shutoff (/ page 51). could be distracted from traffic conditions
all objects they contain. and you may lose control of the vehicle.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the * NOTE Damage to the rear armrest due to # Only use the cup holder when the vehi‐
event of sudden braking or a sudden change body weight cle is stationary.
in direction. When folded out, the rear armrest can be # Only use the cup holder for containers
# Always stow objects in such a way that damaged by body weight. of the right size.
they cannot be thrown around in such # Do not sit or support yourself on the # Close the container, particularly if the
situations. rear seat armrest. liquid is hot.
# Always make sure that objects do not
protrude from storage spaces, parcel * NOTE Damage to the cup holder
nets or storage nets.
# Close the lockable storage spaces When the rear armrest is folded back the cup
before starting a journey. holder could become damaged.
 Seats and stowing 135

# Only fold the rear armrest back when # Always hold the cigarette lighter by the The driving characteristics of your vehicle are
the cup holder is closed. knob. dependent on the distribution of the load within
the vehicle. You should bear the following in
# Always make sure that the cigarette mind when loading the vehicle:
* NOTE Damage to the stowage compart‐ lighter is out of reach of children.
R Never exceed the permissible gross mass or
ment under the ashtray due to intense # Never leave children unattended in the
heat the gross axle weight rating for the vehicle
vehicle. (including occupants). The values are speci‐
The stowage compartment under the ashtray fied on the vehicle identification plate on the
is not heat resistant and could be damaged if & WARNING Risk of burns from the tail‐ vehicle's B-pillar.
you rest a lit cigarette on it. pipe and tailpipe trims R The load must not protrude above the upper
# Make sure that the ashtray is fully The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can edge of the seat backrests.
engaged. become very hot. If you come into contact R Always place the load behind unoccupied
with these parts of the vehicle, you could seats if possible.
& WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from burn yourself. R Secure the load using the parcel net hooks.
hot cigarette lighter # Always be particularly careful around Distribute the load on the parcel net hooks
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and evenly.
heating element or the socket of the ciga‐ supervise children especially closely in
rette lighter. this area.
Stowage spaces in the vehicle interior
# Allow vehicle parts to cool down before
In addition, flammable materials may ignite
if: touching them. Overview of the front storage compartments
R you drop the hot cigarette lighter
R a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
objects, for example
136 Seats and stowing

% The rubber mat in the storage compartment * NOTE Damage to objects when the fold‐
in front center console 3 can be removed ing tables are expanded or collapsed
for cleaning with clear, lukewarm water.
Please comply with the notes on caring for Objects such as tablets and displays can be
the interior (/ page 334). damaged when the folding tables are expan‐
ded or collapsed.
Folding the folding table out or in
# Make sure that the folding tables are

& WARNING Risk of injury from an open expanded and collapsed properly.
folding table
Folding out
1 Storage spaces in the doors Vehicle occupants may bump into the folding
table and injure themselves.
2 Storage and telephone compartment
# Close the folding table before each jour‐
beneath the armrest with a charging module
for wireless charging of mobile phones, mul‐ ney.
timedia and USB ports as well as storage
space, e.g. for an MP3 player * NOTE Damage to the folding tables when
3 Storage compartment in the front center moving the seats back
console with cup holders, USB ports and Open folding tables may be damaged when
charging module for wireless charging of the seats are moved back.
mobile phones
# Make sure that the folding tables are
4 Storage compartment in front of the central # Opening the storage compartment 1 in the
display of the multimedia system folded in when moving the front seats
back. center console of the rear passenger com‐
5 Glove box partment
 Seats and stowing 137

# Pull folding table 2 up and forwards by han‐ # Fold down the rear armrest. # Open the storage box in the rear-compart‐
dle recess 3 and swing it outwards. # Open the storage compartment in the rear ment backrest.
# Fold the table panels apart. armrest . # Press button 1.
% The table panels can be rotated forwards or # Tap handset 1. # Remove the handset.
backwards to bring them into a comfortable Handset 1 will rise.
position for the vehicle occupants in the rear # Remove handset 1. Overview of the parcel net hooks
passenger compartment.
# To fold in: fold the table panels together and Observe the following notes:
swing in the folding table. R Secure the load using the parcel net hooks.
Removing the handset from the rear storage R Do not use elastic straps or nets to secure a
compartment load. These are intended only as anti-slip pro‐
tection for light loads.
R Do not route tie downs across sharp edges
or corners.
R Pad sharp edges for protection.

Depending on the equipment installed, the trunk

contains up to four parcel net hooks.

Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer rear Vehicles with individual rear seats
seats
138 Seats and stowing

1 Parcel net hooks Vehicles with individual rear seats Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer rear
seats
Opening the through-loading feature in the # Vehicles with electrically adjustable
rear passenger compartment outer seats: Fold down the rear armrest.
Requirements:
# Pull handle 1 and fold down cover 2.
R The loading flap is unlocked (/ page 139).
The storage box in the rear-compartment
backrest will be opened.
 Seats and stowing 139

# Push loading flap 1 with release catch 2

up as far back as possible until the flap locks
in the highest position.
The through-loading feature in the rear
passenger compartment will be opened.
If the through-loading feature is to be used as a
storage compartment again:
# Fold down loading flap 1 and lock it in the
trunk (/ page 139).

Locking the through-loading feature in the

trunk
Requirements:
R The refrigerator box is removed.

Vehicles with individual rear seats Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer rear
seats
# Slide release catch 2 in the handle recess
of loading flap 1 upwards.
Loading flap 1 will be unlocked.
140 Seats and stowing

# Slide the release catch on loading flap 1 in EASY-PACK trunk box

the trunk to the right.
Adjusting the height of the EASY-PACK trunk
The loading flap is locked.
box to any position

Using the bag hooks & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped

and injured when raising the floor
& WARNING Risk of injury when using bag Your hands may become trapped on the
hooks with heavy objects frame of the EASY-PACK trunk box and
The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects objects may be thrown upwards.
or items of luggage. # Ensure that your hands are not in the
Objects or items of luggage may be flung range of movement of the floor.
around and hit vehicle occupants. # If someone becomes trapped, carefully
# Only hang light objects on the bag push the center of the floor downward.
hooks. # Remove all objects from the floor
# Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile # Pull bag hook 2 down by tab 1. before raising it.
objects on the bag hooks. % Observe the notes on loading the vehicle
(/ page 133). & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
when pressing the EASY-PACK trunk box
in
Your hands may become trapped when you
are pressing the trunk box into the retracted
position. Children, in particular, may injure
themselves when doing so.
 Seats and stowing 141

# Ensure that your hands are not in the * NOTE Damage to the EASY-PACK trunk
range of movement of the EASY-PACK box by objects
trunk box.
Objects that are sharp-edged, pointed, frag‐
# When leaving the vehicle, always take ile, rounded or heavy and objects that roll
the SmartKey with you and lock the can damage the EASY-PACK trunk box and be
vehicle. thrown out.
# Never leave children unattended in the # Do not transport objects that are sharp-
vehicle. edged, pointed, rounded or fragile and
objects that roll in the EASY-PACK trunk
* NOTE Damage to the extended EASY- box.
PACK trunk box # Always stow and secure such objects

The EASY-PACK trunk box may be damaged outside of the box in the trunk.
when it is extended. # Always observe the maximum permitted

# Do not place any objects on or press load of the EASY-PACK trunk box.
down on the EASY-PACK trunk box # Do not use the EASY-PACK trunk box # To remove: pull handle 2 on the box.
frame. when the rear seats are folded for‐ # To increase the load capacity: push the
# Do not close the trunk lid when the wards. center of floor 1 downwards to the desired
EASY-PACK trunk box is extended. position and box size.
The maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACK
trunk box is 22 lbs (10 kg). To prevent the box # To reduce the load capacity: press button
from being overloaded, the box floor will lower 3.
onto the trunk floor when the load reaches # To store: push the box in completely using
approximately 11 lbs (5 kg). handle 2 until it locks in place.
142 Seats and stowing

% Observe the notes on cleaning the EASY- Removing

PACK trunk box (/ page 334).
Installing and removing the EASY-PACK trunk
box
Installing

# Turn rotating catches 6 outward.

# Insert retainers 3 of box 1 into holes 2. # Turn rotating catches 6 outward.
# Raise box 1 in the direction of the arrow # Lower box 1 in the direction of the arrow
and press hooks 5 into the anchorages of and pull it out of the anchorages on the rear
rear shelf 4. shelf.
# Turn rotating catches 6 inward. # Pull box 1 back out of the openings in the
direction of the arrow.
 Seats and stowing 143

Attaching a roof luggage rack # Depending on the vehicle equipment,

ensure that when the roof luggage rack
& WARNING Risk of accident due to is installed, the trunk lid can be fully
exceeding the maximum roof load opened.
The vehicle center of gravity and the usual # Position the load on the roof luggage
driving characteristics as well as the steering rack in such a way that the vehicle will
and braking characteristics alter. not sustain damage even when it is in
If you exceed the maximum roof load, the motion.
driving characteristics, as well as steering
and braking, will be greatly impaired. * NOTE Damage to panorama roof with
# Never exceed the maximum roof load power tilt/sliding panel caused by roof
and adjust your driving style. luggage rack
If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
You will find information on the maximum roof panel is opened when a roof luggage rack is
load in the "Technical data" section. installed, the panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel may be damaged by the roof * NOTE Damage to the covers
* NOTE Vehicle damage from non- luggage rack.
approved roof luggage racks The covers may be damaged and scratched
# Do not open the panorama roof with when being opened.
The vehicle could be damaged by roof lug‐ power tilt/sliding panel if a roof luggage # Do not use metallic or hard objects.
gage racks that have not been tested and rack is installed.
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
# Carefully fold covers 1 upwards in the
# Only use roof luggage racks tested and
direction of the arrow.
approved for Mercedes-Benz.
144 Seats and stowing

# Secure the roof luggage rack to the fastening Sockets

points beneath covers 1.
Using the 12 V socket
# Comply with the installation instructions of
the roof luggage rack manufacturer. Requirements:
R Only connect devices up to a maximum of
# Secure the load on the roof luggage rack.
180 W (15 A).
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle
Cup holder
has the following 12 V sockets:
Switching the cooling or heating function for R In the front passenger footwell
the temperature-controlled cup holder on or
off # To switch on: press button 2 until the blue R On vehicles with a rear bench seat or electri‐
(keep cool) or red (keep warm) indicator cally adjustable outer seats: in the electron‐
When the heating function is used, the metal lamp on the button lights up. ics compartment of the rear center console
insert of the cup holder is heated. For this rea‐ # To switch off: press button 2 until the indi‐ R On vehicles with individual rear seats: in the
son, you must not reach into the cup holder
insert. cator lamp on the button goes out. storage compartment of the rear center con‐
% Clean the removable rubber mat only with sole
When placing glasses in the temperature-con‐
clean, lukewarm water and the temperature- R In the trunk
trolled cup holder, do not close the cover of the
storage compartment in the rear center console controlled cup holder 1 only with a soft
because the glasses may tip over. cloth.
 Seats and stowing 145

Using the 115 V socket in the rear passenger & DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to incor‐
compartment rect handling of the socket
& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to dam‐ You could receive an electric shock in partic‐
aged connecting cables or sockets ular:
R If you reach into the socket.
You could receive an electric shock if the
connecting cable or the 115 V power socket R If you insert unsuitable devices or objects
is pulled out of the trim or is damaged or into the socket.
wet. # Do not reach into the socket.
# Use only connecting cables that are dry
# Only connect suitable devices to the
and free of damage.
socket.
# When the ignition is switched off, make
sure that the 115 V power socket is dry. Requirements:
# Immediately have the 115 V power R Only connect devices with a suitable plug
socket checked or replaced at a quali‐ which conforms to the standards specific to
Example: 12 V socket in the rear center con‐ fied specialized workshop if it is dam‐ the country you are in.
sole aged or has been pulled out of the trim. R Do not use multiple socket outlets.
# Fold up socket cap 1. # Never plug the connecting cable into a
% Only devices up to a maximum of 150 watts
Insert the plug of the device. 115 V power socket that is damaged or
# (1.3 A) can be connected.
has been pulled out of the trim.
If you have connected a device to the 12 V
socket, leave the cover of the storage compart‐
ment open.
146 Seats and stowing

# Open flap 3.
# Insert the plug of the device into 115 V
socket 2.
When the on-board electrical system voltage
is sufficient, indicator lamp 1 lights up.

USB port in the rear passenger compartment

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle
has the following USB ports in the rear
passenger compartment:
R On vehicles with individual rear seats: in the
storage compartment of the rear passenger
compartment center console .
R On vehicles with a rear bench seat or electri‐
Vehicles with a rear bench seat or electrically Vehicles with individual rear seats cally adjustable outer rear seats: in the elec‐
adjustable outer seats in the rear passenger com‐ tronics compartment in the rear passenger
partment # Vehicles with a rear bench seat or electri‐ compartment center console .
cally adjustable outer seats: Open the
R On vehicles with a rear bench seat or electri‐
electronics compartment in the rear center
console. cally adjustable outer rear seats: in the stor‐
age compartment in the rear armrest .
# Vehicles with individual rear seats: Open
the storage compartment in the rear center % These USB ports in the rear passenger com‐
console. partment can be used to charge a mobile
end device.
 Seats and stowing 147

You can charge a USB device, such as a mobile and cans with a capacity of up to 11 fl. oz.
phone, at the USB ports using a suitable charg‐ (0.33 liters)
ing cable. Depending on the vehicle equipment, If you do not need to use the refrigerator box for
the devices can be charged with up to 20 V (5 A) an extended period, you should switch it off,
when the ignition is switched on. defrost it and clean it. After doing so, leave the
lid open for a time.
Refrigerator box The refrigerator box will reduce its cooling capa‐
Using the refrigerator box city or switch off in the following cases:
R Too many electrical consumers are turned
& WARNING Risk of fire due to a covered on.
vent grille on the refrigerator box R The starter battery is not sufficiently
If you cover the vent grille for the refrigerator charged.
box, it may overheat. If this is the case, the indicator lamps will flash
# Always make sure that the vent grille is on the button for switching the refrigerator box
not covered. on and off. The cooling function will automati‐ Example: vehicles with individual rear seats
cally switch back on as soon as there is suffi‐
The vent grille for the refrigerator box is in the cient voltage. # Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer
trunk. seats: fold down the rear armrest.
The refrigerator box can bear a maximum load of # Pull handle 1 on the storage box and fold
7.7 lb (3.5 kg). down cover 2 of the storage box.
The upper compartment of the refrigerator box
can accommodate, for example, plastic bottles
with a maximum capacity of 17 fl. oz. (0.5 liters)
148 Seats and stowing

# To switch off: press button 2 repeatedly

until both indicator lamps go out.

Removing or installing the refrigerator box

Installing

Example: vehicles with individual rear seats # Open loading flap 2 in the rear passenger
compartment until the loading flap locks in
# To open: pull the handle on refrigerator box the highest position (/ page 138).
1 and fold down the cover of the refrigera‐
tor box. # Pull upwards and hold handle 7.
The connection to refrigerator box 4 is
# To switch on: press button 2 repeatedly unlocked.
until an indicator lamp (low cooling) lights up
or two indicator lamps (high cooling) light up. # Remove cover cap 1.
 Seats and stowing 149

# Slide the refrigerator box with handle 7 up Opening and closing the stowage compart‐ Wireless charging of the mobile phone and
into the open through-loading feature. ment of the refrigerator box in the trunk connection with the exterior antenna
Connection 4 and the electrical contacts of
refrigerator box 3 are inserted into sockets Notes on wirelessly charging the mobile
5 and 6 of the through-loading feature. phone
# Once the refrigerator box has been connec‐ & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
ted in the vehicle, push down handle 7. being stowed incorrectly
The refrigerator box is locked.
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed
Removing incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown
# Pull up and hold handle 7. around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi‐
# Pull the refrigerator box with handle 7 up
tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and
out of sockets 5 and 6 of the though-load‐ mobile phone receptacles cannot always
ing compartment.
# To open: pull the stowage compartment in retain all objects within.
Connection 4 and the electrical contacts of refrigerator box 1 out by the handle back‐ There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
refrigerator box 3 are separated from sock‐ wards in the direction of the arrow. event of sudden braking or a sudden change
ets 5 and 6 of the through-loading fea‐ Stowage compartment 1 is open. in direction.
ture. # To close: slide the stowage compartment in # Always stow objects so that they can‐
refrigerator box 1 forwards in the direction not be thrown around in such situa‐
of the arrow. tions.
Stowage compartment 1 is closed. # Always make sure that objects do not
protrude from stowage spaces, parcel
nets or stowage nets.
150 Seats and stowing

# Close the lockable stowage spaces * NOTE Damage to objects caused by R Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
before starting a journey. placing them in the mobile phone stor‐ mobile phone is connected to the vehicle's
age compartment exterior antenna via the charging module.
# Always stow and secure heavy, hard,
pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky R The charging function and wireless connec‐
If objects are placed in the mobile phone tion of the mobile phone to the vehicle's
objects in the trunk/cargo compart‐ storage compartment, they may be damaged
ment. exterior antenna are only available if the igni‐
by electromagnetic fields. tion is switched on.
# Do not place credit cards, data storage
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. R Small mobile phones may not be able to be
devices, ski passes or other objects charged in every position of the mobile
& WARNING Risk of fire from placing sensitive to electromagnetic fields in phone storage compartment.
objects in the mobile phone storage the mobile phone storage compart‐
ment. R Large mobile phones which do not rest flat in
compartment the mobile phone storage compartment may
Placing other objects in the mobile phone not be able to be charged or connected with
storage compartment could constitute a fire * NOTE Damage to the mobile phone the vehicle's exterior antenna.
hazard. stowage compartment caused by liquids
R The mobile phone may heat up during the
# Apart from a mobile phone, do not If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage charging process. This may also depend on
place any other objects in the mobile compartment, the compartment may be the applications (apps) currently open in the
phone storage compartment, especially damaged. background.
those made of metal. # Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile R To ensure more efficient charging and con‐
phone stowage compartment. nection with the vehicle's exterior antenna,
remove the protective cover from the mobile
Always observe the notes for persons with elec‐ phone. Protective covers which are neces‐
tronic medical aids (/ page 33). sary for wireless charging are an exception.
 Seats and stowing 151

Wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the up. In addition, malfunctions during the mobile
front phone's charging process are shown by the indi‐
cator lamp flashing three times.
Requirements:
R The mobile phone is suitable for wireless % The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g.
charging. using clean, lukewarm water.
A list of compatible mobile phones can be
found at: https://www.mercedes-benz- Wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the
mobile.com/ rear passenger compartment
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the vehi‐ Requirements:
cle has the following options for wirelessly Example: wirelessly charging the mobile phone in R The mobile phone is suitable for wireless
charging the mobile phone in the cockpit: the front storage compartment charging.
R In the front storage compartment # Place the mobile phone as close to the cen‐ A list of compatible mobile phones can be
R In the storage compartment of the cockpit ter of mat 1 as possible with the display found at: https://www.mercedes-benz-
armrest facing upwards. mobile.com/
Wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the
front storage compartment: when a message
is shown in the multimedia system, the mobile
phone is being charged. In addition, malfunc‐
tions during the mobile phone's charging proc‐
ess are shown in the multimedia system display.
Wirelessly charging the mobile phone in the
center console below the armrest: the mobile
phone is charging when the indicator lamp is lit
152 Seats and stowing

% Observe the notes on loading the vehicle Installing floor mats

(/ page 133).

Installing and removing the floor mats

& WARNING Risk of accident due to

objects in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
Example: vehicles with individual rear seats This jeopardizes the operating and road
# Open the storage compartment in the rear safety of the vehicle.
center console. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely

# Place the mobile phone as close to the cen‐

so that they cannot get into the driver's
ter of mat 1 as possible with the display footwell.
facing upwards. # Always install the floor mats securely
When the indicator lamp at the front of the and as prescribed in order to ensure
that there is always sufficient room for
# Slide the corresponding seat backwards and
mobile phone system lights up, the mobile lay the floor mat in the footwell such that it
phone is being charged. In addition, malfunc‐ the pedals.
fits.
tions during the mobile phone's charging # Do not use loose floor mats and do not
process are shown by the indicator lamp place floor mats on top of one another.
# Press studs 1 onto holders 2.
flashing three times. # Adjust the corresponding seat.
% The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g.
using clean, lukewarm water.
 Seats and stowing 153

Removing floor mats

# Slide the corresponding seat backwards and
pull the floor mat off holders 2.
# Adjust the corresponding seat.
154 Light and visibility

Exterior lighting Light switch 5 L Low beam/high beam

Information about lighting systems and your Operating light switches 6 R Switches the rear fog lamp on or off
responsibility When low beam is activated, the T indicator
The various lighting systems of the vehicle are lamp for the parking lamps will be deactivated
only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible and replaced by the L low-beam indicator
for correct vehicle illumination in accordance lamp.
with the prevailing light and visibility conditions, # Always park your vehicle safely using suffi‐
legal requirements and traffic situation. cient lighting, in accordance with the rele‐
vant legal stipulations.

* NOTE Battery discharging by operating

the standing lights
Operating the standing lights over a period of
hours puts a strain on the battery.
# Where possible, switch on the
right X or left W parking light.

1 W Left-hand standing lamps If the battery is insufficiently charged, the stand‐

2 X Right-hand standing lamps ing lamps or parking lamps will be switched off
automatically to facilitate the next engine start.
3 T Parking lamps and license plate lamp
4 Ã Automatic driving lights (preferred light
switch position)
 Light and visibility 155

The exterior lighting (except standing and park‐ Switching the rear fog lights on or off Operating the combination switch for the
ing lamps) will switch off automatically when the lights
driver's door is opened. Requirements:
R The light switch is in the L or à posi‐
R Observe the notes on surround lighting tion.
(/ page 164).
# Press the R button.
Automatic driving lights function
The parking lamps, low beam and daytime run‐ Please observe the country-specific laws on the
ning lamps are switched on automatically use of rear fog lamps.
depending on the ignition status and the ambi‐
ent light.

& WARNING Risk of accident when the low

beam is switched off in poor visibility
When the light switch is set to Ã, the low
beam may not be switched on automatically
if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor
visibility such as spray.
# In such cases, turn the light switch to
1 High beam
L. 2 Turn signal light, right
The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You 3 High-beam flasher
are responsible for vehicle lighting. 4 Turn signal light, left
# Use the combination switch to activate the
desired function.
156 Light and visibility

Switching on high beam # To indicate permanently: push the combi‐ Activating/deactivating the hazard warning
# Turn the light switch to the L or à nation switch beyond the point of resistance lights
position. in the direction of arrow 2 or 4.
# Push the combination switch in the direction Vehicles with Active Lane Change Assist:
of arrow 1. R A turn signal indicator activated by the
When the high beam is activated, the L driver may continue to operate for the
indicator lamp for low beam will be deactiva‐ duration of the lane change.
ted and replaced by the K indicator lamp R If the driver indicated directly beforehand
for high beam. but a lane change was not immediately
Switching off high beam possible, the turn signal indicator may
activate automatically.
# Push the combination switch in the direction
of arrow 1 or pull it in the direction of arrow
3.
High-beam flasher
# Pull the combination switch in the direction
of arrow 3.
Turn signal light # Press button 1.
# To indicate briefly: push the combination The hazard warning lights will switch on auto‐
switch briefly to the point of resistance in the matically if:
direction of arrow 2 or 4. R The airbag has been deployed.
The corresponding turn signal light will flash
three times.
 Light and visibility 157

Adaptive functions MULTIBEAM LED and DIG‐ Active headlamps function Cornering light function
ITAL LIGHT
Intelligent Light System function
In this system, the headlamps adapt to the driv‐
ing and weather situation. It also provides exten‐
ded functions for improved illumination of the
road.
% The availability of the functions is dependent
on the country.
The system comprises the following functions:
R Active headlamps (/ page 157)
Functions of the active headlamps: The cornering light improves the illumination of
R Cornering light (/ page 157) the road over a wide angle in the turning direc‐
R The headlamps follow the steering move‐
R Highway mode (/ page 158) ments. tion, enabling better visibility on tight curves, for
R Enhanced fog light function (/ page 158) example. It can be activated only when the low
R Relevant areas are better illuminated during
beam is switched on.
R Bad weather light (/ page 158) a journey.
The function is active in the following cases:
R City lighting (/ page 158) The functions are active when the low beam is R At speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) when
R Topographical compensation (vehicles with switched on. the turn signal light is switched on or the
DIGITAL LIGHT) (/ page 158) Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the steering wheel is turned
The system is active only when it is dark. course of the lane in which you are driving will R At speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h) and
also be evaluated and the active headlamps 43 mph (70 km/h) and when the steering
function will adjust the light in advance. wheel is turned
158 Light and visibility

Roundabout and intersection function: the R The multifunction camera The function is automatically deactivated under
cornering light will be activated on both sides R Or the navigation system the following conditions:
based on an evaluation of the vehicle's current R At speeds above 62 mph (100 km/h) after
navigation position. It will remain active until The function is not active in the following cases: activation.
after the vehicle has left the roundabout or the R At speeds below 50 mph (80 km/h) R When the rear fog light is switched off.
intersection.
Enhanced fog light function (Canada) Function of the bad weather light (Canada)
Highway mode function (Canada) The enhanced fog light function reduces reflec‐
Highway mode increases the range and bright‐ The bad weather light reduces reflections in
tions and improves the illumination of the edge rainy conditions by dimming individual LEDs in
ness of the cone of light, enabling better visibil‐ of the road.
ity. the headlamps. The driver and other road users
are blinded less as a result.
The city lighting function (Canada)
City lighting improves the illumination of road‐
sides in urban areas using a broad distribution of
light.
The function is active in the following cases:
R At low speeds
R In illuminated parts of urban areas

Function of the topographical compensation

The function is automatically activated under the
The function is active if a freeway journey is Based on map data, the lighting system
following conditions:
detected by means of: responds pre-emptively to different road heights.
R At speeds below 43 mph (70 km/h) and This means that the headlamp range remains vir‐
R The vehicle's speed when the rear fog light is switched on.
 Light and visibility 159

tually constant when you are driving on uphill or cle will automatically adapt to the valid Warnings
downhill gradients. requirements.
% The availability of the function is dependent Spotlight
on the country.
Assistance functions of the DIGITAL LIGHT
DIGITAL LIGHT visually expands on the driver
assistance systems by projecting the assistant
displays in front of the vehicle while it is in
motion. DIGITAL LIGHT can therefore help the
driver in critical situations.
% The availability of the functions is dependent
on the country. If Traffic Sign Assist detects a corresponding sit‐
uation, a triangle will be projected onto the road
The system is active in the following cases:
in the following situations at speeds of at least
R The light switch is in the à position. The spotlight function runs in the background 30 km/h:
R The high beam is switched on.
and flashes the headlamps at detected persons
within the lane markings in four short bursts. R You are driving in the opposite direction to
% If you activate the Head-up Display with aug‐ The driver is made aware of the position of the permissible direction of travel, e.g. on a
mented reality, the projections can be deac‐ oncoming pedestrians by a projected symbol. freeway access road.
tivated depending on the situation. The function is active under the following condi‐ R You are driving towards a stop sign without
% Depending on the country in which you are tions: reducing your speed.
currently driving, certain functions may be R You are driving outside illuminated areas. R You are driving towards a red traffic light
disabled due to different legal requirements, without reducing your speed.
R The system detects a lane marking.
even if they are enabled in the multimedia
system. When a border is crossed, the vehi‐
160 Light and visibility

Observe the system limits of Traffic Sign Assist % In vehicles with DIGITAL LIGHT headlamps,
(/ page 241). the Intelligent Light System can be switched
on and off on the DIGITAL LIGHT menu.
Notes
Activating or deactivating enhanced assis‐
tance functions
% The availability of the functions is dependent
on the country.
# Select Supporting Projections.

# Activate or deactivate the desired projection.

Observe the system limits of Traffic Sign Assist # Activate or deactivate Projection when open-
(/ page 241). ing/closing.
Switching the Intelligent Light System If the locator lighting or the exterior switch-
on/off off delay time is activated, a high-resolution
If Traffic Sign Assist detects a roadworks zone, greeting or farewell scene will be played back
the system will provide support as follows: Requirements: for a short period of time when the vehicle is
R A corresponding symbol will be projected R The ignition is switched on. opened or locked.
onto the road when you enter a roadworks Multimedia system: % More information on locator lighting
zone. 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light (/ page 164)
R When you drive through a roadworks zone, 5 MULTIBEAM LED More information on the exterior switch-off
guide lines will be projected onto the road delay time (/ page 164)
# Switch Dynamic Low Beam on or off.
that roughly match the width of the vehicle.
The guide lines will be suppressed for a while
on tight bends.
 Light and visibility 161

Adaptive Highbeam Assist # Always observe the road and traffic

Adaptive Highbeam Assist function conditions carefully and switch off the
high beam in good time.
& WARNING Risk of accident despite
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into
account road, weather or traffic conditions.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not react to:
Detection may be restricted in the following
R Road users without lights, e.g. pedes‐ cases:
trians
R In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow
R Road users with poor lighting, e.g.
R If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors
cyclists
are obscured
R Road users whose lighting is obstructed,
e.g. by a barrier Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are
responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam the prevailing light, visibility and traffic condi‐
Assist may fail to recognize other road users tions.
with their own lighting, or may recognize Adaptive Highbeam Assist automatically
them too late. switches between the following types of light:
R Low beam
In these, or in similar situations, the auto‐
matic high beam will not be deactivated or R High beam
will be activated despite the presence of
At speeds greater than 19 mph (30 km/h):
other road users.
R If no other road users are detected, the high
beam will switch on automatically.
162 Light and visibility

The high beam will switch off automatically in Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus # Always observe the road and traffic
the following cases: conditions carefully and switch off the
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus function
R At speeds below 16 mph (25 km/h) (Canada) high beam in good time.
R If other road users are detected
& WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into
R If street lighting is sufficient
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus account road, weather or traffic conditions.
% The system's optical sensor is located Detection may be restricted in the following
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not
behind the windshield near the overhead cases:
react to:
control panel. R In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow
R Road users without lights, e.g. pedes‐
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off trians R If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors
R Road users with poor lighting, e.g.
are obscured
Switching on
# Turn the light switch to the à position. cyclists Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid.
# Switch on the high beam using the combina‐
R Road users whose lighting is obstructed, You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's
e.g. by a barrier lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traf‐
tion switch. fic conditions.
If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is activated, On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam
the _ indicator lamp will light up on the Assist Plus may fail to recognize other road
driver's display. users with their own lighting, or may recog‐
Switching off nize them too late.
# Switch off the high beam using the combina‐ In these, or in similar situations, the auto‐
tion switch. matic high beam will not be deactivated or
will be activated despite the presence of
other road users.
 Light and visibility 163

ULTRA RANGE Highbeam increases the bright‐ R If highly reflective signs are detected, ULTRA
ness of the cone of light to the legally permitted RANGE Highbeam will be switched off auto‐
maximum. matically.
Partial high beam does not include other road % The system's optical sensor is located
users in the high beam area. It does not blind behind the windshield near the overhead
them but enables full high beam illumination for control panel.
the driver apart from the excluded vehicles.
At speeds below 16 mph (25 km/h) or when Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
there is sufficient street lighting: on/off (Canada)
R The partial high beam and the high beam will Switching on
be switched off automatically. # Turn the light switch to the à position.
At speeds greater than 19 mph (30 km/h): # Switch on the high beam using the combina‐

R If no other road users are detected, the high tion switch.

beam will switch on automatically. When the high beam is switched on automat‐
ically in the dark, the _ indicator lamp
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus automatically R If other road users are detected, the partial
will light up on the driver's display.
switches between the following types of light: high beam will switch on automatically.
R Low beam
Switching off
At speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h):
R Partial high beam
# Switch off the high beam using the combina‐
R If no other road users are detected on a
tion switch.
R High beam straight road, ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will
R ULTRA RANGE Highbeam (only vehicles with be switched on automatically.
DIGITAL LIGHT) R If other road users are detected, the partial
high beam will switch on automatically.
164 Light and visibility

Switching the daytime running lamps on/off Activating/deactivating the locator lighting Interior lighting
Multimedia system: Requirements: Adjusting the interior lighting
4 © 5 Settings 5 Light R The light switch is in the à position.
5 MULTIBEAM LED
Multimedia system:
# Switch the daytime running lamps on/off. 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light
% In vehicles with DIGITAL LIGHT headlamps, 5 Interior/Exterior Lighting
the Intelligent Light System can be switched # Activate or deactivate Locator Lighting.
on and off in the DIGITAL LIGHT menu.
When the function is activated, the exterior light‐
Setting the exterior lighting switch-off delay ing will light up for 40 seconds after the vehicle
time is unlocked. When you start the vehicle, the
locator lighting is switched off and automatic
Requirements: driving lights are activated. 1 c Switches the front interior lighting
R The light switch is in the à position. on/off
Multimedia system: 2 u Switches the rear interior lighting
4 © 5 Settings 5 Light on/off
5 Interior/exterior lighting 3 | Switches automatic interior lighting
5 External Lighting Delay
control on/off
# Set the switch-off delay time. # To switch reading lamps on/off: hold your
When the vehicle's engine is switched off, hand under the respective reading lamp 4
the exterior lighting will be activated for the or 5.
set time.
 Light and visibility 165

Control panel inside the grab handle (rear # To switch reading lamps off: press button Adjusting the brightness
passenger compartment) 1 once or twice. # Select Brightness.
After pressing it once, the interior lighting in
# Adjust the brightness.
the grab handle and the dome lamp on the
respective side of the vehicle will go out. % Depending on the ambient light, the ambient
After pressing it twice, the reading lamp on lighting will automatically switch between
the respective side of the vehicle will go out. day and night modes.
# To switch the rear interior lighting on/ Activating the brightness for zones
off: press button 2. # Select Brightness.
The reading lamps, the interior lighting in the # Switch off Link Zones .
grab handle and the dome lamps on both
The Direct, Indirect and Accent zones can be
sides of the vehicle will light up or go out.
set separately.
1 p Reading lamp on the respective side of % The Light band zone can also be set for vehi‐
the vehicle Adjusting the ambient lighting cles with active ambient lighting.
2 u Rear interior lighting Multimedia system: Activating effects
# To switch reading lamps on: press button 4 © 5 Settings 5 Comfort
1. 5 Ambient Lighting & WARNING Risk of an accident despite
The reading lamp, the interior lighting in the activated effects of ambient lighting and
grab handle and the dome lamp on the Setting the color active ambient lighting
respective side of the vehicle will light up. # Select Color.
To use the Warning Assistance effects, the
# Select Monochrome or Multi-color.
respective functions must be activated in the
# Set the desired color or color combination. driver assist menu.
166 Light and visibility

# Make sure that the functions and Further information on the exit warning Multi-color Animation
assists are switched on. (/ page 247). R The chosen color combination will change at
R Active Lane Keeping Assist: If there is a predefined intervals.
% The exit warning system is only an aid. warning from Active Lane Keeping Assist, the
Further notes on driving systems and your active ambient lighting will flash red. % In vehicles with active ambient lighting, an
responsibility: (/ page 215) animation will be played.
Further information on Active Lane Keeping
# Select Effects. Assist: (/ page 250). % The desired operating feedback and warning
assistance can be activated or deactivated
# Activate the desired effect. R Active Brake Assist: If there is an Active via the ´ symbol. Depending on the
% Depending on the vehicle equipment, differ‐ Brake Assist warning, the active ambient equipment, different operating feedback and
ent effects are available: lighting in the center of the dashboard will warning assistance effects are available.
flash bright red.
Operating feedback effects: % If the brightness is set to a low level, warning
Further information on Active Brake Assist animations will be displayed at a higher
R Climate: If changes are made to the tempera‐
(/ page 236). basic brightness.
ture setting in the vehicle, the color of the
ambient lighting will change briefly. R Active Blind Spot Assist: In vehicles with
active ambient lighting, the ambient lighting
R Voice Assistant: For vehicles with active
on the affected side will flash red if there is a
ambient lighting, the voice assistant is visu‐ warning from Active Blind Spot Assist.
ally animated.
Further information on Active Blind Spot
Warning assistance effects: Assist (/ page 247).
R Warning When Exiting: If an object is detec‐ Greeting
ted in the blind spot while you are getting out
of the vehicle, the ambient lighting in the R When you get into the vehicle, a special color
affected door will flash red. animation will play.
 Light and visibility 167

Switching the interior lighting switch-off Windshield wiper and windshield washer 4 ° Continuous wiping, slow
delay time on/off system 5 ¯ Continuous wiping, fast
Multimedia system: Switching the windshield wipers on/off # Turn the combination switch to the corre‐
4 © 5 Settings 5 Light
sponding position 1 - 5.
5 Interior/exterior lighting
# Single wipe/washing: push the button on
5 Interior Lighting Delay
the combination switch in the direction of
# Switch Interior Lighting Delay on or off. arrow 1.
When this function is active, the interior light‐ R í Single wipe
ing will light up for a short time after the R î Wiping with washer fluid
vehicle is locked.
Vehicles with MAGIC VISION CONTROL: in
position 2 or 3 , the windshield washing proc‐
ess is automatically triggered if dirt is detected
on the windshield unless the Check Washer Fluid
message is being displayed.
Cleaning the windshield intensively
For heavy soiling, you can clean the windshield
intensively from an outside temperature of 41°F
(5°C).
1 g Windshield wipers off
# In a stationary vehicle, turn the combination
2 Ä Automatic wiping, normal
switch to position 1, 2 or 3.
3 Å Automatic wiping, frequent
168 Light and visibility

# Press the button on the combination switch Moving the wiper arms into the replacement
in the direction of arrow 1 and hold it for position
approximately two seconds. # Switch the ignition on and then off again
The wiper arms will move into the replace‐ immediately.
ment position and washer fluid will be distrib‐
# Within around 15 seconds, press and hold
uted on the windshield.
the î button on the combination switch
After approximately 30 seconds, the wiper for approximately three seconds
arms will move back again and wipe the (/ page 167).
windshield several times. Intensive cleaning The wiper arms will move into the replace‐
has now finished. ment position.
Removing the wiper blades
Replacing the windshield wiper blades
# Fold the wiper arms away from the wind‐
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if shield.
the windshield wipers are switched on
while wiper blades are being replaced # Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the
If the windshield wipers begin to move while other hand, turn the wiper blade away from
you are changing the wiper blades, you can the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1 as
be trapped by the wiper arm. far as it will go.
# Always switch off the windshield wipers # Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3
and the ignition before changing the until it engages in the removal position.
wiper blades. # Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm
in the direction of arrow 4.
 Light and visibility 169

Installing the wiper blades # Fold the wiper arms back onto the wind‐ Maintenance display
shield.
# Switch on the ignition.
# Press the î button on the combination
switch.
The wiper arms will return to the original
position.
# Switch the ignition off.

# Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper # Remove protective film 1 from the mainte‐
arm in the direction of arrow 1. nance display on the tip of the newly instal‐
# Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 led wiper blades.
until it engages in the locking position. When the color of the maintenance display
# Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor‐ changes from black to yellow, the wiper blades
rectly. should be replaced.
170 Light and visibility

% The duration until the color changes varies Removing the wiper blades # To remove the wiper blade: press release
depending on the usage conditions. knob 2, pull the wiper blade in the direction
of arrow 3 and remove.
Replacing the windshield wiper blades Installing the wiper blades
(MAGIC VISION CONTROL)
Moving the wiper arms into the replacement
position
# Switch off the ignition.

# Within around 15 seconds, press the î

button on the combination switch
(/ page 167).
The wiper arms will move into the replace‐
ment position.

# To bring the wiper blade into position to

be removed: hold the wiper arm firmly in
one hand. With the other hand, turn the
wiper blade in the direction of arrow 1
beyond the point of resistance.
# Push the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm
The wiper blade will engage in the removal in the direction of arrow 1 until release
position with a click. knob 2 engages.
 Light and visibility 171

# Press the wiper blade onto the wiper arm in steering wheel and mirror, and fasten Adjusting the outside mirrors
the direction of arrow 3 beyond the point of your seat belt.
resistance.
The wiper blade will engage with a noticeable
click and move freely again. & WARNING Risk of accident due to mis‐
judgment of distance when using the
# Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield. front-passenger mirror
The outside mirror on the front passenger
Mirrors side reflects objects on a smaller scale. The
Operating the outside mirrors objects in view are in fact closer than they
appear.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to # Therefore, always look over your shoul‐
adjusting the vehicle settings while the der in order to ensure that you are
vehicle is in motion aware of the actual distance between
you and the road users driving behind
You could lose control of the vehicle in the
you.
following situations in particular:
R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head
# Use button 2 or 4 to select the desired
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror mirror.
while the vehicle is in motion
R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐ % In vehicles with MBUX Interior Assistant and
cle is in motion driver camera, the required outside mirror
can also be preselected automatically via a
# Before starting the engine: In particular, natural head movement to the left or right
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, (/ page 288).
172 Light and visibility

# Use button 1 to adjust the position of the Automatic anti-glare mirrors function R Immediately change out of clothing
selected mirror. which has been contaminated with
& WARNING Risk of acid burns and poi‐ electrolyte.
Folding the outside mirrors in/out
soning due to the anti-glare mirror elec‐
# Briefly press button 3. R If an allergic reaction occurs, seek
trolyte
medical attention immediately.
% If the battery has been disconnected or has Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an
discharged, the outside mirrors must be automatic anti-glare mirror breaks. The inside rearview mirror and the outside mir‐
moved briefly using button 3. Only then will ror on the driver's side will automatically go into
the automatic mirror folding function work The electrolyte is hazardous to health and
causes irritation. It must not come into con‐ anti-glare mode if light from a headlamp hits the
properly. sensor on the inside rearview mirror.
tact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs
Engaging the outside mirrors or clothing or be swallowed. System limits
If an outside mirror has been forcibly disen‐ # If you come into contact with electro‐
gaged, proceed as follows. The system will not go into anti-glare mode if:
lyte, observe the following:
# Press and hold button 3. R Immediately rinse the electrolyte R The engine is switched off.
You will hear a click and the mirror will audi‐ from your skin with water and seek R Reverse gear is engaged.
bly click into place. The outside mirror will medical attention. R The interior lighting is switched on.
now be set to the correct position. R If electrolyte comes into contact
with your eyes, immediately rinse Front-passenger outside mirror parking posi‐
them thoroughly with clean water tion function
and seek medical attention.
R If the electrolyte is swallowed, The parking position makes parking easier.
immediately rinse your mouth out
thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting.
Seek medical attention immediately.
 Light and visibility 173

The front-passenger outside mirror will swivel Storing the parking position of the front- Calling up
downwards in the direction of the rear wheel on passenger outside mirror using reverse gear # Select the front-passenger outside mirror
the front passenger's side when: using button 2.
Storing
R The parking position is stored (/ page 173). # Engage reverse gear.
R The front-passenger mirror is selected. The front-passenger outside mirror will move
R Reverse gear is engaged. into the stored parking position.
The front-passenger outside mirror will move
back to its original position when: Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror
folding function
R You shift the transmission to another trans‐
mission position. Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle
R You are traveling at a speed greater than
9 mph (15 km/h). 5 Opening/closing

R You press the button for the outside mirror # Switch Automatic Mirror Folding on or off.
on the driver's side.

# Select the front-passenger outside mirror

using button 2.
# Engage reverse gear.
# Move the front-passenger outside mirror into
the desired parking position using button 1.
174 Light and visibility

Area permeable to radio waves on the Infrared-reflective windshield function

windshield The infrared-reflective windshield is coated and
reduces the build-up of heat in the vehicle inte‐
rior.
The coating shields the vehicle interior from
radio waves.

Radio-controlled equipment, such as toll sys‐

tems, can be mounted only on areas 1 of the
windshield that are permeable to radio waves.
Areas permeable to radio waves 1 are best visi‐
ble from outside the vehicle when the windshield
is illuminated with an external light source.
Note this position for vehicles with:
R Windshield heating
R Infrared reflective windshield
 Climate control 175

Overview of climate control systems 5 ¬ Defrosts the windshield

Notes on climate control 6 g Switches air-recirculation mode on/off
(/ page 178)
An interior air filter in combination with the pre‐ 7 ¤ Switches the rear window heater
filter in the engine compartment must always be on/off
used so that the air conditioning system, pollu‐
8 J Increases the airflow or switches on
tion level monitoring and the air filtration work
correctly. Make sure that the filter is installed climate control (/ page 176)
correctly and the filter housing in the engine 9 r Reduces the temperature
compartment is closed correctly using the cap A Ã Sets climate control to automatic
and always tightly sealed when in operation. Use mode, right (/ page 177)
filters recommended and approved by B ± Calls up the air conditioning menu
Mercedes-Benz. Always have service work car‐ (/ page 177)
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop. C Ã Sets climate control to automatic
mode, left (/ page 177)
Overview of the control panel for 3-zone D I Reduces the airflow or switches off cli‐
automatic climate control 1 s Increases the temperature mate control(/ page 176)
2 0 Switches the synchronization function
on/off (/ page 178)
3
Switches climate control on/off
(/ page 176)
4 ¿ Switches the A/C function on/off
(/ page 177)
176 Climate control

Overview of the rear operating unit 3 Sets the airflow in the rear passenger com‐ The settings for the second row of seats can be
partment, left, or switches climate control configured via the rear operating unit, the multi‐
on/off (/ page 177) media system (/ page 178) or the MBUX rear
4 Switches climate control on/off tablet depending on the vehicle's equipment.
(/ page 177)
Switches residual heat on/off (/ page 179) Operating the climate control system
5 Sets the airflow in the rear passenger com‐ Switching climate control on/off
partment, right, or switches climate control
on/off (/ page 177) Switching on climate control
6 Sets the temperature in the rear passenger # Set the airflow to level 1 or higher via J
compartment, right on the climate bar on the central display
7 Sets air distribution to the center and side or
air vents in the rear passenger compart‐ # Press Ã, s, r or ±.
ment, right
8 Sets rear climate control to automatic mode, Switching off climate control
right # Set the airflow to level 0 via I on the cli‐
9 Sets the air distribution to the rear mate bar on the central display
Example: USA passenger compartment footwell vents, right or
1 Sets air distribution to the center and side A Synchronization is activated (/ page 178) #
air vents in the rear passenger compart‐ B Sets the air distribution to the rear
ment, left Press .
passenger compartment footwell vents, left
2 Sets the temperature in the rear passenger If climate control is switched off, the windows
C Sets rear climate control to automatic mode,
compartment, left may fog up more quickly. Switch climate control
left off only briefly.
 Climate control 177

Switching climate control on/off via the rear # Select the Climate Menu entry in the air con‐ % You can increase or reduce the airflow by
operating unit ditioning line. pressing K on the climate bar on the mul‐
The First Row of Seats menu is opened. timedia system.
# To switch on: press button 4.
# To switch to manual operation: switch off
or
Activating/deactivating the A/C function via automatic mode or adjust an aspect of air
# Set the airflow to level 1 or higher using but‐ the multimedia system distribution, e.g. P.
tons 3 and 5.
or Multimedia system:
4 Climate Menu 5 First Row of Seats Setting the air distribution
# Press buttons 2, 6, 8 or C.
# To switch off: press button 4. Depending on the external conditions, improved Multimedia system:
cooling and dehumidification of the interior air 4 Climate Menu
or
are supported when the A/C function is activa‐ # Select First Row of Seats or Second Row of
# Set the airflow to level 0 using buttons 3 ted.
and 5. Seats.
# Select A/C (A/C).
# To set the air distribution: select ¯, P
% If rear climate control is switched off via but‐
ton 4, OFF will be shown on the rear dis‐ or O.
play. Setting climate control to automatic # Set the airflow.

In automatic mode, the set vehicle interior tem‐ % Several air distribution options can be selec‐
Calling up the air conditioning menu perature is controlled automatically and main‐ ted at the same time, for example to set the
tained at a constant level by the air supply. climate control for the windshield and the
The air conditioning menu can be called up via # Press AUTO on the climate bar on the central footwells simultaneously. However, at least
the air conditioning line. The air conditioning line one zone is always active.
display.
is always shown on the lower edge of the central The ¯ climate control for the windshield
display. can only be selected for the first seat row.
178 Climate control

Setting the footwell temperature Deactivating rear climate control Windows fogged up on the outside
Multimedia system: # Select REAR OFF. # Switch on the windshield wipers.
4 Climate Menu # Press the à button.

# Set ^ the footwell temperature. Activating/deactivating the climate control

synchronization function via the multimedia Switching air-recirculation mode on/off
system
Setting rear climate control (multimedia sys‐ # Press g on the climate bar on the central
tem) Multimedia system: display.
4 Climate Menu The interior air will be recirculated.
Multimedia system:
4 Climate Menu Climate control can be set centrally using the Air-recirculation mode automatically switches to
synchronization function. The driver's settings fresh air mode after a while.
Setting the temperature for temperature, airflow and air distribution will
be adopted automatically for all climate zones. % If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the
# Select Second Row of Seats.
windows may fog up more quickly. Switch on
# Select First Row of Seats.
# Set the temperature. air-recirculation mode only briefly.
# Select SYNC (SYNC).
Setting the airflow
# Select Second Row of Seats.
Switching residual heat on/off
Removing condensation from the windows
# Set the airflow. Requirements:
Windows fogged up on the inside R The residual heat function is available.
Controlling the rear climate control automat‐
# Press à on the climate bar of the central R The vehicle is parked.
ically
display. R The coolant temperature must be sufficiently
# Select AUTO.
# If the windows remain fogged up: press ¬ high.
on the climate bar of the central display.
 Climate control 179

It is possible to make use of the residual heat Activating/deactivating ionization Multimedia system:
from the engine to continue heating or ventilat‐ 4 Climate Menu 5 Air Quality
ing the front compartment of the vehicle for Multimedia system:
approximately 30 minutes, depending on the 4 Climate Menu 5 Air Quality The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fra‐
temperature set. grance throughout the vehicle interior from a fla‐
Ionization improves the quality of the vehicle's con located in the glove box.
# To switch on: select Residual Heat on the interior air. Ionization of the interior air is odor‐
less. # Select Fragrance.
climate bar on the central display.
# Select Ionization. # Keep pressing until the desired intensity is
Residual heat will be switched off automatically. reached.
% The function can only be performed if the
AUTO mode is activated or the air distribu‐ Inserting or removing the flacon of the fra‐
Switching residual heat on/off via the rear tion is set to the side air vent. The function is grance system
operating unit restricted if the side air vents on the driver's
Requirements: side are closed. & WARNING Risk of injury from liquid per‐
R The residual heat function is available. fume
R The vehicle is parked. Fragrance system If children open the flacon, they could drink
R The coolant temperature must be sufficiently Setting the fragrance system the liquid perfume or it could come into con‐
high. tact with their eyes.
Requirements: # Do not leave children unattended in the
When the residual heat of the engine is activated R The climate control system is switched on. vehicle.
in the rear passenger compartment, you can R The glove box is closed. # Consult a doctor immediately if liquid
heat or ventilate the front and rear passenger
compartments for approximately 15 minutes. R A flacon is inserted. perfume has been drunk.
# Press button 4.
180 Climate control

# If liquid perfume comes into contact If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior
with your eyes or skin, rinse your eyes perfumes, observe the manufacturers' safety
with clean water. notices on the perfume packaging.
# If symptoms continue, consult a doctor. Dispose of the genuine Mercedes-Benz interior
perfume flacon when it is empty and do not refill
it.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to improper disposal of full Refillable flacon
flacons # Unscrew the cap of the empty flacon.

# Fill the flacon with a maximum of 0.5 fl. oz.

(15 ml).
# Screw the cap back on to the flacon.
Full flacons must not be disposed
of with household waste. Always refill the empty refillable flacon with the
# same perfume. Observe the separate informa‐
tion sheet with the flacon.
1 Cap
Full flacons must be taken to 2 Flacon
Information on the windshield heater
a harmful substance collection point. # To insert: slide the flacon into the holder as
far as it will go. & WARNING Risk of burns from touching
# To remove: after opening the glove box, wait the windshield when the windshield
for approximately seven seconds and pull out heater is switched on
the flacon. The windshield can become very hot when
the windshield heater is switched on.
 Climate control 181

The health of persons with limited tempera‐ Pre-entry climate control for departure time # Do not repeatedly switch on the seat
ture sensitivity or a limited ability to react to Pre-entry climate control for departure time heating.
high temperatures may be affected or they function
may even suffer burn-like injuries. To protect against overheating, the seat heating
# Do not touch the windshield while the & WARNING Danger to life due to expo‐ may be temporarily deactivated after it is
windshield heater is switched on. sure to extreme heat or cold in the vehi‐ switched on repeatedly.
# Allow the windshield to cool down cle % This function is available only in vehicles
before touching it. If people, particularly children, are exposed with a 48 V on-board electrical system (EQ
to extreme temperatures over an extended Boost technology).
The windshield heater will be enabled automati‐ period of time, there is a risk of serious The air inside the vehicle can be heated, ventila‐
cally if ¬ is activated on the climate bar on injury or danger to life. ted or cooled to the set temperature when the
the central display. # Never leave persons, children in partic‐
vehicle is parked.
After the vehicle is started, the windshield ular, unattended in the vehicle. When the vehicle is connected to power supply
heater is switched on automatically as required. equipment, priority is given to charging the 48 V
& WARNING Risk of burns due to repeat‐ battery to a specified minimum charge.
edly switching on the seat heating The running time of pre-entry climate control
may be reduced under the following conditions:
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can
R The vehicle is not connected to power supply
cause the seat cushion and seat backrest
padding to become very hot. equipment.
R The 48 V battery is not fully charged.
In particular, the health of persons with limi‐
ted temperature sensitivity or a limited ability With active pre-entry climate control, the charge
to react to high temperatures may be affec‐ level of the 48 V battery may be reduced, even if
ted or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. the charging cable connector is connected.
182 Climate control

If present, seat ventilation is activated in cooling Setting pre-entry climate control for depar‐ Activating/deactivating pre-entry climate
and ventilation mode. ture time control for departure time
If present, the following functions are activated Multimedia system:
Requirements:
in heating mode: 4 Climate Menu 5 Pre-entry Climate Ctrl.
R The 48 V battery is charged sufficiently.
R Seat heating Setting a single departure time R The function has been activated via the mul‐
R Steering wheel heater # Select the pen icon next to Departure Time. timedia system.
R Panel heating # Select or set a departure time and press OK # To activate: set the departure time
R Mirror heater to confirm. (/ page 182).
R Rear window heating Pre-entry climate control for departure time
Setting the week profile switches on a maximum of 55 minutes
R Windshield heating # Select the pen icon next to Departure Time. before the selected departure time. It will
When the set temperature is changed, climate # Set the desired departure time, e.g. every remain active for another five minutes if the
control mode will automatically be updated and day at 08:00, and mark as Week Profile. departure is delayed.
switched from heating mode to ventilation or # Press OK to confirm. # To deactivate: push the & button up or
cooling mode, from cooling mode to ventilation down.
or heating mode or from ventilation mode to Selecting seats
If present, the following functions will remain
heating or cooling mode. # Select Driver, Passenger, Rear Left or Rear active once the vehicle has been started:
Right. R Seat heating
Pre-entry climate control will take place for
the selected seats. R Seat ventilation
R Panel heating
 Climate control 183

Activating/deactivating immediate pre-entry # Do not repeatedly switch on the seat

climate control heating.
& WARNING Danger to life due to expo‐ To protect against overheating, the seat heating
sure to extreme heat or cold in the vehi‐ may be temporarily deactivated after it is
cle switched on repeatedly.
If people, particularly children, are exposed % Immediate pre-entry climate control is avail‐
to extreme temperatures over an extended able only in vehicles with a 48 V on-board
period of time, there is a risk of serious electrical system (EQ Boost technology).
injury or danger to life. Air conditioning of the vehicle interior can con‐
# Never leave persons, children in partic‐ tinue for up to 50 minutes, e.g. if the journey is
ular, unattended in the vehicle. interrupted.

& WARNING Risk of burns due to repeat‐

edly switching on the seat heating
# Set the temperature using the w arrows
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can on the climate bar on the central display.
cause the seat cushion and seat backrest
# Press button 1.
padding to become very hot.
The red or blue indicator lamp on button 1
In particular, the health of persons with limi‐ will light up or go out.
ted temperature sensitivity or a limited ability
to react to high temperatures may be affec‐ The colors of the indicator lamp have the follow‐
ted or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. ing meanings:
R Blue: stationary ventilation is switched on.
184 Climate control

R Red: the stationary heater is switched on. # To close the center and side air vents:
R Yellow: the departure time is preselected. press button 1 again.
The three indicator lamps on the button will
go out one by one. The air vents will be
Air vents closed completely.
Adjusting the front air vents # To adjust the airflow direction of the side
air vents: hold outer side air vent 2 in the
& WARNING Risk of burns and frostbite center and move it up or down or to the left
due to being too close to the air vents or right.
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air # To adjust the airflow direction of the cen‐
vents. ter air vent: hold air vent 3 in the center
# Make sure that all vehicle occupants
and move it up or down or to the left or right.
always maintain a sufficient distance Adjusting the rear air vents
from the air vents.
# If necessary, direct the airflow to & WARNING Risk of burns and frostbite
another area of the vehicle interior. # To open the center and side air vents: due to being too close to the air vents
press button 1.
The three indicator lamps on the button will Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air
To guarantee the flow of fresh air through the air vents.
vents into the vehicle interior, comply with the light up. The air vents will be opened com‐
pletely. # Make sure that all vehicle occupants
following:
always maintain a sufficient distance
R Always keep the vents and vent grilles in the from the air vents.
vehicle interior free.
# If necessary, direct the airflow to
R Keep the air inlet free of residue build-up another area of the vehicle interior.
(/ page 330).
 Climate control 185

Adjusting the rear air vents in the center # To adjust the airflow direction of the rear # To open the side air vents in the rear
console air vents: hold air vent 2 in the center and passenger compartment: press button 1.
move it up or down or to the left or right. If the button is flush with the side trim, the
side air vent is open.
Adjusting the side air vents in the rear
passenger compartment # To close the side air vents in the rear
passenger compartment: press button 1
again.
If the button protrudes from the side trim,
the side air vent is closed.
# To adjust the airflow direction of the side
air vents: hold air vent 2 in the center and
move it up or down or to the left or right.
# To open the rear air vents: press but‐ Opening or closing the air vent in the glove
ton 1. box
The air vents will be opened completely and
the three indicator lamps on the button will * NOTE Damage to temperature-sensitive
light up. objects in the glove box
# To close the rear air vents: press but‐
Temperature-sensitive objects stored in the
ton 1 again. glove box may be damaged by the air vent
The three indicator lamps on the button will located inside it.
go out one by one. The air vents will be
# Close the air vent when you heat the
closed completely.
vehicle.
186 Climate control

# At high outside temperatures, open the # To open or close: turn controller 1 to the
air vent and switch on the A/C func‐ right or left.
tion.

The automatic climate control must be switched

on to cool the glove box.

1 Air vent controller

2 Air vent
 Driving and parking 187

Driving # When leaving the vehicle, always take

Switching on the power supply or ignition the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury # Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach
due to children left unattended in the of children.
vehicle
Requirements:
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi‐ R The SmartKey is in the vehicle and is recog‐
cle, they could, in particular: nized.
R open doors, thereby endangering other
R The brake pedal is not depressed.
persons or road users.
R get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐
fic.
R operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
# To switch on the power supply: press but‐
In addition, the children could also set the
ton 1 once.
vehicle in motion, for example by:
You can activate the windshield wipers, for
R releasing the parking brake. example.
R changing the transmission position.
The power supply is switched off again if the fol‐
R starting the vehicle. lowing conditions are met:
# Never leave children unattended in the R You open the driver's door.
vehicle. R You press button 1 twice more.
188 Driving and parking

# To switch on the ignition: press button 1 # Never leave the engine or, if present, # If the vehicle still does not start and the dis‐
twice. the auxiliary heating running in an play message Place the Key in the Marked
The indicator lamps appear on the driver dis‐ enclosed space without sufficient venti‐ Space See Operator's Manual also appears
play. lation. in the driver display: start the vehicle with
The ignition is switched off again if one of the the SmartKey in the marked space (emer‐
following conditions is met: gency operation mode) (/ page 188).
& WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable
R You do not start the vehicle within material in the engine compartment or % You can switch off the engine while driving.
15 minutes and the transmission is in posi‐ the exhaust system By pressing button 1 for about three sec‐
tion j or the electric parking brake is onds or by pressing button 1 three times
Flammable materials may ignite. within three seconds. Be sure to observe the
applied.
# Therefore, check regularly that there safety notes under "Driving tips"
R You press button 1 once.
are no flammable materials in the (/ page 192).
engine compartment or on the exhaust Observe any information regarding display mes‐
Starting the vehicle system. sages that can be displayed in the driver display.
Starting the vehicle with the start/stop but‐ Requirements: Starting the vehicle with the SmartKey in the
ton R The SmartKey is in the vehicle and is recog‐ marked space (emergency operation mode)
nized. If the vehicle does not start and the display mes‐
& DANGER Risk of death caused by sage Place the Key in the Marked Space See
exhaust gases # Shift the transmission to position j or i. Operator's Manual appears in the driver display,
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust # Depress the brake pedal and press button you can start the vehicle in emergency operation
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling 1 once. mode.
these exhaust gases is hazardous to health # If the vehicle does not start: switch off non-
and leads to poisoning. essential consumers and press button 1
once.
 Driving and parking 189

# Depress the brake pedal and start the vehi‐ Charging the starter battery before starting
cle using the start/stop button. the journey
% You can also switch on the power supply or If the vehicle battery is discharged, you can
the ignition with the start/stop button. receive a message on your smartphone. You can
then start the vehicle with the smartphone to
Observe any information regarding display mes‐ charge the battery. The vehicle is automatically
sages that can be displayed in the driver display. switched off after ten minutes.
Ensure the following before starting the engine:
Starting the vehicle via Remote Online Serv‐
R The legal stipulations in the area where your
ices
vehicle is parked allow engine starting via
# Make sure that cup holder 2 is empty. Cooling or heating the vehicle interior before smartphone.
# Remove SmartKey 1 from the key ring. starting the journey R It is safe to start and run the engine where
# Place SmartKey 1 in cup holder 2. Ensure the following before starting the engine: your vehicle is parked.
The vehicle will start after a short time. R the legal stipulations in the area where your R The fuel tank is sufficiently full.
If SmartKey 1 is removed from cup holder vehicle is parked allow engine starting via
smartphone. Starting the vehicle (Remote Online)
2, the engine continues running. For further
engine starts, however, SmartKey 1 must R it is safe to start and run the engine where & WARNING Risk of crushing or entrap‐
be located in cup holder 2 during the entire your vehicle is parked. ment due to unintentional starting of the
journey. R the fuel tank is sufficiently full. engine
# Have SmartKey 1 checked at a qualified R the starter battery is sufficiently charged.
specialist workshop. Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the
engine is started unintentionally during
If the vehicle does not start: service or maintenance work.
# Leave SmartKey 1 in cup holder 2.
190 Driving and parking

# Always secure the engine against unin‐ % Further information can be found in the R Do not shift down a gear manually in order to
tentional starting before carrying out smartphone app. brake.
maintenance or repair work. Securing the engine against starting before R Avoid overstraining the vehicle, e.g. driving at
carrying out maintenance or repair work: full throttle.
Requirements: # Switch on the hazard warning light system. R Do not depress the accelerator pedal past
R Park position j is selected. the pressure point (kickdown).
or
R The anti-theft alarm system is not activated. R Only increase the engine speed gradually and
# Unlock the doors.
R The panic alarm is not activated. accelerate the vehicle to full speed after
or 1000 miles (1500 km).
R The hazard warning light system is switched
# Open a side window or the sliding sunroof.
off. This also applies when the engine or parts of the
R The hood is closed. drivetrain have been replaced.
Breaking-in notes
R The doors are closed and locked. Please also observe the following breaking-in
R The windows and sliding sunroof are closed. To preserve the engine during the first notes:
1000 miles (1500 km): R In certain driving and driving safety systems,
# Start the vehicle using the smartphone. R Drive at varying road speeds and engine the sensors adjust automatically while a cer‐
After every engine start, the engine runs for speeds. tain distance is being driven after the vehicle
ten minutes. has been delivered or after repairs. Full sys‐
R Do not drive at speeds greater than 85 mph
You can carry out a maximum of two consecu‐ (140 km/h). tem effectiveness is not reached until the
tive starting attempts. You must start the vehicle end of this teach-in process.
R Drive the vehicle in drive program A
once with the SmartKey before trying to start or ;. R Brakepads, brake discs and tires that are
the engine again with the smartphone. You can either new or have been replaced only ach‐
stop the vehicle again at any time. R Shift to the next highest gear at the very lat‐
ieve optimum braking effect and grip after
est when the needle reaches the last third several hundred kilometers of driving. Com‐
before the red area in the tachometer.
 Driving and parking 191

pensate for the reduced braking effect by If ESP® is deactivated, there is a risk of skid‐
# Move the steering wheel to the straight-
applying greater force to the brake pedal. ding and accident. ahead position.
# Make sure that no persons or obstacles
# Select the sportiest available drive program
Notes on optimized acceleration are in the close vicinity of your vehicle. B or C(/ page 199).
If all necessary requirements and activation con‐
# Deactivate ESP® (/ page 219).
ditions are fulfilled, the best possible accelera‐ Requirements: # Depress and hold the brake pedal firmly with
R The vehicle has been broken in
tion can be achieved from a standstill. your left foot.
(/ page 190).
Do not use the optimized acceleration on public # With your right foot, fully depress the accel‐
R The vehicle and tires are in good condition.
roads. Individual wheels could spin and you erator pedal.
could lose control of the vehicle. There is an R You are on a high-grip roadway. # After no more than five seconds, take your
increased risk of skidding and/or accident. R The engine and transmission are at normal left foot quickly off the brake, but keep the
Be sure to observe the safety notes and informa‐ operating temperature. accelerator pedal depressed.
tion on ESP® (/ page 218). The vehicle pulls away at maximum accelera‐
* NOTE Increased wear due to optimized tion.
acceleration # Switch on ESP® once the acceleration proce‐
Pulling away with optimized acceleration
When pulling away with optimized accelera‐ dure is complete.
& WARNING Risk of skidding and having tion, all components of the drivetrain are Ending optimized acceleration
an accident from wheels spinning subjected to a very high load.
# Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
When you use optimized acceleration, indi‐ This can lead to increased component wear.
# Reactivate the ESP®.
vidual wheels could spin and you could lose # Do not always pull away with optimized
control of the vehicle. acceleration.
# Engage the h drive position (/ page 203).
192 Driving and parking

% After you pull away with optimized accelera‐ & WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐ & DANGER Risk of death caused by
tion, components of the drivetrain can rect footwear exhaust gases
become very hot, which means that opti‐
mized acceleration values may be reached Incorrect footwear includes, for example: Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
again only after a few minutes. R Shoes with platform soles gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases is hazardous to health
R Shoes with high heels
and leads to poisoning.
Notes on driving R Slippers # Never leave the engine or, if present,

& WARNING Risk of accident due to # Always wear suitable footwear so that the auxiliary heating running in an
objects in the driver's footwell you can operate the pedals safely. enclosed space without sufficient venti‐
lation.
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. & WARNING Risk of accident if the ignition
is switched off while driving & WARNING Risk of skidding and of an
This jeopardizes the operating and road accident due to shifting down on slippery
safety of the vehicle. If you switch off the ignition while driving, road surfaces
# Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
safety functions are restricted or no longer
available. If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to
so that they cannot get into the driver's increase the engine braking effect, the drive
footwell. You will need to use considerably more force
wheels may lose traction.
# Always install the floor mats securely
to steer and brake, for example.
# Do not shift down on slippery road sur‐
and as prescribed in order to ensure # Do not switch off the ignition while driv‐
faces to increase the engine braking
that there is always sufficient room for ing.
effect.
the pedals.
# Do not use loose floor mats and do not
place floor mats on top of one another.
 Driving and parking 193

& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poi‐ The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci‐ * NOTE Engine damage due to excessively
sonous exhaust gases dent are greatly increased when you drink or high engine speeds
take drugs and drive.
If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventila‐ The engine will be damaged if you drive with
# Do not drink or take drugs and drive or
tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases the engine in the overrevving range.
such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi‐ allow anyone to drive who has been
# Do not drive with the engine in the over‐
cle. This is the case when the vehicle drinking or taking drugs.
revving range.
becomes stuck in snow, for example.
# Keep the tailpipe and the area around & WARNING Risk of accident due to the
brake system overheating * NOTE Wearing out the brake linings by
the vehicle free from snow when the continuously depressing the brake pedal
engine or the stationary heater are run‐ If you leave your foot on the brake pedal
ning. when driving, the brake system may over‐ # Do not depress the brake pedal contin‐
# Open a window on the side of the vehi‐ heat. uously whilst driving.
cle facing away from the wind to ensure This increases the braking distance and the # To use the braking effect of the engine,
an adequate supply of fresh air. brake system may even fail. shift to a lower gear in good time.
# Never use the brake pedal as a footrest.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury # Do not depress the brake pedal and the
* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and
due to being under the influence of alco‐ engine when pulling away
accelerator pedal at the same time
hol and drugs while driving
while driving. # Do not warm up the engine while the
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and vehicle is stationary. Pull away immedi‐
driving are very dangerous combinations. ately.
Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can # Avoid high engine speeds and driving at
affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg‐ full throttle until the engine has reached
ment. its operating temperature.
194 Driving and parking

* NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter with the notes on loading the vehicle Notes on hydroplaning
due to non-combusted fuel (/ page 133). Hydroplaning can take place once a certain
R Drive attentively, and avoid suddenly pulling amount of water has accumulated on the road
The engine is not running smoothly and is away, braking and steering as well as rapid surface.
misfiring. cornering. Observe the following notes during heavy precip‐
Non-combusted fuel may get into the cata‐ itation or in conditions in which hydroplaning
lytic converter. Notes on driving on salt-treated roads may occur:
The braking effect is limited on salt-treated
# Only depress the accelerator pedal R Reduce speed
roads.
slightly. R Avoid tire ruts
Therefore, observe the following notes:
# Have the cause rectified immediately at
R Due to salt build-up on the brake discs and R Avoid sudden steering movements
a qualified specialist workshop.
brakepads, the braking distance can increase R Brake carefully
Notes on driving with a roof load, trailer or considerably or result in braking only on one
side % Also observe the notes on regularly checking
fully laden vehicle wheels and tires (/ page 358).
When driving with a loaded roof luggage rack or R Maintain a much greater safe distance to the
trailer as well as with a fully laden or fully occu‐ vehicle in front Notes on driving through water on the road
pied vehicle, the vehicle's driving and steering surface
characteristics change. To remove salt build-up: Water which has entered into the vehicle can
You should bear the following in mind: R Brake occasionally while paying attention to damage the engine, electrics and transmission.
the traffic conditions Water can also enter the air intake of the engine
R Do not exceed the permissible roof load and
R Carefully depress the brake pedal at the end and cause engine damage.
towing capacity. Also observe the technical
data in the printed Operator's Manual. of the journey and when starting the next
journey
R Evenly distribute the roof load, and place
heavy objects at the bottom. Also comply
 Driving and parking 195

Observe the following if you must drive through Rear axle steering has the following characteris‐ The engine is switched off automatically in the
water: tics: following situations if all vehicle conditions for
R The water, when calm, may only reach the R Reduced steering effort and turning radius an automatic engine stop are met:
lower edge of the vehicle body. resulting in reduced parking effort R You brake the vehicle to a standstill in trans‐
R Drive at a maximum speed of 6 mph R Improved driving stability, e.g. when corner‐ mission position h or i.
(10 km/h); water can otherwise enter the ing R Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical
vehicle interior or engine compartment. R More direct steering resulting in improved system: You depress the brake pedal when
R Vehicles traveling in front, or oncoming vehi‐ handling of the vehicle traveling at a low speed.
cles, can create waves which may exceed the If the system has detected one of the following
maximum permissible depth of the water. Observe the notes on snow chains
(/ page 359) and on activating snow chain situations, the engine will not stop:
The braking effect of the brakes is reduced after mode. R You stop at a stop sign and there is no vehi‐
fording. Brake carefully while paying attention to cle in front of you.
the traffic conditions until braking power has ECO start/stop function R The vehicle that stopped in front of you
been fully restored. starts up again.
Operation of the ECO start/stop function
R You maneuver, turn the steering wheel
Function of rear axle steering % The ECO start/stop function is not available sharply or engage reverse gear.
in all drive programs, depending on the
The rear axle steering is an electromechanical engine. Observe the status display in the % If the system detects an intelligent stop
auxiliary steering on the rear axle which adjusts driver display for this. inhibitor, for example, a stop sign, the engine
the steering of the rear wheels according to the will not stop.
position of the front wheels, depending on the If you activate the HOLD function or engage
speed. This results in greater maneuverability the park position j, the engine can be
and improved driving stability, e.g. when corner‐ switched off in spite of an intelligent stop
ing. inhibitor.
196 Driving and parking

The engine is restarted automatically if: R Neither the è nor ç symbol appears Deactivating or activating the ECO start/
R You engage transmission position h or k. when the vehicle is at a standstill: an intelli‐ stop function
gent stop inhibitor was detected, for exam‐
R You depress the accelerator pedal.
ple, a stop sign.
R An automatic engine start is required by the
R The s symbol appears: the ECO start/
vehicle. stop function is deactivated or there is a mal‐
R You release the brake pedal. function.
R Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical
If the engine was switched off by the ECO start/
system: stop function and you leave the vehicle, a warn‐
- You release the brake pedal on a downhill ing tone sounds and the engine is not restarted.
gradient and the vehicle does not roll. In addition, the following display message
- The vehicle rolls on a downhill gradient appears in the driver display:
and does not automatically enter glide Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off
mode at 15 mph (20 km/h). Before Exiting
ECO start/stop function symbols in the driver If you do not switch off the ignition, it is auto‐
display: matically switched off after three minutes.
R The è symbol (green) appears when the
vehicle is at a standstill: the engine was # Press button 1.
switched off by the ECO start/stop function. A display appears in the driver display when
switching the ECO start/stop function
R The ç symbol (yellow) appears when the
off/on.
vehicle is at a standstill: not all vehicle condi‐
tions for an engine stop have been met. % A continuous s display appears in the
driver display while the ECO start/stop func‐
tion is deactivated.
 Driving and parking 197

ECO display function The ECO display assesses the following criteria fuel and recuperate. If the system detects an
for an economical driving style: event ahead and the vehicle nears the event,
R Coasting at the right time ECO Assist will calculate the optimum speed for
maximum fuel economy and recuperative energy
R Consistent speed
based on the distance, speed and downhill gradi‐
R Moderate acceleration ent.
% The overall assessment of your driving style
"from start" is given as a percentage 2 and
displayed next to the ECO display. The
assessment starts at 0% and can reach a
maximum of 100%.
The ECO display shows an evaluation of your % You can call up the ECO Display function via
driving style on the driver display depending on the Classic and Exclusive menus
the situation. This enables you to check the effi‐ (/ page 274).
ciency of your driving style and adjust it if neces‐
sary. The ECO Display menu shows a ball 1 ECO Assist function
that will roll forwards or backwards on a stylized ECO Assist display on the driver's display on the
road in the direction of travel according to the Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical sys‐ Assistance menu
driving characteristics. tem (EQ Boost technology) 1 Route event ahead
Above and below the road, lines mark the area % ECO Assist is active only in drive pro‐ 2 "Foot off the accelerator" recommendation
for an efficient driving style 3. Ball 1 will light grams ; and A.
If a route event that can be dealt with more effi‐
up in green if it is rolling within these lines. Out‐ ECO Assist analyzes data for the vehicle's expec‐ ciently by adjusting your driving style is detected
side the lines, the ball will light up in orange. ted route. This allows the system to optimally ahead, corresponding symbol 1 will be dis‐
adjust the driving style for the route ahead, save played.
198 Driving and parking

In addition, the ý symbol will be displayed 8 Vehicle in front R If the windshield is dirty in the area of the
until you take your foot off the accelerator or 9 Speed limit multifunction camera, or if the camera is fog‐
until you have passed the route event. ged up, damaged or covered.
Symbol 1 will disappear as soon as ECO Assist % Only route event 8 "vehicle in front" will be R If the traffic signs are hard to detect, e.g. due
cannot identify any further recommendations displayed in drive program A. to dirt, snow or insufficient lighting, or
from the route ahead. System limits because they are covered.
If the calculated route is adhered to when route R If the information in the navigation system's
guidance is active, ECO Assist will operate with digital map is incorrect or out-of-date.
greater accuracy. The basic function is also R If the signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in
available without active route guidance. Not all roadworks or in adjacent lanes.
information and traffic situations can be fore‐
seen. The quality depends on the map data.
ECO Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsi‐ DYNAMIC SELECT switch
ble for keeping a safe distance from the vehicle Function of the DYNAMIC SELECT button
in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in
good time. % Depending on the engine and equipment,
the vehicle has different drive programs.
The following route events can be detected by The system may be impaired or may not function
in the following situations: Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change
ECO Assist:
between the following drive programs.
3 Roundabout R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi‐
cient illumination of the road, highly variable The chosen drive program appears in the driver
4 S-curve display.
shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy
5 Sharp curve spray. = Individual
6 T-intersection R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, R individual settings
7 Downhill gradient direct sunlight or reflections.
 Driving and parking 199

B Sport+ ; Eco Selecting the drive program

R very sporty driving style with lowered sus‐ R particularly economical driving
pension R balance between traction and stability
R emphasizes the vehicle's own oversteering R recommended for all road conditions
and understeering characteristics for a more
active driving style Depending on the drive program, the following
R only suitable for good road conditions, a dry systems change their characteristics:
road surface and a clear stretch of road R drive

C Sport
- engine and transmission management
R sporty driving style with lowered suspension
- Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
R still sporty, but with an emphasis on stability
- availability of glide mode
R ESP®
R allows the sporty driver a more active driving
style R suspension
R only suitable for good road conditions, a dry - suspension and damping
road surface and a clear stretch of road - vehicle level
# Press DYNAMIC SELECT button 1 on the
A Comfort R steering
left or right.
R comfortable and economical driving The chosen drive program appears in the dis‐
R balance between traction and stability play of the button.
R recommended for all road conditions
200 Driving and parking

Configuring DYNAMIC SELECT (multimedia The ECO start/stop function is activated auto‐ Variables that can influence this are, for
system) matically. example:
Multimedia system: R Sea level
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle Displaying vehicle data R fuel grade
5 DYNAMIC SELECT Multimedia system: R Outside temperature

Setting drive program I 4 © 5 Info R Operating temperature of the engine

# Select Individual. # Select Vehicle. % The values displayed serve only as orienta‐
The vehicle data is displayed. tion. The values for engine output and
# Select and set a category.
engine torque shown in the central display
Switching the reset display on/off may deviate from the actual values.
Displaying engine data
# Switch Request at Start on or off.
Multimedia system: Calling up the fuel consumption indicator
Function on: the next time the vehicle is started 4 © 5 Info
a prompt appears asking whether the last active Multimedia system:
# Select Engine.
drive program should be restored. If the ECO 4 © 5 Info
start/stop function was deactivated, an addi‐ The engine data is displayed.
# Select Consumption.
tional prompt appears asking if the function % The actual (maximum) values that can be
achieved for engine output and engine tor‐ The current and average consumption is dis‐
should remain deactivated. played.
% The prompt appears only if the previously que may deviate from the certified values
active settings deviate from the standard within the country-specific guidelines for
settings. permissible tolerances (basis: UN-ECE No.
85 or country-specific guidelines).
Function off: the next time the vehicle is star‐
ted the A drive program is set automatically.
 Driving and parking 201

Automatic transmission & WARNING Risk of accident and injury # Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach
DIRECT SELECT lever due to children left unattended in the of children.
vehicle
Function of the DIRECT SELECT lever Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi‐ transmission position. The current transmission
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐ cle, they could, in particular: position is shown in the driver display.
rect gearshifting R open doors, thereby endangering other
If the engine speed is higher than the idle persons or road users.
speed and you engage the transmission posi‐ R get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐
tion h or k, the vehicle may accelerate fic.
sharply. R operate vehicle equipment and become
# If you engage the transmission position trapped, for example.
h or k when the vehicle is at a In addition, the children could also set the
standstill, always depress the brake vehicle in motion, for example by:
pedal firmly and do not accelerate at
the same time. R releasing the parking brake.
R changing the transmission position.
R starting the vehicle.

# Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the j Park position
vehicle. k Reverse gear
202 Driving and parking

i Neutral # Release the brake pedal. # When the vehicle is at a standstill, press but‐
h Drive position # Switch the ignition off. ton j.
When the transmission position display
Engaging reverse gear R The Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away N Activated shows j, the park position is engaged. If no
# Depress the brake pedal and push the Manually No Automatic Change to P message transmission position display j appears,
DIRECT SELECT lever upwards past the first appears on the driver's display. secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling
point of resistance. % If you then exit the vehicle leaving the away.
Engaging neutral N SmartKey in the vehicle, the automatic trans‐ % Depending on the situation, it may take a
# Depress the brake pedal and push the mission remains in neutral i. short time until j is engaged. Therefore,
DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first The park position j is automatically re-engaged always pay attention to the transmission
point of resistance. as soon as one of the following conditions is position display.
% To shift into neutral i with the ignition on, met: Park position j is engaged automatically if one
push the selector lever up or down for sev‐ R You switch to transmission position h or of the following conditions is met:
eral seconds to the first point of resistance. k. R You switch off the ignition when the vehicle
Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will R You press the j button. is stationary and the transmission position is
allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push h or k.
it or tow it away. Engaging park position P
R You open the driver's door when the vehicle
# Observe the notes on parking the vehicle
Proceed as follows if you want the automatic is at a standstill or when driving at a very low
(/ page 207).
transmission to remain in neutral i, even if speed and the transmission position is h or
# Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle k.
the ignition is switched off or the driver's comes to a standstill.
door is opened: R You switch off the engine and bring the vehi‐
# Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral
cle to a standstill when the vehicle is rolling
i when the vehicle is at a standstill. and the transmission position is h or k.
 Driving and parking 203

R You switch off the engine, bring the vehicle Manual gearshifting Temporary setting:
to a standstill and open the driver's door # To activate: pull steering wheel gearshift
when the vehicle is stationary or when the paddle 1 or 2.
vehicle is rolling and the transmission posi‐ Manual gearshifting is activated for a short
tion is i. time. The transmission position display
R Engaging park position j automatically is shows p and the current gear.
required by the vehicle.
% How long the manual gearshifting stays acti‐
% To maneuver with an open driver's door, vated is dependent on various factors.
open the driver's door while at a standstill Manual gearshifting can be automatically
and engage transmission position h or k deactivated in the following cases:
again.
R Changing the drive program
Engaging drive position D When the automatic transmission is shifted to
position h, you can manually shift it with the R Restarting the vehicle
# Depress the brake pedal and push the
DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first steering wheel gearshift paddle. If permitted, the R When the transmission position h is
point of resistance. automatic transmission shifts to a higher or engaged again
lower gear depending on the steering wheel R Driving style
When the automatic transmission is in transmis‐ gearshift paddle being pulled.
sion position h, it shifts the gears automati‐ # To shift up: pull steering wheel gearshift
cally. This depends, among other things, on the You have two options to manually shift the auto‐ paddle 2.
following factors: matic transmission:
# To shift down: pull steering wheel gearshift
R Temporary setting
R The selected drive program paddle 1.
R Permanent setting
R The position of the accelerator pedal # To deactivate: pull steering wheel gearshift

R The driving speed The gears shift automatically when manual gear‐ paddle 2 and hold it in place.
shifting is deactivated. The transmission position display shows h.
204 Driving and parking

Permanent setting: Using kickdown Glide mode is activated if the following condi‐
# Change to drive program =(/ page 199). tions are met:
# Maximum acceleration: depress the accel‐
# Select drive setting p (/ page 200). erator pedal beyond the pressure point. R Drive program ; is selected.
R The speed is within a suitable range.
To protect against engine overrev, the automatic
Gearshift recommendation transmission shifts up to the next gear when R The road's course is suitable, e.g. no steep
maximum engine speed has been reached. uphill or downhill inclines or tight bends.
The gearshift recommendation assists you in
R You do not depress the accelerator or brake
adopting an economical driving style.
Glide mode function pedal (except for light brake applications).

With an anticipatory driving style, Glide mode % Glide mode can also be activated if you have
helps you to reduce fuel consumption. selected the "Eco" setting for the drive in the
drive program =.
Glide mode is characterized by the following:
Glide mode is deactivated again if one of the
R The combustion engine is disconnected from
conditions is no longer met.
the drivetrain and continues to run in neutral.
Glide mode can also be prevented by the follow‐
R The transmission position display h is
ing parameters:
shown in green.
R Incline
R Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical
R Downhill gradient
# If gearshift recommendation 1 appears system (EQ Boost technology): The com‐
bustion engine can be switched off. All of the R Temperature
next to the transmission position display,
shift to the recommended gear. vehicle functions remain active. R Height
R Speed
R Operating status of the engine
 Driving and parking 205

R Traffic situation Refueling If you or other people come into contact with
Refueling the vehicle fuel, observe the following:
Function of the 4MATIC # Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with
& WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from soap and water.
4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are driven.
fuel
Together with ESP® and 4ETS, 4MATIC improves # If fuel comes into contact with your
the traction of your vehicle whenever a driven Fuels are highly flammable. eyes, immediately rinse them thor‐
wheel spins due to insufficient traction. # Fire, open flames, smoking and creation oughly with clean water. Seek medical
If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can of sparks must be avoided. attention immediately.
neither reduce the risk of an accident nor over‐ # Switch off the ignition and, if available, # If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten‐
ride the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take the stationary heater, before and while tion immediately. Do not induce vomit‐
account of road, weather and traffic conditions. refueling the vehicle. ing.
4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible espe‐ # Change immediately out of clothing that
cially for maintaining a safe distance from the has come into contact with fuel.
vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in & WARNING Risk of injury from fuels
good time and for staying in lane. Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your
health. & WARNING Risk of fire and explosion due
% In wintry road conditions, the maximum to electrostatic charge
effect of 4MATIC can be achieved only if you # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into
use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Electrostatic charge can ignite fuel vapor.
chains if necessary. # Do not inhale fuel vapor. # Before you open the fuel filler cap or

# Keep children away from fuel.

take hold of the pump nozzle, touch the
metallic vehicle body.
# Keep doors and windows closed during
the refueling process.
206 Driving and parking

# To avoid creating another electrostatic If you have accidentally refueled with the * NOTE Damage to the fuel system caused
charge, do not get into the vehicle again wrong fuel: by overfilled fuel tanks
during the refueling process. # Do not switch the ignition on.
# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. nozzle switches off.
* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Vehicles with a gasoline engine: * NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehi‐ If you have added too much fuel because of a
cles with a gasoline engine defective filling pump, for instance:
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
# Do not switch the ignition on.
result in damage to the fuel system, the If you have accidentally refueled with the
engine and the emission control system. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
wrong fuel:
# Only refuel with low-sulfur gasoline.
R Do not switch the ignition on. Otherwise
fuel can enter the engine. * NOTE Fuel may spray out when you
This fuel may contain up to 10% ethanol. Your remove the fuel pump nozzle
vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel
could result in damage to the fuel system # Only fill the fuel tank until the pump
Never refuel with one of the following fuels: and the engine. The repair costs are high. nozzle switches off.
R Diesel
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Requirements:
R Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by
volume, e.g. E15, E85, E100 # Have the fuel tank and fuel lines R The vehicle is unlocked.
drained completely.
R Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by % Do not get into the vehicle again during the
volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100 refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic
R Gasoline with additives containing metal charge could build up again.
Observe the notes on operating fluids and fuel.
 Driving and parking 207

Only refuel with fuel that has at least the octane 4 QR code for rescue card Parking
number specified in the information label in the 5 Fuel type
fuel filler flap. Otherwise, engine output can be Parking the vehicle
reduced and fuel consumption increased. # Press the back area of fuel filler flap 1.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury
# Turn the fuel filler cap counter-clockwise and caused by an insufficiently secured vehi‐
remove it. cle rolling away
# Insert the fuel filler cap from above into
bracket 2. If the vehicle is not securely parked suffi‐
ciently, it can roll away in an uncontrolled
# Completely insert the pump nozzle into the way even at a slight downhill gradient.
tank filler neck, hook in place and refuel.
# On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the
# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle front wheels so that the vehicle rolls
switches off. towards the curb if it starts moving.
# Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn # Apply the parking brake.
clockwise until it engages audibly.
# Switch the transmission to position j.
# Close fuel filler flap 1.
& WARNING Risk of fire caused by hot
exhaust system parts
Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or
1 Fuel filler flap twigs may ignite.
2 Bracket for fuel filler cap # Park the vehicle so that no flammable
3 Tire pressure table material can come into contact with hot
vehicle components.
208 Driving and parking

# In particular, do not park on dry grass‐ # When leaving the vehicle, always take
land or harvested grain fields. the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury # Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach
due to children left unattended in the of children.
vehicle
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi‐ * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to it
cle, they could, in particular: rolling away
R open doors, thereby endangering other # Always secure the vehicle against roll‐
persons or road users. ing away.
R get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐
fic.
R operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
# Bring the vehicle to a standstill by pressing
In addition, the children could also set the the brake pedal.
vehicle in motion, for example by:
# On gradients, turn the front wheels so that
R releasing the parking brake.
the vehicle will roll towards the curb if it
R changing the transmission position. starts moving.
R starting the vehicle. # Apply the electric parking brake.
# Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
 Driving and parking 209

# Engage transmission position j in a station‐ # Never leave the engine or, if present, Requirements:
ary vehicle with the brake pedal applied the auxiliary heating running in an R The vehicle has been parked outside the
(/ page 202). enclosed space without sufficient venti‐ garage or outside the range of movement of
# Switch off the engine and the ignition by lation. the door.
pressing button 1. R The engine is switched off.
# Release the service brake slowly. & WARNING Risk of injury when opening R The ignition is switched on.
# Get out of the vehicle and lock it. or closing a door with the garage door
% The garage door opener function is always
opener
% When you park the vehicle, you can still available when the ignition is switched on.
operate the side windows and the panoramic When you operate or program the door with
sliding sunroof for approximately four the integrated garage door opener, persons
minutes if the driver's door is closed. in the range of movement of the door may
become trapped or be struck by the door.
# Always make sure that nobody is within
Garage door opener
the range of movement of the door.
Programming buttons for the garage door
opener Only operate the following doors using the
garage door opener:
& DANGER Risk of death caused by
R Doors with a safety stop and reversing fea‐
exhaust gases ture
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust R Doors which conform to the current U.S.
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling safety standards
these exhaust gases is hazardous to health
and leads to poisoning.
210 Driving and parking

# Check if the transmitter frequency of the synchronization of the rolling code with # Press previously programmed button 1, 2
remote control has the frequency range of the door system must also be carried out. or 3 repeatedly until the door closes.
280 to 868 MHz. # If indicator lamp 4 does not light up or flash When the door closes, programming is com‐
Radio equipment approval number: green: repeat the procedure. pleted.
R NZLMUAHL5 (USA) # Release all of the buttons. % Please also read the operating instructions
for the door drive.
R 4112A-MUAHL5 (Canada) % The remote control for the door drive is not
# Press and hold button 1, 2 or 3 that you included in the scope of delivery of the Troubleshooting when programming the
wish to program. garage door opener. remote control
# Check if the transmitter frequency of remote
Indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow. Synchronizing the rolling code control 5 is supported.
% It can take up to 20 seconds before the indi‐ Requirements: # Replace the batteries in remote control 5.
cator lamp flashes yellow. R The door system uses a rolling code.
# Hold remote control 5 at various angles
# Release the previously pressed button.
R The vehicle must be within range of the from a distance of 0.4 in (1 cm) to 3 in
Indicator lamp 4 continues to flash yellow. garage door or door drive. (8 cm) front of the inside rearview mirror.
# Point remote control 5 from a distance of You should test every position for at least
R The vehicle as well as persons and objects
0.4 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) towards button are located outside the range of movement 25 seconds before trying another position.
1, 2 or 3. of the door. # Hold remote control 5 at the same angles
# Press and hold button 6 of remote control at various distances in front of the inside rear
5 until one of the following signals appears:
# Press the programming button on the door
drive unit. view mirror. You should test every position
R Indicator lamp 4 lights up green contin‐ for at least 25 seconds before trying another
uously. Programming is complete. Initiate the next step within approximately
30 seconds. position.
R Indicator lamp 4 flashes green. Pro‐
gramming was successful. Additionally,
 Driving and parking 211

# On remote controls that transmit only for a Clearing the garage door opener memory In addition, the children could also set the
limited period, press button 6 on remote # Press and hold buttons 1 and 3.
vehicle in motion, for example by:
control 5 again before transmission ends. Indicator lamp 4 lights up yellow.
R releasing the parking brake.
# Align the antenna line of the door opener unit # If indicator lamp 4 flashes green: release
R changing the transmission position.
with the remote control. buttons 1 and 3.
The entire memory has been deleted. R starting the vehicle.
% Support and additional information on pro‐
gramming: # Never leave children unattended in the
R On the toll free HomeLink® Hotline on Electric parking brake vehicle.
1-800-355-3515 Function of the electric parking brake (apply‐ # When leaving the vehicle, always take
R On the Internet at https:// ing automatically) the SmartKey with you and lock the
www.homelink.com/mercedes vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury # Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach
Opening or closing the garage door
due to children left unattended in the of children.
Requirements: vehicle
R The corresponding button is programmed to If children are left unsupervised in the vehi‐ The electric parking brake is applied if the trans‐
operate the door. cle, they could, in particular: mission is in position j and one of the follow‐
ing conditions is fulfilled:
# Press and hold buttons 1, 2 or 3 until R open doors, thereby endangering other
R The engine is switched off.
the door opens or closes. persons or road users.
R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the
# If indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow after R get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐
approximately 20 seconds: press and hold fic. seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the
the previously pressed button again until the driver's door is opened.
R operate vehicle equipment and become
door opens or closes. trapped, for example. % To prevent application: pull the handle of the
electric parking brake (/ page 212).
212 Driving and parking

In the following situations, the electric parking The electric parking brake is not automatically - You have previously driven at speeds
brake is also applied: applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO greater than 2 mph (3 km/h).
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing start/stop function.
When the electric parking brake is released, the
the vehicle to a standstill. Electric parking brake function (releasing red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp
R The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta‐ automatically) in the driver's display goes out.
tionary. The electric parking brake is released when the Applying/releasing the electric parking
R Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle following conditions are fulfilled: brake manually
stationary. R The driver's door is closed.
Applying
This is the case if one of the following conditions R The engine is running.
is also fulfilled: R The transmission is in position h or k and
R The engine is switched off. you depress the accelerator pedal or you
R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the shift from transmission position j to h or
seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the k when on level ground with the driver's
driver's door is opened. door closed.
R There is a system malfunction. R If the transmission is in position k, the
trunk lid must be closed.
R The power supply is insufficient.
R The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat
R The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period.
belt buckle of the driver's seat.
When the electric parking brake is applied, the If the seat belt tongue is not inserted into the
red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp seat belt buckle of the driver's seat, one of
lights up in the driver's display. the following conditions must be fulfilled:
- You shift from transmission position j.
 Driving and parking 213

# Push handle 1. Information on collision detection on a % If the battery is severely discharged, the
The red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indica‐ parked vehicle function for detecting a collision on a parked
tor lamp lights up in the driver display. vehicle is automatically deactivated to facili‐
If a collision is detected when the tow-away tate the next engine start.
% The electric parking brake is only securely alarm is armed on a locked vehicle, you will
applied if the indicator lamp is lit continu‐ receive a notification in the multimedia system System limits
ously. when you switch on the ignition. Detection may be restricted in the following sit‐
Releasing You will receive information about the following uations:
# Switch on the ignition. points: R The vehicle is damaged without impact, e.g.
# Pull handle 1.
R The area of the vehicle that may have been if an outside mirror is torn off or the paint is
The red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indica‐ damaged. damaged by a key
tor lamp in the driver display goes out. R The force of the impact. R An impact occurs at low speed

Emergency braking The following situations can lead to inadvertent R The electric parking brake is not applied
# Press and hold handle 1. activation:
As long as the vehicle is driving, the Please R The parked vehicle is moved, e.g. in a two- Setting collision detection on a parked vehi‐
Release Parking Brake message is displayed story garage. cle
and the red ! indicator lamp flashes.
% Deactivate the tow-away alarm in order to Multimedia system:
When the vehicle has been braked to a prevent inadvertent activation. If you deacti‐ 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle
standstill, the electric parking brake is vate the tow-away alarm, collision detection 5 Opening/closing 5 Vehicle Protection
applied. The red F (USA) or ! (Can‐ will also be deactivated.
ada) indicator lamp lights up in the driver dis‐ You can permanently deactivate collision
# Activate or deactivate the function under Col-
play. detection via the multimedia system lision detection.
(/ page 213).
214 Driving and parking

% A maximum of three incidents can be regis‐ Copying the collision photos to a USB flash Standby mode (extension of the starter bat‐
tered. Up to 15 photos are taken for every drive tery's period out of use)
incident. In the event of another incident, the # Connect a USB flash drive . Standby mode function
photos of the first incident will be overwrit‐
# Select Manage Collision Photos. % This function is not available for all models.
ten if they have not been deleted already.
# Select Copy (USB). If standby mode is activated, energy loss will be
Activating or deactivating the collision pho‐ All collision photos are copied to the USB
tos function minimized during extended periods of non-oper‐
flash drive. ation.
Please note possible legal restrictions in some
countries regarding automatic recording of the % To ensure secure operation, only use FAT32 Standby mode is characterized by the following:
vehicle surroundings. or exFAT formatted USB storage devices. R The starter battery is preserved.
# Activate or deactivate Collision photos. Deleting collision photos R The maximum non-operational time appears

Transferring the collision photos with the # Select Manage Collision Photos. in the driver's display.
Mercedes me app # Select Delete. R The connection to online services is interrup‐
# Select Upload Collision Photos. All collision photos will be deleted. ted.
# Scan the QR code on the central display with If the following conditions are fulfilled, standby
the Mercedes me app. Notes on parking the vehicle for an extended mode can be activated or deactivated using the
The encrypted collision photos will then be period multimedia system:
uploaded to Mercedes me. If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six R The engine is switched off.
% Any device that can scan QR codes can be weeks, it may suffer damage through disuse. R The ignition is switched on.
used to view the collision photos in the The 12 V battery may also be impaired or dam‐
Mercedes me app. Exceeding the vehicle's displayed non-opera‐
aged by heavy discharging. tional time may cause inconvenience; i.e. it can‐
% Further information can be obtained at a not be guaranteed that the starter battery will
qualified specialist workshop. reliably start the engine.
 Driving and parking 215

Charge the starter battery in the following situa‐ Driving and driving safety systems Information on vehicle sensors and cameras
tions:
Driving systems and your responsibility Some driving and driving safety systems use
R The vehicle's non-operational time must be cameras as well as radar, lidar or ultrasonic sen‐
extended. Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems sors to monitor the area in front of, behind or
R The starter battery charge level is insufficient
which assist you in driving, parking and maneu‐ next to the vehicle.
for standby mode. vering the vehicle. The driving systems are only
aids. They are not a substitute for your attention
% Standby mode is automatically deactivated to the surroundings and do not relieve you of
when the ignition is switched on. your responsibility pertaining to road traffic law.
The driver is always responsible for maintaining
Activating/deactivating standby mode (park‐ a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle
ing the vehicle for an extended period) speed, for braking in good time and for staying
Requirements: in lane. Pay attention to the traffic conditions at
R The engine is switched off. all times and intervene when necessary. Be
aware of the limitations regarding the safe use of
Multimedia system: these systems.
4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle
Driving systems can neither reduce the risk of
5 Opening/closing accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor
# Activate or deactivate Standby Mode. override the laws of physics. They cannot always
take into account road, weather or traffic condi‐
tions.
216 Driving and parking

& WARNING Risk of accident due to Make sure that there are no overhanging loads
restricted detection performance of vehi‐ protruding into the detection range.
cle sensors and cameras If there is damage to a bumper or the radiator
grille, or after an impact, have the function of
If the area around vehicle sensors or cam‐ the sensors checked at a qualified specialist
eras is covered, damaged or dirty, certain workshop. Have damage or stone chipping in the
driving and safety systems cannot function area of the cameras on the front and rear win‐
correctly. There is a risk of an accident. dows repaired at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Keep the area around vehicle sensors
or cameras clear of any obstructions
and clean. Overview of driving systems and driving
% The radar and lidar sensors are integrated safety systems
behind the bumpers and/or behind the # Have damage to the bumper, radiator
Mercedes star. grille or stone chipping in the area of R ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
1 Multifunction camera the front and rear windows repaired at (/ page 217)
a qualified specialist workshop. R BAS (Brake Assist System) (/ page 217)
2 Cameras in the outside mirrors
3 Ultrasonic sensors Particularly, keep the areas around the sensors
R ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
and cameras free of dirt, ice or slush (/ page 218)
4 Front camera
5 Rear view camera (/ page 333). The sensors and cameras must R ESP® Crosswind Assist (/ page 219)
not be covered and the detection ranges around R ESP® trailer stabilization
them must be kept free. Do not attach additional
license plate brackets, advertisements, stickers, R EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribution)
foils or foils to protect against stone chippings in (/ page 219)
the detection range of the sensors and cameras. R STEER CONTROL (/ page 219)
R HOLD function (/ page 220)
 Driving and parking 217

R Hill Start Assist (/ page 221) R Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning conditions and can serve as a reminder to take
R ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 221) (/ page 247) extra care while driving.
R Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 241) R Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 250)
R Traffic light view (/ page 244) R PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side (/ page 59) Function of BAS
R AIRMATIC (/ page 253) Parking Package The Brake Assist System (BAS) supports your
R Rear view camera (/ page 255) emergency braking situation with additional
Driving Assistance package brake force.
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R Surround view camera (/ page 257)
(/ page 223) If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is
R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 261)
activated:
R Active Speed Limit Assist (country-depend‐ R Active Parking Assist (/ page 265)
R BAS automatically boosts the brake pres‐
ent) (/ page 227)
sure.
R Route-based speed adaptation (country- Function of ABS R BAS can shorten the braking distance.
dependent) (/ page 228)
R Active Brake Assist (/ page 236)
The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) regulates the R ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
brake pressure in critical driving situations:
R Active Steering Assist (country-dependent) The brakes will function as usual once you
R During braking, e.g. at full brake application release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
(/ page 230)
or insufficient tire traction, the wheels are
R Active Emergency Stop Assist (country- prevented from locking.
dependent) (/ page 233)
R Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured.
R Active Lane Change Assist (country-depend‐
ent) (/ page 234) If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a
R Active Stop-and-Go Assist (country-depend‐
pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake
pedal can be an indication of hazardous road
ent) (/ page 230)
218 Driving and parking

Function of ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro‐ When ESP® is deactivated, the å warning % Spinning the wheels results in a cutting
gram) lamp lights up continuously: action, which enhances traction.
R Driving stability will no longer be improved. If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up continu‐
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is ously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction.
R The drive wheels could spin.
deactivated
R ETS/4ETS traction control is still active. Observe the following information:
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® cannot carry R Warning and indicator lamps (/ page 530)
out vehicle stabilization. % When ESP® is deactivated, you are still assis‐
R Display messages (/ page 478)
# ESP® should only be deactivated in the ted by ESP® when braking.
following situations. When the ÷ warning lamp flashes, one or ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
several wheels has reached its grip limit: ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP® and
ESP® can monitor and improve driving stability R Adapt your driving style to suit the current makes it possible to pull away and accelerate on
and traction in the following situations, within road and weather conditions. a slippery road.
physical limits: R Do not deactivate ESP®. ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction by
R When pulling away on a wet or slippery road. intervening in the following ways:
R Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
R When braking. R The drive wheels are braked individually if
is necessary when pulling away.
they spin.
If the vehicle deviates from the direction desired Deactivate ESP® in the following situations to R More drive torque is transferred to the wheel
by the driver, ESP® can stabilize the vehicle by improve traction: or wheels with traction.
intervening in the following ways: R When using snow chains.
R One or more wheels are braked. Influence of drive programs on ESP®
R In deep snow.
R The engine output is adapted according to
The drive programs enable ESP® to adapt to dif‐
R On sand or gravel. ferent weather and road conditions as well as
the situation.
the driver's preferred driving style. Depending on
the selected drive program, the appropriate
 Driving and parking 219

ESP® mode will be activated. You can select the can otherwise be found in the Assistance Function of STEER CONTROL
drive programs using the DYNAMIC SELECT menu.
STEER CONTROL assists you by transmitting a
switch (/ page 199). # Select ESP. noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in
# Select On or å Off. the direction required for vehicle stabilization.
Function of ESP® Crosswind Assist This steering recommendation is given in the fol‐
ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFF warn‐
lowing situations:
ESP® Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument
side wind and helps the driver to keep the vehi‐ cluster. R Both right wheels or both left wheels are on
cle in the lane: a wet or slippery road surface when you
Observe any information on warning lamps and
brake
R ESP® Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle display messages which may be shown in the
speeds between approx. 47 mph (75 km/h) instrument cluster. R The vehicle starts to skid
and 125 mph (200 km/h) when driving System limits
straight ahead or cornering slightly. Function of EBD STEER CONTROL may be impaired or may not
R The vehicle is stabilized by means of individ‐ function in the following situations:
ual brake application on one side. Electronic Breakforce Distribution (EBD) is char‐
acterized by the following: R ESP® is deactivated.
R Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure R ESP® is malfunctioning.
Activating/deactivating ESP® (Electronic Sta‐ on the rear wheels.
bility Program) R The steering is malfunctioning.
R Improved driving stability when braking,
Multimedia system: especially on bends. If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted
4 © 5 ß 5 y further by the electric power steering.
% ESP® can only be activated/deactivated
using quick access when at least one other
function is available in quick access. ESP®
220 Driving and parking

HOLD function Activating/deactivating the HOLD function R The electric parking brake is released.
HOLD function R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deacti‐
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to the vated.
The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a stand‐
HOLD function being active when you
still without requiring you to depress the brake R The transmission is in position h, k or i.
leave the vehicle
pedal, e.g. while waiting in traffic.
If the vehicle is only braked with the HOLD Activating the HOLD function
The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsi‐
bility for the vehicle safely standing still remains function it could, in the following situations, # Depress the brake pedal, and after a short

with the driver. roll away: time quickly depress further until the ë
R If there is a malfunction in the system or display appears in the driver's display.
System limits in the power supply. # Release the brake pedal.
The HOLD function is only intended to provide
R If the HOLD function is deactivated by
assistance when driving and is not a sufficient Deactivating the HOLD function
means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling depressing the accelerator pedal or brake # Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away.
away when stationary. pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
or
R The incline must not be greater than 30%. # Always secure the vehicle against roll‐ # Depress the brake pedal until the ë dis‐
ing away before you leave it. play disappears from the driver's display.
Requirements: The HOLD function is deactivated in the follow‐
R The vehicle is stationary. ing situations:
R The driver's door is closed or the seat belt on R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐
the driver's side is fastened. ted.
R The engine is running or has been automati‐ R The transmission is shifted to position j.
cally switched off by the ECO start/stop R The vehicle is secured with the electric park‐
function. ing brake.
 Driving and parking 221

In the following situations, the vehicle is held by R The electric parking brake is released. ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monoto‐
transmission position j and/or by the electric nous journeys, e.g. on highways and trunk roads.
parking brake: This gives you enough time to move your foot If indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in
from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal concentration on the part of the driver are
R The seat belt is unfastened and the driver's and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll
door is opened. detected, the system suggests taking a break.
away.
R The vehicle is switched off. ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration
R There is a malfunction in the system or the
due to the vehicle rolling away in time. The system is not a substitute for a well-
power supply is insufficient. rested and attentive driver. On long journeys,
After a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer take regular breaks in good time that allow for
In addition, the Brake Immediately message may
holds the vehicle. adequate recuperation.
appear in the driver's display and a horn tone
may sound at regular intervals. # Swiftly move your foot from the brake
You can choose between two settings:
# Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly
pedal to the accelerator pedal. Do not
R Standard: normal system sensitivity.
leave the vehicle when it is being held
until the warning message disappears. R Sensitive: increased system sensitivity: the
by Hill Start Assist.
The HOLD function is deactivated. driver is warned earlier and the attention
# Additionally secure the vehicle against rolling level detected by the system is adapted
away. ATTENTION ASSIST accordingly.
Function of ATTENTION ASSIST with micro‐ If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentra‐
Function of Hill Start Assist sleep detection tion are detected, the ATTENTION ASSIST: Take
Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short % The microsleep detection subfunction is only a Break! warning appears in the driver display.
time when pulling away on a hill under the fol‐ available in combination with the driver cam‐ You can acknowledge the message and take a
lowing conditions: era. break where necessary. If you do not take a
break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to
R The transmission is in position h or k.
detect increasing lapses in concentration, you
222 Driving and parking

will be warned again after a minimum of - Deactivated: display 1 is hidden. restarted. The last selected sensitivity level
15 minutes. - Activated but not operational: display 1 remains stored.
is gray. System limits
- Activated and operational: display 1 is ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 37 mph
green. (60 km/h) to 124 mph (200 km/h) speed range.
If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the The microsleep detection function is available at
attention level and cannot issue a warning, the a speed of 12.5 mph (20 km/h) and above.
System Suspended message appears. Particularly in the following situations, ATTEN‐
If the system, which uses the driver camera, TION ASSIST only functions in a restricted man‐
detects indicators of microsleep, the ATTEN- ner and warnings may be delayed or not occur:
TION ASSIST Nodding Off Take a Break! warning R If you have been driving for less than approx‐
message appears in the driver display and a imately 30 minutes.
The following information is displayed in the
driver display: warning tone sounds simultaneously. This warn‐ R If the road condition is poor (uneven road
ing message must be confirmed by Touch Con‐ surface or potholes).
R The length of the journey since the last break trol. It is recommended that you take a break
R If there is a strong side wind.
R The attention level determined by ATTENTION immediately.
ASSIST: R If you adopt a sporty driving style (high cor‐
If a warning is given in the driver display, the
nering speeds or high rates of acceleration).
- The more segments 2 of the circle dis‐ multimedia system offers to search for a rest
played, the higher the detected attention area. You can select a rest area and start naviga‐ R If the Steering Assist function of Active Dis‐
level. tion to this rest area. tance Assist DISTRONIC is active.
- Fewer segments 2 are displayed in the ATTENTION ASSIST with microsleep detection is R If the clock is set to the incorrect time.
circle as the attention level decreases. activated automatically when the engine is R If you change lanes and vary your speed fre‐
R Microsleep detection 1 status: quently In active driving situations.
 Driving and parking 223

Microsleep detection also does not function Setting ATTENTION ASSIST vehicle in front are set and saved using the
when the driver camera cannot detect the eyes Multimedia system: steering wheel.
of the driver, as a result of the following factors, 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is available in
for example: 5 Assistance 5 ATTENTION ASSIST the 15 mph (20 km/h) to 130 mph (210 km/h)
R The driver's eyes are covered due to the speed range.
steering column position, for example. Setting the sensitivity
Other features of Active Distance Assist
# Tap the current setting.
R Poor ambient light. DISTRONIC:
# Select Standard or Sensitive.
R Some types of eyeglasses or sunglasses. R Adjusts the driving style depending on the
R The driver's line of vision is outside the driver Activating/deactivating the microsleep selected drive program (fuel-saving, comfort‐
camera's field of vision. warning able or dynamic) (/ page 198)
# Activate/deactivate Microsleep Warning. R Initiates acceleration to the stored speed if
Also observe any information regarding display the turn signal indicator is switched on to
messages that can be displayed in the driver dis‐ change to the overtaking lane
play. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R Reacts to stationary vehicles detected in
The tiredness and alertness assessment of Function of Active Distance Assist urban speed ranges (except bicycles and
ATTENTION ASSIST with microsleep detection is DISTRONIC motorcycles)
reset and restarted when continuing the journey Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC maintains the
in the following situations: R Takes one-sided overtaking restrictions into
set speed on free-flowing roads. If vehicles in account on highways or on multi-lane roads
R If you switch off the engine. front are detected, the set distance is main‐ with separate roadways (country-dependent)
R If you unfasten your seat belt and open the tained, if necessary, until the vehicle comes to a
driver's door (e.g. to change drivers or take a halt. The vehicle accelerates or brakes depend‐ Additional function available in certain coun‐
break). ing on the distance to the vehicle in front and tries: if Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has
the set speed. The speed and distance to the braked the vehicle to a standstill, it can automat‐
ically follow the vehicle in front when driving off
224 Driving and parking

again within 30 seconds. If a critical situation is Driver display in the Assistance menu R ç (green): Active Distance Assist
detected in the surrounding area when driving DISTRONIC active, specified distance set and
off, such as a person in the vehicle path, a visual vehicle detected
and acoustic warning is given indicating that the
driver must now take control of the vehicle. The The stored speed is shown under the permanent
vehicle is not accelerated any further. status display and highlighted on the speedome‐
ter. When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is ready to passive, the status display is grayed out.
pull away when the green ç vehicle symbol
flashes cyclically. If the speed of the vehicle in front or the speed
adjustment is less than the stored speed due to
Observe the notes on driving systems and your the route event ahead, the segments in the
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐ speedometer light up.
nize dangers (/ page 215).
1 Vehicle in front When the set specified distance is increased or
2 Distance indicator decreased, the Ò display briefly appears
3 Set specified distance under the vehicle in the permanent status dis‐
play.
Vehicle detected in front 1 is highlighted in % On highways or high-speed major roads, the
green. It may also be in the lane to the left of green ç vehicle symbol is displayed cycli‐
your vehicle in situations where it is not permit‐ cally when the vehicle is ready to pull away.
ted to overtake on the right, for example on high‐
ways. % If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond
the setting of the Active Distance Assist
Permanent status display DISTRONIC, the system is switched to pas‐
R ç (white): Active Distance Assist sive mode. The ç Suspended message
DISTRONIC selected, specified distance set appears on the driver display.
 Driving and parking 225

System limits & WARNING Risk of accident from acceler‐ & WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf‐
The system may be impaired or may not function ation or braking by Active Distance ficient deceleration by Active Distance
in the following situations, for example: Assist DISTRONIC Assist DISTRONIC
R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accel‐ Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes
glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying erate or brake in the following cases, for your vehicle with up to 50% of the possible
ambient light. example: deceleration. If this deceleration is not suffi‐
R The windshield in the area of the camera is R If the vehicle pulls away using Active Dis‐ cient, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered. tance Assist DISTRONIC. alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning.
R If the radar sensors are dirty or covered. # Adjust your speed and maintain a suita‐
R If the stored speed is called up and is
R In parking garages or on roads with steep considerably faster or slower than the ble distance from the vehicle in front.
uphill or downhill gradients. currently driven speed. # Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take

R If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as R If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no evasive action.
bicycles or motorcycles. longer detects a vehicle in front or does
not react to relevant objects. & WARNING Risk of accident if detection
In addition, on slippery roads, braking or accel‐ function of Active Distance Assist
erating can cause one or several wheels to lose # Always carefully observe the traffic con‐
DISTRONIC is impaired
traction and the vehicle could then skid. ditions and be ready to brake at all
Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in times. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not
these situations. # Take into account the traffic situation react or has a limited reaction:
before calling up the stored speed. R when driving on a different lane or when
changing lanes
226 Driving and parking

R to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or sta‐ # To operate Active Distance Assist

tionary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles DISTRONIC: press the respective button
with only one finger or swipe on the control
R to complex traffic conditions panel.
R to oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic
Activating/deactivating Active Distance
As a result, Active Distance Assist Assist DISTRONIC
DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor # Press H.
intervene in such situations.
# Always observe the traffic conditions Activating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
# To activate without a stored speed: on
carefully and react accordingly.
control panel 1 press M on the upper
Operating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC section or N on the lower section or
J. Remove your foot from the accelerator
Requirements: pedal.
R The electric parking brake is released.
or
R ESP® is activated and is not intervening.
J Adopts the stored/detected speed # To activate with a stored speed: press
R The transmission is in position h. ± Deactivates the variable limiter/Active J. Remove your foot from the accelerator
R All the doors are closed. Distance Assist DISTRONIC pedal.
R Check of the radar sensor system has been 1 Increases/decreases the speed The current speed is stored and maintained
successfully completed. K Increases/decreases the specified dis‐ by the vehicle.
R Snow chain mode is not active tance
(/ page 359). H Activates/deactivates Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC
 Driving and parking 227

Increasing or reducing the speed # Press J. If the lowest level is already selected, the
# To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards The limit speed displayed in the driver display selection jumps to the highest level.
from the bottom of control panel 1. is adopted as the stored speed. The vehicle
R The stored speed is increased by 1 mph adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in Deactivating Active Distance Assist
(1 km/h). front, but only up to the stored speed. DISTRONIC
# To decrease the stored speed: swipe down‐ & WARNING Risk of an accident due to
Pulling away with Active Distance Assist
wards from the top of control panel 1. DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC being
R The stored speed is decreased by 1 mph active when you leave the driver's seat
# Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
(1 km/h).
and remove your foot from the brake pedal. If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle
or # Press J. is being braked by Active Distance Assist
# Briefly press M on the upper section or DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away.
or
N on the lower section of control panel # Always deactivate Active Distance
# Depress the accelerator pedal briefly and
1. Assist DISTRONIC and secure the vehi‐
The stored speed is increased or reduced by firmly.
The functions of Active Distance Assist cle to prevent it from rolling away
5 mph (10 km/h). before you leave the driver's seat.
DISTRONIC continue to be carried out.
or
# Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.
Reducing or increasing the specified dis‐ # Press ±.
tance from the vehicle in front
# Press M on the upper section of control % If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP®
# Press K.
panel 1. intervenes, Active Distance Assist
The Ò display appears under the ç DISTRONIC is deactivated.
Adopting the limit speed shown in the driver status display.
display The specified distance is reduced by one Function of Active Speed Limit Assist
# Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC. level. If speed limit change between 12 mph
(20 km/h) and 80 mph (130 km/h) is detected
228 Driving and parking

and the automatic adoption of speed limits is Observe the notes on driving systems and your R in wet conditions or in fog
active, it will be automatically adopted as the responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐
stored speed (/ page 230). nize dangers (/ page 215). R when towing a trailer
The driven speed is adjusted when the vehicle is System limits # Ensure that the driven speed complies
level with the traffic sign at the latest. In the The system limits of Traffic Sign Assist apply to with traffic regulations.
case of signs indicating entry into an urban area, the detection of traffic signs (/ page 241). # Adjust the driving speed to suit current
the speed is adapted according to the speed traffic and weather conditions.
permitted within the urban area. The speed limit Speed limits below 12 mph (20 km/h) are not
display in the driver display is always updated automatically adopted by the system as the
stored speed. Temporary speed restrictions (e.g. Function of route-based speed adaptation
when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign. When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is acti‐
for a certain time or due to weather conditions)
If you are driving on German highways and there cannot be properly detected by the system. The vated, the vehicle speed will be adapted accord‐
is no speed limit, the system uses the speed maximum permissible speed applying to a vehi‐ ingly to the route events ahead. Depending on
stored on an unlimited stretch of road as the cle with a trailer is not detected by the system. the drive program selected, the vehicle negoti‐
recommended speed. If you do not alter the ates a route event ahead in a fuel-saving, com‐
stored speed on an unlimited stretch of road, the Adjust the speed in these situations. fortable or dynamic manner. When the route
recommended speed is 80 mph (130 km/h). event has been passed, the vehicle accelerates
& WARNING Risk of accident due to Active again to the stored speed. The set distance to
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been Speed Limit Assist adapting the vehicle's
put into passive mode by pressing the accelera‐ the vehicle in front, vehicles detected ahead and
speed speed restrictions ahead are taken into account.
tor pedal, only speed limits which are higher
than the set speed are adopted. The speed adopted by Active Speed Limit Route-based speed adaptation can be activated
Assist may be too high or incorrect in some in the multimedia system (/ page 230).
The maximum permissible speed does not take individual cases, such as:
the road condition and current weather and traf‐ The following route events are taken into
fic conditions into account. Adjust your speed R at speed limits below 12 mph (20 km/h) account:
accordingly, when necessary. R Curves
 Driving and parking 229

R Roundabouts confirmed and further speed adjustment is acti‐ In these situations the driver must intervene
R T-intersections vated. accordingly.
R Turns and exits Speed adaptation is canceled in the following
cases: & WARNING Risk of accident in spite of
R Traffic jams ahead (only with Live Traffic ) route-based speed adaptation
R If the turn signal indicator is switched off
Also, the speed is reduced if the turn signal indi‐ before the route event and it is therefore Route-based speed adaptation can malfunc‐
cator to change lanes is switched on and one of assumed that the route event is not relevant tion or be temporarily unavailable in the fol‐
the following situations is detected: to the driver. lowing situations:
R Turning off at intersections R If the driver depresses the accelerator or R If the driver does not follow the calcula‐
R Driving on slowing-down lanes brake pedal during the process. ted route
R Driving on lanes adjacent to slowing-down R If map data is not up-to-date or available
System limits
lanes Route-based speed adaptation does not take R In the event of roadworks
right of way regulations into account. The driver R In bad weather or road conditions
The driver is responsible for choosing the right
is responsible for complying with road traffic R If the accelerator pedal is depressed
speed and observing other road users. This
regulations and driving at a suitable speed.
applies in particular to intersections, round‐ R In the event of electronically displayed
abouts and traffic lights, as route-based speed In difficult conditions, the speed selection made speed limitations
adaptation does not brake the vehicle to a stand‐ by the system may not always be suitable:
still. R Unclear roads # Adapt the speed to the traffic situation.
If a corresponding route event is detected while R Road narrowing
route guidance is active, the first speed adjust‐ R Varying maximum permissible speeds in indi‐
ment is carried out automatically. If the turn sig‐ vidual lanes, for example at toll stations
nal indicator is switched on, the selected route is
R Wet road surfaces, snow or ice
230 Driving and parking

Setting Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R Variable limiter Active Traffic Jam Assist activates automatically
driving styles when all of the following conditions are met:
Further information about Active Distance
Requirements: Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 226). R You are in a traffic jam on a freeway or high-
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐ speed major road.
% Further information on speed adaptation
ted. (/ page 228). R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐
ted and active (/ page 226).
Multimedia system: Function of Active Traffic Jam Assist R Active Steering Assist is activated and active
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance Active Traffic Jam Assist helps you when in traf‐ (/ page 232).
5 Driving 5 Active Distance Assist fic jams on multi-lane roads with separate road‐
ways by automatically pulling away within R You are traveling no faster than 35 mph
Selecting a driving style 60 seconds and with moderate steering maneu‐ (60 km/h).
# Select DYNAMIC SELECT based , Dynamic or vers. It orients itself using the vehicle in front When Active Traffic Jam Assist is active the ¬
Comfort. and lane markings. Active Traffic Jam Assist status display appears in the driver display.
automatically maintains a safe distance from the
Setting speed adaptation vehicle in front and vehicles cutting in. System limits
# Select When cornering etc. or For limits. Active Traffic Jam Assist requires you, as the The system limitations of Active Distance Assist
When these functions are active, the vehicle driver, to keep your hands on the steering wheel DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist apply to
speed is adjusted according to a route event at all times so that you are able to intervene at Active Traffic Jam Assist (/ page 230).
ahead or to speed limits detected by Traffic any time to correct the course of the vehicle and
Sign Assist. keep it in lane. Active Steering Assist
% When one of the following systems is active, Observe the notes on driving systems and your
the detected speed can be manually adopted Function of Active Steering Assist
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐ Active Steering Assist is only available up to a
as the speed limit: nize dangers (/ page 215). speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). The system helps
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
you to stay in the center of the lane by means of
 Driving and parking 231

moderate steering interventions. Depending on enlarged and flashing. Once the system is play message 1 appears in the driver display. If
the speed driven, Active Steering Assist uses the passive, the Ø symbol is shown as gray in the driver still does not steer the vehicle, or
vehicles ahead and lane markings as a refer‐ the driver display. gives no confirmation to the system, a warning
ence. tone sounds in addition to the visual warning
Contact detection message.
% Depending on the country, in the lower The driver is required to keep their hands on the
speed range Active Steering Assist can use steering wheel at all times and be able to inter‐ If the driver does not react to this warning for a
the surrounding traffic as a reference. If nec‐ vene at any time to correct the course of the considerable period, an emergency stop is initi‐
essary, Active Steering Assist can then also vehicle and keep it in lane. The driver must ated (/ page 233).
provide assistance when driving away from expect a change from active to passive mode or The warning is not issued or is stopped as soon
the center of the lane. vice versa at any time. as the system detects that the driver has
If the detection of lane markings and vehicles touched the steering wheel.
ahead is impaired, Active Steering Assist Touch detection may be limited or inoperative in
switches to passive mode. The system provides the following situations:
no support in this case.
R The driver is wearing gloves.
Permanent status display in the driver dis‐ R There is a steering wheel cover on the steer‐
play ing wheel.
Ø Gray: activated and passive
Ø Green: activated and active If Active Steering Assist detects that a system
limit has been reached, a visual warning is
Ø Red, flashing: prompt to the driver to issued and a warning tone sounds.
actively confirm or transition from active
If the system detects that the driver has not Observe the notes on driving systems and your
to passive status, system limit detected
steered the vehicle for a considerable period of responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐
% During the transition from active to passive time or has removed their hands from the steer‐ nize dangers (/ page 215).
status, the Ø symbol is shown as ing wheel, an optical warning is given first. Dis‐
232 Driving and parking

System limits R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too # Always keep your hands on the steering
Active Steering Assist has a limited steering tor‐ short and thus the lane markings cannot be wheel and observe the traffic carefully.
que for lateral guidance. In some cases, the detected.
steering intervention is not sufficient to keep the
# Always steer the vehicle paying atten‐
R The road is narrow and winding. tion to traffic conditions.
vehicle in the lane.
R There are obstacles on the lane or projecting
The system may be impaired or may not function out into the lane, such as object markers.
in the following instances: & WARNING Risk of accident if Active
The system does not provide assistance in the Steering Assist unexpectedly intervenes
R There is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain,
fog, heavy spray, greatly varying ambient following conditions: The detection of lane markings and objects
light or strong shadows on the road. R On very tight curves and when turning. may malfunction and cause unexpected
R There is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, R When crossing intersections. steering interventions.
direct sunlight or reflections. # Steer according to traffic conditions.
R At roundabouts or toll plazas.
R Insufficient road illumination. R When actively changing lane without switch‐ Activating/deactivating Active Steering
R The windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged ing on the turn signal indicator. Assist
or covered in the vicinity of the camera, e.g. R When the tire pressure is too low.
by a sticker. Requirements:
& WARNING Risk of accident if Active R ESP® is activated, but is not intervening.
R No, or several, unclear lane markings are
present for one lane, or the markings change Steering Assist unexpectedly stops func‐ R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐
quickly, for example, in a construction area tioning ted.
or at intersections. If the system limits of Active Steering Assist Multimedia system:
R The lane markings are worn away, dark or are reached there is no guarantee that the 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance
covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow. system will remain active or will keep the 5 Driving
vehicle in lane.
# Select Ø Act. Steering Asst. .
 Driving and parking 233

Function of Active Emergency Stop Assist ing wheel, visual warning 1 is issued. If the Depending on the country, a lane change to the
driver still does not steer the vehicle, or gives no adjacent right-hand lane is carried out, if possi‐
Active Emergency Stop Assist uses touch sen‐ ble.
confirmation to the system, a warning tone
sors to monitor whether the driver holds the
sounds in addition to the visual warning mes‐ % It is only possible to change across one lane
steering wheel and initiates an emergency stop if
sage. and only into the right-hand lane, and not
necessary.
Also observe the instructions on the contact onto the hard shoulder.
If Active Steering Assist is deactivated, the
detection of Active Steering Assist Depending on the country, the hazard warning
accelerator and brake pedal are monitored as
(/ page 230). lights are switched on when automatic braking is
well as the steering wheel. A warning is issued
when the steering wheel is not being held or Active Emergency Stop Assist issues the follow‐ initiated.
when a pedal is not depressed, and the vehicle ing warnings in order: When the vehicle is stationary, the following
is in danger of leaving the lane. R Display message 1 appears in the driver actions are carried out:
display. R The vehicle is secured with the electric park‐
R In addition to display 1 a warning tone ing brake.
sounds. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is ended
R The Beginning Emergency Stop message R The vehicle is unlocked.
appears in the driver display, a continuous
R If possible, an emergency call is placed to
warning tone sounds, the vehicle no longer
accelerates, and there is a slight, repeated the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center
tensioning of the seat belt. Before automatic braking is initiated, you can
R The vehicle speed is reduced in increments cancel Active Emergency Stop Assist by steer‐
until it is at a standstill. Sharp brake impul‐ ing.
If the system detects that the driver has not ses are also produced.
steered the vehicle for a considerable period of
time or has removed their hands from the steer‐
234 Driving and parking

You can cancel the intervention by Active Emer‐ For the detection of vehicles and other obsta‐ R No vehicle or obstacle is detected in the
gency Stop Assist after automatic braking is ini‐ cles, observe the system limits of the following adjacent lane.
tiated by one of the following actions: functions: R Active Lane Change Assist is selected in the
R Accelerating or braking: the emergency stop R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC multimedia system.
is canceled, but the warning message, warn‐ (/ page 223) R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active
ing tone and power steering remain active R Active Steering Assist (/ page 230) Steering Assist are switched on and active.
R Steering: power-assisted steering is can‐ R Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 234)
celed, the warning message and warning
tone remain active and the vehicle continues
to be braked Active Lane Change Assist
% Active Emergency Stop Assist can initiate an Function of Active Lane Change Assist
emergency stop a maximum of three times Active Lane Change Assist supports the driver
within one ignition cycle. After this Active when changing lanes and is activated by indicat‐
Steering Assist and Active Emergency Stop ing briefly.
Assist are deactivated for that ignition cycle. For this, the following conditions must be fulfil‐
led:
System limits
If Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect R You are on a freeway or high-speed major
lane markings, Active Emergency Stop Assist is road.
not active. R The vehicle speed is between approximately
45 mph (70 km/h) and 110 mph (180 km/h).
R The adjacent lane is separated by a broken
lane marking.
 Driving and parking 235

Driver display in the Assistance menu play appears along with gray arrows in the driver Active Lange Change Assist can be canceled in
display. various situations, including the following:
If no vehicle or obstacle is detected in the adja‐ R Change in the surrounding conditions (e.g.
cent lane and a lane change is permitted, the detected obstacle).
lane change begins after the driver has indicated R The driver steers with too much force or in
briefly. The lane change is shown to the driver the opposite direction.
with a flashing green arrow next to the ±
R The driver moves the turn signal indicator in
steering wheel symbol. Green arrow 1 is dis‐
played in the appropriate adjacent lane in the the opposite direction.
Assistance menu in the driver display. The Lane R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or Active
Change to the Left message, for example, also Steering Assist is deactivated.
appears. R The vehicle cannot make the lane change as
If a lane change is not possible directly after the planned.
driver has activated the turn signal indicator Cancellation of Active Lane Change Assist is dis‐
because an obstacle has been detected, for played as follows:
example, the arrow will also flash in green next
to the ± steering wheel symbol and the adja‐ R The arrow in the selected direction of travel
1 Green arrow: lane change initiated cent lane will continue to be monitored. When turns red.
2 Red arrow: lane change canceled the lane becomes free, a lane change will be car‐ R A corresponding message appears on the
ried out and the Lane Change to the Left mes‐ driver display.
When Active Lane Change Assist is available, the sage, for example, appears in the driver display. R In certain circumstances a warning tone
± display appears along with green arrows in If the green arrows stop flashing, the lane sounds.
the driver display. If the system has been activa‐ change must be activated again.
ted but is not currently available, the ± dis‐
236 Driving and parking

& WARNING Risk of accident when chang‐ Observe the traffic conditions and steer Observe the notes on driving systems and your
ing lane to an occupied adjacent lane and/or brake if necessary. responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐
nize dangers (/ page 215).
Lane Change Assist cannot always clearly System limits
detect if the adjacent lane is free. Selecting Active Lane Change Assist
The system limitations of Active Steering Assist Multimedia system:
The lane change might be initiated although apply to Active Lane Change Assist 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance
the adjacent lane is not free. (/ page 230).
5 Driving
# Before changing lanes, make sure that The system may also be impaired or may not
the neighboring lane is free and there is # Select the function.
function in the following situations:
no danger to other road users. R The sensors are damaged, covered or dirty
# Monitor the lane change. (/ page 215). Active Brake Assist
R The exterior lighting shows a malfunction. Function of Active Brake Assist
& WARNING Risk of accident if Lane R The system does not detect a suitable road, Active Brake Assist consists of the following
Change Assist unexpectedly stops func‐ for example, in tight curves. functions:
tioning
R The vehicle is on a construction site. R Distance warning function
If the system limitations for Lane Change
% The Active Lane Change Assist sensors R Autonomous braking function
Assist have been reached, there is no guar‐
antee that the system will remain active. adjust automatically while a certain distance R Situation-dependent braking assistance
is being driven after the vehicle has been R Evasive Steering Assist (country-specific)
Lane Change Assist cannot then assist you
delivered. Active Lane Change Assist is
by applying steering torque.
unavailable or only partially available during Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize the
# Always monitor the lane change and this teach-in process, and no arrows are dis‐ risk of a collision with vehicles, cyclists or
keep your hands on the steering wheel. played next to the Ø Active Steering pedestrians or to reduce the effects of such a
Assist symbol. collision.
 Driving and parking 237

If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of colli‐ % Vehicles with active ambient lighting: if
sion, a warning tone sounds and the L dis‐ Warning Support is activated, the Active
tance warning lamp lights up. Brake Assist warning is also accompanied by
ambient lighting (/ page 165).
If you do not react to the warning, autonomous
braking can be initiated in critical situations.
In particularly critical situations, Active Brake
Assist can also initiate autonomous braking
directly. In this case, the warning lamp and warn‐
ing tone occur simultaneously with the braking
application. If autonomous braking or situation-dependent
braking assistance has occurred, pop up 1
If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situa‐ appears in the driver display and then automati‐
tion or apply the brake during autonomous brak‐ cally goes out after a short time.
In the Assistance menu, an insufficient distance ing, situation-dependent braking assistance
1 to the vehicle in front is displayed in red. If occurs. The brake pressure increases up to max‐ If the autonomous braking function or the situa‐
you further reduce the distance, the vehicle in imum full-stop braking if necessary. tion-dependent braking assistance is triggered,
front is also highlighted in red. When the system additional preventive measures for occupant
detects a risk of collision, red radar waves 2 protection (PRE-SAFE®) may also be initiated.
appear in front of the vehicle.
Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: depending on the
country, an additional haptic warning occurs in
the form of slight, repeated tensioning of the
seat belt.
238 Driving and parking

& WARNING Risk of an accident caused by The individual subfunctions are available in R At speeds up to approximately 75 mph
limited detection performance of Active the following speed ranges: (120 km/h) when approaching crossing vehi‐
Brake Assist The distance warning function issues a warning cles, pedestrians and cyclists.
in the following situations: R At speeds up to approximately 62 mph
Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly (100 km/h) when approaching stationary
identify objects and complex traffic situa‐ R From approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), if your
vehicle is critically close to a vehicle, cyclist vehicles.
tions.
or pedestrian, you will hear an intermittent R At speeds up to approximately 50 mph
Active Brake Assist is only an aid. The driver warning tone and the L distance warning (80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead.
is responsible for maintaining a sufficiently lamp lights up in the driver's display.
safe distance to the vehicle in front, vehicle R At speeds up to approximately 43 mph
speed and for braking in good time. Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: depending on (70 km/h) when approaching stationary
the country, an additional haptic warning pedestrians and cyclists.
# Always pay careful attention to the traf‐
fic situation; do not rely on Active Brake occurs in the form of slight, repeated ten‐ Autonomous braking function
Assist alone. sioning of the seat belt.
The autonomous braking function can intervene
# Be prepared to brake or swerve if nec‐ If possible, brake immediately or maneuver to from speeds of approximately 4 mph (7 km/h):
essary. avoid the obstacle. R At speeds up to approximately 155 mph
Distance warning function (250 km/h) when approaching vehicles
% If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, æ ahead.
appears in the driver display. The distance warning function can assist you by
means of an intermittent warning tone and a R At speeds up to approximately 75 mph
If the system is unavailable or the functions
are restricted, Ä appears. warning lamp: (120 km/h) when approaching crossing vehi‐
R At speeds up to approximately 155 mph
cles, pedestrians and cyclists.
Also observe the system limits of Active Brake
(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles R At speeds up to approximately 62 mph
Assist.
ahead. (100 km/h) when approaching stationary
vehicles.
 Driving and parking 239

R At speeds up to approximately 50 mph Canceling a brake application of Active Brake R Autonomous braking application in order to
(80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead. Assist reduce the severity of an accident
R At speeds up to approximately 43 mph You can cancel a brake application of Active Evasive Steering Assist
(70 km/h) when approaching stationary Brake Assist at any time by:
pedestrians and cyclists. R Fully depressing the accelerator pedal or & WARNING Risk of accident despite Eva‐
Situation-dependent braking assistance with kickdown. sive Steering Assist
Situation-dependent braking assistance can R Releasing the brake pedal. Evasive Steering Assist cannot always recog‐
intervene from speeds of approximately 4 mph Active Brake Assist may cancel the brake appli‐ nize objects or complex traffic situations
(7 km/h): cation when one of the following conditions is clearly.
R At speeds up to approximately 155 mph fulfilled: Moreover, the steering support provided by
(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles R You maneuver to avoid the obstacle.
Evasive Steering Assist is not sufficient to
ahead. avoid a collision.
R There is no longer a risk of collision.
R At speeds up to approximately 75 mph # Always pay careful attention to the traf‐
R An obstacle is no longer detected in front of fic situation; do not rely on Evasive
(120 km/h) when approaching crossing vehi‐
cles, pedestrians and cyclists. your vehicle. Steering Assist alone.
R At speeds up to approximately 62 mph Reaction to oncoming road users # Be prepared to brake or swerve if nec‐
(100 km/h) when approaching stationary Active Brake Assist can also react to detected essary.
vehicles. oncoming road users: # End the support by actively steering in
R At speeds up to approximately 50 mph R Reaction up to speeds of approximately non-critical situations.
(80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead. 62 mph (100 km/h) # Drive at an appropriate speed if there
R At speeds up to approximately 43 mph R Warning for oncoming road users through are pedestrians close to the path of
(70 km/h) when approaching stationary acoustic warning and warning lamp your vehicle.
pedestrians and cyclists.
240 Driving and parking

Evasive Steering Assist has the following charac‐ The system may be impaired or may not func‐ R If a pedestrian or cyclist is not detected as
teristics: tion, particularly in the following situations: such, e.g. due to special clothing or other
R Detection of pedestrians, cyclists and vehi‐ R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is objects.
cles. glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying R If the driver's seat belt is not fastened.
R Assistance through power-assisted steering if ambient light. R On curves with a tight radius.
it detects a swerving maneuver. R If the sensors are dirty, fogged up, damaged
or covered. (/ page 215) % The Active Brake Assist sensors adjust auto‐
R Activation by an abrupt steering movement matically while a certain distance is being
during a swerving maneuver. R If the sensors are impaired due to interfer‐ driven after the vehicle has been delivered.
R Assistance during swerving and straightening ence from other radar sources, e.g. strong Active Brake Assist is unavailable or only
of the vehicle. radar reflections in parking garages. partially available during the teach-in proc‐
R Reaction from a speed of approximately R If a loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire has ess.
13 mph (20 km/h) up to a speed of approx‐ been detected and displayed.
Setting Active Brake Assist
imately 68 mph (110 km/h). R In complex traffic situations where objects
cannot always be clearly identified. Requirements:
The steering support of Evasive Steering Assist R The ignition is switched on.
can be canceled at any time by counter steering. R If pedestrians, cyclists or vehicles move
quickly into the sensor detection range. Multimedia system:
System limits R If road users are hidden by other objects or 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance
Full system performance is not available for a are located close to other objects. 5 Avoid collision 5 Active Brake Assist
few seconds after switching on the ignition or
after driving off. R If the typical outline of a pedestrian or cyclist # Select the desired setting.
cannot be distinguished from the back‐ The setting is retained when the engine is
If the system is unavailable or the functions are ground.
restricted, the Ä warning lamp appears in the next started.
driver's display.
 Driving and parking 241

Deactivating Active Brake Assist In some countries, the system can provide you Messages in the driver display
% It is recommended that you always leave with further functions and can warn you when
Active Brake Assist activated. you are approaching pedestrian crossings or
when you are about to drive past stop signs or
# Select Off.
red lights unintentionally.
The distance warning function, the autono‐
mous braking function and the Evasive Steer‐ The camera also detects and analyzes traffic
ing Assist are deactivated. signs with a restriction indicated by an additional
sign (e.g. when wet).
When the engine is next started, the medium
setting is automatically selected. Traffic Sign Assist only visualizes selected signs
in the driver display. Actual traffic signs and
% If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the speed limits have priority over traffic signs and
æ symbol appears in the status bar of the speed limits shown in the driver display.
multifunction display. 1 Permissible speed
Also observe the following information: 2 Permissible speed when there is a restriction
R Select a speed adapted to the traffic, sur‐ 3 Additional sign with restriction
Traffic Sign Assist
roundings and weather conditions
Function of Traffic Sign Assist R Observe actual traffic signs
The system can show up to two traffic signs in
Traffic Sign Assist detects traffic signs with the the driver display simultaneously. The system
R Observe applicable traffic rules and regula‐ always prioritizes displaying speed limits. Up to
multifunction camera and compares this with
information in the digital navigation map. It tions one traffic sign with a maximum permissible
assists you by displaying detected speed limits Observe the notes on driving systems and your speed can be shown in the head-up display. If
and overtaking restrictions in the driver display responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐ two speed signs are shown in the driver display,
and in the head-up display. The system can issue nize dangers (/ page 215). for example, when speed limits are detected, the
a warning when you exceed the maximum per‐ value of left-hand speed limit 1 is transmitted
missible speed. to the limiter or Active Distance Assist
242 Driving and parking

DISTRONIC for adoption and is shown in the Traffic Sign Assist can detect following addi‐
head-up display. tional signs 3 and, if necessary, analyze the
relevance of the restrictions using other vehicle
sensors:
R In wet conditions Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all coun‐
R On slippery road surfaces
tries. If the vehicle is in a country where Traffic
Sign Assist is not supported, this is displayed
R In fog continuously.
R Temporary restrictions % Also observe the information on display mes‐
R Exits sages in Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 478).
R Limits for vehicle/trailer combinations Warning when the maximum permissible
Traffic Sign Assist also uses data from the digital speed is exceeded
Examples of traffic signs which can be displayed street map in the navigation system. Therefore, The system can warn you if you unintentionally
when you leave or enter a municipality or change exceed the maximum permissible speed. To do
Traffic Sign Assist can detect and display follow‐
roads, on a freeway exit or entry road for exam‐ this, you can specify in the multimedia system
ing traffic signs 1:
ple, or after you turn at an intersection, the dis‐ by how much the maximum permissible speed
R Speed limitations can be exceeded before a warning is issued. You
play in the driver display can be updated without
R End of the speed limit a traffic sign having been detected. can set the warning to visual only (the traffic
R Overtaking restrictions sign flashes three times in the driver display) or
If Traffic Sign Assist cannot determine the cur‐ visual and acoustic, including a warning tone.
R Play streets rently applicable maximum permissible speed
R Recommended speeds (e.g. due to missing signs), the following display Additional functions of Traffic Sign Assist
appears in the driver display: (country-specific)
Warning for no-entry signs: Traffic Sign Assist
can warn you if you drive the wrong way down a
 Driving and parking 243

section of road, for example on freeway entry R At least one of the red traffic lights detected R If the windshield in the area of the multifunc‐
roads or one-way streets. is on the front passenger side beside the tion camera is dirty, or if the camera is fog‐
Warning at pedestrian crossings: if you vehicle's own lane. ged up, damaged or covered.
approach pedestrian crossings, provided that R The traffic lights are in the following R If traffic signs are difficult to detect, e.g. due
pedestrians are in the danger zone or are moving sequence (from top to bottom): red, yellow, to dirt, snow, ice, insufficient lighting or driv‐
towards it, Traffic Sign Assist can warn you up to green. ing too close to the vehicle in front, or
a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h). because they are covered, faded, damaged,
% If the function is available, you can activate badly positioned or twisted.
Warning at stop signs: Traffic Sign Assist can or deactivate the warnings at pedestrian
warn you up to a speed of approximately 44 mph crossings, stop signs and red lights in the R Active traffic signs with LED displays may not
(70 km/h) if you are about to drive past a stop Traffic Sign Assist menu under Further Warn- be detected correctly or at all due to techni‐
sign unintentionally. For this to be possible, the ings (/ page 244). cal factors, such as transmission frequency.
signs must be clear, for example if the system R If the information on the navigation system's
detects more than one stop sign, or a stop sign %
digital map is incorrect, incomplete or out of
can be confirmed using the digital navigation System limits date.
map. No warning can be issued if several differ‐ The system may be impaired or may not function
ent signs are detected.
R If signs or the road layout is ambiguous, e.g.
particularly in the following situations: traffic signs in roadworks, at exits and
Warning at red lights: Traffic Sign Assist can R If visibility is poor, e.g. due to insufficient illu‐ ramps, in adjacent lanes or parallel roads.
warn you up to a speed of approximately 44 mph mination of the road, highly variable shade R If signs do not conform to the standard.
(70 km/h) if you are about to drive through a red conditions, rain, snow, fog, swirling dust or
light unintentionally. R If signs or road layouts are specific to the
heavy spray. country and deviate from the route guidance
The following conditions must be fulfilled: R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, in the navigation system, e.g. at or beyond
R Several traffic lights have been detected. direct sunlight or reflections. construction sites.
R All traffic lights detected are red.
244 Driving and parking

R After sharp turns and tight bends, when traf‐ Activating or deactivating further functions Multimedia system:
fic signs are outside the camera's field of of Traffic Sign Assist 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance
vision. # Activate or deactivate Further Warnings. 5 Assistance 5 Traffic Light View
R If you overtake vehicles with traffic signs The available functions are activated or deac‐ % This function is not available in all countries.
which are affixed or attached to them. tivated.
If the vehicle is in first position at a traffic light,
Setting Traffic Sign Assist Setting the type of warning for further func‐ the camera image with traffic light view is shown
Multimedia system: tions in the central display.
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance # Select ´ next to Further Warnings. When the vehicle pulls away, the camera image
5 Assistance 5 Traffic Sign Assist is faded out.
# Select Visual & Audible or Visual.
# Activate D or deactivate E Traffic
Activating or deactivating the speed warning
# Activate or deactivate Speed Limit Warning. Traffic light view Light View.
Information on the traffic light view Using other available functions
Setting the type of warning
The traffic light view supports the driver when # Select ´.
# Select ´ next to Speed Limit Warning.
waiting in front of a red light by displaying the # Select On Request or Automatic.
# Select Visual & Audible or Visual. camera image on the central display. The cam‐ If On Request is set and a traffic light view is
Setting the warning threshold era image is displayed when the driver is the first available, the Tap Here for Traffic Light View
vehicle in front of the red light and faded out message is displayed. The camera image is
This value determines the speed at which a
when the vehicle drives off. shown after confirmation of the message.
warning is issued when exceeded.
# Set the desired speed under Warning Thresh- Displaying traffic light view If Automatic is set, the camera image is auto‐
old. matically displayed when the traffic light view
Requirements:
is available.
R The Traffic Light View option is switched on.
R A traffic light view is available.
 Driving and parking 245

Overview of the traffic light data service If neither function is active, the remaining
time until the next green phase for the lane
& WARNING Risk of an accident or injury straight ahead is displayed.
due to distraction, incorrect or missing % Use of the traffic light information service
data requires the regular transmission of vehicle
The traffic light information display is an aid positions and driving directions to
and cannot replace the observation of the Mercedes-Benz. The data is immediately
actual driving situation. anonymized by Mercedes-Benz and forwar‐
# Keep the actual traffic situation con‐
ded to the provider of the traffic light infor‐
mation service. The vehicle positions and
stantly in view when approaching a traf‐ driving directions are deleted after a very
Example representation in the driver display
fic light and when changing lanes. short time (a few seconds) and are not per‐
# Avoid prolonged viewing of the Instru‐ The display is hidden about five seconds before manently saved.
ment Display and Head-up Display. the traffic lights change to green.
If you do not want to transmit the vehicle
% The display also goes out in the following positions and driving directions, you have
The traffic lights and countdown of the remain‐ cases: the following options:
ing time 1 until the next green phase are R When turning off before the intersection
shown in the driver display. R You deactivate the service in the
into a cross or side street Mercedes me portal.
R When turning before the intersection R You have the service deactivated at an
% The direction arrows are displayed depend‐ authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
ing on the following functions: % This traffic light data service is only available
R A turn signal is set in certain cities and regions.
R A lane is recommended during active
route guidance
246 Driving and parking

The function is supported under the following A set turn signal left or right and lane recom‐ Observe the notes on driving systems and your
conditions: mendations during active route guidance are responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐
R The vehicle is equipped with a multimedia taken into account for the display. nize dangers.
system featuring navigation and a communi‐ The service is for information purposes only and System limits
cation module with an activated, integrated is not linked to any other vehicle functions, sys‐
SIM card. tems or components. Please note that the dis‐ The display does not appear in the following sit‐
played data is not available in all traffic areas uations, for example:
R You have a user account for the Mercedes
and may be incorrect. R There is no traffic light data available.
me Portal.
Certain light signal systems automatically adapt R The time remaining until the next green
R The vehicle has been connected with the
user account. their switching times to the current traffic situa‐ phase is less than ten seconds.
tion. This can lead to a sudden change in the R Emergency vehicles or local public transport
R The navigation services option is available,
countdown display. are located in the vicinity of the intersection.
subscribed to and activated in the Mercedes
me Portal. The driver display is shown after selecting the R The data transmission from the vehicle has
Assistance menu. If another menu is selected, been interrupted.
R The traffic light data service is within the
the traffic light countdown is not displayed. R Light signal systems are located in a con‐
scope of the navigation service.
Also observe the following information: struction site area or are being maintained.
The current vehicle position and the direction of R select a speed adapted to the traffic, sur‐ R The light signal system is malfunctioning.
travel are transmitted via the communication roundings and weather conditions
module and aligned with the data from the traf‐ R The subscription to the service has expired.
fic light data service provider. The provider gath‐ R observe actual traffic signs
ers data from traffic lights which transmit their R observe applicable traffic rules and regula‐
changing phases. When the vehicle approaches tions
an intersection with networked traffic lights,
data is transmitted to the vehicle.
 Driving and parking 247

Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning If the turn signal indicator remains on, the dis‐
play in the outside mirror flashes for all other
Function of Active Blind Spot Assist with exit
detected vehicles, but no further warning tone
warning
sounds. If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no
Active Blind Spot Assist uses radar sensors to warning is given.
monitor the area up to 130 ft (40 m) behind and
10 ft (3 m) next to your vehicle. % Vehicles with active ambient lighting: if
Warning Support is activated, the Active
The system can detect vehicles traveling from
Blind Spot Assist warning is also accompa‐
speeds of approximately 8 mph (12 km/h) and
nied by ambient lighting (/ page 165).
issue a warning if they move into the monitoring
range. Observe the notes on driving systems and your
Driver display in the Assistance menu responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐
Status display in the driver's display
If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring nize dangers (/ page 215).
¸ Gray: the system is activated but inopera‐
range, the red warning lamp lights up in the cor‐
tive. & WARNING Risk of accident despite
responding outside mirror. In the Assistance
¸ Green: the system is activated and opera‐ menu, the lamp in outside mirror 1 also lights Active Blind Spot Assist
tional. up red, and the lane in which the vehicle is Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to the
detected is hatched out. following:
If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range R if you overtake a vehicle too closely so
and you switch on the turn signal indicator in the that it is in the blind spot area
corresponding direction, a warning tone sounds R if vehicles traveling at a much faster
twice and the warning lamp flashes red in the speed approach and then overtake
respective outside mirror. Red radar waves 2
are displayed next to your vehicle in the assis‐ Active Blind Spot Assist may not give warn‐
tance graphic. ings or intervene in such situations.
248 Driving and parking

# Always pay careful attention to the traf‐ If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range, available once the warning lamp in the outside
fic situation and maintain a safe dis‐ the red warning lamp lights up in the corre‐ mirror flashes three times.
tance at the side of the vehicle. sponding outside mirror. The exit warning is only an aid and not a substi‐
If a vehicle occupant pulls the door handle on tute for the attention of vehicle occupants. The
Exit warning the side of the warning, a warning tone sounds responsibility for opening and closing the doors
The exit warning is an additional function of twice and the ambient lighting in the respective and for leaving the vehicle remains with the vehi‐
Active Blind Spot Assist and can warn vehicle door and the warning lamps in the correspond‐ cle occupants.
occupants attempting to leave the stationary ing outside mirror flash red.
vehicle about approaching vehicles. System limits
Vehicles with MBUX Interior Assistant: the
visual warning begins as soon as the hand of a Active Blind Spot Assist may be limited in the fol‐
& WARNING Risk of accident despite exit vehicle occupant moves in to the area of the lowing situations, in particular:
warning door. R if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors
The exit warning neither reacts to stationary % Vehicles with ambient lighting or active are obscured
objects nor to vehicles approaching you at a ambient lighting: theWarning Support of R in poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
greatly differing speed. the ambient lighting can be activated and snow
The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these deactivated (/ page 165). R if there are narrow vehicles, e.g. bicycles or
situations. % The warning assistance can differ depending motorbikes
# Always pay particular attention to the on the equipment and may vary according to R if the road has very wide or narrow lanes
traffic situation when opening the doors the setting. R if vehicles are not driving in the center of
and make sure there is sufficient clear‐ The exit warning is only available when Active their lane
ance. Blind Spot Assist is activated and up to a maxi‐
mum of three minutes after the ignition has Warnings may be issued in error when driving
been switched off. The exit warning is no longer close to crash barriers or similar continuous lane
borders. Always make sure that there is suffi‐
 Driving and parking 249

cient distance to the side for other traffic or & WARNING Risk of accident despite # Always pay careful attention to the traf‐
obstacles. brake application of Active Blind Spot fic situation and maintain a safe dis‐
Warnings may be interrupted when driving along‐ Assist tance at the side of the vehicle.
side long vehicles, for example trucks, for a pro‐
longed time. A course-correcting brake application cannot
always prevent a collision.
Active Blind Spot Assist is not operational when
# Always steer, brake or accelerate your‐
reverse gear is engaged.
self, especially if Active Blind Spot
Additionally, the exit warning may be limited in Assist warns you or makes a course-
the following situations: correcting brake application.
R when the sensors are covered by adjacent # Always maintain a safe distance at the
vehicles in narrow parking spaces sides.
R when people approach the vehicle
R in the event of stationary or slowly moving & WARNING Risk of accident despite
objects Active Blind Spot Assist If a course-correcting brake application occurs,
the red warning lamp flashes in the outside mir‐
Function of the brake application of Active Active Blind Spot Assist does not react in the ror and a warning tone sounds. In addition, a dis‐
Blind Spot Assist following situations: play 1 indicating the danger of a side collision
If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side R If you overtake vehicles at a high speed. appears in the driver's display.
impact in the monitoring range, a course-cor‐ R If vehicles approach and overtake you at
recting brake application is carried out. This is In rare cases, the system may make an inappro‐
a greatly different speed. priate brake application. This brake application
designed to help you avoid a collision.
may be interrupted at any time if you steer
The course-correcting brake application is availa‐ Active Blind Spot Assist may not give warn‐
slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate.
ble in the speed range between approximately ings or intervene in such situations.
20 mph (30 km/h) and 125 mph (200 km/h).
250 Driving and parking

System limits Activating/deactivating Active Blind Spot The system can intervene in the following situa‐
Either a course-correcting brake application Assist tions:
appropriate to the driving situation, or none at Multimedia system: R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects a lane
all, may occur especially in the following situa‐ 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance marking.
tions: 5 Avoid collision 5 Active Blind Spot Assist
R One of your front wheels goes over a lane
R Vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are # Select Active Blind Spot Assist. marking.
located on both sides of your vehicle. # Select On or Off. If you activate the turn signal indicator, a steer‐
R A vehicle approaches too closely on the side. ing intervention does not occur on the corre‐
R You have adopted a sporty driving style with Active Lane Keeping Assist sponding side.
high cornering speeds. If the system detects an obstacle, such as
R You brake or accelerate significantly.
Function of Active Lane Keeping Assist another vehicle in the adjacent lane, a steering
Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in intervention occurs regardless of the turn signal
R A driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP® front of your vehicle by means of the multifunc‐
or Active Brake Assist. indicator. If you leave the lane without using the
tion camera (/ page 215) and can warn you turn signal indicator, but an obstacle is detected
R ESP® is deactivated. before you leave your lane unintentionally. The in your lane, a steering intervention does not
system can guide you back into your lane occur.
R A loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire is
through a course-correcting steering interven‐
detected.
tion and additionally warns you with vibration
pulses in the steering wheel. Active Lane Keep‐
ing Assist is available in the speed range
between 37 mph (60 km/h) and 124 mph
(200 km/h).
 Driving and parking 251

ous lane markings or only continuous lane mark‐ Vehicles without Driving Assistance
ings (/ page 253). Package: if both lane markings are
simultaneously shown in red in the status
Status displays for Active Lane Keeping display, Active Lane Keeping Assist has
Assist initiated an emergency stop
ï White: Active Lane Keeping Assist is (/ page 233).
deactivated.
ï Yellow: there is a malfunction. Please Active Lane Change Assist display in the
also observe the display messages. "Assistance" menu
ð Gray: Active Lane Keeping Assist is acti‐
Display 1 will appear in the driver display and a vated, but not operating.
warning tone will sound in the following situa‐ ð Green: Active Lane Keeping Assist is
tions: activated and operating. If the system is
R A steering intervention by Active Lane Keep‐ operational on only one side, the lane
ing Assist lasts longer than approximately ten marking is shown in green on the corre‐
seconds. sponding side.
R The system carries out two or more steering ð Red: Active Lane Keeping Assist has gui‐
interventions within approximately three ded you back into your lane with a
minutes without any steering intervention course-correcting steering intervention.
from the driver. The status display will flash if there is If the front wheel of the vehicle drives over a
also a haptic warning in the steering detected lane marking, this will be highlighted
In the Active Lane Keeping Assist settings, you wheel. The lane marking is shown in red red in the Assistance menu in the driver's dis‐
can set the sensitivity of the system and set the only on the side for which there is a play.
level of support. Additionally, you can set warning.
whether the system should react to discontinu‐
252 Driving and parking

% Vehicles with active ambient lighting: if The system may be impaired or may not function Observe the notes on driving systems and your
Warning Support is activated, the Active particularly in the following situations: responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐
Lane Keeping Assist warning is also accom‐ R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi‐ nize dangers (/ page 215).
panied by ambient lighting (/ page 165). cient illumination of the road, if there are Activating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping
System limits highly variable shade conditions or in rain, Assist
snow, fog or heavy spray. Multimedia system:
In the following situations, no lane-correcting
R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance
steering intervention occurs but rather a warning
in the steering wheel, depending on the situa‐ the sun or reflections. 5 Avoid collision
tion: R If the windshield in the area of the multifunc‐ 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist

R You clearly and actively steer, brake or accel‐ tion camera is dirty, or if the camera is fog‐ # Switch the function on or off.
erate. ged up, damaged or covered.
R If there are no lane markings, or several Alternatively, Active Lane Keeping Assist can be
R If a driving safety system intervenes, such as
unclear lane markings are present for one activated and deactivated in the Assistance
ESP®, Active Brake Assist or Active Blind menu.
Spot Assist. lane, e.g. around roadworks.
R If the lane markings are worn, dark or cov‐ % After starting the engine, the settings are
R You have adopted a sporty driving style with
ered. country-specific.
high cornering speeds or high rates of accel‐
eration. R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too
R When ESP® is deactivated.
short and thus the lane markings cannot be
detected.
R If a loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire has
R If the lane markings change quickly, e.g.
been detected and displayed. lanes branch off, cross one another or
merge.
R If the road is very narrow and winding.
 Driving and parking 253

Setting Active Lane Keeping Assist AIRMATIC Suspension setting depending on the drive
Multimedia system: program
Function of AIRMATIC
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance Drive program C and B:
AIRMATIC is an air suspension system with varia‐
5 Avoid collision
ble damping for improved driving comfort. The R The suspension setting is firmer.
5 Active Lane Keeping Assist all-round level control system ensures the best R The vehicle is set to low level -1.
possible suspension and constant ground clear‐
Setting the sensitivity ance, even with a laden vehicle. When driving at R The vehicle is lowered to low level -2 when
# Select ´. speed, the vehicle is lowered automatically to driving at speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
# Select Early, Med. or Late. improve driving safety and to reduce fuel con‐ R When driving at speeds below 50 mph
sumption. You also have the option of manually (80 km/h), the vehicle is raised again to low
The last selected setting will be adopted the next adjusting the vehicle level. level -1.
time the engine is started.
AIRMATIC includes the following components Drive program A and ;:
% The standard setting for this function is and functions:
dependent on the country. R The suspension setting is comfortable.
R Air suspension with automatic all-round level
R The vehicle is set to the normal level.
Activating or deactivating assistance on dis‐ control
continuous lane markings R The vehicle is lowered to low level -1 when
R Speed-dependent lowering to reduce fuel
# Select Advanced Support. consumption driving at speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
R The vehicle is lowered to low level -2 when
R Increased vehicle level for greater ground
The last selected setting will be adopted the next driving at speeds above 100 mph
time the engine is started. clearance, selected via the multimedia sys‐
tem (160 km/h).
% The standard setting for this function is R When driving at speeds below 75 mph
R ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System with
dependent on the country. (120 km/h), the vehicle is raised again to low
constant damping force adjustment)
level -1.
254 Driving and parking

R When driving at speeds below 50 mph the wheel arches when the vehicle is # Make sure that there are no obstacles
(80 km/h), the vehicle is raised again to the being lowered. such as curbs underneath or in the
normal level. immediate vicinity of the body when the
Setting the vehicle level & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped vehicle is being lowered.
due to the vehicle lowering
& WARNING Risk of accident because Requirements:
Vehicles with AIRMATIC or level control: R The vehicle has been started.
vehicle level is too high
when you unload luggage or leave the vehi‐ R The vehicle is not moving faster than 37 mph
Driving characteristics may be impaired. cle, the vehicle first rises slightly and then (60 km/h).
The vehicle can drift outwards, for example, returns to the set level shortly afterwards.
R When the trailer socket is contacted (trailer/
when steering or cornering. You or anyone else in the vicinity of the bicycle rack): the vehicle is not moving faster
# Choose a vehicle level which is suited wheel arches or the underbody could thus than 19 mph (30 km/h).
to the driving style and the road surface become trapped.
conditions. The vehicle can also be lowered after being Multimedia system:
locked. 4 © 5 ß 5 y
& WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehi‐ # When leaving the vehicle, make sure
Raising the vehicle
cle lowering that nobody is in the vicinity of the
wheel arches or the underbody.
# Select t.
When lowering the vehicle, people could The indicator lamp lights up continuously.
become trapped if their limbs are between The vehicle is raised to off-road level +1.
the vehicle body and the tires or underneath * NOTE Damage due to vehicle lowering
the vehicle. Parts of the body could be damaged when Your selection is saved. The off-road level +1 set
# Make sure no one is underneath the the vehicle is lowered. remains stored even after the ignition has been
vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of switched off.
 Driving and parking 255

The vehicle is lowered again in the following sit‐ Rear view camera
uations:
Function of the rear view camera
R When driving faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). The rear view camera monitors the area behind
R When driving briefly between 37 mph your vehicle. When you engage reverse gear, the
(60 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h). image from the rear view camera is automati‐
R After selecting a different drive program cally shown in the central display.
using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch. The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a
In this case, the vehicle is adjusted to the substitute for your attention to the surroundings.
height of the active drive program. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and
parking remains with you. Make sure that there
R When the trailer socket is contacted (trailer/
are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the
bicycle rack): the vehicle is moving faster maneuvering area while maneuvering and park‐
than 19 mph (30 km/h). ing.
Lowering the vehicle % The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a
# Select t. mirror image, as in the inside rearview mir‐
The indicator lamp goes out. ror. Camera Viewsmenu (top view)
The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the 1 Menu Parking Assist
active drive program. 2 Rear view camera with top view
% In the Sport drive program, only the normal 3 Wide-angle view
vehicle level is possible when the trailer 4 To activate/deactivate Parking Assist
socket is contacted (trailer/bicycle rack). PARKTRONIC (/ page 264)
5 Warning display of Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC (/ page 261)
256 Driving and parking

6 Guide lines at a distance of approximately The rear view camera will not function or will
1.6 ft (0.5 m), 3.3 ft (1.0 m), 5 ft (1.5 m) and only partially function in the following situations:
9.9 ft (3.0 m) from the rear area R You are driving forwards at a speed greater
7 Path marking the course the tires will take than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h).
with the current steering wheel angle R The trunk lid is open.
(dynamic)
R The weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy
8 Driven surface depending on the current
rain, snow, fog, storm or spray.
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
R The ambient light conditions are poor, e.g. at
9 Guide line at a distance of approximately
1.0 ft (0.3 m) from the rear area night or if light is shining into the camera.
R The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or fog‐
% When Active Parking Assist is active, lane ged up. Observe the notes on cleaning the
markings 7 are displayed in green rear view camera (/ page 333).
(/ page 265).
R The camera or rear of your vehicle is dam‐
aged. In this case, have the camera and its
Wide-angle view position and setting checked at a qualified
specialist workshop.
System limits
% Do not use the rear view camera in these
If the system is not ready for operation, the Sys-
types of situations. You could otherwise
tem Inoperative message appears in the central
injure others or collide with objects when
display.
parking the vehicle.
The field of vision and other functions of the rear
view camera may be restricted due to additional
 Driving and parking 257

accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. The surround view camera includes the following Menu overview Camera Views
license plate bracket or bicycle rack). cameras and evaluates their images:
% The contrast of the display may be impaired R Rear view camera
by direct sunlight or by other light sources, R Front camera
e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this
R Two side cameras in the outside mirrors
case, pay particular attention.
% Have the display repaired or replaced if, for The cameras are only an aid and may show a dis‐
example, pixel errors considerably restrict its torted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly
use. or not show them at all. They are not a substi‐
tute for your attention to the surroundings. The
responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking
Surround view camera remains with you. Make sure that there are no
Function of the surround view camera persons, animals or objects etc., in the maneu‐
The surround view camera is a system that con‐ vering area while maneuvering and parking.
sists of four cameras which cover the immediate
surroundings of the vehicle. The cameras assist
you when you are parking, for example, or at
exits with reduced visibility. 1 Menu Parking Assist
If this function is activated, the image from the 2 Top view with image from the front camera
rear view camera is automatically displayed in 3 Top view with image from the rear view cam‐
the central display when reverse gear is selec‐ era
ted . 4 3D view, left-hand side of the vehicle
5 3D view, right-hand side of the vehicle
6 3D auto view
258 Driving and parking

7 To activate/deactivate Parking Assist Function of the guide lines % When Active Parking Assist is active, lanes
PARKTRONIC (/ page 264) and guide lines are displayed in green
8 To set the GPS activation point instead of yellow (/ page 265).
(/ page 261) Top view with image from the front or rear
9 To switch between standard and wide-angle view camera
view If this function is activated, the image from the
% In all views, the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC rear view camera is automatically displayed in
warning display is shown (/ page 261). the central display when reverse gear is selec‐
ted .

1 Guide lines at a distance of approximately

1.6 ft (0.5 m), 3.3 ft (1.0 m), 5 ft (1.5 m) and
9.9 ft (3.0 m) from the rear area
2 Path marking the course the tires will take
with the current steering wheel angle
(dynamic)
3 Driven surface depending on the current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
4 Guide line at a distance of approximately 1 Warning display of Parking Assist
1.0 ft (0.3 m) from the rear area PARKTRONIC (/ page 261)
2 Your vehicle from above
3 Lane indicating the route the vehicle will
take at the current steering wheel angle
 Driving and parking 259

3D view, left/right-hand side of the vehicle

* NOTE Risk of accident due to objects

being severely distorted in the display or
not displayed at all
Due to the projection of the cameras,
objects in the 3D views may be severely dis‐
torted when displayed or not displayed at all.
# Make sure that there are no persons,
animals or objects etc. in the maneu‐
vering area while maneuvering and 1 Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC 1 Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
parking. (/ page 261) (/ page 261)
2 Guide lines
In the 3D view, left/right-hand side of the vehi‐
cle, the virtual camera moves to the respective In the 3D auto view, the virtual camera moves to
side of the vehicle. When you change the trans‐ the standard perspective, facing forward from
mission position, the view is automatically adap‐ the rear above the roof. The view changes auto‐
ted. matically when approaching obstacles.
3D auto view If you touch the touchscreen, the view changes
% The area behind the vehicle is not displayed to 3D view with free rotation. You can turn, tilt
as a mirror image as is usual in the 3D and zoom the views by touch.
views.
260 Driving and parking

Wide-angle view The surround view camera will not function or injure others or collide with objects when
will only partially function in the following situa‐ parking the vehicle.
tions: For technical reasons, the standard height of the
R You are driving forwards at a speed greater vehicle may be altered if the vehicle is carrying a
than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h). heavy load and can result in inaccuracies in the
R The doors are open. guide lines and in the display of the generated
images.
R An outside mirror is not completely folded
out. The field of vision and other functions of the
camera system may be restricted due to addi‐
R The trunk lid is open.
tional attachments on the vehicle (e.g. license
R The weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy plate bracket, bicycle rack).
rain, snow, fog, storm or spray. % The contrast of the display may be impaired
1 Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
R The ambient light conditions are poor, e.g. at by abrupt, direct sunlight or by other light
(/ page 261)
2 To switch between standard and wide-angle
night or if light is shining into the camera. sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In
view R The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or fog‐ this case, pay particular attention.
ged up. % Have the display repaired or replaced if, for
System limits R If cameras or vehicle components in which example, pixel errors considerably restrict its
If the system is not ready for operation, the Sys- the cameras are installed are damaged. In use.
tem Inoperative message appears in the central this event, have the cameras, their positions
display. See the notes on cleaning the surround view
and their setting checked at a qualified spe‐ camera (/ page 333).
cialist workshop.
% Do not use the surround view camera under
such circumstances. You could otherwise
 Driving and parking 261

Calling up the surround view camera views Selecting a view for the surround view cam‐ # Select E.
using the button era (reverse gear) # Confirm the prompt.
# Shift to reverse gear.
The activation position is deleted.
# Select the desired view in the multimedia
system (/ page 257). Opening the camera cover of the rear view
camera
Surround view camera with GPS - managing Multimedia system:
activation positions 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance
Multimedia system: 5 Camera
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance
# Select Open Camera Cover.
5 Camera
% The camera cover closes automatically after
Renaming an activation position some time or after an ignition cycle.
% You can determine activation positions in the
Camera Views menu. (/ page 257) Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
# Select an activation position.
Function of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
# Select ´. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic
# Enter a name and confirm. parking assistance system which monitors the
# Press button 1. The activation position is saved under the area surrounding your vehicle and shows you the
# Select the Camera Views menu. new name. distance between the vehicle and a detected
# In the multimedia system, select the desired obstacle visually and audibly.
Deleting an activation position
view (/ page 257). The passive side impact protection also warns
# Select Manage Activation Positions. you of obstacles to the side. These must be
# Select an activation position. detected beforehand by the sensors in the front
262 Driving and parking

or rear bumper while driving by them. If you Messages in the central display As soon as Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is opera‐
steer in the direction of a detected obstacle and tional, the respective areas of the display are
there is a risk of a lateral collision, a warning is shown in blue.
issued. The passive side impact protection can 1 Operational, front and rear
be activated and deactivated via the multimedia
system. 2 Operational, all around
In order for front or rear obstacles to the side to 3 Operational, all around and obstacle detec‐
be displayed, the vehicle must first travel a dis‐ ted
tance of at least half a vehicle length. Once the The color of the display changes depending on
vehicle has traveled one vehicle length, obsta‐ the distance to the detected obstacle:
cles on all sides can be shown. R Blue: > 3.3 ft (1 m) (no obstacles detected)
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is
Vehicles with surround view camera R Yellow: approx. 3.3 ft (1 m) - 2.2 ft (0.7 m)
not a substitute for your attention to the sur‐
roundings. The responsibility for safe maneuver‐ R Orange: approx. 2.2 ft (0.7 m) - 1.2 ft
ing and parking remains with you. Make sure (0.4 m)
that there are no persons, animals or objects in R Red: < 1.2 ft (0.4 m)
the maneuvering area while maneuvering and
parking in/exiting parking spaces. Vehicles with surround view camera: the
boundary line shifts dynamically depending on
the position and distance of the obstacles detec‐
ted.
Depending on the distance to the obstacle
detected, an intermittent warning tone also
sounds. You can set the timing of the warnings
Vehicles with rear view camera in the multimedia system. In the Warn Early set‐
 Driving and parking 263

ting, the system warns you from a distance of

3.3 ft (1 m), in the standard setting only from
1.2 ft (0.4 m).

Optionally, obstacles detected by Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC from a distance of approximately
3.3 ft (1.0 m) in front 2 and 2.2 ft (0.7 m) on
sides 3 can also be displayed in the Head-up
Display.
Vehicles with rear view camera System limits
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessa‐
If you are not in the Camera & Parking menu and rily take into account the following obstacles:
an obstacle in the vehicle path is detected, at
Vehicles with surround view camera speeds below 8 mph (12 km/h) (vehicles with‐ R Obstacles below the detection range, e.g.
out Active Parking Assist) or 11 mph (18 km/h) persons, animals or objects.
(vehicles with Active Parking Assist), pop up win‐ R Obstacles above the detection range, e.g.
dow 1 appears in the central display. overhanging loads, overhangs or loading
ramps of trucks.
264 Driving and parking

R Pedestrians or animals approaching the vehi‐ goes out, and the é symbol appears in the # When parking or maneuvering the vehi‐
cle from the side. driver display, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may cle, pay particular attention to any
R Objects placed next to the vehicle. have been deactivated due to signal interfer‐ objects which are above or below the
ence. Start the vehicle again and check if Park‐ sensors, e.g. flower pots or drawbars.
Obstacles on the sides are not shown in the fol‐ ing Assist PARKTRONIC is working at a different The vehicle or other objects could oth‐
lowing situations, for example: location. erwise be damaged.
R You park the vehicle and switch off the igni‐ If a warning tone also sounds, it may be due to
tion. one of the following causes: Requirements:
R You open the doors. R The sensors are dirty: clean the sensors R The camera menu is open.
and observe the notes on care of vehicle R Or: Active Parking Assist is active.
After the engine is restarted, obstacles must be
detected again by driving past them before a parts (/ page 333). R Or: the PARKTRONIC pop-up window
new warning can be issued. R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has been appears.
Also observe the system limits of the following deactivated due to a malfunction: restart # Tap = in the central display.
systems: the vehicle. If the problem persists, consult a
qualified specialist workshop. If the indicator lamp is lit, Parking Assist
R Rear view camera (/ page 255)
Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator lamp is
R Surround view camera (/ page 257) not lit or the é symbol appears in the instru‐
PARKTRONIC
ment cluster, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not
Observe the information on vehicle sensors and
active.
cameras; the system otherwise cannot function * NOTE Risk of an accident from objects
properly (/ page 215). at close range % Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically
activated when the engine is started.
Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect
certain objects at close range. Alternatively, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC can be
If the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display lights
activated or deactivated in the quick access
up red for approximately 3 seconds and then
menu.
 Driving and parking 265

Setting the warning tones of Parking Assist Active Parking Assist R Parking in parking spaces that can only be
PARKTRONIC detected as such due to markings (for exam‐
Function of Active Parking Assist
Multimedia system: ple at the roadside)
Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance R Exiting a parking space parallel to the road
assistance system, which uses ultrasound with
5 Parking
the assistance of the rear view camera and sur‐ R Exiting a parking space perpendicular to the
Setting the volume or pitch of the warning round view camera. When you are driving for‐ road (optionally either left or right)
tones wards up to approximately 22 mph (35 km/h),
the system automatically measures parking Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a
# Set the desired level under Volume or Tone
spaces on both sides of the vehicle. substitute for your attention to the surroundings.
Pitch. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and
Active Parking Assist offers the following func‐ parking remains with you. Make sure that no
Activating/deactivating audio fadeout tions: persons, animals or objects etc. are in the
# Activate or deactivate Audio Fadeout. Vehicles with rear view camera maneuvering range.
The volume of the currently playing media R Parking in parking spaces parallel to the road
source is reduced during a Parking Assist If Active Parking Assist is available, the Ç
PARKTRONIC warning tone. R Backing up into parking spaces perpendicu‐ message appears in the driver display. When the
lar to the road system detects parking spaces, È appears.
or The arrows show on which side of the road
# Switch Audio Fadeout When in R on or off. Vehicles with surround view camera detected parking spaces are located. They are
The volume of the currently playing media R Parking in parking spaces parallel to the road then shown in the central display.
source is reduced when reverse gear is R Parking in parking spaces perpendicular to The parking space can be selected as desired.
engaged. the road (optionally either forwards or Depending on the location of the parking space,
Setting the time of the warnings reverse) the parking direction (rearwards or forwards)
can also be selected as desired.
# Select Time of Warning.
When Active Parking Assist is activated, the turn
# Set the time for the warning.
signal indicators are activated based on the cal‐
266 Driving and parking

culated path of your vehicle. When you are Objects located above or below the detection & WARNING Risk of accident due to
entering or exiting a parking space, the proce‐ range of Active Parking Assist, such as over‐ objects located above or below the
dure is assisted by acceleration, braking, steer‐ hanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of detection range of Active Parking Assist
ing and gear changes. trucks or the borders of parking spaces, are not
To start the parking procedure, press the c detected during measurement of the parking If there are objects above or below the
button (/ page 267). space. These are also then not taken into detection range, the following situations may
account when calculating the parking procedure. arise:
Active Parking Assist will be canceled in the fol‐ In some circumstances, Active Parking Assist R Active Parking Assist may steer too early.
lowing situations: may therefore guide you into the parking space R The vehicle may not stop in front of these
R You deactivate Parking Assist PARKTRONIC. prematurely or brake too late. objects.
R You press the c button again. Certain environmental conditions, such as snow‐
R You begin steering. fall or heavy rain, may lead to a parking space This could cause a collision.
R You engage transmission position j.
being measured inaccurately. Parking spaces # In these situations, do not use Active
that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars Parking Assist.
R ESP® intervenes. might not be identified as such or be measured
R You open the driver's door. incorrectly. Only use Active Parking Assist on Active Parking Assist can also display unsuitable
level, high-grip ground. parking spaces, e.g. parking spaces in which
System limits parking is not permitted or parking spaces on
If the exterior lighting is malfunctioning, Active unsuitable surfaces.
Parking Assist is not available.
Do not use Active Parking Assist in the following
Also observe the system limits of the following situations:
systems: R In extreme weather conditions such as ice,
R Rear view camera (/ page 255) packed snow or in heavy rain.
R Surround view camera (/ page 257)
 Driving and parking 267

R When transporting a load that protrudes Parking with Active Parking Assist
beyond the vehicle.
R If the parking space is on a steep downhill or
uphill gradient.
R When snow chains are installed.
R Directly after a tire change or when spare
tires are installed.
R If the tire pressure is too low or too high.
R If the suspension is out of alignment, e.g.
after bottoming out on a curb.
R On steep inclines of more than approximately
15%.

# Select Parking Assistance menu 2.

# Press button 1. Parking spaces 3 detected by the system are
shown in the central display.
268 Driving and parking

# Vehicles with surround view camera: to # Pay attention to objects and other road
change the parking direction, tap the selec‐ users.
ted parking space again.
# Where necessary, stop the vehicle or
# To start the parking procedure: press but‐ cancel the parking procedure with
ton 1 again. Active Parking Assist.
The vehicle drives into the selected parking
space. On completion of the parking procedure, the
Ø Active Parking Assist Finished: Take Con-
The turn signal indicator is switched on automat‐ trol of Vehicle display message appears.
ically when the parking procedure begins. You
# Secure the vehicle against rolling away.
are responsible for selecting the turn signal indi‐
cator in accordance with the traffic conditions. If When required by legal requirements or local
necessary, select the turn signal indicator conditions: turn the wheels towards the curb.
accordingly. % You can stop the vehicle and change the
transmission position during the parking pro‐
& WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi‐ cedure. The system then calculates a new
When the vehicle is stationary, indicated vehicle cle swinging out while parking or pulling vehicle path. If no new vehicle path is availa‐
path 4 into currently selected parking space out of a parking space ble, the transmission position can be
5 also appears. changed again, or the process can be can‐
While parking or exiting a parking space, the
# If parking spaces are displayed: bring the celed. You can also interrupt the parking pro‐
vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas
vehicle to a standstill. cedure by braking, for example, to let people
of the oncoming lane.
# If necessary, select another parking space.
in or out of the vehicle. The parking proce‐
This could cause you to collide with objects dure can then be continued by briefly press‐
or other road users. ing the accelerator pedal.
 Driving and parking 269

Exiting a parking space with Active Parking The turn signal indicator is automatically
Assist switched on when exiting a parking space begins
and switched off when it is completed. You are
Requirements: responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator
R The vehicle is equipped with a surround view
in accordance with the traffic conditions. If nec‐
camera. essary, select the turn signal indicator accord‐
R The vehicle has been parked with Active ingly.
Parking Assist. After the parking space has been exited, a warn‐
# Start the vehicle. ing tone and the Ø Active Parking Assist Fin-
# Press button 1. ished: Take Control of Vehicle message prompt
you to take control of the vehicle. You have to
accelerate, brake, steer and change gear your‐
self again.
If you do not react to the prompt to take control
of the vehicle, the system will brake the vehicle
# Select Parking Assistance menu 2. to a standstill.
# If necessary, change direction of exit 3.
Maneuvering assistance
# To start exiting the parking space: press
button 1 again. Function of Drive Away Assist
# If necessary, change the transmission posi‐ Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an
tion. Observe any messages displayed in the impact when pulling away. If the system detects
driver display and central display. an obstacle in the direction of travel, the vehi‐
The vehicle moves out of the parking space. cle's speed is briefly reduced to approximately
1 mph (2 km/h).
270 Driving and parking

A risk of collision may arise in the following sit‐ # Be prepared to brake or swerve as nec‐
uations, for example: essary, provided the traffic situation
R If the driver mixes up the accelerator and permits and that it is safe to take eva‐
brake pedals. sive action.
R If the driver engages an incorrect gear.
% If Drive Away Assist is not available, the
same symbol appears in gray. If the Camera System limits
R If the driver depresses the accelerator pedal & Parking menu is not opened in the central The system limits of Active Parking Assist apply
with too much force. display, the symbol and pop-up of Parking (/ page 265).
Drive Away Assist is active under the following Assist PARKTRONIC both appear. On uphill gradients, the performance of Drive
conditions: Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a sub‐ Away Assist is restricted.
R If the vehicle was stationary and the trans‐ stitute for your attention to the surroundings.
The responsibility for safe maneuvering and Function of cross traffic warning
mission position was changed to k or h. The cross traffic warning can warn you of cross‐
parking remains with you. Make sure that no
R If the vehicle has rolled less than approx‐ ing traffic when you are backing up out of a
persons, animals or objects etc. are in the
imately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) since being at a stand‐ maneuvering range. parking space. The radar sensors in the bumper
still. also monitor the area adjacent to the vehicle.
R If the detected obstacle is less than approx. & WARNING Risk of accident caused by The cross traffic warning is automatically active
3.3 ft (1.0 m) away. limited detection performance of Drive when you reverse at a speed of less than approx‐
Away Assist imately 6 mph (10 km/h).
% You can activate and deactivate Drive-away
Assist (/ page 272). Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly iden‐ If a critical situation is detected, the following
tify objects and traffic situations. symbol appears red in the selected view in the
If a critical situation is detected, the following Camera & Parking menu:
symbol appears red in the selected view in the # Always pay careful attention to the traf‐
Camera & Parking menu: fic situation; do not rely on Drive Away
Assist alone.
 Driving and parking 271

# Always pay careful attention to the traf‐ The maneuvering brake function can intervene
fic situation; do not rely on the cross under the following conditions:
traffic warning alone. R The vehicle is backing up at a speed slower
# Be prepared to brake or swerve as nec‐ than 6 mph (10 km/h).
The vehicle can be automatically braked. essary, provided the traffic situation R The camera image is shown in the central
% If the cross traffic warning is not available, permits and that it is safe to take eva‐ display (/ page 261).
the same symbol appears in gray. If the sive action.
Camera & Parking menu is not opened in the % You can activate and deactivate the maneu‐
central display, the symbol and pop-up of System limits vering brake function (/ page 272).
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC both appear. The system limits of Active Parking Assist apply If the maneuvering brake function is triggered,
The cross traffic warning is only an aid and not a (/ page 265). the following symbol appears in red in the selec‐
substitute for your attention to the surroundings. If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles ted view in the Camera & Parking menu:
The responsibility for safe maneuvering and or other objects, detection is not possible.
parking remains with you. Make sure that no In the following situations, the cross traffic warn‐
persons, animals or objects etc. are in the ing is not available:
maneuvering range.
R On inclines
% If the maneuvering brake function is not
& WARNING Risk of accident caused by Maneuvering brake function available, the same symbol appears in gray.
limited detection performance of the The maneuvering brake function can prevent col‐ If the Camera & Parking menu is not opened
cross traffic warning lisions with pedestrians when the vehicle is in the central display, the symbol and pop-up
The cross traffic warning cannot always backing up at slow speeds. If the rear view cam‐ of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC both appear.
clearly identify objects and traffic situations. era detects a person in the vehicle path, the The maneuvering brake function is only an aid. It
vehicle can be braked to a standstill. is not a substitute for your attention to the sur‐
roundings. The responsibility for safe maneuver‐
272 Driving and parking

ing and parking remains with you. Make sure The maneuvering brake function is not available tems, safe driving characteristics cannot be
that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in in the following situations: guaranteed for the towing vehicle or the towed
the maneuvering range. R On inclines vehicle. The vehicle-trailer combination may
swerve from side to side. Comply with the per‐
& WARNING Risk of accident caused by Activating/deactivating maneuvering assis‐ mitted towing methods (/ page 350) and the
limited detection by the maneuvering tance instructions for towing with both axles on the
brake function Multimedia system: ground (/ page 351).
4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance
The maneuvering brake function cannot
5 Parking
always clearly detect people. Other obstacles
are not detected by the function. # Select Maneuvering Assistance.
In these cases, the function may brake # Activate or deactivate the desired maneuver‐
unnecessarily or not brake at all. ing assistance.
# Always pay careful attention to the traf‐ % Maneuvering assistance systems must be
fic situation; do not rely on the maneu‐ active for the function of Drive Away Assist
vering brake function alone. (/ page 269) and the maneuvering brake
# Be ready to brake. function (/ page 271).

System limits
Vehicle towing instructions
Observe the system limits of the following func‐
tions: The vehicle is not suitable for the use of tow bar
systems that are used for flat towing or dinghy
R Active Parking Assist (/ page 265)
towing, for example. Attaching and using tow bar
R Surround view camera (/ page 257) systems can lead to damage on the vehicle.
R Rear view camera (/ page 255) When you are towing a vehicle with tow bar sys‐
 Driver display 273

Notes on the driver display R Status displays for the driver assistance sys‐ R The operating conditions are not in place,
tems e.g. if the outside temperature is too low or
& WARNING Risk of accident due to a R Display messages too high.
driver display malfunction R Indicator and warning lamps
If the driver display has failed or malfunc‐ R Information on Consumption and range Operating the driver display
tioned, the function restrictions applying to
safety relevant systems are not visible. The menu contents and settings can be individu‐ & WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐
ally adjusted and set. mation systems and communications
The operating safety of your vehicle may be
impaired. equipment
# Drive on carefully. Notes on the 3D driver display If you operate information and communica‐
# Have the vehicle checked immediately The 3D driver display enables a spatial represen‐ tion equipment integrated in the vehicle
at a qualified specialist workshop. tation of the content of the driver display. It is a when driving, you will be distracted from the
prerequisite that the driver be recorded by the traffic situation. This could also cause you to
If the operating safety of your vehicle is driver camera. lose control of the vehicle.
impaired, park the vehicle immediately and # Only operate this equipment when the
safely. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. System limits traffic situation permits.
The driver display shows basic information such The system may be impaired or may not function # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
as speed, engine speed, fuel level and coolant in the following situations: vehicle whilst paying attention to road
temperature. R The driver camera is deactivated or is not and traffic conditions and operate the
Additional functions available to you include the working. equipment with the vehicle stationary.
following: R The driver is outside the detection range of
the driver camera. Observe the legal requirements for the country
R Different menus, for Assistance and Naviga‐ in which you are currently driving when operat‐
tion ing the driver display.
274 Driver display

Scrolling on the menu bar one finger. Confirm the selection by pressing the # Only operate this equipment when the
Touch Control. traffic situation permits.
% To operate Touch Control 3 in the most # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
effective way, use the tip of your thumb if vehicle whilst paying attention to road
possible. You can also set the sensitivity of and traffic conditions and operate the
the Touch Control on the central display equipment with the vehicle stationary.
(/ page 294).
# Briefly press main menu button 2. Observe the legal requirements for the country
# Select a menu by swiping to the left or right in which you are currently driving when operat‐
on Touch Control 3. ing the driver display.
# Press Touch Control 3 to confirm. The following menus can be called up via the
menu bar on the driver display:
R Understated
Menus on the driver display R Sport
Notes on the menus on the driver display R Exclusive

& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐ R Classic

1 Back button
mation systems and communications R Navigation
2 Main menu button
equipment R Assistance
3 Touch Control
If you operate information and communica‐ R Service
The content of the driver display is controlled tion equipment integrated in the vehicle
using the control elements on the left side of the when driving, you will be distracted from the In some of these menus, you can choose
steering wheel. Touch Control 3 is used to navi‐ traffic situation. This could also cause you to between different display content on the center
gate in a vertical and horizontal direction with lose control of the vehicle. display area.
 Driver display 275

In most of the menus, you can use Options to The following image shows an example of the 7 Set speed in the driver assistance system
configure further settings for the menu-specific context with augmented reality. (e.g. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC)
display content. 8 Detected traffic signs (Traffic Sign Assist)
Head-up Display with navigation and aug‐
% You can find further information about the mented reality (10x5°)
possible settings and selections on the When you receive a call, the 6 Call Waiting
menus in the Digital Operator's Manual. message will appear on the Head-up Display.
System limits
Head-up Display Visibility is particularly influenced by the follow‐
ing conditions:
Function of the Head-up Display
R Seat position
The Head-up Display projects various content R Image position setting
into the driver's field of vision, for example.
R Ambient light
You can use the Head-up Display menu bar to
select different contexts, e.g.: R Wet road surfaces

R Minimal R Objects on the display cover

1 Navigation instructions
R Sport 2 Augmented reality navigation instructions R Polarization in sunglasses

R Standard 3 Navigation status displays, such as remain‐

R Augmented reality ing distance to the destination, expected
time of arrival
R ECO display
4 Active Lane Keeping Assist status
R Settings 5 Steer Assist status
R Head-up Display 6 Current speed
276 Driver display

Function of the Head-up Display with aug‐ # Always keep an eye on the actual traffic
mented reality situation when carrying out all driving
maneuvers.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to distraction as well as incorrect The Head-up Display with augmented reality
representation or interpretation of the projects content into the driver's field of vision,
display such as:
When driving, you should not base your R Information from and visualization of the nav‐
actions on the augmented reality display of igation system
the Head-up Display. R Information and visualization of the driver
# Always keep an eye on the actual traffic assistance systems, e.g. Active Distance Head-up Display with augmented reality
situation. Assist DISTRONIC (example)
# Avoid looking at the augmented reality
1 Marker of the detected vehicle in front
R Information from the menus of the driver dis‐
display of the Head-up Display for an play (Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC)
extended period of time. 2 Change-of-direction arrows for the route
(navigation)
3 Status line for driver assistance systems
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury
due to imprecise positioning of addi‐ The marker of the detected vehicle in front and
tional information the change-of-direction arrows for the route are
The additional information from the augmen‐ dynamic displays. The vehicle marker stays with
ted reality display is not a substitute for the vehicle in front, and Active Distance Assist
observing the actual driving situation. regulates your speed based on this. The change-
of-direction arrows point the way calculated by
the navigation system.
 Driver display 277

System limits # To select the menu bar of the Head-up Setting the position and brightness
Route guidance with augmented reality is not Display: swipe upwards on the left-hand # On the menu bar of the Head-up Display,
available in some situations, e.g. in the event of Touch-Control. select the Settings menu by swiping to the
poor satellite reception or roads that have not left or right.
been digitized.
# Press the left-hand Touch Control.
Visibility is influenced by the following condi‐ The current position and brightness settings
tions: will be displayed graphically on the Head-up
R Driver camera and multifunction camera Display as well as on the driver display.
recording # To adjust the position: swipe upwards or
R The extent to which the windshield in the downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
area of the multifunction camera is dirty, or if # To adjust the brightness: swipe to the right
the camera is fogged up, damaged or or left on the left-hand Touch Control.
obscured. The settings configured for position and
Further system limits of the Head-up Display # To switch between types of display con‐ brightness will be saved automatically.
(/ page 275). tent on the Head-up Display: swipe to the # Press the G or a button to exit the
left or right on the left-hand Touch Control. settings.
The Head-up Display shows a preview of the
Operating the Head-up Display % Vehicles with augmented reality func‐
selected display contents after each swipe.
tion: when the position is adjusted, the sta‐
Selecting display content of the Head-up Dis‐ # Press the a button to confirm the desired tus bar will be moved upward and the display
play via the menu bar of the driver display content. area reduced. This may impair visibility of
# Press the ò main menu button on the
Switching back to the driver display the augmented reality slightly.
left.
# Press the G or ò button.
278 Driver display

Selecting the Head-up Display with augmen‐ Switching off Switching the Head-up Display on/off
ted reality # Swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Con‐ # Select Head-up Display.
# Press the ò main menu button on the trol. The Head-up Display is activated or deactiva‐
left. # Select Head-up Display by swiping on the ted.
# To select the menu bar of the Head-up left-hand Touch Control.
Display: swipe upwards on the left-hand # Press left-hand Touch Control a. Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical
Touch-Control. system (EQ Boost technology)
or Setting the Head-up Display in the multime‐
# Press and hold the a button. dia system
# To select the Head-up Display with aug‐
Multimedia system:
mented reality: swipe to the left or right on
4 © 5 ß 5 y
the left-hand Touch-Control to activate the
desired content. Switching the 3D display for the driver dis‐
play on or off
Switching the Head-up Display on/off # Select 3D Driver Display.

Driver display: The 3D display of the driver display is

4 ©
switched on or off.
% The 3D display for the driver display is only 1 POWER shows the electric drive support.
Switching on activated when the driver camera detects 2 CHARGE shows the recuperation power of
# Swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Con‐ the driver. Otherwise, the driver display the electric motor.
trol. switches from the 3D display to the 2D dis‐
play (/ page 273). õ shows the drive system's operational read‐
Head-up Display will appear. iness.
# Press left-hand Touch Control a.
 Driver display 279

Overview of status displays on the driver È Active Parking Assist has detected a park‐ Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
display ing space (/ page 267) (/ page 162)
The status displays for the driving and driving é Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated ¬ Active Stop-and-Go Assist (/ page 230)
safety systems can be found in areas 1 to 4. (/ page 264)
Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist: Detected
ç Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC instructions and traffic signs (/ page 241).
(/ page 223)
Ò Specified distance for Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 223)
æ Active Brake Assist switched off
(/ page 240)
Ä Active Brake Assist impaired or not func‐
tioning (/ page 240)
Ø Active Steering Assist (/ page 230)
± Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 234)
ð Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 250)
Z Active Blind Spot Assist (only on assis‐
tance display) (/ page 249)
° Haptic accelerator pedal (/ page 197)
Y Pedestrian detection (only on assistance è ECO start/stop function (/ page 195)
display) ë HOLD function (/ page 220)
Ç Active Parking Assist is available _ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (/ page 161)
(/ page 267)
280 MBUX multimedia system

Overview and operation Overview of the MBUX multimedia system Further operating options:
Notes on the MBUX multimedia system R Conducting a dialog with the MBUX Voice
Assistant.
& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐ R Operating functions contact-free with the
mation systems and communications MBUX Interior Assistant.
equipment The interaction then follows intelligently,
If you operate information and communica‐ reactively or with hand or head movements.
tion equipment integrated in the vehicle R If the vehicle is equipped with a driver cam‐
when driving, you will be distracted from the era, functions can be triggered via "Look &
traffic situation. This could also cause you to Answer".
lose control of the vehicle.
1 Touch Control and control panel for the % You can find further information about oper‐
# Only operate this equipment when the
MBUX multimedia system ation as well as about applications and serv‐
traffic situation permits. ices in the Digital Operator's Manual.
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the MBUX stands for Mercedes-Benz User Expe‐
vehicle whilst paying attention to road rience. Anti-theft protection
and traffic conditions and operate the • Operating Touch Control This device is equipped with technical provisions
equipment with the vehicle stationary. 2 Central display with touch functionality to protect it against theft. Further information on
protection against theft can be obtained at an
• Home screen overview
You must observe the legal requirements for the authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
• Operating the touchscreen
country in which you are currently driving when 3 Control panel with fingerprint sensor ú,
operating the multimedia system.
switches the MBUX multimedia system on or
off Ü, switches the mute function on or
off a and adjusts the volume ø
 MBUX multimedia system 281

Home screen overview 7 Calls up applications Content sharing menu

8 Quick-access to application
9 Global menu
G Calls up previous menu
© Calls up the home screen
û Previous track or previous radio sta‐
tion
ü Next track or next radio station
Active call: display of the call duration
In the image, the applications are arranged as a
carousel. Pressing and holding on © arranges
the applications in a grid. This presentation is
also used by a smartphone, for example.
The following functions are called up in the Con‐
trol Center:
R Notifications Center
1 Status line Example: showing displays
2 Calls up user profile settings and switches R Content sharing menu 1 Calls up a menu
user R Favorites 2 Central display with active content (cover
3 Using the global search R Vehicle quick-access display)
4 Calls up the Control Center (pull down) 3 Displays animation for content sharing
5 Calls up favorites 4 Ä Bluetooth® headphones connected to
6 Displays in the status line the right rear display
282 MBUX multimedia system

5 Rear displays with active content (cover dis‐ =9Ì: swipe in the direction Using the touchscreen
play) of the arrow (navigate)
6 MBUX rear tablet a Press (confirm)
3 G Returns to the previous display
To share content, drag a display and drop it over
another display. 4 6 Makes or accepts a call
To control media playback, tap a display. 5 ~ Rejects or ends a call
6 Increase volume: swipe upwards
Reduce volume: swipe down
Operating the MBUX multimedia system
8 Switch off the sound: press
Using Touch Control 7 ß Calls up favorites (press briefly) or
adds favorites (press and hold)
8 £ Starts the MBUX Voice Assistant
You can navigate through menus and lists via the
touch-sensitive surface of Touch Control 2
using a single-finger swipe, for example:
# To enter a character: select a character 1 Fingerprint sensor
using the keyboard and press on Touch Con‐ 2 Switches the MBUX multimedia system on or
trol 2. off
# To select a menu option: scroll in a list and 3 Switches the mute function on/off
press Touch Control 2. 4 To adjust the volume
1 © Shows the home screen
# To move the digital map: swipe in any Press ± or q or swipe over the button
2 Touch Control
direction.
 MBUX multimedia system 283

# To select a menu item or entry: tap on a # To move the digital map: touch the information and examples of voice commands
symbol or an entry. touchscreen and move your finger in any can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual.
# To increase the map scale: tap twice direction. You can use the MBUX Voice Assistant to oper‐
quickly with one finger. # To save the destination in the digital ate the following functions depending on the
# To reduce the map scale: tap with two fin‐ map: touch the touchscreen and hold until a vehicle equipment:
gers. message is shown. R Telephone
# To enter characters with the keypad: tap # To call up the home screen: swipe up with R Text message and e-mail
on a button. three fingers in an application. R Navigation
# To navigate in menus: swipe up, down, left # To set the volume on a scale: touch the R Radio, media, TV
or right. touchscreen and move the finger to the left
or right. R Vehicle functions
# To use handwriting to enter characters: R Online functions
write the character with one finger on the # To call up a global menu in the applica‐
touchscreen. tions: touch the touchscreen and hold until Full functionality of the voice control system is
the Options menu appears. only available for you with activation of online
# To zoom in and out of the map: move two
fingers together or apart. voice control .
# To enlarge or reduce the size of a section Function of the MBUX Voice Assistant
of a website: move two fingers together or Using the MBUX Voice Assistant, vehicle func‐ Conducting a dialog
apart. tions and various areas of the MBUX multimedia Starting a dialog
# To turn the digital map: turn counter-clock‐ system can be operated by voice input. The # Say "Hey Mercedes" to activate the MBUX
wise or clockwise using two fingers. MBUX Voice Assistant is operational approx‐ Voice Assistant. Voice activation must be
imately half a minute after switching on the igni‐ switched on in the multimedia system.
tion and can be operated from all seats. Further
or
284 MBUX multimedia system

# Press the £ button on the multifunction # To change the system language to Eng‐ # Always have maintenance work and
steering wheel. lish (short command): "Change language repairs carried out by a qualified spe‐
A blue line appears in the MBUX multimedia to English". cialist workshop.
system. The dialog can be started. # To operate the radio: "Show me the list of
For the dialog with the MBUX Voice Assistant, radio stations." This product complies with the requirements of
you can use complete sentences of colloquial the FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 with
language as voice commands. Voice activation # To operate media: "Switch on random play-
exception of the variations according to the FDA
can also be directly combined with a voice com‐ back."
Laser Notice No. 50 from 24. June 2007.
mand, e.g. "Hey Mercedes, how fast can I # To operate vehicle functions: "Switch the
% The camera records image data for the appli‐
drive?". seat heating to level 2." cations, for example body, head and hand
Calling up help # To operate online functions: "What's the detection.
# For information about the MBUX Voice time in Sydney?" The camera converts the image data directly
Assistant: say "Hey Mercedes, what can # To ask a question about the vehicle: "Do I into meta data. No image data is saved in
you do?" have Blind Spot Assist?" the process. The data is only processed in
the vehicle and is not transmitted from the
# Digital Operator's Manual: "Show me the
vehicle.
Operator's Manual". The full extent of the Overview of the MBUX Interior Assistant The MBUX Interior Assistant is automatically
Digital Operator's Manual is available when activated whenever the engine is started.
the vehicle is stationary. & WARNING Risk of injury from the cam‐ You can set the functions individually or
era's laser radiation switch the Interior Assistant on or off.
Operating functions (examples)
# To operate the navigation: "Search for an
This product uses a classification 1 laser sys‐
tem. If the housing is opened or damaged,
Asian restaurant, but not Japanese, in South
laser radiation may damage your retina.
London."
# Do not open the housing.
# To operate the phone: "Call my father."
 MBUX multimedia system 285

The most recently active settings are stored The vehicle occupant actively requests a
in your user profile. If you switch off the Inte‐ function using a hand movement or pose.
rior Assistant, for example, this setting will
be adopted in your user profile. However you The Assistant offers functions for the following:
do not change any other active user profile R SAFETY
in which the Interior Assistant is switched The Assistant supports vehicle occupants
on. with the use of restraint systems.
The MBUX Interior Assistant detects the pres‐ R COMFORT
ence of the front vehicle occupants using a 3D
The Assistant enhances comfort by automat‐
laser camera. The Assistant interprets natural
ing functions inside the vehicle and support‐
hand, head and body movements contextually or Cameras 1 are located in the overhead control ing natural interaction with the vehicle.
upon the explicit request of the vehicle occu‐ panel.
pants. The Assistant can thus automatically trig‐ R INFOTAINMENT
The Assistant supports vehicle and infotainment
ger vehicle interior functions and assist appropri‐ functions at three interaction levels: Operating options or information are high‐
ately to the situation. lighted and/or shown on the central display
R INTELLIGENT
The Assistant recognizes driver and front as your hand approaches. The vehicle occu‐
passenger interactions. The Assistant recognizes vehicle occupants pants can carry out a favorite function with a
automatically and activates functions. hand pose.
R REACTIVE
System limits, display messages and notes
The Assistant recognizes the natural body for rectification
language of a vehicle occupant and carries The error messages are shown in the central dis‐
out functions automatically, appropriate to play.
the situation.
R CONTACTLESS
286 MBUX multimedia system

The system may be impaired or may not function Clean the outside of the camera cover with a Anticipatory exit warning (SAFETY/reactive)
in the following situations: dry or damp cotton cloth. Do not use micro‐
fiber cloths. Do not remove the cover when Requirements:
R The camera in the overhead control panel
cleaning. R The vehicle is equipped with Active Blind
may heat up due to operating conditions. As
a result the camera may switch off tempora‐ Spot Assist with exit warning.
R A vehicle occupant is very large. Clothing
rily, particularly during longer periods of being worn (gloves, hat, scarf, color of cloth‐ R Active Blind Spot Assist is activated
operation and at high outside temperatures. ing) or objects carried on a person, for exam‐ (/ page 250).
Do not touch or cover the camera and wait ple a watch with a large face, are affecting R The vehicle is equipped with active ambient
until the camera has cooled down and is the camera view. Or the detection range of lighting or ambient lighting.
available again. the camera is restricted.
% Observe the information on the system limits
The Interior Assistant is temporarily unavaila- The Availability of the Interior Assistant is of Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning
ble. You will be informed as soon as the func- limited for the driver. Please see the Opera- (/ page 247).
tion is available again. message appears. tor's Manual message appears.
The function can warn vehicle occupants about a
You receive a message when the camera is Keep the camera's field of vision clear. possible collision with an approaching vehicle or
available again. R The camera is not operational. bicycle when they exit the vehicle.
R The camera is covered or dirty, fogged up or The Interior Assistant unavailable. Please As soon as the driver or front passenger moves
scratched. visit a workshop. message appears. their hand towards the door handle, depending
Wait until the camera has cooled down Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen‐ on the vehicle equipment, the following warnings
before cleaning the camera cover. ter. are issued:
The Interior Assistant is temporarily unavaila- R The active ambient lighting or ambient light‐
ble. Please refer to the Operator's Manual ing flashes red.
message appears. R The warning lamp in the outside mirror
flashes red.
 MBUX multimedia system 287

R When the door is opened, a warning tone Switching the reading light on and off Switching the search light on and off
sounds.
% The visual warning is thus already given
before the door is opened.
% Further information on Active Blind Spot
Assist with exit warning (/ page 247) and
on ambient lighting (/ page 165).

Switching the reading light and search light

and on or off
Requirements: Carrying out operation of the reading light for the Interaction area for activating the search light
R For the reading light: the driver's and front driver and front passenger
# To switch on: reach across the front
passenger's hand movement takes place # Move your hand up and down vertically under passenger seat with a hand.
under the inside rearview mirror. the inside review mirror. The search light is switched on automatically
R For the search light: the function is availa‐ The reading light is switched on or off. for the driver.
ble in the vehicle when it is dark. # To switch off: take a hand back away from
R The front passenger seat is not occupied or a the front passenger seat.
child is sitting in a child restraint system. The search light is switched off again.
R The hand movement is made by the driver in
the interaction area above the front
passenger seat.
288 MBUX multimedia system

Automatic preselection of the outside mirror Calling up favorites with the V pose (INFO‐
(COMFORT/reactive) TAINMENT/contactless)
Until now, to set the outside mirror the desired Requirements:
mirror had to be selected using a preselection R At least one favorite has been saved in the
button in the driver's door. favorites list.
With the MBUX Interior Assistant, the mirror to R The favorite has been connected with the
be set is preselected automatically by the natu‐ MBUX Interior Assistant.
ral movement of your head to the left or right. R The area for detecting the favorites pose (V
When the hand touches the button for adjusting pose) is above the center console in front of
the outside mirror, the LED under the button of the central display.
the preselected mirror side lights up.
R The V pose is held for a brief time.
Use the button to set the position of the active
outside mirror. The V pose makes it easier to call up favorites.
% Preselection of the outside mirror using but‐ The front vehicle occupants can associate their
tons is still possible. Further information on own favorite with the V-pose. Some examples
adjusting the outside mirrors (/ page 171). include a navigation destination, a radio station Implementation of the V-pose above the storage
compartment of the center console at the height of
% The driver camera is also used for this appli‐ or a massage program for a seat.
the central display
cation. % If a favorite has not yet been saved and con‐
nected with the MBUX Interior Assistant, the # Position your hand above the storage com‐
multimedia system will assist you. partment of the center console at the height
of the central display. The back of your hand
is facing upwards. In doing so, your index
and middle finger are spread to form a V.
 MBUX multimedia system 289

With your other fingers bent inwards. Briefly The driver camera must be set up for face detec‐ The Change the steering wheel/ seat posi-
hold the V pose. tion before use. Teaching-in biometric data tion until 6 dots are visible on the upper
The favorite is called up. (/ page 291). edge of the screen. message appears.
System limits R The view of the driver camera is reduced or
Function of the driver camera restricted.
The system may be impaired or may not function
The driver camera is in the driver's display or in in the following situations: The Driver Camera View Currently Restricted
the 3D driver display. See Operator's Manual message appears.
R The camera is covered or dirty, fogged up or
The driver camera detects the following charac‐ scratched. Notes on care
teristics: R The driver's face and/or eyes are covered. Please comply with the notes on caring for the
R Head position interior (/ page 334).
R The driver is wearing glasses that block infra‐
R Viewing direction red.
R Eyelid closure characteristics
Switching the driver camera on or off
Display messages
R Driver's face In the following situations display messages may Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Settings 5 System
% The driver camera records image data for be shown:
5 Intelligent Assistance
applications such as ATTENTION ASSIST and R The driver camera is inoperative.
facial recognition, for example. # Select On or Off.
The camera is faulty.
The camera converts the image data directly When the driver camera is switched off, the fol‐
The Driver Camera Inoperative See Opera-
into meta data. No image data is saved in lowing functions are not available or limited:
tor's Manual message appears.
the process. The data is only processed in R The 3D driver display
the vehicle and is not transmitted from the R The driver camera cannot capture the posi‐
vehicle. tion of your head. R The MBUX augmented reality Head-up Dis‐
The camera is activated automatically each play (/ page 275)
time the engine is started.
290 MBUX multimedia system

R The microsleep detection of ATTENTION # Make sure that when the position of User profiles and user-specific content
ASSIST (/ page 221) driver's seat is being adjusted using the Prerequisites for the vehicle owner:
R The facial recognition multimedia system, no people or body R You have a Mercedes me user account.
This function serves as sensor input for parts are in the seat's range of move‐
R You have a Mercedes me PIN.
authentication and unlocking of the user pro‐ ment.
R You have agreed to the terms of use.
file and protected applications If there is a risk of someone becoming trap‐
(/ page 291). ped, stop the adjustment process immedi‐ User profiles save personal settings. If the vehi‐
R Multimodality ately: cle is used by several people, a person can
This function activates the MBUX Voice # a) Tap the warning message on the cen‐
change their profile settings without changing
Assistant with eye control, e.g. for the confir‐ tral display. the settings of other users.
mation of a display message by voice. or You can individualize a user profile in the vehicle
using the set-up assistant or using the settings
# b) Press a memory position button or a
in your user profile. Some settings, e.g. the
Information on users, suggestions and favor‐ seat adjustment switch on the driver's Mercedes me PIN and a profile photo are made
ites door. in the Mercedes me app or in the Mercedes me
The adjustment process will be stop‐ Portal.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped ped.
during adjustment of the driver's seat User-specific content and applications with per‐
after calling up a driver profile The driver's seat is equipped with an access pre‐ sonal data are protected by different levels of
venter. security. To access protected content, the
Selecting a user profile may trigger an Mercedes me PIN and, depending on the vehicle
adjustment of the driver's seat to the posi‐ If the driver's door is open, the driver's seat will equipment, biometric sensors can be used.
tion saved under the user profile. You or not be set after calling up the driver's profile.
other vehicle occupants could be injured in
the process.
 MBUX multimedia system 291

% The security level is set by the multimedia R Suggestions and favorites Multimedia system:
system and calculated from the combination 4 © 5 f 5 Change User
of all sensor inputs. Some security levels Suggestions
cannot be turned off. The vehicle can learn the habits of the driver. It Adding a user
then makes suggestions regarding navigation
% When a user profile is activated, the follow‐ destinations, phone numbers and music prefer‐
# Select f Add User .
ing personalized comfort systems, for exam‐ ences. The requirements for that are the selec‐ A QR code is loaded.
ple, can be adjusted or their settings loaded: tion of a user, your consent to the recording of # Scan the displayed QR code with the
R Seat data and sufficient collected data. Mercedes me app or any QR code scanner
R Ambient light on a mobile device. If the Mercedes me app
Favorites is not yet installed on your mobile device,
R Outside mirrors Favorites offer you quick access to frequently you will be directed to the store of your
R Blinds used applications. 100 favorites are available in mobile device.
total.
R Air conditioning adjustment # Follow the directions in the app.
The vehicle is connected with your Mercedes
If the user profile is activated when driving Configuring users, suggestions and favorites me user account. This automatically creates
then the driver's seat position will not be your user profile in the vehicle.
adjusted. Requirements:
R To use the set-up assistant: the vehicle is sta‐ If only your user profile is available, it will be
Depending on the vehicle equipment you can, as loaded automatically.
a user, save the following settings, for example: tionary.
If more than one user profile is available, you
R Driver's seat, steering wheel and mirror set‐
will be directed to the user selection.
tings
When the vehicle is stationary, the set-up
R Climate control
assistant starts automatically after user
R Ambient lighting selection.
R Radio (including station list)
292 MBUX multimedia system

Selecting user options Protecting user-specific content and applica‐ The purchase of services is protected.
# Select Settings. tions
If you add a new user, access protection is
# Switch Protect Content on or off.
# To configure suggestions: select Sugges-
already activated for the user profile. The # Switch Access Protection on or off.
tion Settings. Mercedes me PIN and, depending on the vehicle % When access protection is switched off, your
# Select Suggestions. equipment, biometric sensors are available for user profile can be accessed and changed
# Switch the options on or off. access. Biometric sensors must be taught in in from every vehicle seat.
If an option is switched on and sufficient the vehicle. The authentication process then
% Access protection is switched on or off on a
data has been gathered, suggestions based takes all taught-in and available sensors into
account. vehicle-specific basis.
on your user behavior will be offered to you.
# For intelligent multimodality: select Multi- The following user-specific content and applica‐ Teaching in, editing and deleting biometric
tions are protected, for example: data
modality. The biometric data models are saved in the sen‐
If the option is active, the MBUX Voice Assis‐ R User selection and user profile settings
sors in the vehicle. If recognition has been
tant can be activated in certain situations. R The teaching-in of biometric sensors taught-in, this sensor serves as a contributory
# To switch the learning function off for R Suggestions factor for authentication on the multimedia sys‐
24 h: switch on Deactivate 24h Intelligent tem.
The data and determination of the most
Learning. probable navigation destinations, media # Select Biometric Data.
# To delete cumulated suggestions: select sources, radio stations, contacts and mes‐ # Select Fingerprint Recognition, Facial Recog-
Reset Suggestion History. sages are protected. nition or Voice Recognition.
# Select Ja (Yes). R ENERGIZING COACH
% If necessary, authenticate yourself on the
The recorded health data and their evaluation multimedia system.
are protected.
# Select Configure.
R Mercedes me connect store
 MBUX multimedia system 293

# To use fingerprint: place and lift your finger % Avoid background or disturbing noises dur‐ Adding favorites from categories
several times on the fingerprint sensor under ing voice recognition. # Select ©.
the touchscreen . # To delete biometric data: select Delete. # Select ß.
The finger is scanned. If the scanning proce‐
# Select Ja (Yes). # Select r.
dure is successful, a message appears on the
central display. You can unlock your user pro‐ Selecting a user # Select W Create New Favorite.
file and protected applications with your fin‐ # Select the category.
% When you call up your driver profile, the driv‐
ger print.
er's seat and the steering wheel can be set. # Select a favorite.
# To use face recognition: close the driver's
You can cancel the setting process with the
door or fasten the driver's seat belt. Linking favorites with the MBUX Interior
following actions:
# Look at the driver display for about five sec‐ Assistant V pose
R Tap on the Tap Here to Cancel message
onds. # Select ©.
in the central display.
Your face is scanned. A message in the driver # Select ß.
display shows whether facial recognition was R Press one of the seat operating buttons
in the driver's door. # Select r.
successful or not. You can unlock your user
profile and protected applications with the # Select Change User. # Select Driver or Passenger.
facial scan. # Select a user. # Select the category.
# To use voice recognition: speak the sen‐ # When requested to do so, authenticate with # Select a favorite.
tence shown on the central display and fol‐ the Mercedes me PIN or a taught-in biomet‐
low the instructions of the voice assistant. ric characteristic.
If the voice recognition was successful, a The user profile is loaded and activated.
message appears on the central display. You
can unlock your user profile and protected % If you select Continue Without Selecting a
applications with voice input. User, no specific settings for the user profile
are loaded.
294 MBUX multimedia system

System settings R Connectivity Carrying out a software update:

Overview of the system settings menu - Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, NFC R You can start online software updates via the
R MBUX rear tablet child-proof lock communication module.
In the system settings menu, you can make set‐ R You can start software updates via a Wi-Fi
tings in the following menus and control ele‐ R Time & date
hotspot.
ments: R Language
R You can start map updates from an external
R Display R Units for distance medium.
- Display brightness R Updating software
% To complete software updates via the com‐
R Control elements R System Reset munication module, the vehicle must be con‐
- Keyboard language and handwriting rec‐ nected with the Internet and a Mercedes me
ognition Overview of software updates user account.
- Touchpad sensitivity % To complete software updates via Wi-Fi, the
Important software updates may be necessary
- Sensitivity of the Touch Controls for the security of your multimedia system's vehicle must be connected to an external Wi-
- Haptic operation for the touchscreen data. Install these updates, or else the security Fi hotspot.
R MBUX Voice Assistant of your multimedia system cannot be ensured. A software update consists of three steps:
The multimedia system displays a corresponding R Downloading or copying of the data required
R MBUX Interior Assistant
message when a software update is available. for installation
R Sound
If the Automatic Online Update option is active, R Installation of the downloaded software
- Entertainment software updates are downloaded automatically. update
- Navigation and traffic announcements If the option is deactivated, you will be informed R Activation of the downloaded software
- Telephone of new software updates once. The software update.
updates are available for downloading for a limi‐
- Voice amplification ted period of time.
 MBUX multimedia system 295

% It may be necessary to restart the MBUX available. Drive on carefully and consult a spe‐
multimedia system after completion of a cialist workshop as soon as possible.
software update.
Failure of the driver display
% While some software updates are being If the driver display fails or there is a malfunc‐
downloaded, the multimedia system cannot tion, you may not recognize limitations in the
be operated and the vehicle functions may functions of systems relevant to safety or the
be restricted. speed display, for example. The operating safety
% Some software updates require a safe vehi‐ of the vehicle may be impaired. Drive on care‐
cle status for the installation to be comple‐ fully and have the vehicle checked at a qualified
ted. They may only be carried out in a safely specialist workshop immediately (/ page 487).
parked vehicle with the ignition switched off. % The display message does not appear every
Further information about software updates can
time a software update is installed.
% For software updates requiring a safe vehicle be found at https://me.secure.mercedes-
status: when the last installation step is In rare cases, an error can occur during the benz.com.
reached, a message appears in the central installation. The multimedia system automati‐
display after the ignition is switched off. Fol‐ cally attempts to restore the previous version.
Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot
low the step-by-step instructions in the cen‐ If it is not possible to restore the previous ver‐
tral display to complete the installation. sion, the display messages shown above appear Requirements:
Availability of the driver display and central every time the engine is started. R Wi-Fi is activated on the multimedia system
display and the communication device to be connec‐
Failure of the central display
During the installation of software updates, it is ted.
If the central display fails or the display message
not possible to use the vehicle, central display shown above is shown continuously, several sys‐ R The communication device to be connected
and driver display. You may receive the following tems such as the rear view camera, supports at least one of the types of connec‐
display messages when an installation is run‐ PARKTRONIC or climate control are no longer tion described.
ning:
296 MBUX multimedia system

The connection types shown depend on the make it available as a hotspot for external devi‐ Alternatively: the device being connected has an
device to be connected. The function must ces. integrated QR code scanner (see manufacturer's
be supported by the multimedia system and When Wi-Fi is switched off, it is not possible to operating instructions).
by the device to be connected. The type of establish a hotspot connection. # Scan the QR code shown.
connection established must be selected on The Wi-Fi connection is established.
the multimedia system and on the device to When Wi-Fi is switched off, no connection can
be established with the MBUX rear tablet. Connecting using NFC
be connected.
# Activate NFC on the device to be connected.
% The availability of the functions is dependent
% Some functions may first need to be activa‐ on the country. # Hold the device to be connected to the NFC
ted on the communication device being con‐ interface when the NFC symbol appears in
nected. More detailed information can be % The vehicle's data volume is used for data
connection via the multimedia system. Data the status line.
found in the manufacturer's operating
instructions. volumes can be purchased via the Mercedes # Follow the instructions on the device.
me Portal. The Wi-Fi connection is established.
% The use of the vehicle data tariff by external The data tariff of the mobile communication Connecting using a security key
devices is not available in all countries. device is used for the data connection via an # Select the vehicle from the device to be con‐
Multimedia system: external communication device. nected. The vehicle is displayed with the
4 © 5 Settings 5 System MBUX XXXXX network name.
Using the multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hot‐
5 Internet and Bluetooth
spot # Enter the security key which is shown in the
# Select Wi-Fi. # Select MBUX Hotspot. central display on the device to be connec‐
The controller is to the right: Wi-Fi is ted.
# Select one of the following connection
switched on. # Confirm the entry.
options.
When Wi-Fi is switched on, you can connect the Connecting using a QR code Generating a new security key
multimedia system with external hotspots or # Select the security key in the MBUX Hotspot
Requirement: an app for scanning the QR code is
installed on the device being connected. menu.
 MBUX multimedia system 297

# Confirm the prompt with Yes. % The Wi-Fi function on the mobile phone and # Select the mobile phone with the \ Blue‐
A new security key is generated. Internet access via Wi-Fi must be activated tooth® symbol in the Internet device man‐
(see the manufacturer's operating instruc‐ ager.
A connection will be established with the newly tions).
created security key.
# Select Search for Internet access.
% When a new security key is generated, all # Select the network.
Navigation and traffic
existing Wi-Fi connections are then discon‐ Notes on navigation
# Log in to the Wi-Fi network.
nected. If the Wi-Fi connections are being re-
established, the new security key must be or Route guidance with augmented reality
entered. # Select the mobile phone with the ö Wi-Fi
symbol in the Internet device manager. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury as
Using a mobile communication device as a Setting up an Internet connection via Blue‐ a result of distraction, incorrect depic‐
Wi-Fi hotspot (tethering) tion or wrong interpretation of the dis‐
tooth®
An external Wi-Fi hotspot is accessed for the play
Internet connection of the multimedia system. % The mobile phone must support the Blue‐
tooth® profile PAN (Personal Area Network). The camera image of the augmented reality
The data tariff of the mobile communication
display is not suitable as a guide for driving.
device via Purchased Data Plan is used for the # Select Search for Internet access.
data connection. # Always keep an eye on the actual traffic
In the list displayed, all mobile phones
already known to the multimedia system are situation.
% This function is country-dependent.
shown. New devices can be set up using the # Avoid extended observation of the cam‐
# Select the Set Up option in the Internet and
phone application. era image.
Bluetooth menu.
# Connect the mobile phone using Bluetooth®.
# Select Connect to the Internet.

# Select one of the following connection or

options.
Setting up an Internet connection via Wi-Fi
298 MBUX multimedia system

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury Navigation overview 4 Selects the map orientation
due to imprecise positioning of addi‐ Digital map 5 Current vehicle position (vehicle symbol or
tional information arrow)
6 Navigation menu
The additional information from the augmen‐
ted reality display is not a substitute for Navigation menu
observing the actual driving situation.
# Always keep an eye on the actual traffic
situation when carrying out all driving
maneuvers.

Switching navigation on
Multimedia system:
4 © 5 Navigation

# Alternatively, activate the MBUX Voice Assis‐

tant (/ page 283). 1 Enters a POI or address and additional desti‐
# Switch to navigation. nation entries
The map appears. 1 Navigation window 2 Interrupts route guidance (if route guidance
Route guidance active: display for destina‐ is active)
tion information, route list, lane recommen‐ 3 Repeats a navigation announcement and
dations, for example switch navigation announcements on or off
2 Status line, calls up Control Center 4 Calls up Route, and Traffic menus
3 Searches for parking facilities in the vicinity
 MBUX multimedia system 299

• Showing the route overview, entering Further information can be found at: Multimedia system:
intermediate destinations, selecting alterna‐ https://www.mercedes.me 4 © 5 Navigation 5 ª Where to?
tive routes R The service is available.
• Displaying traffic incidents and local area R The service has been activated at an author‐
reports ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
5 Makes settings for View, Messages & Acous-
tic Signals and Route
% If the navigation menu is not shown, tap on
the digital map.
% The options are not available in all countries.

Entering a destination
Requirements:
R For online search: an Internet connection is
established.
R Mercedes me connect is available.
R You have set up a user account in the Example: entering a POI, address or contact
Mercedes me Portal. 1 Input line with current entry
R The vehicle is connected with the user 2 Search result
account and you have accepted the terms of 3 Selects destination input, displays further
use. destination inputs with double arrow
4 Deletes an entry
300 MBUX multimedia system

5 Adopts the search result in the input line and # Select the destination in the list. Calculating a route and using settings for
continues the search The route is calculated. route guidance
6 Deletes the last character entered % Observe the notes on the MBUX multimedia
7 Hides the keypad system (/ page 280).
8 Switches to handwriting recognition
9 Starts the MBUX Voice Assistant
A Sets the written language
B Switches to digits and special characters
C Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters
# Enter the destination in 1. The entries can
be made in any order.
The search results are displayed in a list.
% Online search results for POIs may contain
additional information, for example opening
times and prices. The information is provi‐
ded by an online map service.
This online function is not available in all 1 Saves a destination as a favorite
countries.
2 Selects a parking space in the vicinity of the
% You can enter a destination as a 3 word destination
address from what3words. This option is not 3 Calculates the route and starts route guid‐
available in all countries.
ance
# Hide the keyboard with a.
 MBUX multimedia system 301

4 Calls up the route overview # Select ¥ Replace Route . Selecting alternative routes
5 Selects a point of interest in the vicinity of The selected destination address is set as a % If Route Overview after Start has been
the destination new destination. Route guidance begins. switched on and a route has been calcula‐
Selecting a route type ted, the function is available.
# To call up the detailed display with desti‐
# Select ¡ in the navigation menu.
nation address: pull the bar above the ¥ # Select Z in the navigation menu
symbol upwards. (/ page 298). # Select Alternative Routes.
Depending on the destination selection and # Select Route. # When the alternative routes have been calcu‐
availability, online content, for example rat‐ The route is calculated as a fast route with a lated, display the route in the navigation win‐
ings, prices and weather information, is short journey time. The trailer mode can be dow by swiping to the right or left.
shown. used if a trailer has been coupled with the # Select Start.
# To share a destination: select Ç Share . vehicle. If available, you can select online
This option allows you to scan the displayed routes. Traffic announcements for the route Activating a commuter route
QR code. are taken into account via Reroute Based on % A user profile has been created and Allow
Traffic r. Destination Suggestions has been activated
Adding an intermediate destination to the
existing route or starting a new route guid‐ % Trailer mode and online routes are not availa‐ in the user options (/ page 291). Route
ance ble in all countries and for all vehicles. guidance is not active.
# Select ¦ Add . # Select Z in the navigation menu.
Calculating alternative routes
The selected destination address is set as # Select Route.
the next intermediate destination. Route
# Select Z in the navigation menu.
# Activate Activate Commuter Route.
guidance begins. # Select View.
The navigation system automatically detects
or # Activate Route Overview after Start.
that the vehicle is on a commuter route.
Alternative routes are calculated for every
route.
302 MBUX multimedia system

For the daily commuter route, traffic inci‐ Showing property information for route guid‐ Moving the map
dents on the route are also reported when ance with augmented reality # When the map is displayed, swipe in any
driving without active route guidance. Road guidance with augmented reality is activa‐ direction with one finger on the central dis‐
# To select or delete a commuter route: ted. play.
selectStart or ¨. # Select Z in the navigation menu. # To reset the map to the current vehicle

Avoiding or using route sections, e.g. high‐ # Select View. position: select \ Center .
ways or ferries # Select Augmented Reality Video.
Selecting map orientation
# Select Z in the navigation menu. # Activate Street Names and House Numbers. # Tap repeatedly on the Ä compass symbol
# Select Route. During route guidance, the activated options on the map.
are shown as additional information in the
# Select Avoid Options.
camera image. The map orientations changes in this order:
# Activate or deactivate the avoid option. R The 3D map view is aligned to the direc‐
tion of travel.
Activating route guidance with augmented Using map functions
reality R The 2D map view is aligned to the direc‐
Multimedia system: tion of travel.
# Tap on ¨ in the map.
4 © 5 Navigation
The indicator lamp lights up blue. R The 2D map view is displayed so that
Increasing map scale north is always at the top.
The video image of the augmented reality
camera is shown on the central display R The map shows the complete route.
# When the map is shown, tap twice quickly
before a turning maneuver. The video image with one finger on the central display.
includes additional information. Using services
Decreasing map scale
# To return to the navigation map: tap on
# When the map is displayed, tap the central Requirements:
¨ again.
display with two fingers. R There is an Internet connection.
The indicator lamp is not lit.
 MBUX multimedia system 303

R Mercedes me connect is available. # Activate Traffic Incidents and Free Flowing R Vehicle with active hazard warning light
R You have set up a user account in the Traffic. R Mobile roadworks
Mercedes me Portal. Traffic incidents, for example roadworks,
local area reports (e.g. fog) and warning mes‐ Displaying online map contents
R The vehicle is connected to a user account sages, are shown on the route.
and you have accepted the conditions of use
# Select Z in the navigation menu.
for the service. The traffic delay is displayed for the current # Select View.
route. The smallest value for the display for # Select Map Symbols.
Further information can be found at: traffic delays is a minute.
https://www.mercedes.me # Switch on an online service, e.g. Weather.
R The service is available. Displaying hazard warnings Current weather information is displayed on
If hazard warnings are available these can be the navigation map, e.g. temperature or
R The service has been activated at an author‐ shown as symbols on the map. The display
ized Mercedes-Benz Center. cloud cover.
depends on the settings for the Traffic Incidents
The service information is not shown in all
Multimedia system: option.
map scales, e.g. weather symbols or gas sta‐
4 © 5 Navigation # Set the option using Z. tion prices.
If the option is activated, all of the symbols
Showing traffic information are shown.
# Select Z in the navigation menu. If the option is deactivated, the symbols are
# Select View. only shown when there is a hazard warning.
# Select Map Symbols. The following hazards may be shown on the
map:
R Accidents and breakdowns
R Fog and ice
R Hazards reported manually
304 MBUX multimedia system

Telephone & WARNING Risk of an accident from & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
Telephony operating mobile communication equip‐ being stowed incorrectly
ment while the vehicle is in motion If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed
Notes on telephony
Mobile communications devices distract the incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown
& WARNING Risk of distraction from oper‐ driver from the traffic situation. This could around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi‐
ating integrated communication equip‐ also cause the driver to lose control of the tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and
ment while the vehicle is in motion vehicle. mobile phone receptacles cannot always
# As the driver, only operate mobile com‐ retain all objects within.
If you operate communication equipment
integrated in the vehicle when driving, you munications devices when the vehicle is There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
could be distracted from the traffic situation. stationary. event of sudden braking or a sudden change
This could also cause you to lose control of # As a vehicle occupant, only use mobile in direction.
the vehicle. communications devices in the areas # Always stow objects so that they can‐

# Only operate this equipment when the

intended for this purpose, e.g. in the not be thrown around in such situa‐
traffic situation permits. rear passenger compartment. tions.
# Always make sure that objects do not
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
You must observe the legal requirements for the protrude from stowage spaces, parcel
vehicle whilst paying attention to road country in which you are currently driving when
and traffic conditions and operate the nets or stowage nets.
operating mobile communication equipment in
equipment with the vehicle stationary. # Close the lockable stowage spaces
the vehicle.
before starting a journey.
# Always stow and secure heavy, hard,
pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky
objects in the trunk/cargo compart‐
ment.
 MBUX multimedia system 305

Observe the additional information on stowing - The car telephone has access to the SIM mobile phone network provider of the person
mobile communications devices correctly: card data and dials into the mobile phone you are calling support HD Voice® .
R Loading the vehicle (/ page 133) network via the exterior antenna. Depending on the quality of the connection, the
Bluetooth® connection Irrespective of this, Bluetooth® audio functional‐ voice quality may fluctuate.
The menu view and the available functions in the ity can by used with any mobile radio unit. Further information can be obtained from an
telephone menu are in part dependent on the For information on the range of functions of the authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at:
Bluetooth® profile of the connected mobile mobile radio unit to be connected, see the man‐ https://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
phone. If the mobile phone supports all the fol‐ ufacturer's operating instructions.
lowing Bluetooth® profiles, the full range of fea‐ Network connection:
tures is available:
The following cases can lead to the call being
R PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile)
disconnected while the vehicle is in motion:
- The contacts on the mobile phone are R You switch into a transmission/reception
shown automatically on the multimedia station, in which no communication channel
system. is free.
R MAP (Message Access Profile)
R The SIM card used is not compatible with the
- The mobile phone message functions can network available
be used on the multimedia system. R A mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged
R HFP (hands-free profile) into the network with the second SIM card at
- Wireless telephony is available on the the same time
multimedia system. The multimedia system supports calls in HD
R SAP (SIM Access Profile) Voice® for improved speech quality. A require‐
ment for this is that the mobile phone and the
306 MBUX multimedia system

Telephone menu overview 4 Battery status of the connected mobile Connecting a mobile phone
phone Requirements:
5 Options R Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile phone
6 Messages (see the manufacturer's operating instruc‐
7 Calls up my devices tions).
8 Numerical pad R Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia
9 Starts contact search system.
Telephony operating modes overview Multimedia system:
Depending on your equipment, the following tel‐ 4 © 5 Phone 5 Z 5 Devices
ephony operating modes are available: 5 My Devices
R A mobile phone is connected to the multime‐
Searching for a mobile phone
dia system via Bluetooth®.
# Select Connect New Device.
R Two mobile phones are connected with the
multimedia system via Bluetooth® (two Connecting a mobile phone
phone mode). # Select a mobile phone.
1 Bluetooth® device name of the currently - You can use all the functions of the multi‐ A code is displayed in the multimedia system
connected mobile phone/of the mobile media system with both mobile phones. and on the mobile phone.
phone # If both codes match, confirm the code on the
2 Bluetooth® device name of the currently mobile phone.
connected mobile phone/of the mobile
phone (two phone mode)
3 Signal strength of the mobile phone network
 MBUX multimedia system 307

Functions in the telephony menu Mercedes me and apps You can also call the Mercedes-Benz Customer
In the telephony menu you have the following Center using the multimedia system
Mercedes me connect (/ page 309).
functions, for example:
R Making calls, e.g.:
Information on Mercedes me connect Please note that Mercedes me connect is a
Mercedes me connect consists of multiple serv‐ Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, first call
- R Accept a call ices. the national emergency services using the
- k End Call You can use the following services via the multi‐ standard national emergency service telephone
- Answering a call with a message media system and the overhead control panel, numbers. In emergencies, you can also use the
for example: Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
- i Conference (/ page 314).
R Accident and Breakdown Management (me
- Accepting or rejecting a waiting call Please note the Mercedes me connect terms of
button or situation-dependent display in the
R Managing contacts, e.g.: multimedia system) use and the data protection information for
- Downloading mobile phone contacts R Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (auto‐
Mercedes me connect. You can find these in
- Managing the format of a contact's name matic emergency call and SOS button) your Mercedes me user account.
- Deleting favorites Further information about Mercedes me connect
The Mercedes me connect Accident and Break‐ services can be obtained in the Mercedes me
R Receiving and sending messages, e.g.: down Management and the Mercedes-Benz Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
- Using the read-aloud function emergency call center are available to you
around the clock. Information on Mercedes me connect Acci‐
- Dictating a new message dent and Breakdown Management
The me button and the SOS button can be found
on the vehicle's overhead control panel The Accident and Breakdown Management can
(/ page 309). include the following functions:
R Supplement to the Mercedes-Benz emer‐
gency call system (/ page 314)
308 MBUX multimedia system

If necessary, the contact person at the clearly interpreted and are available through Data transferred during Mercedes me con‐
Mercedes-Benz emergency call center for‐ the monitoring of components that are sub‐ nect call services
wards the call to Mercedes me connect Acci‐ ject to diagnostics. The data transferred during a Mercedes me con‐
dent and Breakdown Management. Forward‐ If your vehicle detects a breakdown or threat nect call depends on:
ing the call is however not possible in all of a breakdown, you may be prompted via R The reason for initiation of the call
countries. the multimedia system to contact the
R The service that is selected in the voice con‐
R Breakdown assistance by a technician on Mercedes-Benz Customer Center for further
location and/or the towing away of the vehi‐ help. This prompt in the multimedia system trol system
cle to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz only appears when the vehicle is stationary. R The activated Mercedes me connect services
Center
% These services are subject to technical You can find out which data is transferred when
You may be charged for these services. restrictions such as the mobile phone cover‐ using the services in the currently valid
R Addition to the emergency guide after auto‐ age, mobile network quality and the ability of Mercedes me connect terms of use and the data
matic accident or breakdown detection the processing systems to interpret the protection information for Mercedes me con‐
(/ page 310) transferred data. In some circumstances, nect. You can find these in your Mercedes me
In the event of a breakdown or accident, fur‐ this can result in delays or the failure of the user account.
ther vehicle data is sent which enables opti‐ information to appear in the multimedia sys‐
mal support by the Mercedes-Benz Customer tem.
Center and the authorized service partner or More information about Mercedes me connect
breakdown assistance. services can be obtained in the Mercedes me
R Addition to the Mercedes me connect Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
service Telediagnostics
With the Telediagnostics function, specific
wear and failure reports are recorded by the
service provider, in so far as these can be
 MBUX multimedia system 309

Mercedes me calls Making an emergency call R Nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center

Making a call via the overhead control panel # To open the cover of SOS button 2, press it R Other products and services from Mercedes-
briefly. Benz
# Press and hold SOS button 3 for at least
Data is transferred during the connection to the
one second. Mercedes-Benz Customer Center (/ page 311).
If a Mercedes me call is active, an emergency Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center
call can still be triggered. This has priority over using the multimedia system
all other active calls.
Requirements:
Information about the Mercedes me call R Access to a GSM network is available.
using the me button
R The contract partner's GSM network cover‐
A call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center
has been initiated via the me button in the over‐ age is available in the respective region.
head control panel or the multimedia system R The ignition must be switched on so that
(/ page 309). vehicle data can be transferred automati‐
Using the voice dialog system you access the cally.
desired service: Multimedia system:
R Accident and Breakdown Management 4 © 5 Phone 5 ©
1 me button for service or information calls R Mercedes-Benz Customer Center for general # Call Mercedes me connect.
2 SOS button cover information about the vehicle After confirmation, the multimedia system
3 SOS button (emergency call system) sends the required vehicle data. The data
You can find information on the following topics:
Making a Mercedes me call transfer is shown in the central display.
R Activation of Mercedes me connect
# Press me button 1.
R Operating the vehicle
310 MBUX multimedia system

Then, you can select a service and be connected # Select Call. Call Later, the message will be hidden and
to a specialist at the Mercedes-Benz Customer R After your agreement, or if the Mercedes appear again later.
Center. me connect service "Accident and Break‐ The prompt triggered by the Mercedes me
down Management" is active, the vehicle connect service "Telediagnostics", can either
Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center data is transferred automatically be confirmed or declined. After being
after automatic accident or breakdown (/ page 307). declined, this will not be shown again.
detection
R The Mercedes-Benz Customer Center Arranging a service appointment via a
Requirements: takes your call and organizes the break‐ Mercedes me call
R The vehicle has detected an accident or down and accident assistance. If you have activated the maintenance manage‐
breakdown situation. ment service, relevant vehicle data is transferred
You may be charged for these services.
R The vehicle is stationary. automatically to the Mercedes-Benz Customer
% Depending on the severity of the accident, Center. You will then receive individual recom‐
R The hazard warning lights are switched on.
an automatic emergency call can be initi‐ mendations regarding the maintenance of your
% This function is not available in all countries. ated. This has priority over all other active vehicle.
calls.
The vehicle can detect accident or breakdown Regardless of whether you have consented to
situations under certain circumstances. % In addition, if the Mercedes me connect the maintenance management service, the multi‐
service "Telediagnostics" is active, a similar media system reminds you after a certain
In the event an accident or breakdown is detec‐
prompt can appear after a delay in the event amount of time that a service is due. A prompt
ted, the emergency guide shows safety notes in
of a breakdown. If you are already in contact appears asking if you would like to make an
the multimedia system display.
with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center or appointment.
After quitting the emergency guide display on have already received support, this prompt
the multimedia system, a prompt appears asking # To arrange a service appointment: select
can be ignored or declined.
whether you would like to get support from the Call.
% If you answer the prompt for support from After your agreement, the vehicle data is
Mercedes-Benz Customer Center.
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center with transferred and the Mercedes-Benz Cus‐
 MBUX multimedia system 311

tomer Center takes your preferred appoint‐ Multi-stage transfer depends on the following If a call is made for a service appointment via
ment date. The information is then sent to factors: the service reminder, the following data is also
your desired service outlet. R Reason for the initiation of the call transmitted:
This will contact you to confirm the appoint‐ R The available mobile phone transmission R Current mileage and maintenance data
ment and if necessary consult about the technology.
details. If a call is made after automatic accident or
R The activated Mercedes me connect serv‐ breakdown detection using the multimedia sys‐
% If you select Call Later after the service mes‐ ices. tem, the following data is also transmitted:
sage appears, the message is hidden and
R The service selected in the voice control sys‐ R Current mileage and maintenance data
reappears at a later time.
tem. R Current vehicle location
Transferred data during a Mercedes me call
If you initiate a service call using Mercedes me, Data transfer if Mercedes me connect serv‐ If Accident and Breakdown Management is
data is transferred to enable targeted advice and ices are not activated called via the voice control system, the following
an efficient service. If no Mercedes me connect services are activa‐ data can also be called up from the vehicle by
The following requirements must be fulfilled for ted, the following data is transferred: the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center:
the transfer of the data: R Vehicle identification number R Current vehicle location
R The ignition is switched on. R Time of the call Data processing
R The required data transfer technology is sup‐ R Reason for the initiation of the call The data transmitted within the scope of the call
ported by the mobile phone network pro‐ R Confirmation of the data protection prompt is deleted from the processing system after the
vider. call is finished, in so far as this data is not being
R Country indicator of the vehicle
R The quality of the mobile connection is suffi‐
used for other activated Mercedes me connect
R Set language for the multimedia system services.
cient.
R Telephone number of the communication The incident-specific data is processed and
platform installed in the vehicle stored in the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center
312 MBUX multimedia system

and, if required to process the incident, forwar‐ In the Apps menu, the following options can be Web browser overview
ded to the service partner authorized by the available:
Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. Please take R Connecting the vehicle with the Mercedes
note of the data protection information on the me user account
Mercedes me Internet page https://
R Deleting a connection between a Mercedes
www.mercedes.me or in the recorded message
immediately after calling the Mercedes-Benz me user account and the vehicle
Customer Center. R Calling up the Mercedes me services
% The recorded message is not available in R Calling up apps such as, In-Car Office or the
every country. web browser depending on availability

Overview of the Mercedes me & Apps menu

When you log in with a user account to the
Mercedes me Portal, then services and offers
from Mercedes-Benz will be available to you.
For more information consult an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or visit the Mercedes me 1 Search
portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com 2 To refresh/stop
% Make sure you always keep the Mercedes 3 Previous website
me apps updated. 4 Options
You can call up the menu using Apps in the mul‐ 5 Settings
timedia system.
 MBUX multimedia system 313

% Under Ä you have the following options: Apps for Smartphone Integration Overview of transferred vehicle data
R Bookmarks R Mercedes-Benz Link (implementation of the When using Smartphone Integration, certain
function using the Mercedes-Benz Link con‐ vehicle data is transferred to the mobile phone.
R Load mobile website
trol box) This enables you to get the best out of selected
% Websites cannot be shown while the vehicle mobile phone services. Vehicle data is not
is in motion. R Apple CarPlay® (wireless connection via
directly accessible.
Bluetooth® also possible)
The following system information is transmitted:
Overview of smartphone integration R Android Auto (wireless connection via Blue‐
R Software release of the multimedia system
tooth® also possible)
With Smartphone Integration, you can use cer‐ R System ID (anonymized)
tain functions on your mobile phone via the mul‐ % For safety reasons, the first activation of
timedia system display. Mercedes-Benz Link, Apple CarPlay® or The transfer of this data is used to optimize com‐
Android Auto on the multimedia system munication between the vehicle and the mobile
Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec‐ phone.
ted via Smartphone Integration to the multime‐ must be carried out when the vehicle is sta‐
dia system. Also for use with two phone mode tionary and the parking brake is applied. To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the
with smartphone integration, only one additional You can start Smartphone Integration using the mobile phone, a vehicle identifier is randomly
mobile phone can be connected using Blue‐ My Devices menu. generated.
tooth® with the multimedia system. You can end Smartphone Integration via the My This has no connection to the vehicle identifica‐
Devices or by disconnecting the connecting tion number (VIN) and is deleted when the multi‐
The full range of functions for Smartphone Inte‐ media system is reset .
gration is only possible with an Internet connec‐ cable between the mobile phone and multimedia
tion. The appropriate application must be down‐ system. The following driving status data is transmitted:
loaded on the mobile phone to use Smartphone % Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting R Transmission position engaged
Integration. The mobile phone must be switched the connection via the device manager or R Distinction between parked, standstill, rolling
on and connected to the multimedia system via the connecting cable only when the vehicle and driving
the USB port using a suitable cable. is stationary.
314 MBUX multimedia system

R Day/night mode of the instrument cluster in no way replaces assistance provided from % eCall is activated at the factory.
R Drive type dialing 911. % eCall can be deactivated by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz eCall only functions in areas Mercedes-Benz dealer. Please note that in
The transfer of this data is used to alter how where mobile phone coverage is available from the event ownership of the vehicle is trans‐
content is displayed to correspond to the driving the wireless service providers. Insufficient net‐ ferred to another owner in its deactivated
situation. work coverage from the wireless service provid‐ state, eCall will remain deactivated unless
The following position data is transmitted: ers may result in an emergency call not being the new owner visits an authorized
R Coordinates transmitted. Mercedes-Benz dealership to reactivate the
R Speed eCall is a standard feature in your Mercedes- system.
R Compass direction
Benz vehicle. In order to function as intended,
the system relies on the transmission of data Overview of the Mercedes-Benz emergency
R Acceleration direction detailed in the Transmitted Data section that fol‐ call system
This data is used by the mobile phone to lows (/ page 316).
eCall can help to reduce the time between an
improve the accuracy of the navigation (e.g. for To disable eCall, a customer must visit an accident and the arrival of emergency services
continuation in a tunnel). authorized Mercedes-Benz Service department at the site of the accident. It helps locate an
to deactivate the vehicle's communication mod‐ accident site in places that are difficult to
ule. access. However, even if a vehicle is equipped
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Deactivation of this module prevents the with eCall, this does not mean the system is ON.
Information on the Mercedes-Benz emer‐ activation of any and all Mercedes me con‐ As such, eCall does not replace dialing 911 in the
gency call system nect services. After the deactivation of event of an accident.
Your vehicle is equipped with the Mercedes-Benz eCall, automatic emergency call and manual An emergency call can be made automatically
emergency call system ("eCall"). This feature can emergency call will not be available. (/ page 315) or manually (/ page 315). Only
help save lives in the event of an accident. eCall The ignition must be switched on before an auto‐ make emergency calls if you or others are in
matic emergency call can be made. need of rescue.
 MBUX multimedia system 315

Only make emergency calls if you or others are R A message with accident data is transmitted R If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambu‐
in need of rescue. Do not make an emergency to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center. lance is sent to the vehicle immediately.
call in the event of a breakdown or a similar sit‐ The Mercedes-Benz emergency call center
uation. can transmit the vehicle position data to one Triggering a manual Mercedes-Benz emer‐
of the emergency call centers. gency call
Triggering an automatic Mercedes-Benz The SOS button in the overhead control panel
emergency call
# To use the SOS button in the overhead
flashes until the emergency call is finished. control panel: press the SOS button at least
Requirements: It is not possible to immediately end an auto‐ one second long (/ page 309).
R The ignition is switched on. matic emergency call. or
R The starter battery is sufficiently charged. If no connection can be made to the emergency # To use voice control: use the voice com‐
services either, a corresponding message mands of the MBUX Voice Assistant.
The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system trig‐ appears in the media display.
gers an emergency call automatically in the fol‐ The emergency call has been made:
# Dial the local emergency number on your
lowing cases: R A voice connection is made to the Mercedes-
mobile phone.
R After activation of the restraint systems such Benz emergency call center.
as airbags or Emergency Tensioning Devices If an emergency call has been initiated: R A message with accident data is transmitted
after an accident. R Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center.
R After an automatically initiated emergency conditions permit you to do so until a voice
The Mercedes-Benz emergency call center
stop by Active Emergency Stop Assist. connection is established with the emer‐
can transmit the vehicle position data to one
gency call center operator.
The emergency call has been made: of the emergency call centers.
R Based on the call, the operator decides
R Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic
R A voice connection is made to the Mercedes- whether it is necessary to call rescue teams
Benz emergency call center. conditions permit you to do so until a voice
and/or the police to the accident site.
316 MBUX multimedia system

connection is established with the emer‐ R GPS position data on the route (a few For accident clarification purposes, the following
gency call center operator. 300 feet (100 meters) before the incident) measures can be taken up to an hour after the
R Based on the call, the operator decides R Direction of travel emergency call has been initiated:
whether it is necessary to call rescue teams R Vehicle identification number R The current vehicle position can be called up.
and/or the police to the accident site. R A voice connection to the vehicle occupants
R Vehicle drive type
If no connection can be made to the emergency can be established
R Number of people determined to be in the
services, a corresponding message appears in vehicle
the central display.
R Whether Mercedes me connect is available
# Dial the local emergency number on your
or not
mobile phone.
R Whether the emergency call was initiated
Ending an unintentionally triggered manual manually or automatically
Mercedes-Benz emergency call R Time of the accident
# Select ~ on the multifunction steering
wheel. Depress the button for several sec‐
R Language setting on the multimedia system
onds. Data transmitted is vehicle information. For any
questions about the collection, use and sharing
Data transfer of the Mercedes-Benz emer‐ of the eCall system data, please contact MBU‐
gency call system SA's Customer Assistance Center at 800-FOR-
MERC.
In the event of an automatic or manual emer‐ For Canada, please contact MBC's Customer
gency call the following data is transmitted, for Assistance Center at 1-800-387-0100.
example:
Customer requests for covered information
R Vehicle's GPS position data
should be submitted via the same channels.
 MBUX multimedia system 317

Radio & media

Overview of the symbols and functions in the media menu

Symbol Designation Function

6 Play Select to start or continue playback.

8 Rest Select to pause the playback.

: Repeat a track Select to repeat the current track or the active playlist.
R Select once: the active playlist is repeated.
R Select twice: the current track is repeated.
R Select three times: the function is deactivated.

9 Random playback Select to play back the tracks in random order.

û/ü Skip forwards/back Select to skip to the next or to the previous track.

Ä Additional options Select to show additional options.

5 Categories Select to show or search through available categories (e.g. playback lists, albums,
artists, etc.).
ª Search Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods,
for example.
318 MBUX multimedia system

Symbol Designation Function

Z Settings Select to make settings.

© Home Select to return to the home screen.

j Messaging Select to call up messaging.

2 Full screen Select to switch to full screen mode.

The following functions and settings are availa‐

ble in the media menu:
R Connecting external data storage media with
the multimedia system (e.g. using USB or
Bluetooth®)
R Playing back audio or video files
 MBUX multimedia system 319

Overview of the symbols and functions in the radio menu

Symbol Designation Function

© Home Select to return to the home screen.

j Messaging Select to call up messaging.

û/ü Skip forwards/back Select to skip to the next or to the previous station.

Z Settings Select to have further options shown.

The setting options are country-dependent.
HD HD radio® Select to switch the HD Radio® function on or off.
This function is not available in all countries.
4 Station list Select to have the station list shown.

ª Search Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods,
for example.

Additional functions of TuneIn Radio

% A relatively large volume of data can be
transmitted when using TuneIn Radio.
320 MBUX multimedia system

Symbol Designation Function

Z Settings The following additional settings are available in
the TuneIn Radio menu:
R Selecting stream
R Logging on to or out of the TuneIn account

ß Favourites Select during playback to save the station cur‐

rently set as a favorite.
6/8 Play/Pause Select to start, stop or continue playback.

4 Browse Select to choose a category and then a radio

station.

Additional functions of the satellite radio lites to broadcast around the clock throughout % Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos
SIRIUS XM® satellite radio offers more than 175 the USA and Canada. The satellite radio program are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and
digital-quality radio channels providing 100% is available for a monthly fee. Information about its subsidiaries. All other marks, channel
commercial-free music, sports, news and enter‐ this can be obtained from a Sirius XM® Service names and logos are the property of their
tainment, for example. SIRIUS XM® satellite Center and at https://www.siriusxm.com (USA) respective owners. All rights reserved.
radio employs a fleet of high-performance satel‐ or https://www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
 MBUX multimedia system 321

Symbol Designation Function

Z Settings The following additional settings are available in
the satellite radio menu:
R Activate child safety lock to lock channels
with adult content
R Set alarm programming for music and sport
alerts
R Create TuneMix lists to listen to music seam‐
lessly
6 Play Select to start or continue playback.

8 Rest Select to pause the playback.

Depending on the frequency band selected, dif‐ Calling up TuneIn Radio R The data volume is available.
ferent functions are available to you. Depending on the country, data volume may
Requirements:
Select the desired frequency band in the radio R There is a user account at https:// need to be purchased.
menu head runner. www.mercedes.me. R A fast Internet connection for data transmis‐
R The vehicle is linked to the Mercedes me sion free of interference.
user account. % Data volume can be purchased directly
R The TuneIn Radio service is activated in the from a mobile phone network provider via
Mercedes me portal. the Mercedes me Portal.
322 MBUX multimedia system

% The functions and services are country- Multimedia system: Music and sport alerts
dependent. For more information, consult an 4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 SiriusXM
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Multimedia system:
5 Z
4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 SiriusXM
Multimedia system: # Select Service Information. 5 Z 5 Alerts
4 © 5 Radio
The service information screen appears
# Select TuneIn Radio. showing the radio ID and the current sub‐ Setting music and sport alerts
The TuneIn menu appears. The last station scription status. This function enables you to program an alert for
set starts playing. # Establish a telephone connection.
your favorite artists, tracks or sporting events.
Music alerts can be saved whilst a track is being
% The connection quality depends on the local # Follow the service staff's instructions.
played and sport alerts can be saved during a
mobile phone reception. The activation process may take up to ten live game. You can also specify sport alerts via
minutes. the menu option. The system then continuously
Setting up satellite radio % You can also have the satellite service acti‐ searches through all the channels.
vated online. To do so, please visit https:// # Set a music or sports alert, to be informed of
Requirements: www.siriusxm.com (USA) or https:// matches in the live program.
R Satellite radio equipment is available. www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
R Registration with a satellite radio provider Activating messages for a category
has been completed. # Select a category and activate D.
R If registration is not included when purchas‐
Adding messages for a category
ing the system, your credit card details will
be required to activate your account. # Select a category and add a message W.
# Select Artist Alerts or Song Alerts in the dia‐
log window.
The message is set for the activated O track
and artist. If a match is found, a prompt
 MBUX multimedia system 323

appears asking whether you wish to change - Automatic adjustment

to the station.
Burmester® 3D-surround sound system and
Deleting messages in a category Burmester® high-end 4D surround sound
# Select a category, mark the desired mes‐ system
sages and delete E.
The following functions are available:
or
R Equalizer:
# Do not mark any messages and delete all
- Treble, mid-range and bass
entries E.
R Balance and fader
R Sound focus
Sound settings
R VIP seat (Burmester® high-end 4D surround
Overview of functions in the sound menu sound system)
The setting options and functions available R Sound profiles
depend on the sound system installed. You can R Volume:
find out which sound system is installed in your
vehicle in the Digital Operator's Manual. - Automatic adjustment
Standard sound system
The following functions are available:
R Equalizer:
- Treble, mid-range and bass
R Balance and fader
R Volume:
324 Maintenance and care

ASSYST PLUS service interval display workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz # Always have the prescribed mainte‐
Center. nance work carried out at a qualified
Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval
display specialist workshop.
Displaying the service due date
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the
driver display provides information on the Driver display: Special service requirements
remaining time or distance before the next 4 Service
service due date. The prescribed service interval is based on nor‐
The next service due date is displayed. mal operation of the vehicle. Maintenance work
You can hide this service display using the back # To exit the display: press the back button will need to be performed more often if the vehi‐
button on the left-hand side of the steering cle is operated under arduous conditions or
on the left-hand side of the steering wheel.
wheel. increased loads.
Bear in mind the following related topic:
Depending on how the vehicle is used, the The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is only
ASSYST PLUS service interval display may R Operating the driver display (/ page 273).
an aid. The driver of the vehicle bears responsi‐
shorten the service interval, e.g. in the following bility as regards to whether maintenance work
cases: Information on regular maintenance work needs to be performed more often than speci‐
R Mainly short-distance driving fied based on the actual operating conditions
R When the engine is often left idling for long * NOTE Premature wear through failure to and/or loads.
periods observe service due dates Examples of arduous operating conditions:
R In the event of frequent cold start phases Maintenance work which is not carried out at R regular city driving with frequent intermedi‐
the right time or incompletely can lead to ate stops
Mercedes-Benz recommends avoiding such increased wear and damage to the vehicle.
operating conditions. R mainly short-distance driving
# Adhere to the prescribed service inter‐
You can obtain information concerning the serv‐ R frequent operation in mountainous terrain or
vals. on poor road surfaces
icing of your vehicle from a qualified specialist
 Maintenance and care 325

R when the engine is often left idling for long Engine compartment & WARNING Risk of burns when opening
periods the hood
Opening and closing the hood
R operation in particularly dusty conditions
and/or if air-recirculation mode is frequently If you open the hood when the engine has
& WARNING Risk of accident due to driv‐ overheated or when there is a fire in the
used ing with the hood unlocked engine compartment, the following situations
In these or similar operating conditions, have the The hood may open and block your view. may occur:
interior air filter, engine air cleaner, engine oil # Never release the hood when driving. R You could come into contact with hot
and oil filter etc. changed more frequently. The gases.
tires must be checked more frequently if the # Before every trip, ensure that the hood
is locked. R You could come into contact with other
vehicle is operated under increased loads. Fur‐
ther information can be obtained at a qualified hot, escaping operating fluids.
specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury # Before opening the hood, allow the
when opening and closing the hood overheated engine to cool down.
Battery disconnection periods The hood may suddenly drop into the end # In the event of a fire in the engine com‐
position. partment, keep the hood closed and
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display can call the fire service.
calculate the service due date only when the There is a risk of injury for anyone in the
battery is connected. hood's range of movement.
# Display the service due date on the driver # Do not open or close the hood if there
& WARNING Risk of injury due to moving
is a person in the hood's range of move‐ parts
display and note it down before disconnect‐
ing the battery (/ page 324). ment. Components in the engine compartment may
continue running or start up suddenly, even if
the ignition is switched off.
326 Maintenance and care

Make sure of the following before performing & WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐ Opening the hood
tasks in the engine compartment: ponent parts in the engine compartment
# Switch the ignition off.
Certain component parts in the engine com‐
# Never reach into the danger zone sur‐ partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine,
rounding moving components, e.g. the the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.
rotation area of the fan. # Allow the engine to cool down and only
# Remove jewelery and watches. touch component parts described in
# Keep items of clothing and hair away the following.
from moving parts.
& WARNING Risk of injury from using the
& WARNING Risk of injury from touching windshield wipers while the engine hood
components under voltage is open
The ignition system and the fuel injection When the engine hood is open and the wind‐
system work under high voltage. You could shield wipers are set in motion, you can be
receive an electric shock. trapped by the wiper linkage.
# Always switch off the windshield wipers
# Never touch components of the ignition # Pull on handle 1 twice.
system or the fuel injection system and ignition before opening the engine The hood will be released and open slightly.
when the ignition is switched on. hood.
# Then lift the hood by hand.
 Maintenance and care 327

Closing the hood The engine oil level is determined during driving. R Engine Oil Level Reduce and the bar display
Determining the engine oil level can take up to for indicating the oil level on the driver dis‐
* NOTE Damage to the hood 30 minutes with a normal driving style and even play is yellow and is above "max":
longer with an active driving style.
If the hood is closed manually, there is a risk # Drain off any excess engine oil that has been
of dents. Driver display: added. To do so, consult a qualified specialist
4 Service workshop.
# Do not close the hood manually.
The engine oil level is shown. R For Engine Oil Level Switch On Ignition
# Lower the hood to a height of around 8 in One of the following messages will appear on
(20 cm) and then allow it to fall, applying a # Switch on the ignition to check the engine oil
the driver display: level.
little force as you let it go.
R Engine Oil Level Measuring Now…: measure‐
# If the hood can still be lifted slightly, open R Engine Oil Level System Inoperative: The oil
ment of the oil level is not yet possible. level sensor is defective or not connected.
the hood again and close it with a little more
force until it engages correctly. # Repeat the request after a maximum of # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
30 minutes' driving.
R Engine Oil Level Currently Unavailable
Engine oil R Engine Oil Level OK and the bar display for
indicating the oil level on the driver display is # Close the hood.
Checking the engine oil level with the driver green and is between "min" and "max": the
display Refilling engine oil
oil level is correct.
Requirements: R Engine Oil Level Refill 1,0 liq.gal. and the bar & WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐
R The engine has been warmed up. display for indicating the oil level on the ponent parts in the engine compartment
R The vehicle is parked on a level surface. driver display is yellow and is below "min": Certain component parts in the engine com‐
R The engine is running at idle speed. # Add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil. partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine,
R The hood is closed. the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.
328 Maintenance and care

# Allow the engine to cool down and only # Follow the instructions on the service
touch component parts described in interval display for changing the engine
the following. oil and observe the prescribed change
intervals.
& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from # Do not use additives.
engine oil
If engine oil comes into contact with hot * NOTE Damage caused by refilling too
component parts in the engine compart‐ much engine oil
ment, it may ignite. Too much engine oil can damage the engine
# Make sure that no engine oil is spilled or the catalytic converter.
next to the filler opening. # Have excess engine oil removed at a
# Allow the engine to cool off and thor‐ qualified specialist workshop.
oughly clean the engine oil from compo‐
nent parts before starting the vehicle. % Depending on driving style, the vehicle con‐
sumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liter) of oil per # Turn cap 1 counter-clockwise and remove
* NOTE Engine damage caused by an 600 miles (1000 km). The oil consumption it.
incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi‐ may be higher than this when the vehicle is
new or if you frequently drive at high engine # Add engine oil.
tives
speeds. # Replace cap 1 and turn it clockwise until it
# Do not use engine oils or oil filters % Depending on the engine, the cap may be engages.
which do not correspond to the specifi‐ installed in the engine compartment in dif‐ # Check the oil level again (/ page 327).
cations explicitly prescribed for the ferent locations.
service intervals.
 Maintenance and care 329

Checking the coolant level Refilling the windshield washer system

& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐ & WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐
ponent parts in the engine compartment ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com‐ Certain component parts in the engine com‐
partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine,
the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.
# Allow the engine to cool down and only # Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in touch component parts described in
the following. the following.

& WARNING Risk of scalding from hot & WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from
coolant windshield washer concentrate
If you open the cap, you could be scalded. Windshield washer concentrate is highly
# Let the motor cool down before opening flammable. It could ignite if it comes into # Remove cap 1 by the tab.
the cap. contact with hot engine component parts or
the exhaust system. # Refill washer fluid.
# When opening the cap, wear protective
# Make sure that no windshield washer % Further information about the windshield
gloves and safety glasses. washer fluid (/ page 474)
concentrate spills out next to the filler
# Open the cap slowly to release pres‐
opening.
sure.
# Only have the coolant checked or refilled at a
qualified specialist workshop.
330 Maintenance and care

Keeping the air-water duct free * NOTE Damage from automatic braking # Ensure there is sufficient ground clear‐
# Keep the area between the hood and the ance between the underbody and the
If one of the following functions is switched guide rails of the car wash.
windshield free of deposits, e.g. ice, snow on, the vehicle brakes automatically in cer‐
and leaves. tain situations: # Ensure that the clearance width of the
car wash, in particular the width of the
R Active Brake Assist
guide rails, is sufficient.
Cleaning and care R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Notes on washing the vehicle in a car wash R HOLD function To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a
car wash, ensure the following beforehand:
R Active Parking Assist
& WARNING Risk of accident due to R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deacti‐
reduced braking effect after washing the To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate vated.
vehicle these systems in the following or similar sit‐ R the HOLD function is switched off.
The braking effect is reduced after washing uations:
R the surround view camera or the rear view
the vehicle. # During towing
camera is switched off.
# After the vehicle has been washed, # In a car wash
R the vehicle is locked and the door handles
brake carefully while paying attention to retracted.
the traffic conditions until the braking * NOTE Damage due to unsuitable car R the side windows and sliding sunroof are
effect has been fully restored. wash completely closed.
# Before driving into a car wash make R the blower for the ventilation/heating is
sure that the car wash is suitable for switched off.
the vehicle dimensions. R the windshield wiper switch is in position g.
R the SmartKey is at a minimum distance of
20 ft (6 m) away from the vehicle. Otherwise,
 Maintenance and care 331

the trunk lid or a door could open uninten‐ Components damaged in this way may unex‐ R observe the information on the correct dis‐
tionally. pectedly fail. tance in the equipment manufacturer's oper‐
R for car washes with a conveyor system: ating instructions.
# Do not use a power washer with round-
- neutral i is engaged. spray nozzles. R do not direct the nozzle of the power washer
directly at sensitive parts, e.g. tires, gaps,
- the vehicle is locked from inside. # Have damaged tires or chassis parts
electrical components, batteries, light sour‐
R do not make any hand movements in the replaced immediately. ces and ventilation slits.
area of the overhead control panel or deacti‐
vate (/ page 294) the Sliding Sunroof and To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the fol‐
lowing when using a power washer: Washing the vehicle by hand
Roller Sunblind option in the settings for the
MBUX Interior Assistant. R the SmartKey is at a minimum distance of
10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle. Otherwise, * NOTE Engine damage due to water
% If, after the car wash, you remove the wax the trunk lid or a door could open uninten‐ ingress
from the windshield and wiper rubbers, this tionally.
will prevent smearing and reduce wiper
# Take care not to point the water jet
noise. R maintain a distance of at least 11.8 in directly towards the air inlet grille below
(30 cm) to the vehicle. the hood.
R vehicles with decorative foil: parts of your
Notes on using a power washer Observe the legal requirements, e.g. in a number
vehicle are covered with a decorative foil.
Maintain a distance of at least 27.6 in of countries, washing by hand is only permitted
& WARNING Risk of an accident when (70 cm) between the foil-covered parts of the in specially designated wash bays.
using power washers with round-spray vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer. # Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo.
nozzles Move the power washer nozzle around whilst # Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using
The water jet can cause externally invisible cleaning. The water temperature of the a soft car sponge. When doing so, do not
damage. power washer must not exceed 140°F expose the vehicle to direct sunlight.
(60°C).
332 Maintenance and care

# Carefully hose the vehicle off with water and R Do not attach stickers, films or similar mate‐ Notes on cleaning decorative foils
dry using a chamois. rials. Only have film attached to the bumper
at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the notes on matte finish care in the
% Observe the notes on the care of vehicle chapter "Notes on paintwork/matte finish paint‐
parts (/ page 333). R Remove dirt immediately, where possible. work care" (/ page 332). They also apply to
Matte finish matte decorative foils.
Notes on paintwork/matte finish paintwork R Only use care products approved for Observe the notes on cleaning decorative foils to
care Mercedes-Benz. avoid vehicle damage.
Observe the notes on cleaning and care to avoid R Do not attach stickers, films or similar mate‐ Cleaning
damaging the paintwork and interfering with the rials. Only have film attached to the bumper R For cleaning, use plenty of water and a mild
driver assistance systems. at a qualified specialist workshop. cleaning agent without additives or abrasive
Paint R Do not polish the vehicle and alloy wheels. substances, e.g. a car shampoo approved for
R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and R Only use car washes that correspond to the Mercedes-Benz.
rinse off the treated areas afterwards. latest engineering standards. R Remove dirt immediately, where possible,

R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off R Do not use car wash programs with a final whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. There is
hot wax treatment. otherwise a risk of damaging the decorative
afterwards.
foil irreparably.
R Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by R Do not use paint cleaners, buffing or polish‐
R If there is dirt on the finish or if the decora‐
rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petro‐ ing products, gloss preservers, e.g. wax.
tive foil is dull: use the Paint Cleaner recom‐
leum ether or lighter fluid. In the event of paintwork damage: mended and approved for Mercedes-Benz.
R Coolant and brake fluid: remove with a damp
R Always have paintwork repairs carried out at R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and
cloth and clean water. a qualified specialist workshop. rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
R Tar stains: use tar remover.
R Make sure the radar sensors function R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off
R Wax: use silicone remover. (/ page 215). afterwards.
 Maintenance and care 333

R To prevent water stains, dry a foil-wrapped You can obtain more information on care and & WARNING Risk of burns from the tail‐
vehicle with a soft, absorbent cloth after cleaning products from the manufacturer. pipe and tailpipe trims
every car wash. In the case of foil-wrapped surfaces, optical dif‐
ferences may occur between the surfaces that The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can
Avoiding damage to the decorative foil become very hot. If you come into contact
R The service life and color of decorative foils were not protected by a decorative foil after
removing a decorative foil. with these parts of the vehicle, you could
are impaired by: burn yourself.
- Sunlight % Have work or repairs to decorative foils car‐
# Always be particularly careful around
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop,
- Temperature, e.g. hot air blower e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and
- Weather conditions supervise children especially closely in
this area.
- Stone chippings and dirt Notes on care of vehicle parts # Allow vehicle parts to cool down before
- Chemical cleaning agents touching them.
- Oily products & WARNING Risk of entrapment if the
R Do not use polish on matte decorative foil.
windshield wipers are switched on while To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the
the windshield is being cleaned notes on cleaning and care of the following vehi‐
Polishing will have the effect of shining the
foil-wrapped surface. If the windshield wipers are set in motion cle parts:
R Do not treat matte or structured decorative while you are cleaning the windshield or Wheels and rims
foils with wax. Permanent stains may occur. wiper blades, you can be trapped by the R Use water and acid-free alloy wheel cleaners.
wiper arm.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by R Do not use acidic alloy wheel cleaners to
# Always switch off the windshield wipers
corrosion and damage caused by incorrect care remove brake dust. This could damage wheel
and the ignition before cleaning the bolts and brake components.
cannot always be completely repaired. In such windshield or wiper blades.
cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. R To avoid corrosion of the brake discs and
brakepads, drive the vehicle for a few
334 Maintenance and care

minutes after cleaning before parking it. The Exterior lighting Notes on care of the interior
brake discs and brakepads warm up and dry R Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild
out. cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. & WARNING Risk of injury from plastic
R Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths parts breaking off after the use of sol‐
Windows
that are suitable for plastic lenses. vent-based care products
R Clean the windows inside and outside with a
damp cloth and with a cleaning agent recom‐ Sensors Care and cleaning products containing sol‐
mended for Mercedes-Benz. R Clean the sensors in the front and rear vents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to
R Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solvent- bumpers with a soft cloth and car shampoo become porous. When the airbags are
based cleaning agents to clean the inside of (/ page 215). deployed, plastic parts may break away.
windows. # Do not use any care or cleaning prod‐
R When using a power washer, maintain a mini‐
mum distance of 11.8 in (30 cm). ucts containing solvents to clean the
% Remove external fogging or dirt on the wind‐ cockpit.
shield in front of the multifunction camera. Rear view camera and surround view camera
Otherwise, driving systems and driving R Open the camera cover with the multimedia
safety systems may be impaired or not avail‐ & WARNING Risk of injury or death from
system (/ page 261). bleached seat belts
able (/ page 215).
R Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean the
Wiper blades camera lens. Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely
R Move the wiper arms into the replacement weaken them.
R Do not use a power washer.
position (/ page 168). This can, for example, cause seat belts to
R With the wiper arms folded out, clean the
Tailpipes tear or fail in an accident.
R Clean with a cleaning agent recommended # Never bleach or dye seat belts.
wiper blades with a damp cloth.
for Mercedes-Benz, especially in the winter
R Do not clean the wiper blades too often. and after washing the vehicle. To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the fol‐
R Do not use acidic cleaning agents. lowing notes on cleaning and care:
 Maintenance and care 335

Seat belts R Black piano-lacquer look: clean with a damp R For heavy soiling: use a cleaner recommen‐
R Clean with lukewarm and soapy water. cloth and soapy water. ded for Mercedes-Benz.
R Do not use chemical cleaning agents. R For heavy soiling: use a cleaner recommen‐ R Leather care: use a leather care agent that
R Do not dry by heating them to over 176°F ded for Mercedes-Benz. has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
(80°C) or exposing them to direct sunlight. R Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents, R Do not allow the leather to become too
polishes or waxes. damp.
Display
R Switch off the display and let it cool down. Headliner R Do not use a microfiber cloth.
R Clean the surface carefully with a microfiber R Clean with a brush or dry shampoo. % Leather is a natural product. It has natural
cloth and a suitable display care product Carpet surface properties, such as differences in
(TFT-LCD). R Use a carpet and textile cleaning agent rec‐ structure, marks caused by growth and
R Do not use any other agents. ommended for Mercedes-Benz. injury or subtle color differences.
Plastic trim Steering wheel made of genuine leather or Genuine leather seat covers
R Clean with a damp microfiber cloth. DINAMICA R Clean with a damp cloth and then wipe with a
dry cloth.
R For heavy soiling: use a cleaner recommen‐
ded for Mercedes-Benz. * NOTE Damage caused by wrong cleaners R Leather care: use a leather care agent that
has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
R Do not attach stickers, films or similar mate‐ # Do not use solvent-based cleaning
rials. agents such as tar remover or wheel R Do not allow the leather to become too
cleaner; neither should you use pol‐ damp.
R Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or
sun cream to come in contact with the plas‐ ishes or waxes. Otherwise you may R Do not use a microfiber cloth.
tic trim. damage the finish.
DINAMICA seat covers
Real wood and trim elements R Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water R Clean with a damp cloth.
R Clean with a microfiber cloth. solution and then wipe with a dry cloth. R Do not use a microfiber cloth.
336 Maintenance and care

Fabric seat covers

R Clean with a damp microfiber cloth and 1%
soapy water and allow to dry.
EASY-PACK trunk box
R Clean with a damp cloth.
R Do not use any alcohol-based thinners, gaso‐
line or abrasive cleaning agents.
 Breakdown assistance 337

Emergency Replace the safety vest in the following cases:

Removing the safety vest R The reflective strips are damaged or dirt on
the reflective strips can no longer be
The safety vests are located in storage spaces in removed
the front door. R The maximum number of washes is exceeded
R The fluorescence has faded

1 Maximum number of washes

2 Maximum wash temperature
3 Do not bleach
4 Do not iron
5 Do not tumble dry
# Take the safety vest bag out of storage space 6 Do not dry clean
1. 7 This is a class 2 vest
# Open the safety vest bag and pull out the
safety vest. The requirements defined by the legal standard
are only fulfilled in the following cases:
% Safety vests can also be stored in the rear
door storage spaces. R The safety vest is the correct size
R The safety vest is fully closed whilst being
worn
338 Breakdown assistance

Warning triangle Setting up the warning triangle

Removing the warning triangle

# Fold side reflectors 1 upwards to form a tri‐ Flat tire

angle and attach at the top using upper Notes in the event of a flat tire
press-stud 2.
# Fold legs 3 down and out to the side. & WARNING Risk of accident due to a flat
tire
First-aid kit (soft sided) A flat tire severely affects the driving charac‐
teristics as well as the steering and braking
# Push both sides of warning triangle holder First-aid kit (soft sided) 1 is located on the of the vehicle.
1 in the direction of the arrow and open it. right-hand side of the trunk and is secured with Tires without run-flat characteristics:
# Remove warning triangle 2. Velcro strip 2.
# Do not drive with a flat tire.

# Change the flat tire immediately with an

emergency spare wheel or spare wheel.
 Breakdown assistance 339

Alternatively, consult a qualified spe‐ R All vehicles: change the wheel R Vehicle vibration
cialist workshop. (/ page 380).
R Smoke which smells like rubber
% The emergency spare wheel is only available R Continuous ESP® intervention
Tires with run-flat characteristics: in certain countries.
# Observe the information and warning R Cracks in the tire side walls
notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat After driving in emergency mode, have
tire). Notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tires) #
the rims checked by a qualified special‐
& WARNING Risk of accident when driving ist workshop with regard to their further
In the event of a flat tire, the following options use.
are available depending on your vehicle's equip‐ in limp-home mode
ment: When driving in emergency mode the han‐
# The defective tire must be replaced in
dling characteristics are impaired. every case.
R Vehicles with MOExtended tires: it is pos‐
sible to continue the journey for a short # Do not exceed the specified maximum With MOExtended tires (run-flat tires), you can
period of time. Make sure you observe the speed of the MOExtended tires. continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a
notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tires) # Avoid any abrupt steering and driving total loss of pressure in one or more tires. How‐
(/ page 339). maneuvers as well as driving over ever, the tire affected must not show any clearly
R Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can repair obstacles (curbs, pot holes, off-road). visible damage.
the tire so that it is possible to continue the This applies, in particular, to a loaded You can recognize MOExtended tires by the
journey for a short period of time. To do this, vehicle. MOExtended marking which appears on the side
use the TIREFIT kit (/ page 340). # Stop driving in the emergency mode if wall of the tire.
R Vehicles with Mercedes me connect: you you notice: Vehicles with tire pressure monitoring sys‐
can make a call for breakdown assistance via R Banging noise tem: MOExtended tires may only be used in con‐
the overhead control panel in the case of a junction with an activated tire pressure monitor‐
breakdown (/ page 309). ing system.
340 Breakdown assistance

If a pressure loss warning message appears in TIREFIT kit storage location & WARNING Risk of accident when using
the driver's display, proceed as follows: tire sealant
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the stor‐
R Check the tire for damage. age bag for the TIREFIT kit is located in the cargo The tire sealant may be unable to seal the
R If driving on, observe the following notes. compartment or on the left side of the stowage tire properly, especially in the following
net. Comply with the loading guidelines cases:
Driving distance possible in emergency (/ page 133).
mode after the pressure loss warning: R There are large cuts or punctures in the

Load condition Driving distance pos‐ tire (larger than damage previously men‐
Using the TIREFIT kit tioned)
sible in emergency
mode Requirements: R The wheel rims have been damaged
R Tire sealant bottle and tire inflation compres‐ R After journeys with very low tire pressure
Partially laden 50 miles (80 km) sor (/ page 340) or with flat tires
Fully laden 19 miles (30 km) R TIREFIT sticker # Do not continue driving.
R Gloves (depending on the vehicle equipment)
The driving distance possible in emergency # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
mode may vary depending on the driving style. You can use TIREFIT tire sealant to seal perfora‐
Observe the maximum permissible speed of tion damage of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly & WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning
50 mph (80 km/h). those in the tire contact surface. You can use from tire sealant
If a tire has been punctured and cannot be TIREFIT in outside temperatures down to -4 °F
(-20 °C). The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita‐
replaced with an MOExtended tire, you can use a tion. Do not allow it to come into contact
standard tire as a temporary measure. with the skin, eyes or clothing, and do not
swallow it. Do not inhale tire sealant fumes.
Keep the tire sealant away from children.
 Breakdown assistance 341

If you come into contact with the tire sealant, Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on
observe the following: the sticker on the tire inflation compressor.
# Rinse off the tire sealant from your skin Have the tire sealant bottle replaced at a quali‐
immediately using water. fied specialist workshop every five years.
# If tire sealant gets into your eyes, thor‐ # Do not remove any foreign objects which

oughly rinse out the eyes using clean have entered the tire.
water.
# If tire sealant has been swallowed,
immediately rinse out the mouth thor‐
oughly and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting and seek medical
attention immediately.
# Change out of any clothes contamina‐
ted with tire sealant immediately.
# If allergic reactions occur, seek medical # Pull plug 6 with the cable and hose 5 out
attention immediately. of the tire inflation compressor housing.
# Affix part 1 of the TIREFIT sticker to the # Push the plug of hose 5 into flange 4 of
* NOTE Overheating due to the tire infla‐ instrument cluster within the driver's field of
tire sealant bottle 3 until the plug engages.
tion compressor running too long vision.
# Place tire sealant bottle 3 head downwards
# Affix part 2 of the TIREFIT sticker near the
# Do not run the tire inflation compressor into recess 2 of the tire inflation compres‐
valve on the wheel with the faulty tire.
for longer than ten minutes without sor.
interruption.
342 Breakdown assistance

# Let the tire inflation compressor run for a # Pump up the tire again.
maximum of ten minutes. After a maximum of ten minutes the tire
The tire should then have attained a tire pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/
pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi).
29 psi).
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the
If tire sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the specified tire pressure not being attained
affected area as quickly as possible. It is prefera‐
ble to use clean water. If the minimum tire pressure is not reached
If you get tire sealant on your clothing, have it after the specified time, the tire is too badly
cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethy‐ damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the
# Remove the valve cap from valve 7 on the tire in this instance.
lene.
faulty tire. The braking and driving characteristics may
# Screw filling hose 8 onto valve 7. If, after ten minutes, a tire pressure of be greatly impaired.
200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been
# Insert plug 6 into a 12 V socket in your attained:
# Do not continue driving.
vehicle. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
# Switch on the ignition.
# Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the If, after ten minutes, a tire pressure of
# Switch on the tire inflation compressor using faulty tire.
On/Off switch 1. 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained:
The tire is inflated. First, tire sealant is pum‐ # Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
Please note that tire sealant may leak out when
ped into the tire. The pressure may briefly unscrewing the filling hose. # Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the
rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). faulty tire.
# Drive forwards or in reverse very slowly for

Do not switch off the tire inflation compres‐ approximately 33 ft (10 m).
sor during this phase!
 Breakdown assistance 343

& WARNING Risk of accident from driving + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental The braking and driving characteristics may
with sealed tires pollution caused by environmentally irre‐ be greatly impaired.
A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant sponsible disposal # Do not continue driving.

impairs the handling characteristics and is Tire sealant contains pollutants. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
not suitable for higher speeds. # Have the tire sealant bottle disposed of
# Adapt your driving style accordingly and professionally, e.g. at an authorized In cases such as the one mentioned above, con‐
drive carefully. Mercedes-Benz Center. tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or
call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or
# Do not exceed the maximum speed
# Store the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla‐ 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
limit with a tire that has been repaired
tion compressor. # Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least
using tire sealant.
# Pull away immediately. 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and
# Observe the maximum permissible speed for Loading Information placard on the B‑pillar
# Stop driving after approximately ten minutes on the driver's side or the tire pressure table
a tire sealed with tire sealant 50 mph and check the tire pressure using the tire
(80 km/h). in the fuel filler flap for values.
inflation compressor.
# To increase the tire pressure: switch on
The tire pressure must now be at least
* NOTE Staining caused by leaking tire 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). the tire inflation compressor.
sealant
After use, excess tire sealant may leak out & WARNING Risk of accident due to the
from the filling hose. specified tire pressure not being attained
# Therefore, place the filling hose in the If the specified tire pressure is not reached,
plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT the tire is too badly damaged. The tire seal‐
kit. ant cannot repair the tire in this instance.
344 Breakdown assistance

Battery (vehicle) # Always have work on the battery carried

Notes on the 12 V battery out at a qualified specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to R Further information on ABS (/ page 217)
work carried out incorrectly on the bat‐ R Further information on ESP® (/ page 218)
tery
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery that you only use batteries which have been tes‐
can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This ted and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-
can restrict functions relevant for safety sys‐ Benz.
# To reduce the tire pressure: press pressure tems and impair the operating safety of your
vehicle. All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-
release button 1 next to manometer 2. ion battery
# When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew You could lose control of the vehicle in the
the filling hose from the valve of the sealed following situations in particular: & WARNING Risk of explosion due to elec‐
tire. R When braking trostatic charge
# Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the R In the event of abrupt steering maneuvers Electrostatic charge can ignite the highly
sealed tire. and/or when the vehicle's speed is not explosive gas mixture in the battery.
# Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire adapted to the road conditions
# To discharge any electrostatic charge
inflation compressor. # In the event of a short circuit or a simi‐ that may have built up, touch the metal
The filling hose stays on the tire sealant bot‐ lar incident, contact a qualified special‐ vehicle body before handling the bat‐
tle. ist workshop immediately. tery.
# Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work‐ # Do not drive on.
shop and have the tire, tire sealant bottle
and filling hose replaced there.
 Breakdown assistance 345

The highly flammable gas mixture is created All vehicles Risk of explosion.
while the battery is charging and during starting
assistance. + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage caused by improper disposal of
& WARNING Danger of chemical burns batteries Fire, open flames and smoking are
from the battery acid prohibited when handling the battery.
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid creating sparks.
# Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or
clothing. Batteries contain pollutants. It is Electrolyte or battery acid is corro‐
illegal to dispose of them with the household sive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes
# Do not lean over the battery.
rubbish. or clothing. Wear suitable protective
# Do not inhale battery gases.
# clothing, in particular gloves, an
# Keep children away from the battery. apron and a face mask. Immediately
rinse electrolyte or acid splashes off
# Immediately rinse battery acid off thor‐
Dispose of batteries in an with clean water. Consult a doctor if
oughly with plenty of clean water and necessary.
seek medical attention immediately. environmentally responsible manner.
Take discharged batteries to a qualified Wear safety glasses.
specialist workshop or to a collection
point for used batteries.

If you have to disconnect the 12 V battery, con‐ Keep children away.

tact a qualified specialist workshop.
Comply with safety notes and take protective
measures when handling batteries.
346 Breakdown assistance

Observe this Operator's Manual. * NOTE Damage to the battery from over‐ & WARNING Risk of explosion from hydro‐
voltage gen gas igniting
When charging using a battery charger with‐ There is a danger of hydrogen gas igniting
out a maximum charging voltage, the battery when charging the battery if there is a short
Observe the following if you do not intend to use or the on-board electronics may be damaged. circuit or sparks start to form.
the vehicle over an extended period of time:
# Only use battery chargers with a maxi‐ # Make sure that the positive terminal of
R Activate standby mode.
mum charging voltage of 14.8 V. the connected battery does not come
R Alternatively: connect the battery to a bat‐ into contact with vehicle parts.
tery charger approved by Mercedes-Benz or All other vehicles # Never place metal objects or tools on a
consult a qualified specialist workshop to When charging the battery and during starting battery.
disconnect the battery. assistance, always use the jump-start connec‐ # The described order of the battery
tion point in the engine compartment.
clamps must be observed when con‐
Notes on starting assistance and charging necting and disconnecting the battery.
the 12 V battery * NOTE Damage to the battery from over‐
voltage # When giving starting assistance, always
Vehicles with a lithium-ion battery make sure that you only connect bat‐
When charging using a battery charger with‐ tery terminals with identical polarity.
When charging the battery and during starting
out a maximum charging voltage, the battery
assistance, always use the jump-start connec‐ # During starting assistance, you must
or the on-board electronics may be damaged.
tion point in the engine compartment. observe the described order for con‐
# Only use battery chargers with a maxi‐
necting and disconnecting the jumper
mum charging voltage of 14.8 V. cable.
# Do not connect or disconnect the bat‐
tery clamps while the engine is running.
 Breakdown assistance 347

& WARNING Risk of explosion during If the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument Observe the following points during starting
charging process and starting assistance cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is assistance and when charging the battery:
very likely that the discharged battery has fro‐ R Only use undamaged jumper cables/charg‐
During the charging process and starting zen. In this case you may neither jump-start the ing cables with a sufficient cross-section and
assistance, the battery may release an explo‐ vehicle nor charge the battery. insulated terminal clamps.
sive gas mixture. The service life of a battery that has been R Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps
# Avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks thawed may be dramatically shortened. The must not come into contact with other metal
and smoking. starting characteristics may be impaired, espe‐ parts while the jumper cable/charging cable
# Make sure there is sufficient ventila‐ cially at low temperatures. is connected to the battery/jump-start con‐
tion. It is recommended that you have a thawed bat‐ nection point.
# Do not lean over a battery. tery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. R The jumper cable/charging cable must not
All vehicles come into contact with any parts which may
& WARNING Risk of explosion from a fro‐ move when the engine is running.
zen battery * NOTE Damage caused by numerous or R Always make sure that neither you nor the
A discharged battery may freeze at tempera‐ extended attempts to start the engine battery is electrostatically charged.
tures slightly above or below freezing point. Numerous or extended attempts to start the R Keep away from fire and open flames.
During starting assistance or battery charg‐ engine may damage the catalytic converter R Do not lean over the battery.
ing, battery gas can be released. due to non-combusted fuel.
Observe the additional following points when
# Always allow a battery to thaw before # Avoid numerous and extended attempts
charging the battery:
charging it or performing starting assis‐ to start the engine.
R Only use battery chargers tested and
tance.
approved for Mercedes-Benz.
R Read the battery charger's operating instruc‐
tions before charging the battery.
348 Breakdown assistance

Observe the additional following points during Starting assistance

starting assistance:
R Starting assistance may only be provided
using vehicles, batteries or other jump start
devices with a nominal voltage of 12 V.
R The vehicles must not touch.
R Vehicles with a gasoline engine: jump-
start the vehicle only when the engine and
exhaust system are cold.

Starting assistance and charging the 12 V

battery
Preparing starting assistance/the charging
process
# Secure the vehicle by applying the electric # Open cover 1.
parking brake. # Slide protective cover 2 of positive contact # Connect the positive contacts of the vehicles
# Select transmission position j. 3 on the jump-starting connection point in with the jumper cable. Start with your own
the direction of the arrow. vehicle first.
# Switch off the ignition and all electrical con‐
sumers. # Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run
# Open the hood. it at idling speed.
# Connect negative terminal 4 of the donor
battery to the ground point of your vehicle
 Breakdown assistance 349

using the jumper cable. Start with the donor Charging the 12 V battery workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
vehicle first. # Connect the positive contacts of the vehicle Center.
# Start the engine of your own vehicle. and the charger with the charging cable. Observe the following notes if you want to
# Let the engines run for several minutes. Start with the vehicle first. replace the battery yourself:
# Connect the negative contact of the charger R Always replace a faulty battery with a battery
# Before disconnecting the jumper cables,
switch on an electrical consumer in your own and ground point 4 on the vehicle with the which meets the specific vehicle require‐
vehicle, e.g. the rear window heater or the charging cable. Start with the charger first. ments.
lighting. # Start the charging process. The vehicle is equipped with an AGM technol‐
ogy battery (Absorbent Glass Mat) or a lith‐
When starting assistance has finished: When the charging process is complete: ium-ion battery. Full vehicle functionality is
# First remove the jumper cable from the # Remove the charging cable from ground only guaranteed with an AGM battery or lith‐
ground point of your own vehicle and the point 4 on the vehicle and the negative con‐ ium-ion battery. For safety reasons,
negative terminal of the donor battery, then tact of the charger first and then from the Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
remove the jumper cable from the positive positive contacts on the vehicle and charger. use batteries which have been tested and
contacts of both vehicles. Always start with Always start with the vehicle first. approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
your own vehicle first. # Close protective cover 2 of positive contact R Carry over detachable parts, such as vent
# Close protective cover 2 of positive contact 3 and close cover 1. hoses, elbow fitting or terminal covers from
3 and close cover 1. the battery being replaced.
R Make sure that the vent hose is always con‐
Further information can be obtained at a quali‐ Replacing the 12 V battery
nected to the original opening on the side of
fied specialist workshop. Observe the notes on the 12 V battery
# the battery.
(/ page 344). Install any existing or supplied cell caps.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the Otherwise, gases or battery acid could
12 V battery replaced at a qualified specialist escape.
350 Breakdown assistance

R Make sure that detachable parts are recon‐ Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your Vehicles with rear wheel drive
nected in the same way. vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than Permitted towing methods
towing it away.
For towing, use a tow rope or tow bar with both Both axles on Yes, maximum 31 miles
Tow starting or towing away the ground (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h)
axles on the ground. Do not use tow bar systems
Permitted towing methods (/ page 272).
Front axle No
* NOTE Damage from automatic braking raised
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to tow‐
If one of the following functions is switched ing away incorrectly Rear axle Yes, if the steering wheel is
on, the vehicle brakes automatically in cer‐ # Observe the instructions and notes on raised fixed in the center position
tain situations: towing away. with a steering wheel lock
R Active Brake Assist 4MATIC vehicles
R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Towing with a raised axle: towing should be
performed by a towing company. Permitted towing methods
R HOLD function
R Active Parking Assist
Both axles on Yes, maximum 31 miles
the ground (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h)
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
these systems in the following or similar sit‐ Front axle No
uations: raised
# During towing Rear axle No
# In a car wash raised
 Breakdown assistance 351

Towing the vehicle with both axles on the * NOTE Damage due to towing away at the permissible gross mass of your own
ground excessively high speeds or over long dis‐ vehicle.
# Observe the notes on the permitted towing tances
methods (/ page 350). If a vehicle must be tow-started or towed away,
The drivetrain could be damaged when tow‐ its weight must not exceed the permissible gross
# Make sure that the battery is connected and ing at excessively high speeds or over long mass of the towing vehicle.
charged. distances.
# Information on the permissible gross mass of
When the battery is discharged, the following # A towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h)
the vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden‐
actions cannot be performed: must not be exceeded. tification plate (/ page 466).
R The engine cannot be started # A towing distance of 30 miles (50 km)
# Do not open the driver's door or front
R The electric parking brake cannot be
must not be exceeded. passenger door, otherwise the automatic
released or applied transmission automatically shifts to position
R The automatic transmission cannot be shif‐
& WARNING Risk of accident when towing j.
a vehicle which is too heavy # Install the towing eye (/ page 353).
ted to position i or j
If another vehicle is tow-started or towed # Fasten the tow bar.
% If the automatic transmission cannot be shif‐ away, its weight must not exceed the permis‐
ted to position i or the driver's display in sible gross mass of your own vehicle, other‐
the instrument cluster does not show any‐ * NOTE Damage due to incorrect connec‐
wise the following could occur: tion of the tow bar
thing, have the vehicle transported away
(/ page 352). A towing vehicle with lifting R The towing eye may become detached. # Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to
equipment is required for vehicle transporta‐ R The vehicle/trailer combination may the towing eyes.
tion. swerve or even rollover.
# Deactivate the automatic locking mecha‐
# If another vehicle is tow-started or nism .
towed away, its weight must not exceed
352 Breakdown assistance

# Do not activate the HOLD function. # Use a tow bar. electrics. To shift to i, provide the on-
# Deactivate the tow-away alarm board electrical system with power
# Make sure that the steering wheel can (/ page 348).
(/ page 103). move freely before towing the vehicle
# Deactivate Active Brake Assist away. # Raise the vehicle in order to achieve greater
(/ page 240). ground clearance (/ page 254).
# Shift the automatic transmission to position * NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive # Load the vehicle onto the transporter.
i. power # Shift the automatic transmission to position
# Release the electric parking brake. j.
If you pull away sharply, the tractive power
may be too high and the vehicles could be # Use the electric parking brake to secure the
& WARNING Risk of accident due to limi‐ damaged. vehicle against rolling away.
ted safety-related functions during the # Only secure the vehicle by the wheels.
# Pull away slowly and smoothly.
towing process
4MATIC vehicles
Safety-related functions are limited or no lon‐
ger available in the following situations: Loading the vehicle for transport
R The ignition is switched off. # Observe the notes on towing away
R The brake system or power steering sys‐ (/ page 351).
tem is malfunctioning. # Connect the tow bar to the towing eye in
R The energy supply or the on-board electri‐ order to load the vehicle.
cal system is malfunctioning. # Shift the automatic transmission to position
When your vehicle is then towed away, signif‐ i.
icantly more effort may be required to steer % The automatic transmission may be locked
and brake than is normally required. in position j in the event of damage to the
 Breakdown assistance 353

# Make sure that the front and rear axles come Depending on the vehicle equipment, the towing # Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it
to rest on the same transportation vehicle. eye may be located at another position in the will go and tighten.
trunk. # Make sure that cover 1 engages in the
* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain due to bumper when you remove the towing eye.
incorrect positioning Installing the towing eye
# Do not position the vehicle above the * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to
connection point of the transport vehi‐ incorrect use of the towing eye
cle. When a towing eye is used to recover a vehi‐
cle, the vehicle may be damaged in the proc‐
ess.
Towing eye storage location
# Only use the towing eye to tow away or
tow start the vehicle.

Tow-starting the vehicle (emergency engine

start)

* NOTE Damage to the automatic trans‐

mission due to tow-starting
Tow-starting the vehicle can damage the
automatic transmission.
Towing eye 1 is located under the trunk floor. # Press the mark on cover 1 inwards and
# Do not tow-start the vehicle.
remove.
# Do not tow-start the vehicle.
354 Breakdown assistance

Electrical fuses Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the R All electrical consumers are switched off.
same rating, which you can recognize by the R The ignition is switched off.
Notes on electrical fuses color and fuse rating. The fuse ratings and fur‐
ther information to be observed can be found in The electrical fuses are located in the following
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury the fuse assignment diagram. fuse boxes:
due to overloaded lines R Fuse box in the engine compartment on the
Fuse assignment diagram: in the vehicle docu‐
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if ment wallet. driver's side (/ page 354)
you replace it with a fuse with a higher R Fuse box on the driver's side of the cockpit
amperage, the electric line could be overloa‐ * NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused (/ page 356)
ded. by moisture R Fuse box in the front passenger footwell
This could result in a fire. Moisture may cause damage to the electrical (/ page 357)
# Always replace faulty fuses with speci‐ system or cause it to malfunction. R Fuse box in the trunk on the right-hand side
fied new fuses containing the correct # When the fuse box is open, make sure of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction
amperage. that no moisture can enter the fuse of travel (/ page 357)
box.
* NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuses # When closing the fuse box, make sure Opening and closing the fuse box in the
Electrical components or systems may be that the seal of the lid is positioned cor‐ engine compartment
damaged by incorrect fuses, or their func‐ rectly on the fuse box.
tionality may be significantly impaired. Requirements:
If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the R Observe the notes on electrical fuses
# Only use fuses that have been approved
cause traced and rectified at a qualified special‐ (/ page 354).
by Mercedes-Benz and which have the
ist workshop. R Have the following tools readily available:
correct fuse rating.
Ensure the following before replacing a fuse: - A dry cloth
R The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
 Breakdown assistance 355

- A screwdriver with an appropriate head # Depending on the vehicle equipment, there

may be an electrical component 2 on the
Opening fuse box lid. If present, unscrew screw 3
% Depending on the vehicle equipment, access and put the component to the side without
to the fuse box may be limited. Mercedes- disconnecting the electrical connection.
Benz recommends consulting a qualified
specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

& WARNING Risk of injury from using the

windshield wipers while the engine hood # Release the rotary catches on cover 1 and
is open pull the cover up and out.
When the engine hood is open and the wind‐ # Remove any existing moisture from the fuse
shield wipers are set in motion, you can be box using a dry cloth.
trapped by the wiper linkage.
# Always switch off the windshield wipers
# If present, release hoses 4 from the retain‐
and ignition before opening the engine
ing clips on the fuse box and vehicle body.
hood.
356 Breakdown assistance

# If present, engage hoses 5 in the retaining

clips in the engine compartment and vehicle
body.
# If present, engage hoses 4 in the retaining
clips on the fuse box and vehicle body.
# If present, insert electrical component 2
into the holder on the fuse box lid and
tighten screws 3.
# Insert cover 1 and engage the rotary
# If present, release hoses 5 from the retain‐ catches.
ing clips in the engine compartment and
vehicle body. Opening and closing the fuse box in the
cockpit
Requirements:
# Unscrew screws 8 and remove fuse box lid R Observe the notes on electrical fuses
9 to the side. (/ page 354).
Closing
# Check whether the seal is positioned cor‐
rectly in lid 9.
# Place lid 9 on the fuse box and tighten
screws 8.
# Unscrew screws 6 and fold out bar 7. # Fold back bar 7 and tighten screws 6.
 Breakdown assistance 357

# Open cover 1 in the direction of the arrow # Fold cover 1 down in the direction of the
and remove it. arrow.

Opening and closing the fuse box in the front

passenger footwell
Requirements:
# Open cover 1 in the direction of the arrow
R Observe the notes on electrical fuses
and remove it.
(/ page 354).
Opening and closing the fuse box in the
trunk
Requirements:
R Observe the notes on electrical fuses
(/ page 354).
358 Wheels and tires

Notes on noise or unusual handling charac‐ & WARNING Risk of hydroplaning due to R Visually inspect wheels and tires for damage.
teristics insufficient tire tread R Check the valve caps.
Make sure there are no vibrations, noises or Insufficient tire tread will result in reduced R Visual check of the tire tread depth and the
unusual handling characteristics when the vehi‐ tire grip. tire contact surface across the entire width.
cle is in motion. This may indicate that the The minimum tread depth for summer tires is
wheels or tires are damaged. Hidden tire dam‐ In heavy rain or slush the risk of hydroplaning
is increased, in particular where speed is not â in (3 mm) and for winter tires ã in
age could also be causing the unusual handling (4 mm).
characteristics. adapted to suit the conditions.
# Thus, you should regularly check the
If you suspect that a tire is malfunctioning,
reduce your speed immediately and have the tread depth and the condition of the
tires and wheels checked at a qualified specialist tread across the entire width of all tires.
workshop. Minimum tread depth for:
R Summer tires: â in (3 mm)
Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and R M+S tires: ãin (4 mm)
tires
# For safety reasons, replace the tires
& WARNING Risk of injury through dam‐ before the legally-prescribed limit for
aged tires the minimum tread depth is reached.
Six marks 1 show where the bar indicators
Damaged tires can cause tire pressure loss. Carry out the following checks on all wheels reg‐ (arrow) are integrated into the tire tread. They
# Check the tires regularly for signs of ularly, at least once a month or as required, for are visible once a tire tread depth of approx‐
example, prior to a long journey or driving off- imately á in (1.6 mm) has been reached.
damage and replace any damaged tires
immediately. road:
R Check the tire pressure (/ page 360).
 Wheels and tires 359

Notes on snow chains Observe the following notes when using snow % You can deactivate ESP® to pull away
chains: (/ page 219). This allows the wheels to
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐ R Snow chains are only permissible for certain spin, achieving an increased driving force.
rect mounting of snow chains wheel/tire combinations. You can obtain
If you have mounted snow chains to the front information about this from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. Activating or deactivating snow chain mode
wheels, the snow chains may drag against Multimedia system:
the vehicle body or chassis components. R For safety reasons, only use snow chains that
4 © 5 ß 5 y
This could cause damage to the vehicle or have been specifically approved for your
the tires. vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains # Activate or deactivate Snow Chain Mode.
with the same quality standard.
# Never mount snow chains on the front When the function is active, the vehicle behaves
R If snow chains are installed, the maximum
wheels. as if snow chains were mounted. For example,
permissible speed is 30 mph (50 km/h).
# Only mount snow chains on the rear the maximum steering movement of the rear
R Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: Do wheels is limited.
wheels in pairs.
not use Active Parking Assist when snow Additionally, parts of the driving and driving
chains are installed. safety systems are not available when snow
* NOTE Damage to components of the R Vehicles with level control: If snow chains
vehicle body or chassis due to mounted chain mode is active.
are installed, only drive at raised vehicle level
snow chains
(/ page 254).
If you mount snow chains to the front wheels R Vehicles with rear axle steering: If snow
of 4MATIC vehicles, you may damage compo‐ chains are installed, only drive with snow
nents of the vehicle body or chassis. chain mode active (/ page 359).
# Only mount snow chains to the rear
wheels of 4MATIC vehicles.
360 Wheels and tires

Tire pressure # Adjust the tire pressure where neces‐ R Increased fuel consumption
Notes on tire pressure sary.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to too
Tire pressure which is too high or too low can: high a tire pressure
& WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf‐
ficient or excessive tire pressure R Shorten the service life of the tires. Tires with excessively high pressure can
R Cause increased tire damage.
burst.
Tires with either too low or too high a pres‐
sure present the following hazards: R Adversely affect driving characteristics and
In addition, they also suffer from irregular
thus driving safety, e.g. due to hydroplaning. wear, which can significantly impair the brak‐
R the tires could burst ing properties and the handling characteris‐
R the tires could wear excessively and/or tics.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to too
unevenly low a tire pressure # Avoid excessively high tire pressures.
R the driving characteristics as well as
steering and braking characteristics may Tires with pressure that is too low can over‐ Tire pressure which is too high can cause:
be severely impaired heat and burst as a consequence.
R Increased braking distance
In addition, they also suffer from irregular
# Observe the recommended tire pres‐ wear, which can significantly impair the brak‐ R Impaired handling characteristics
sures and check the tire pressure of all ing properties and the handling characteris‐ R Irregular wear
tires including the spare wheel: tics. R Impaired driving comfort
R monthly # Avoid excessively low tire pressure.
R Susceptibility to damage
R if altering the load on the vehicle
R prior to long journeys Tire pressure which is too low can cause:
R if the operating conditions change, for R Tire faults as a result of overheating
example when driving off-road R Impaired handling characteristics
R Irregular wear
 Wheels and tires 361

& WARNING Risk of accident due to repea‐ Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire & WARNING Risk of accident due to
ted pressure drop in the tires pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does unsuitable accessories on tire valves
not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire
The wheels, valves or tires could be dam‐ pressure. If you mount unsuitable accessories onto tire
aged. Only correct tire pressure when the tires are valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and
Too low a tire pressure can lead to the tires cold. Conditions for cold tires: malfunction, which can cause tire pressure
bursting. loss.
R The vehicle has been parked with the tires
# Examine the tires for foreign objects. # Only screw standard valve caps or valve
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours.
caps specifically approved by
# Check whether the tire has a puncture R The vehicle has traveled less than 1 mile Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto
or the valve has a leak. (1.6 km). the tire valve.
# If you are unable to rectify the damage,
The vehicle's tires heat up when driving. As the
contact a qualified specialist workshop. temperature of the tires increases, so too does
Tire pressure table
the tire pressure.
You can find information on tire pressure for the
vehicle's factory-installed tires on the following Vehicles with tire pressure monitoring sys‐ The tire pressure table is on the inside of the
labels: tem: You can also see the tire pressure in the fuel filler flap.
R Tire and Loading Information placard on the
driver display. % The data shown in the images is example
B‑pillar of your vehicle (/ page 365). The tire pressure recommended for increased data.
R Tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel
load/speed in the tire pressure table can affect
the ride comfort.
filler flap (/ page 361).
Observe the maximum tire pressure
(/ page 371).
362 Wheels and tires

Checking the tire pressure manually

# Read the tire pressure recommended for the
current operating conditions from the Tire
and Loading Information placard or the tire
pressure table. Observe the notes on tire
pressure.
# Remove the valve cap of the tire to be
checked.
# Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto

If one or more tire sizes precede a tire pressure, the valve.

the following tire pressure information is only # Read the tire pressure.
valid for those tire sizes and their respective # If the tire pressure is lower than the recom‐
load condition. mended value, increase the tire pressure to
The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully the recommended value.
laden" are defined in the table for different num‐ Some tire pressure tables only show the rim # If the tire pressure is higher than the recom‐
bers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The diameter instead of the complete tire size, e.g. mended value, release air. To do so, press
actual number of seats may differ from this. R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size and down the metal pin in the valve, e.g. using
can be found on the tire side wall (/ page 372). the tip of a pen, for example. Then check the
R Tire and Loading Information placard tire pressure again using the tire pressure
(/ page 365) gauge.
# Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
R Maximum tire pressure (/ page 371)
Further related subjects:
R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 360)
 Wheels and tires 363

R Tire pressure table (/ page 361) pressure telltale when one or more of your and then remain continuously illuminated.
R Tire and Loading Information placard tires is significantly underinflated. Accord‐ This sequence will continue upon subsequent
(/ page 365) ingly, if the low tire pressure telltale illumi‐ vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
nates, you should stop and check your tires exists.
Tire pressure monitoring system as soon as possible, and inflate them to the When the malfunction indicator is illumina‐
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly ted, the system may not be able to detect or
Function of the tire pressure monitoring sys‐ underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
tem and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation malfunctions may occur for a variety of rea‐
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread sons, including the installation of incompati‐
& DANGER Risk of accident due to incor‐ life, and may affect the vehicle's handling ble replacement or alternate tires or wheels
rect tire pressure and stopping ability. Please note that the on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire main‐ functioning properly.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
tenance, and it is the driver's responsibility
should be checked monthly when cold and Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale
to maintain correct tire pressure, even if
then inflated to the inflation pressure recom‐ after replacing one or more tires or wheels
underinflation has not reached the level to
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the on your vehicle to ensure that the replace‐
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres‐
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure ment or alternate tires and wheels allow the
sure telltale.
label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different TPMS to continue to function properly.
size than the size indicated on the vehicle Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when The system checks the tire pressure and the tire
should determine the proper tire inflation the system is not operating properly. The temperature of the tires installed on the vehicle
pressure for these tires.) TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with by means of a tire pressure sensor.
the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys‐
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has The tire pressure and the tire temperature
tem detects a malfunction, the indicator
been equipped with a tire pressure monitor‐ appear on the driver display (/ page 364).
lamp will flash for approximately a minute
ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
364 Wheels and tires

If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the Checking the tire pressure with the tire pres‐ The tire pressures are already being moni‐
tire temperature is excessive, you will be warned sure monitoring system tored.
with display messages (/ page 524) or the
h warning lamp in the instrument cluster Requirements: # Compare the tire pressure with the recom‐
(/ page 546). R The ignition is switched on. mended tire pressure for the current operat‐
ing condition (/ page 361). Observe the
The tire pressure monitoring system is only an Driver display: notes on tire temperature (/ page 360).
aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire 4 © 5 Service
pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure % The values displayed in the driver display
One of the following displays appears: may deviate from those of the tire pressure
suitable for the operating situation.
R Current tire pressure of each wheel: gauge as they refer to sea level. At high ele‐
In most cases, the tire pressure monitoring sys‐ vations, the tire pressure values indicated by
tem will automatically update the new reference a pressure gauge are higher than those
values after you have changed the tire pressure. shown by the driver display. In this case, do
You can, however, also update the reference val‐ not reduce the tire pressure.
ues by restarting the tire pressure monitoring
system manually (/ page 364). Bear in mind the following related topic:
R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 360)
System limits
The system may be impaired or may not function Restarting the tire pressure monitoring sys‐
particularly in the following situations: tem
R The tire pressure has been set incorrectly Requirements:
R The recommended tire pressure is correctly
R Sudden pressure loss caused by a foreign R Tire pressure displayed after driving for a
object penetrating the tire, for example few minutes. set for the respective operating status on
each of the four wheels (/ page 360).
R There is a malfunction caused by another R Tire Pressure Monitor Active: the teach-in
radio signal source process of the system is not yet complete.
 Wheels and tires 365

Restart the tire pressure monitoring system in Bear in mind the following related topic:
the following situations: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 360)
R The tire pressure has changed.
R The wheels or tires have been changed or
Loading the vehicle
newly installed.
Notes on Tire and Loading Information plac‐
Driver display: ard
4 © 5 Service

# Select Tire Pressure and confirm with a. & WARNING Risk of accident from overloa‐
The driver display shows the Use current ded tires
pressures as new reference values? mes‐ Overloaded tires may overheat and burst as a 1 Tire and Loading Information placard
sage. consequence. Overloaded tires can also
# Select Yes and confirm the restart with impair the steering and handling characteris‐
a. tics and lead to brake failure.
The driver display shows the Tire Pressure # Observe the load rating of the tires.
Monitor Restarted message. # The load rating must be at least half the
Current warning messages are deleted and permissible axle load of the vehicle.
the yellow h warning lamp goes out. # Never overload the tires by exceeding
After you have been driving for a few the maximum load.
minutes, the system checks whether the cur‐
rent tire pressures are within the specified The Tire and Loading Information placard is on
range. The current tire pressures are then the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle.
accepted as reference values and monitored.
366 Wheels and tires

R Maximum permissible load 3 comprises the Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575, pur‐
gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load suant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle
and luggage. Safety Act of 1966".
R Recommended tire pressure 1 for cold # (1): Locate the statement "The combined
tires. The recommended tire pressures are weight of occupants and cargo should never
valid for the maximum permissible load and exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's
up to the maximum permissible vehicle placard.
speed. # (2): Determine the combined weight of the

Please also note: driver and passengers that will be riding in

your vehicle.
R Information on permissible weights and loads
# (3): Subtract the combined weight of the
on the vehicle identification plate
(/ page 466). driver and passengers from XXX kg or
R Information on tire pressure in the tire pres‐
XXX lbs.
sure table (/ page 361). # (4): The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
% The data shown in the illustration is example Further related subjects: For example, if the "XXX" amount equals
data. R Determining the maximum permissible load 1400 lbs. and there will be five occupants
The Tire and Loading Information placard shows (/ page 366) 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the
the following information: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 360). amount of available cargo and luggage load
R Maximum number of seats 2 according to capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) =
the maximum number of people permitted to 650 lbs.)
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit # (5): Determine the combined weight of lug‐
travel in the vehicle.
The following steps have been developed as gage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
required of all manufacturers under Title 49, That weight may not safely exceed the availa‐
 Wheels and tires 367

ble cargo and luggage load capacity calcula‐ mum gross axle weight rating of your vehicle are R Vehicle identification plate (/ page 466)
ted in step 4. not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehi‐
# (6): If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, cle identification plate. Calculation example for determining the
load from your trailer will be transferred to # Have your loaded vehicle – including driver, maximum load
your vehicle. Consult this manual to deter‐ occupants and load – weighed on a vehicle
mine how this reduces the available cargo weighbridge. The following table shows examples of how to
and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. The measured values may not exceed the calculate total and load capacities with varying
maximum permissible values stated on the seating configurations and different numbers
% Not all vehicles are permitted to tow a vehicle identification plate. and sizes of occupants. The following examples
trailer. Towing a trailer is only permitted if a use a maximum load of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This
trailer-hitch is installed. Please consult an Further related subjects: is for illustration purposes only. Make sure
authorized Mercedes-Benz dealer if you have R Calculation example for determining the max‐ you are using the actual load limit for your vehi‐
any questions about towing a trailer with imum load (/ page 367) cle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading
your vehicle. R Tire and Loading Information placard Information placard (/ page 365).
Even if you have calculated the total load care‐ (/ page 365) The higher the weight of all the occupants, the
fully, you should still make sure that the maxi‐ R Tire pressure table (/ page 361) smaller the maximum load for luggage.
mum permissible gross weight and the maxi‐

Step 1

Example 1 Example 2
Combined maximum weight of occupants and 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)
load (data from the Tire and Loading Information
placard)
368 Wheels and tires

Step 2

Example 1 Example 2
Number of people in the vehicle (driver and 5 1
occupants)
Distribution of the occupants Front: 2 Front: 1
Rear: 3
Weight of occupants Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg)
Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg)
Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg)
Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg)
Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg)
Total weight of all occupants 750 lbs (340 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)

Step 3

Example 1 Example 2
Permissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 750 lbs (340 kg) = 750 lbs 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 200 lbs (91 kg) = 1300 lbs
rating from the Tire and Loading Information (340 kg) (589 kg)
placard minus the gross weight of all occupants)
 Wheels and tires 369

Tire labeling 5 Manufacturer

Overview of tire labeling 6 Characteristics of the tire (/ page 372)
7 Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity,
speed rating and load index (/ page 372)
8 Tire name
% The data shown in the illustration is example
data.

Tire Quality Grading

1 Tread wear grade
In accordance with the US Department of Trans‐ 2 Traction grade
portation's "Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand‐
ards", tire manufacturers are required to grade 3 Temperature grade
their tires on the basis of the following three per‐ % The data shown in the illustration is example
formance factors: data.
% The classification is not legally stipulated for
Canada, but it is generally stated.
1 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards Tread wear grade
(/ page 369) The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
2 DOT (Department of Transportation), (TIN) based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
Tire Identification Number (/ page 370) under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
3 Maximum tire load (/ page 371) ernment test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half (1\1/2) times
4 Maximum tire pressure (/ page 371)
370 Wheels and tires

as well on the government course as a tire gra‐ The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are heat when tested under controlled conditions on
ded 100. AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus‐
The relative performance of tires depends upon ability to stop on wet pavement as measured tained high temperature can cause the material
the actual conditions of their use, however, and under controlled conditions on specified govern‐ of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
variations in driving habits, service practices and tire marked C may have poor traction perform‐ failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
differences in road characteristics and climate ance. performance which all passenger car tires must
conditions. meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard
Temperature grade No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
Traction grade of performance on the laboratory test wheel
& WARNING Risk of accident from tire than the minimum required by law.
& DANGER Risk of accident due to inade‐ overheating and tire failure
quate traction Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The traction grade assigned to this tire is loading, either separately or in combination,
based on straight-ahead braking traction can cause excessive heat build-up and possi‐ US tire regulations stipulate that every tire man‐
tests. ble tire failure. ufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or
# Observe the recommended tire pres‐ on the side wall of each tire produced.
# Always adapt your driving style and
drive at a speed to suit the prevailing sure.
traffic and weather conditions. # Regularly check the pressure of all the
tires.
* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain from # Adjust the tire pressure, if necessary.
wheelspin
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B
# Avoid wheelspin. and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
 Wheels and tires 371

R Tire size: identifier 3 describes the tire % The data shown in the image is example
size. data.
R Tire type code: tire type code 4 can be Maximum tire load 1 is the maximum permissi‐
used by the manufacturer as a code to ble weight for which the tire is approved.
describe specific characteristics of the tire. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the speci‐
R Manufacturing date: manufacturing date fied load limit. The maximum permissible load
5 provides information about the age of a can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading
tire. The 1st and 2nd positions represent the Information placard on the B-pillar on the driv‐
calendar week and the 3rd and 4th positions er's side (/ page 365).
state the year of manufacture (e.g. "3208"
% The data shown in the image is example represents the 32nd week of 2008).
data. Specifications for maximum tire pressure
The TIN is a unique identification number to Information on the maximum tire load
identify tires and comprises the following:
R DOT (Department of Transportation): tire
symbol marks 1 indicating that the tire
complies with the requirements of the US
Department of Transportation.
R Manufacturer identification code: manu‐
facturer identification code 2 contains
details of the tire manufacturer. New tires
have a code with two symbols. Retreaded
tires have a code with four symbols. Further % The data shown in the illustration is example
information on retreaded tires (/ page 377). data.
372 Wheels and tires

Never exceed maximum tire pressure 1 speci‐ Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity,
fied for the tire. Always observe the recommen‐ speed rating and load index
ded tire pressure for your vehicle when adjusting
the tire pressure (/ page 361). & WARNING Risk of injury through exceed‐
ing the specified tire load-bearing capa‐
Information on tire characteristics city or the permissible speed rating
Exceeding the specified tire load rating or
the permissible speed rating may lead to tire
damage and to the tires bursting.
# Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model. 1 First letter(s)
# Observe the tire load rating and speed
2 Nominal tire width in millimeters
rating required for your vehicle. 3 Aspect ratio in %
4 Tire code
5 Rim diameter
6 Load-bearing index
% The data shown in the image is example 7 Speed rating
data. 8 Load index
This information describes the type of tire cord % The data shown in the illustration is example
and the number of layers in side wall 1 and data.
under tire tread 2.
Information about reading tire data can be
obtained from any qualified specialist workshop.
 Wheels and tires 373

First letter(s) 1: Rim diameter 5: % An electronic speed limiter prevents your

R Without: passenger vehicle tires according to The diameter of the bead seat (not the diameter vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph
European manufacturing standards. of the rim flange). The rim diameter is specified (210 km/h).
R "P": passenger vehicle tires according to US in inches (in). Make sure that your tires have the required
manufacturing standards. Load-bearing index 6: speed rating. You can obtain information on the
R "LT": light truck tires according to US manu‐ Numerical code that specifies the maximum required speed rating from an authorized
facturing standards. load-bearing capacity of a tire (e.g. "91" corre‐ Mercedes-Benz Center.
R "T": compact emergency spare wheels with sponds to 1356 lbs (615 kg)). Summer tires
high tire pressure that are only designed for The load-bearing capacity of the tire must be at Index Speed rating
temporary use in an emergency. least half the gross axle weight rating of your
vehicle. Do not overload the tires by exceeding Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
Aspect ratio 3: the specified load limit.
Ratio between tire height and tire width in per‐ R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
cent (tire height divided by tire width). See also:
R Maximum permissible load on the Tire and S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
Tire code 4 (tire type): Loading Information placard (/ page 365)
R "R" radial tire T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
R Maximum tire load (/ page 371)
R "D": bias ply tire H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
R Load index
R "B": bias belted tires
Speed rating 7: V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
R "ZR": radial tire with a maximum speed above
149 mph (240 km/h) (optional) Specifies the approved maximum speed of the W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
tire.
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
374 Wheels and tires

Index Speed rating All-weather tires and winter tires R "C", "D", "E": a load range that depends on
Index Speed rating the maximum load that the tire can carry at a
ZR...Y1 up to 186 mph (300 km/h) certain pressure
Q M+S2 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
ZR...(..Y)1 over 186 mph (300 km/h)
T M+S2 up to 118 mph (190 km/h) Definition of terms for tires and loading
ZR1 over 149 mph (240 km/h) Tire structure and characteristics: describes
H M+S2 up to 130 mph (210 km/h) the number of layers or the number of rubber-
R Specifying the speed rating as the "ZR" index
V M+S2 up to 149 mph (240 km/h) coated belts in the tire contact surface and the
in tire code 4 is optional for tires up to
tire wall. These are made of steel, nylon, poly‐
186 mph (300 km/h). ester and other materials.
Winter tires bear the i snowflake symbol
R If your tire code 4 includes "ZR" and there Bar: metric unit for tire pressure.
and fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manu‐
is no speed rating 7, find out what the max‐
facturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and
imum speed is from the tire manufacturer.
Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire 100 kilopascal (kPa) is the equivalent of one bar.
R If load-bearing index 6 and speed rating 7 traction on snow. DOT (Department of Transportation): DOT-
are in brackets, the maximum speed rating of
Load index 8: marked tires fulfill the requirements of the
your tire is above 186 mph (300 km/h). To
R No specification given: standard load (SL) US Department of Transportation.
find out the maximum speed, ask the tire
manufacturer. tire Average weight of the vehicle occupants: the
R "XL" or "Extra Load": extra load tire or rein‐ number of vehicle occupants for which the vehi‐
forced tire cle is designed, multiplied by 150 lb (68 kg).
R "Light Load": light load tire

1 "ZR" stated in the tire code.

2 Or "M+Si" for winter tires.
 Wheels and tires 375

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards: a regardless of whether it is actually installed on of the fully laden vehicle (weight of the vehicle
uniform standard to grade the quality of tires the vehicle or not. including all accessories, occupants, fuel, lug‐
with regard to tread quality, tire traction and Rim: the part of the wheel on which the tire is gage and the trailer drawbar noseweight if appli‐
temperature characteristics. The quality grading installed. cable). The gross vehicle weight rating is speci‐
assessment is made by the manufacturer follow‐ fied on the vehicle identification plate on the
ing specifications from the U.S. government. The GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating): the GAWR B‑pillar on the driver's side.
quality grade of a tire is imprinted on the side is the maximum permissible axle load. The
actual load on an axle must never exceed the Maximum weight of the laden vehicle: the
wall of the tire. maximum weight is the sum of the curb weight
gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight
Recommended tire pressure: the recommen‐ rating can be found on the vehicle identification of the vehicle, the weight of the accessories, the
ded tire pressure is the tire pressure specified plate on the B‑pillar on the driver's side. maximum load and the weight of optional equip‐
for the tires mounted to the vehicle at the fac‐ ment installed at the factory.
tory. Speed rating: the speed rating is part of the tire
identification. It specifies the speed range for Kilopascal (kPa): metric unit for tire pressure.
The tire and information table contains the rec‐ which a tire is approved. 6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for
ommended tire pressures for cold tires, the max‐ tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascal (kPa) equals
imum permissible load and the maximum per‐ GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight): the gross vehicle 1 bar.
missible vehicle speed. weight comprises the weight of the vehicle
including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accesso‐ Load index: in addition to the load-bearing
The tire pressure table contains the recommen‐ ries installed, occupants, luggage and the trailer index, the load index may also be imprinted on
ded tire pressures for cold tires under various drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross the side wall of the tire. This specifies the load-
operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle bearing capacity of the tire more precisely.
of the vehicle. weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle Curb weight: the weight of a vehicle with stand‐
Increased vehicle weight due to optional identification plate on the B‑pillar on the driver's ard equipment including the maximum capacity
equipment: the combined weight of all standard side. of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air
and optional equipment available for the vehicle, GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating): the conditioning system and optional equipment if
GVWR is the maximum permitted gross weight
376 Wheels and tires

these are installed on the vehicle, but does not without direct sunlight on the tires or the vehicle er's identity code, tire size, tire type code and
include passengers or luggage. has been driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km). the manufacturing date.
Maximum tire load: the maximum tire load is Tire contact surface: the part of the tire that Load-bearing index: the load-bearing index is a
the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or comes into contact with the road. code that contains the maximum load-bearing
lbs for which a tire is approved. Tire bead: the purpose of the tire bead is to capacity of a tire.
Maximum permissible tire pressure: maxi‐ ensure that the tire sits securely on the wheel Traction: traction is the grip resulting from fric‐
mum permissible tire pressure for one tire. rim. There are several wire cores in the tire bead tion between the tires and the road surface.
Maximum load on one tire: maximum load on to prevent the tire from changing length on the Wear indicator: narrow bars (tread wear bars)
one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maxi‐ wheel rim. that are distributed over the tire contact surface.
mum axle load of one axle by two. Side wall: the part of the tire between the tread If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear
PSI (pounds per square inch): standard unit of and the tire bead. limit of 1/16 in (1.6 mm) has been reached.
measurement for tire pressure. Weight of optional equipment: the combined Distribution of vehicle occupants: distribution
Aspect ratio: ratio between tire height and tire weight of the optional equipment weighing more of vehicle occupants over designated seat posi‐
width in percent. than the replaced standard parts and more than tions in a vehicle.
5 lbs (2.3 kg). This optional equipment, such as Maximum permissible payload weight: nomi‐
Tire pressure: pressure inside the tire applying high-performance brakes, level control system, a
an outward force to every square inch of the tire. nal load and luggage load plus 150 lb (68 kg)
roof luggage rack or high-performance batteries, multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle.
The tire pressure is specified in pounds per is not included in the curb weight and the weight
square inch (psi), in kilopascals (kPa) or in bar. of the accessories.
The tire pressure should only be corrected when
the tires are cold. TIN (Tire Identification Number): a unique
identification number which can be used by a
Cold tire pressure: the tires are cold when the tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example,
vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours in a product recall, and thus identify the pur‐
chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur‐
 Wheels and tires 377

Changing a wheel & WARNING Risk of injury through exceed‐ R MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
Notes on selecting, installing and replacing ing the specified tire load-bearing capa‐ (run-flat tire only for certain wheels)
tires city or the permissible speed rating R MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer‐
Exceeding the specified tire load rating or tain AMG tires)
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐ the permissible speed rating may lead to tire Certain characteristics, such as handling,
rect dimensions of wheels and tires damage and to the tires bursting. vehicle noise emissions, consumption, etc.
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are # Therefore, only use tire types and sizes may otherwise be adversely affected. Fur‐
installed, the wheel brakes or wheel suspen‐ approved for your vehicle model. thermore, other tire sizes could result in the
sion components may be damaged. # Observe the tire load rating and speed tires rubbing against the body and axle com‐
# Always replace wheels and tires with rating required for your vehicle. ponents when loaded. This could result in
those that fulfill the specifications of damage to the tire or the vehicle.
the original part. * NOTE Vehicle and tire damage through Only use tires, wheels and accessories that
When replacing wheels, make sure to fit the tire types and sizes that have not been have been checked and recommended by
correct: approved Mercedes-Benz.
R Designation
For safety reasons, only use tires, wheels
R Model
* NOTE Risk to driving safety from retrea‐
and accessories which have been specially
ded tires
approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
When replacing tires, make sure to install the
These tires are specially adapted to the con‐ Retreaded tires are neither tested nor recom‐
correct:
trol systems, such as ABS, ESP® and mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous
R Designation damage cannot always be detected on
4MATIC, and marked as follows:
R Manufacturer retreaded tires.
R MO = Mercedes-Benz Original
R Model For this reason driving safety cannot be guar‐
anteed.
378 Wheels and tires

# Do not use used tires if you have no * NOTE Damage to electronic component Before purchasing and using non-approved
information about their previous usage. parts from the use of tire-mounting tools accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop
and inquire about:
Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring R Suitability
* NOTE Possible damage to wheels or tires system: Electronic component parts are
when driving over obstacles R Legal stipulations
located in the wheel. Tire-mounting tools
Large wheels have a lower tire section width. should not be used in the area of the valve. R Factory recommendations
The lower the tire section width, the greater This could otherwise damage the electronic
is the risk of damage to wheels or tires when component parts. & WARNING Risk of accident with high
driving over obstacles. performance tires
# Have the tires changed at a qualified
# Avoid obstacles or drive particularly specialist workshop only. The special tire tread in combination with the
carefully. optimized tire compound means that the risk
of skidding and hydroplaning on wet roads is
* NOTE Damage to summer tires at low increased.
* NOTE Possible wheel and tire damage ambient temperatures
when parking on curbs or in potholes In addition, the tire grip is greatly reduced at
At low ambient temperatures, tears could a low outside temperature and tire running
Parking on curbs or in potholes may damage form when driving with summer tires, caus‐ temperature.
the wheels and tires. ing permanent damage to the tire. # Switch on the ESP® and adapt your
# If possible, park only on flat surfaces. # At temperatures below 45 °F (7 °C) use
driving style accordingly.
# Avoid curbs and potholes when parking. i M+S- tires. # Use i M+S tires at outside temper‐

Accessory parts that are not approved for your atures of less than 50 °F (10 °C).
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used # Only use the tires for their intended pur‐
correctly can impair the operating safety. pose.
 Wheels and tires 379

Observe the following when selecting, installing R For M+S tires, only use tires with the same Be sure to also observe the following further
and replacing tires: tread. related subjects:
R Furthermore, the use of certain tire types in R Observe the maximum permissible speed for R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 360)
certain regions and areas of operation can the M+S tires installed. R Tire and Loading Information placard
be highly beneficial. If the tire's maximum speed is below that of (/ page 365)
R Only use tires and wheels of the same type the vehicle, this must be indicated by an R Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity,
(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended appropriate label in the driver's field of speed rating and load index (/ page 372)
tires) and the same make. vision.
R Tire pressure table (/ page 361)
R Only install wheels of the same size on one R Break in new tires at moderate speeds for
R Notes on the emergency spare wheel
axle (left and right). the first 60 miles (100 km).
(/ page 386)
It is only permissible to install a different R Replace the tires after six years at the latest,
wheel size in the event of a flat tire in order regardless of wear.
to drive to the specialist workshop. Notes on rotating wheels
R When replacing with tires that do not fea‐
R Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring ture run-flat characteristics: vehicles with
& WARNING Risk of injury through differ‐
system: All installed wheels must be equip‐ MOExtended tires are not equipped with a
ped with functioning sensors for the tire TIREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle ent wheel sizes
pressure monitoring system. with a TIREFIT kit after replacing with tires Rotating the front and rear wheels can
R At temperatures below 45°F (7°C) use win‐ that do not feature run-flat characteristics, severely impair the driving characteristics.
ter tires or all-season tires marked i M+S e.g. winter tires. The wheel brakes or suspension components
for all wheels. For more information on wheels and tires, con‐ may also be damaged.
Winter tires provide the best possible grip in tact a qualified specialist workshop. # Rotate front and rear wheels only if the
wintry road conditions. wheels and tires are of the same dimen‐
sions.
380 Wheels and tires

The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels Notes on storing wheels
differ:
When storing wheels, observe the following
R Front wheels wear more on the tire shoulder notes:
R Rear wheels wear more in the center of the R After removing wheels, store them in a cool,
tire dry and preferably dark place.
Do not drive with tires that have too little tread R Protect the tires from contact with oil, grease
depth. This significantly reduces traction on wet or fuel.
roads (hydroplaning).
On vehicles that have the same size front and Overview of the tire-change tool kit
rear wheels, rotate the wheels according to the The tool bag contains:
intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty Apart from some country-specific variants, vehi‐
cles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit.
R Jack
book in your vehicle documents. If this is not
For more information on which tire-changing R Gloves
available, rotate the tires every
3000 to 6000 miles (5000 to 10,000 km), tools are required and approved for performing a R Lug wrench
depending on the wear. Ensure that the direction wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified R Alignment bolt
of rotation is maintained. specialist workshop.
R Folding chock
Observe the instructions and safety notes on Required tire-changing tools may include, for
example: R Ratchet for jack
"Changing a wheel" when doing so
(/ page 380). R Jack
R Chock Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change
R Lug wrench Requirements:
R The required tire-change tool kit is available.
The tire-change tool kit is located in tool bag 1 If your vehicle is not equipped with the tire-
on the trunk floor.
 Wheels and tires 381

change tool kit, consult a qualified specialist Removing and installing the wheel trim/hub # To install: follow the instructions above in
workshop to find out about suitable tools. caps reverse order.
R The vehicle is not on a slope. Requirements: % Specified tightening torque: 18 lb-ft
R The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level R The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change (25 Nm).
ground. (/ page 380).
# Apply the electric parking brake manually. Aluminum hub cap Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel
# Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead Requirements:
position. R There are no persons in the vehicle.
# Shift the transmission to position j. R The vehicle has been prepared for a wheel
# Vehicles with level control system: Set the change (/ page 380).
normal vehicle level (/ page 254). R The hub caps have been removed
# Switch off the engine. (/ page 381).
# Make sure that the engine cannot be started. Important notes on using the jack:
# Place chocks or other suitable items under R Use only a vehicle-specific jack that has
the front and rear of the wheel that is diago‐ been approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise
nally opposite the wheel you wish to change. # To remove: position socket 2 from the tire- the vehicle.
# Remove the hub cap if necessary change tool kit on hub cap 1. R The jack is only designed for raising and
(/ page 381). # Position wheel wrench 3 on socket 2. holding the vehicle for a short time while a
# Raise the vehicle (/ page 381). wheel is being changed and not for mainte‐
# Using wheel wrench 3, turn hub cap 1 nance work under the vehicle.
counter-clockwise and remove it.
R The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
non-slip surface.
382 Wheels and tires

R The foot of the jack must be positioned verti‐

cally under the jack support point.

# Using the lug wrench, loosen the wheel bolts Position of jack support points
on the wheel you wish to change by about
one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com‐ & WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect
Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised: pletely. positioning of the jack
R Never place your hands and/or feet under
If you do not position the jack correctly at
the vehicle.
the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle,
R Never lie under the vehicle. the jack could tip with the vehicle raised.
R Do not start the engine and do not release # Only position the jack at the appropri‐
the electric parking brake. ate jacking point of the vehicle. The
R Do not open or close any doors or the trunk base of the jack must be positioned
lid. vertically under the jacking point of the
vehicle.
 Wheels and tires 383

* NOTE Vehicle damage from the jack

# Loosen and remove the wheel (/ page 383).

If you do not position the jack correctly at

Removing a wheel
the appropriate jack support point of the
vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehi‐ Requirements:
cle raised. R The vehicle is raised.
# The jack is designed exclusively for
jacking up the vehicle at the jack sup‐ When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force
port points. to the brake discs, as this could impair the level
of comfort when braking.
# Take the ratchet wrench out of the tire-
change tool kit and place it on the hexagon * NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on
nut of the jack so that the letters "AUF" are wheel bolts
visible. # Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on
a dirty surface.
# Position support 2 of jack 4 on jack sup‐ # Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com‐
port point 1. pletely.
# Turn ratchet wrench 3 clockwise until jack
support 2 sits completely on jack support
point 1 and the base of the jack lies evenly
on the ground.
# Continue to turn ratchet wrench 3 until the
tire is raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) off
the ground.
384 Wheels and tires

bolt threads can cause the wheel bolts/ & WARNING Risk of injury from tightening
wheel nuts to come loose. wheel bolts and nuts
# Never oil or grease the threads.
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
# In the event of damage to the threads, when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip.
contact a qualified specialist workshop # Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts
immediately. when the vehicle is on the ground.
# Have the damaged wheel bolts or dam‐
aged hub threads replaced. # Be sure to observe the instructions and
# Do not continue driving. safety notes on "Changing a wheel"
(/ page 377).
# Screw alignment bolt 1 into the thread # Observe the information on the choice of # For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts
instead of the wheel bolt. tires (/ page 377). which have been approved by Mercedes-
# Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts com‐ Benz and for the wheel in question.
pletely. For tires with a specified direction of rotation, an
# Remove the wheel. arrow on the side wall of the tire indicates the * NOTE Damage to paintwork of the wheel
correct direction of rotation. Observe the direc‐ rim when screwing on the first wheel bolt
tion of rotation when installing.
Installing a new wheel If the wheel has too much play when screw‐
# Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the
alignment bolt and push it on. ing in the first wheel bolt, the wheel rim paint
& WARNING Risk of accident from losing a can be damaged.
wheel # Press the wheel firmly against the
Oiled, greased or damaged wheel bolt/wheel wheel hub when screwing on the first
nut threads or wheel hub/wheel mounting wheel bolt.
 Wheels and tires 385

# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal # To lower the vehicle: place the ratchet onto & WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐
pattern in the order indicated until they are the hexagon nut of the jack so that the let‐ rect tightening torque
finger-tight. ters "AB" are visible and turn counter-clock‐
# Unscrew and remove the alignment bolt. wise. The wheels could come loose if the wheel
bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the
# Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger- prescribed torque.
tight.
# Ensure that the wheel bolts or wheel
# Lower the vehicle (/ page 385). nuts are tightened to the prescribed
tightening torque.
Lowering the vehicle after a wheel change # If you are not sure, do not move the
vehicle. Contact a qualified specialist
Requirements: workshop and have the tightening tor‐
R The new wheel has been installed
que checked immediately.
(/ page 384).
# Check the tire pressure of the newly installed
* NOTE Risk of trapping the jack # Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal wheel and adjust it if necessary.
If the AIRMATIC system has released air pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 with # Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring
when raising the vehicle, the jack can an initial maximum force of 59 lb-ft (80 Nm). system: Restart the tire pressure monitoring
become trapped when the vehicle is lowered. # Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal system (/ page 364).
# Start the engine. This adapts the vehi‐ pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 to Exception: the new wheel is an emergency
cle level. the specified tightening torque of 111 lb-ft spare wheel.
# Remove the jack from under the vehi‐
(150 Nm).
cle.
386 Wheels and tires

Emergency spare wheel shop. The new wheel must have the installed, the tire pressure monitoring sys‐
correct dimensions. tem cannot function reliably. For a few
Notes on the emergency spare wheel minutes after an emergency spare wheel is
% The emergency spare wheel is secured in the installed, the system may still display the tire
& WARNING Risk of accident caused by pressure of the removed wheel. Only restart
incorrect wheel and tire dimensions emergency spare wheel bag in the trunk.
the system again when the emergency spare
Observe the following notes on installing an wheel has been replaced with a new wheel.
The wheel or tire size and the tire type of the emergency spare wheel:
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel and Be sure to also observe the following further
the wheel to be replaced may differ. The R Check the tire pressure of the emergency
related subjects:
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel can spare wheel installed. Correct the pressure
as necessary. R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 360)
significantly impair driving characteristics of
the vehicle. R The maximum permissible speed with an R Tire and Loading Information placard
emergency spare wheel installed is 50 mph (/ page 365)
To prevent hazardous situations:
(80 km/h). R Tire pressure table (/ page 361)
# Adapt your driving style accordingly and
drive carefully. R Do not equip the emergency spare wheel R Notes on installing tires (/ page 377)
with snow chains.
# Never install more than one emergency
spare wheel or spare wheel that differs R Replace the emergency spare wheel after six
in size. years at the latest, regardless of wear.
# Only use an emergency spare wheel or R Use the wheel bolts that are included with
spare wheel of a different size briefly. the emergency spare wheel.
# Do not switch off ESP®. Specified tightening torque: 96 lb-ft
(130 Nm)
# Have the emergency spare wheel or
spare wheel of a different size replaced % Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring
at the nearest qualified specialist work‐ system: If an emergency spare wheel is
 Technical data 387

Notes on technical data & WARNING Risk of accident due to * NOTE Invalidation of the operating per‐
The data stated only applies to vehicles with improper operation of two-way radios mit due to failure to comply with the
standard equipment. You can obtain further If you use two-way radios in the vehicle instructions for installation and use
information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz improperly, their electromagnetic radiation The operating permit may be invalidated if
Center. can disrupt the vehicle's electronics. This is the instructions for installation and use of
the case in the following situations, in partic‐ two-way radios are not observed.
ular: # Only use approved frequency bands.
Vehicle electronics
R The two-way radio is not connected to an # Observe the maximum permissible out‐
Two-way radios
exterior antenna. put power in these frequency bands.
Notes on installing two-way radios R The exterior antenna is installed incor‐ # Only use approved antenna positions.
rectly or is not a low-reflection antenna.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to
improper work on two-way radios This could jeopardize the operating safety of
the vehicle.
If two-way radios are manipulated or retrofit‐
# Have the low-reflection exterior
ted incorrectly, the electromagnetic radiation
from the two-way radios can interfere with antenna installed at a qualified special‐
the vehicle electronics and jeopardize the ist workshop.
operating safety of the vehicle. # When operating two-way radios in the

# You should have all work on electrical vehicle, always connect them to the
and electronic components carried out low-reflection exterior antenna.
at a qualified specialist workshop.
388 Technical data

retrofitting two-way radios. Comply with the Frequency band Maximum transmis‐
legal requirements for detachable parts. sion output
If your vehicle has installations for two-way radio
equipment, use the power supply and antenna 70 cm frequency 35 W
connectors provided in the pre-installation. band
Observe the manufacturer's supplements when 430 - 470 MHz
installing.
Two-way radio 2W
Two-way radio transmission output
2G
The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the
base of the antenna must not exceed the values Two-way radio 0.5 W
in the following table:
3G/4G/5G
Frequency band and maximum transmission
output The following devices can be used in the vehicle
without restrictions:
Frequency band Maximum transmis‐
R Two-way radios with a maximum transmis‐
1 Rear roof area sion output
sion output of up to 100 mW
On vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof, 2 m frequency band 50 W R Two-way radios with transmitter frequencies
installing an antenna to the roof area is not per‐ 144 - 174 MHz in the 380 - 420 MHz frequency band and a
mitted. maximum transmission output of up to 2 W
Terrestrial Trunked 10 W (TETRA)
Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Radio (TETRA)
Vehicles – "EMCs for installation of aftermarket R Mobile phones (2G/3G/4G/5G)
radio frequency transmitting equipment") when 380 - 460 MHz
 Technical data 389

There are no restrictions when positioning the Manu‐ Manufacturer information Manu‐ Manufacturer information
antenna on the outside of the vehicle for the fol‐ factur‐ factur‐
lowing frequency bands: er's er's
R TETRA abbrevi‐ abbrevi‐
R 2G/3G/4G/5G ated ated
designa‐ designa‐
tion tion
Radio operating permits for vehicle compo‐
nents Conti‐ Continental Advanced Antenna Hirsch‐ Hirschmann Car Communication
nental GmbH, Römerring 1, 31137 Hilde‐ mann GmbH, Stuttgarter Straße 45-51,
Overview of manufacturers Antenna sheim, Germany 72654 Neckartenzlingen, Germany
Manu‐ Manufacturer information Conti‐ Continental Automotive GmbH, Huf Bao‐ Huf Baolong Electronics Bretten
factur‐ nental Siemensstraße 12, 93055 Regens‐ long GmbH, Gewerbestraße 40, 75015
er's Automo‐ burg, Germany Bretten, Germany
abbrevi‐ tive
ated HUF HUF Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH &
designa‐ Gentex Gentex Corporation, 600 North Co. KG, Steeger Straße 17, 42551
tion Centennial Street, Zeeland MI Velbert, Germany
49464, USA
ADC ADC Automotive Distance Control KATHREI KATHREIN Automotive GmbH &
Systems GmbH, Peter-Dornier- HELLA HELLA KGaA Hueck & Co., Rix‐ N Co. KG, Römerring 1, 31137 Hilde‐
Straße 10, 88131 Lindau, Germany becker Straße 75, 59552 Lipp‐ sheim, Germany
stadt, Germany
Bosch Robert Bosch GmbH, Daimler‐ LEO‐ LEOPOLD KOSTAL GmbH & Co.
straße 6, 71229 Leonberg, Ger‐ POLD KG, Hauert 11, 44227 Dortmund,
many KOSTAL Germany
390 Technical data

Manu‐ Manufacturer information Manu‐ Manufacturer information Argentina

factur‐ factur‐
er's er's
abbrevi‐ abbrevi‐
ated ated
designa‐ designa‐
tion tion Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
facturer nation ment approval
MAR‐ MARQUARDT GmbH, Schloßstraße Veoneer Veoneer Sweden AB, Wallentinsvä‐ number
QUARDT 16, 78604 Rietheim-Weilheim, gen 22, 44737 Vårgårda, Sweden
Germany ADC ARS4-A (radar C-18005
WITTE- WITTE-Velbert GmbH & Co. KG, sensor)
Meta Meta System S.P.A., Via T. Galim‐ Velbert Hoeferstr. 3-15, 42551 Velbert,
System breti 5, 42124 Reggio Emilia, Italy Germany ADC ARS4-B (radar C-17908
sensor)
Pana‐ Panasonic Automotive Systems
sonic Europe GmbH, Robert-Bosch- ADC ARS4-C (radar C-23776
Straße 27, 63225 Langen, Ger‐ sensor)
many Bosch MRR1Rear C-21798
Schrader Schrader Electronics Ltd., 11 Tech‐ (radar sensor)
nology Park, Belfast Road, Antrim Bosch MRRe14FCR C-20030
BT41 1QS, Northern Ireland, Uni‐ (radar sensor)
ted Kingdom
Bosch FR5CPCCF H-23855
(radar sensor)
 Technical data 391

Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval
number number number
Continen‐ RKE213E1 H-15475 Hirsch‐ 920287A H-15694 HUF HUF4761 H-11545
tal (antenna mann (locking sys‐ (locking sys‐
Antenna amplifier) tem) tem)
Continen‐ RKE223E1 H-24637 Hirsch‐ 920287B H-15695 LEOPOLD KK1 (locking H-16874
tal (antenna mann (locking sys‐ KOSTAL system)
Antenna amplifier) tem)
MAR‐ DC12A (lock‐ H-17689
Continen‐ CMKG1 (lock‐ H-24376 Huf Bao‐ TSSRE4A (tire H-20027 QUARDT ing system)
tal Auto‐ ing system) long pressure mon‐
motive itor sensor) MAR‐ DC12B (lock‐ H-21034
QUARDT ing system)
Continen‐ MARS Keyless H-17929 HUF HUF14632 H-15541
tal Auto‐ (locking sys‐ (locking sys‐ MAR‐ DC12K (lock‐ H-21035
motive tem) tem) QUARDT ing system)

HELLA DM4 (locking H-17845 MAR‐ MS2 (locking H-17598

system) QUARDT system)
392 Technical data

Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval
number number number
MAR‐ MS4 (locking H-23101 MAR‐ MU2 (locking H-24936 Veoneer 77V12CRN C-23672
QUARDT system) QUARDT system) (radar sensor)
MAR‐ MS5 (locking H-24933 Schrader AG5SP4 (tire H-4788 Veoneer 77GHz EXPENACOM
QUARDT system) pressure mon‐ MMRV1 (radar 9967/2017
itor sensor) sensor)
MAR‐ MK1 (locking H-17213
QUARDT system) Schrader GG4T (tire H-20495 WITTE- SDHTAG3NFC H-24664
pressure mon‐ Velbert (locking sys‐
MAR‐ MK2 (locking H-17212 itor sensor) tem)
QUARDT system)
Schrader DG6W2D4 H-20959
MAR‐ 3350.38 H-23166 (tire pressure
QUARDT (locking sys‐ monitor sen‐
tem) sor)
MAR‐ MU1 (locking H-23102 Veoneer 77V12BSM C-23670
QUARDT system) (radar sensor)
 Technical data 393

Australia Bahamas
Man‐ Model Radio equipment
ufac‐ designa‐ approval number
turer tion
Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equipment Veon‐ 77V12BS FCC ID: WU877V12BSM
Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equipment fac‐ nation approval number eer M (radar
fac‐ nation approval number turer sensor)
turer
Schrad AG5SP4 (tire Veon‐ 77V12CR FCC ID: WU877V12CRN
Huf TSSRE4A (tire er pressure moni‐ eer N (radar
Bao‐ pressure moni‐ tor sensor) sensor)
long tor sensor)
Schrad GG4T (tire
Huf TSSSG4G6 er pressure moni‐
Bao‐ (tire pressure tor sensor)
long monitor sen‐
sor)
Schrad DG6W2D4
Huf TSSSG4G6b er (tire pressure
Bao‐ (tire pressure monitor sen‐
long monitor sen‐ sor)
sor)
394 Technical data

Belarus

Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment
Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment facturer ignation approval number facturer ignation approval number
facturer ignation approval number
HELLA DM4 (lock‐ MAR‐ MS2 (lock‐
Continen‐ RKE223E1 ing system) QUARDT ing system)
tal (antenna
Antenna amplifier)
MAR‐ DC12A MAR‐ MS4 (lock‐
Continen‐ CMKG1 QUARDT (locking sys‐ QUARDT ing system)
tal Auto‐ (locking sys‐ tem)
motive tem)
MAR‐ DC12B MAR‐ MS5 (lock‐
Continen‐ MARS Key‐ QUARDT (locking sys‐ QUARDT ing system)
tal Auto‐ less (locking tem)
motive system)
MAR‐ DC12K MAR‐ MK1 (lock‐
QUARDT (locking sys‐ QUARDT ing system)
tem)
 Technical data 395

Botswana Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐

Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ facturer nation ment approval
facturer nation ment approval number
number
Continen‐ CMKG1 (lock‐ BOCRA/TA/
Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment ADC ARS4-A (radar BOCRA/TA/ tal Auto‐ ing system) 2019/5075
facturer ignation approval number sensor) 2018/2026 motive
MAR‐ MK2 (lock‐ ADC ARS4-B (radar BOCRA/TA/ Continen‐ MARS Keyless BOCRA/TA/
QUARDT ing system) sensor) 2019/4582 tal Auto‐ (locking sys‐ 2019/4661
motive tem)
Bosch FR5CPCCF BOCRA/TA/
(radar sensor) 2019/4975 HELLA DM4 (locking BOCRA/TA/
MAR‐ MU1 (lock‐ system) 2019/4662
QUARDT ing system) Bosch MRR1Rear BOCRA/TA/
(radar sensor) 2017/3788 Hirsch‐ 920287A BOCRA/TA/
mann (locking sys‐ 2019/4724
Continen‐ RKE213E1 BOCRA/TA/ tem)
tal (antenna 2017/4387
Antenna amplifier) Hirsch‐ 920287B BOCRA/TA/
mann (locking sys‐ 2019/4723
Continen‐ RKE223E1GN BOCRA/TA/ tem)
tal S (antenna 2017/5050
Antenna amplifier) Huf Bao‐ TSSRE4A (tire No. 20233
long pressure moni‐
tor sensor)
396 Technical data

Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval
number number number
HUF HUF4761 BOCRA/TA/ MAR‐ MS5 (locking BOCRA/TA/ Veoneer 77V12CRN BOCRA/TA/
(locking sys‐ 2019/4664 QUARDT system) 2020/5473 (radar sensor) 2019/4980
tem)
MAR‐ MK1 (locking BOCRA/TA/ WITTE- SDHTAG3NFC BOCRA/TA/
LEOPOLD KK1 (locking BOCRA/TA/ QUARDT system) 2019/4359 Velbert (locking sys‐ 20205342
KOSTAL system) 2019/4593 tem)
MAR‐ MK2 (locking BOCRA/TA/
MAR‐ DC12A (lock‐ BOCRA/TA/ QUARDT system) 2019/4360
QUARDT ing system) 2019/4389
MAR‐ 3350.38 (lock‐ BOCRA/TA/
MAR‐ DC12B (lock‐ BOCRA/TA/ QUARDT ing system) 2019/4687
QUARDT ing system) 2019/4388
MAR‐ MU1 (locking BOCRA/TA/
MAR‐ DC12K (lock‐ BOCRA/TA/ QUARDT system) 2019/4759
QUARDT ing system) 2019/4390
Schrader AG5SP4 (tire No. 1967
MAR‐ MS2 (locking BOCRA/TA/ pressure moni‐
QUARDT system) 2019/5135 tor sensor)
MAR‐ MS4 (locking BOCRA/TA/ Veoneer 77V12BSM BOCRA/TA/
QUARDT system) 2019/4758 (radar sensor) 2019/4975
 Technical data 397

Brazil

Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment
Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment facturer ignation approval number facturer ignation approval number
facturer ignation approval number
Continen‐ MARS Key‐ 03189-17-02856 HUF HUF4761 00053-13-06643
ADC ARS4-C 06783-19-02496 tal Auto‐ less (locking (locking sys‐
(radar sen‐ motive system) tem)
sor)
HELLA DM4 (lock‐ 04689-17-05364 MAR‐ DC12A (lock‐ 01333-17-02930
Bosch FR5CPCCF 06351-19-03745 ing system) QUARDT ing system)
(radar sen‐
sor) Hirsch‐ 920287A 1855-12-5762 MAR‐ DC12B (lock‐ 01395-11-02930
mann (locking sys‐ QUARDT ing system)
Continen‐ RKE213E1 3691-15-5298 tem)
tal (antenna MAR‐ DC12K (lock‐ 01392-11-02930
Antenna amplifier) Hirsch‐ 920287B 1787-12-8058 QUARDT ing system)
mann (locking sys‐
Continen‐ CMKG1 00325-20-02149 tem) MAR‐ MS2 (locking 00616-17-02930
tal Auto‐ (locking sys‐ QUARDT system)
motive tem) HUF HUF14632 03627-15-06643
(locking sys‐ MAR‐ MS4 (locking 06218-19-02930
tem) QUARDT system)
398 Technical data

Brunei Darussalam

Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment
facturer ignation approval number facturer ignation approval number Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
facturer nation ment approval
MAR‐ 3350.38 03149-19-02930 Veoneer 77V12CRN 06352-19-12386 number
QUARDT (locking sys‐ (radar sen‐
tem) sor) ADC ARS4-C (radar DRQ-D-
sensor) JATI-07-2000-10
MAR‐ MK1 (locking 03756-15-02930 WITTE- SDHTAG3NF 00616-17-02930 90000
QUARDT system) Velbert C (locking DTA-004005
system)
MAR‐ MK2 (locking 03757-15-02930 Bosch FR5CPCCF DRQ-D-
QUARDT system) (radar sensor) JATI-07-2000-10
Veoneer 77V12BSM 06468-19-12386 9000
(radar sen‐ DTA-004222
sor) Bosch LRR3 (radar DRQ-D-
sensor) MAJU-02-2011-1
11083-
LPD-31820
 Technical data 399

Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval
number number number
Bosch MRR1Rear DRQ- Continen‐ CMKG1 (lock‐ DRQ-D- Hirsch‐ 920287A DRQ-
(radar sensor) DMAJU-02-2011- tal Auto‐ ing system) JATI-07-2000-10 mann (locking sys‐ DJATI-07-2000-1
11108 3- motive 9000 tem) 09000
LPD-31504 DTA-005043 DTA-001661
Bosch MRRe14FCR DTA-000793 Continen‐ MARS Keyless DRQ-D- Hirsch‐ 920287B DRQ-
(radar sensor) tal Auto‐ (locking sys‐ MAJU-02-2011-1 mann (locking sys‐ DMAJU-02-2011-
motive tem) 11083- tem) 111083
Continen‐ RKE213E1 DRQ-D- LPD-39004 DTA-000794
tal (antenna JATI-07-2000-10
Antenna amplifier) 9000 HELLA DM4 (locking DRQ- Huf Bao‐ TSSRE4A (tire DTA No. 000310
DTA-001661 system) DJATI-07-2000-1 long pressure moni‐
09000 tor sensor)
Continen‐ RKE223E1GN DRQ-D- DTA-000351
tal S (antenna JATI-07-2000-10
Antenna amplifier) 9000
DTA-004998
400 Technical data

Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval
number number number
Huf Bao‐ TSSSG4G6 DTA No. 000311 HUF HUF4761 DRQ-D- MAR‐ DC12K (lock‐ DRQ-D-
long (control unit) (locking sys‐ JATI-07-2000-10 QUARDT ing system) JATI-07-2000-10
(tire pressure tem) 9000 9000
monitor sen‐ DTA-006138 DTA-000066
sor)
LEOPOLD KK1 (locking DRQ- MAR‐ MS2 (locking DRQ-
Huf Bao‐ TSSSG4G6b DTA No. 003757 KOSTAL system) DMAJU-02-2011- QUARDT system) DJATI-07-2000-8
long (control unit) 111083- 916- LPD-38890
(tire pressure LPD-30419
monitor sen‐ MAR‐ MS4 (locking DRQ-
sor) MAR‐ DC12A (lock‐ DRQ- QUARDT system) DJATI-07-2000-1
QUARDT ing system) DJATI-07-2000-8 09000
HUF HUF14632 DRQ- 916-LPD-38937 DTA-003525
(locking sys‐ DJATI-07-2000-8
tem) 916- LPD-30012 MAR‐ DC12B (lock‐ DRQ-D- MAR‐ MS5 (locking DRQ-D-
QUARDT ing system) JATI-07-2000-10 QUARDT system) JATI-07-2000-10
9000 9000
DTA-000068 DTA-005850
 Technical data 401

Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval
number number number
MAR‐ MK1 (locking DRQ- MAR‐ MU2 (locking DRQ-D- Schrader MFR (control DTA No. 003893
QUARDT system) DJATI-07-2000-8 QUARDT system) JATI-07-2000-10 unit) (tire pres‐
916- LPD-33567 9000 sure monitor
DTA-005843 sensor)
MAR‐ MK2 (locking DRQ-
QUARDT system) DJATI-07-2000-8 Schrader AG5SP4 (tire DRQ-D-QAF Veoneer 77V12BSM DRQ-D-
916- LPD-33568 pressure moni‐ AUTO-05-2003-1 (radar sensor) JATI-07-2000-10
tor sensor) 089 4- 9000
MAR‐ 3350.38 (lock‐ DRQ- LPD-29559 DTA-004000
QUARDT ing system) DJATI-07-2000-1 DRQDJATI-07-20
09000 00-8916LPD-29 Veoneer 77V12CRN DRQ-D-
DTA-003662 665 (radar sensor) JATI-07-2000-10
9000
MAR‐ MU1 (locking DRQ- Schrader DG6W2D4 DTA-001514 DTA-003999
QUARDT system) DJATI-07-2000-1 (tire pressure
09000 monitor sen‐
DTA-003524 sor)
402 Technical data

Ghana Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐

Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ facturer nation ment approval
facturer nation ment approval number
number
Continen‐ MARS Key‐ BR3-1M-GE2-16A
Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ NCA APPROVED tal Auto‐ less (locking
facturer nation ment approval motive system)
number ADC ARS4-B 1R3-1M-7E1-160
(radar sensor) HELLA DM4 (locking BR3-1M-GE2-157
Veoneer 77GHz DRQ-D- system)
MMRV1 (radar JATI-07-2000-89 ADC ARS4-C ZRO-1H-7E3-152
sensor) 16-LPD-30870 (radar sensor) Hirsch‐ 920287A ZRO-M8-7E3-X45
mann (locking sys‐
WITTE- SDHTAG3NFC DRQ-D- Bosch FR5CPCCF ZR0-M8-7E3-230 tem)
Velbert (locking sys‐ JATI-07-2000-10 (radar sensor)
tem) 9000 Hirsch‐ 920287B ZRO-M8-7E3-X47
Continen‐ RKE213E1 ZRO-M8-7E3-X53 mann (locking sys‐
DTA-005628 tal (antenna tem)
Antenna amplifier)
HUF HUF4761 EX6-6M-GE2-16C
Continen‐ RKE223E1GN ZRO-M8-7E3-225 (locking sys‐
tal S (antenna tem)
Antenna amplifier)
LEOPOLD KK1 (locking ZRO-M8-7E3-X49
Continen‐ CMKG1 (lock‐ ZRO-M8-7E3-277 KOSTAL system)
tal Auto‐ ing system)
motive
 Technical data 403

Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Indonesia
facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
number number facturer nation ment approval
number
MAR‐ DC12A (lock‐ ZRO-M8-7E3-X50 MAR‐ 3350.38 ZRO-M8-7E3-X3C
QUARDT ing system) QUARDT (locking sys‐ ADC ARS4-A (radar 36010/SDPPI/
tem) sensor) 2017 2130
MAR‐ DC12B (lock‐ ZRO-M8-7E3-X51
QUARDT ing system) MAR‐ MU1 (locking ZRO-M8-7E3-272 ADC ARS4-B (radar 38132/SDPPI/
QUARDT system) sensor) 2017 2130
MAR‐ DC12K (lock‐ ZRO-M8-7E3-X52
QUARDT ing system) MAR‐ MU2 (locking SRO-1M-7E3-129
QUARDT system)
MAR‐ MS2 (locking BR3-1M-GE-129
QUARDT system) Veoneer 77V12BSM ZRO-1H-7E3-142
(radar sensor)
MAR‐ MS4 (locking ZRO-1H-7E3-26E
QUARDT system) Veoneer 77V12CRN ZR0-M8-7E3-230
(radar sensor)
MAR‐ MS5 (locking SRO-1M-7E4-11B
QUARDT system) WITTE- SDHTAG3NFC SRO-1M-7E4-X59
Velbert (locking sys‐
MAR‐ MK1 (locking ZRO-M8-7E3-X4A tem)
QUARDT system)
MAR‐ MK2 (locking ZRO-M8-7E3-X4C
QUARDT system)
404 Technical data

Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval
number number number
ADC ARS4-C (radar 68676/SDPPI/ Bosch LRR3 (radar 40556/SDPPI/ Bosch FR5CPCCF 67882/SDPPI/
sensor) 2020 sensor) 2018 (radar sensor) 2020
Bosch MRR1Rear 34538/SDPPI/
(radar sensor) 2017
Bosch MRRe14FCR 53078/SDPPI/
Dilarang melaku‐ (radar sensor) 2017 Dilarang melaku‐
kan perubahan PLG3612 kan perubahan
spesifikasi yang spesifikasi yang
dapat menimbul‐ dapat menimbul‐
kan gangguan kan gangguan
fisik dan/atau fisik dan/atau
elektromagnetik elektromagnetik
terhadap lingkun‐ terhadap lingkun‐
gan sekitarnya gan sekitarnya
 Technical data 405

Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval
number number number
Continen‐ RKE213E1 41771/I/SDPPI/ Continen‐ RKE223E1GN 66185/ SDPPI/ Continen‐ D-WMI2020A 66678/ SDPPI/
tal (antenna 2018 5205 tal S (antenna 2020 10325 tal Auto‐ (control unit) 2020 7163
Antenna amplifier) Antenna amplifier) motive

Dilarang melaku‐ Dilarang melaku‐

kan perubahan kan perubahan
spesifikasi yang spesifikasi yang
dapat menimbul‐ dapat menimbul‐
kan gangguan kan gangguan
fisik dan/atau fisik dan/atau
elektromagnetik elektromagnetik
terhadap lingkun‐ terhadap lingkun‐
gan sekitarnya gan sekitarnya
406 Technical data

Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval
number number number
Continen‐ CMKG1 (lock‐ 66911/ SDPPI/ Continen‐ MARS Keyless 69379/SDPPI/ Hirsch‐ 920287A 29510/SDPPI/
tal Auto‐ ing system) 2020 7163 tal Auto‐ (locking sys‐ 2020 7163 mann (locking sys‐ 2016 3159
motive motive tem) tem)
Hirsch‐ 920287B 28238/SDPPI/
mann (locking sys‐ 2016 3159
tem)
Dilarang melaku‐ Dilarang melaku‐
kan perubahan kan perubahan Huf Bao‐ TSSRE4A (tire 52166/SDPPI/
spesifikasi yang spesifikasi yang long pressure mon‐ 2017 3533
dapat menimbul‐ dapat menimbul‐ itor sensor)
kan gangguan kan gangguan
fisik dan/atau fisik dan/atau HUF HUF14632 41618/SDPPI/
elektromagnetik elektromagnetik (locking sys‐ 2018 3533
terhadap lingkun‐ terhadap lingkun‐ tem)
gan sekitarnya gan sekitarnya HUF HUF4761 26742/SDPPI/
(locking sys‐ 2015 3533
tem)
KATHREI RKE213E1 41771/SDPPI/
HELLA DM4 (locking 52221/SDPPI/ N (locking sys‐ 2018 5205
system) 2017 6051 tem)
 Technical data 407

Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval
number number number
LEOPOLD KK1 (locking 41121/SDPPI/ MAR‐ DC12A (lock‐ 67373/SDPPI/ MAR‐ DC12B (lock‐ 59840/SDPPI/
KOSTAL system) 2018 5125 QUARDT ing system) 2020 7163 QUARDT ing system) 2019 7163

Dilarang melaku‐ Dilarang melaku‐

kan perubahan kan perubahan
spesifikasi yang spesifikasi yang
dapat menimbul‐ dapat menimbul‐
kan gangguan kan gangguan
fisik dan/atau fisik dan/atau
elektromagnetik elektromagnetik
terhadap lingkun‐ terhadap lingkun‐
gan sekitarnya gan sekitarnya
408 Technical data

Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval
number number number
MAR‐ DC12K (lock‐ 59838/SDPPI/ MAR‐ MS2 (locking 67372/SDPPI/ MAR‐ MS4 (locking 64126/SDPPI/
QUARDT ing system) 2019 7163 QUARDT system) 2020 7163 QUARDT system) 2019 7163

Dilarang melaku‐ Dilarang melaku‐ Dilarang melaku‐

kan perubahan kan perubahan kan perubahan
spesifikasi yang spesifikasi yang spesifikasi yang
dapat menimbul‐ dapat menimbul‐ dapat menimbul‐
kan gangguan kan gangguan kan gangguan
fisik dan/atau fisik dan/atau fisik dan/atau
elektromagnetik elektromagnetik elektromagnetik
terhadap lingkun‐ terhadap lingkun‐ terhadap lingkun‐
gan sekitarnya gan sekitarnya gan sekitarnya
 Technical data 409

Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval
number number number
MAR‐ MS5 (locking 69077/SDPPI/ MAR‐ MK1 (locking 40283/SDPPI/ MAR‐ MK2 (locking 40282/SDPPI/
QUARDT system) 2020 7163 QUARDT system) 2018 2208 QUARDT system) 2018 2208

Dilarang melaku‐ Dilarang melaku‐ Dilarang melaku‐

kan perubahan kan perubahan kan perubahan
spesifikasi yang spesifikasi yang spesifikasi yang
dapat menimbul‐ dapat menimbul‐ dapat menimbul‐
kan gangguan kan gangguan kan gangguan
fisik dan/atau fisik dan/atau fisik dan/atau
elektromagnetik elektromagnetik elektromagnetik
terhadap lingkun‐ terhadap lingkun‐ terhadap lingkun‐
gan sekitarnya gan sekitarnya gan sekitarnya
410 Technical data

Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval
number number number
MAR‐ 3350.38 62233/SDPPI/ Schrader GG4T (tire 54083/SDPPI/ Veoneer 77V12CRN 66830/SDPPI/
QUARDT (locking sys‐ 2019 7163 pressure mon‐ 2017 PLG3612 (radar sensor) 2020 7163
tem) itor sensor)
Schrader AG5SP4-D 38892/SDPPI/
(tire pressure 2018 3612
monitor sen‐
Dilarang melaku‐ sor) Dilarang melaku‐
kan perubahan kan perubahan
spesifikasi yang Schrader DG6W2D4 57058/SDPPI/ spesifikasi yang
dapat menimbul‐ (tire pressure 2018 PLG3612 dapat menimbul‐
kan gangguan monitor sen‐ kan gangguan
fisik dan/atau sor) fisik dan/atau
elektromagnetik elektromagnetik
terhadap lingkun‐ Schrader MC34MA4 25626/SDPPI/ terhadap lingkun‐
gan sekitarnya (tire pressure 2015 PLG3612 gan sekitarnya
monitor sen‐
sor)
Veoneer 77GHz 40524/R/I/
MMRV1 SDPPI/2018
(radar sensor)
 Technical data 411

Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Jamaica
facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval Manufac‐ Model Radio equipment
number number turer designa‐ approval number
tion
Veoneer 77V12BSM 66792/SDPPI/ Pana‐ DAIRSE 63550/SDPPI/
(radar sensor) 2020 7163 sonic 2019 Continen‐ CMKG1 SMA – CMKG1
tal Auto‐ (locking
motive system)
MAR‐ DC12A SMA - DC12A
QUARDT (locking
Dilarang melaku‐ Dilarang melaku‐ system)
kan perubahan kan perubahan
spesifikasi yang spesifikasi yang MAR‐ DC12B SMA - DC12B
dapat menimbul‐ dapat menimbul‐ QUARDT (locking
kan gangguan kan gangguan system)
fisik dan/atau fisik dan/atau
elektromagnetik elektromagnetik MAR‐ DC12K SMA - DC12K
terhadap lingkun‐ terhadap lingkun‐ QUARDT (locking
gan sekitarnya gan sekitarnya system)
MAR‐ MS2 (lock‐ SMA - MS2
QUARDT ing sys‐
tem)
412 Technical data

Manufac‐ Model Radio equipment Manufac‐ Model Radio equipment Manufac‐ Model designation Radio
turer designa‐ approval number turer designa‐ approval number turer equipment
tion tion approval
number
MAR‐ MS4 (lock‐ SMA - MS4 MAR‐ MU1 (lock‐ SMA - MU1
QUARDT ing sys‐ QUARDT ing sys‐ ADC ARS4-C (radar sen‐ T/
tem) tem) sor) 4/11/11/6
676
MAR‐ MS5 (lock‐ SMA - MS5 MAR‐ MU2 (lock‐ SMA - MU2
QUARDT ing sys‐ QUARDT ing sys‐ Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar T/
tem) tem) sensor) 4/11/11/6
645
MAR‐ MK1 (lock‐ SMA - MK1 Jordan
QUARDT ing sys‐ Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) TRC/LPD/
tem) Manufac‐ Model designation Radio 2009/15
turer equipment
MAR‐ MK2 (lock‐ SMA - MK2 approval Bosch MRR1Rear (radar TRC/LPD/
QUARDT ing sys‐ number sensor) 2014/73
tem)
ADC ARS4-A (radar sen‐ TRC/LPD/ Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar TRC/LPD/
MAR‐ 3350.38 SMA - 3350.38 sor) 2014/126 sensor) 2017/254
QUARDT (locking
system) ADC ARS4-B (radar sen‐ TRC/LPD/ Continen‐ RKE213E1 (antenna T/
sor) 2014/248 tal amplifier) 4/11/11/7
Antenna 046
 Technical data 413

Manufac‐ Model designation Radio Manufac‐ Model designation Radio Manufac‐ Model designation Radio
turer equipment turer equipment turer equipment
approval approval approval
number number number
Continen‐ RKE223E1GNS T/ Hirsch‐ 920287A (locking T/ HUF HUF14632 (locking T/
tal (antenna amplifier) 4/11/11/9 mann system) 4/11/11/1 system) 4/11/11/4
Antenna 682 0883 355
Continen‐ CMKG1 (locking T/ Hirsch‐ 920287B (locking TRC/LPD/ HUF HUF4761 (locking TRC/LPD/
tal Auto‐ system) 4/11/11/1 mann system) 2012/53 system) 2012/144
motive 799
Huf Bao‐ TSSRE4A (tire pres‐ TRC/LPD/ LEOPOLD KK1 (locking sys‐ TRC/LPD/
Continen‐ MARS Keyless TRC/LPD/ long sure monitor sen‐ 2017/421 KOSTAL tem) 2015/102
tal Auto‐ (locking system) 2017/183 sor)
motive MAR‐ DC12A (locking sys‐ T/
Huf Bao‐ TSSSG4G6 (control TRC/LPD/ QUARDT tem) 4/11/11/1
Gentex EUROII (conveni‐ TRC/LPD/ long unit) (tire pressure 2017/422 899
ence system) 2014/258 monitor sensor)
MAR‐ DC12B (locking sys‐ T/
Gentex MUAHL 5 (conveni‐ TRC/LPD/ Huf Bao‐ TSSSG4G6b (con‐ TRC/LPD/ QUARDT tem) 4/11/11/1
ence system) 2015/299 long trol unit) (tire pres‐ 2017/175 0892
sure monitor sen‐
HELLA DM4 (locking sys‐ T/ sor) MAR‐ DC12K (locking sys‐ T/
tem) 4/11/11/6 QUARDT tem) 4/11/11/1
459 0891
414 Technical data

Manufac‐ Model designation Radio Manufac‐ Model designation Radio Manufac‐ Model designation Radio
turer equipment turer equipment turer equipment
approval approval approval
number number number
MAR‐ MS2 (locking sys‐ T/ MAR‐ MU1 (locking sys‐ T/ Schrader MC34MA4 (tire TRC/LPD/
QUARDT tem) 4/11/11/6 QUARDT tem) 4/11/11/2 pressure monitor 2011/158
412 511 sensor)
MAR‐ MS4 (locking sys‐ TRC/LPD/ MAR‐ MU2 (locking sys‐ T/ Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar T/
QUARDT tem) 2019/127 QUARDT tem) 4/11/11/4 sensor) 4/11/11/5
462 557
MAR‐ MS5 (locking sys‐ T/
QUARDT tem) 4/11/11/3 Schrader AG5SP4-D (tire TRC/LPD/ Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar T/
509 pressure monitor 2019/21 sensor) 4/11/11/5
sensor) 556
MAR‐ MK1 (locking sys‐ T/
QUARDT tem) 4/11/11/1 Schrader MFR (control unit) TRC/LPD/ Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 TRC/LPD/
1020 (tire pressure moni‐ 2019/184 (radar sensor) 2015/161
tor sensor)
MAR‐ MK2 (locking sys‐ T/ WITTE- SGHTAG3NFC T/
QUARDT tem) 4/11/11/1 Schrader GG4T (tire pressure TRC/LPD/ Velbert (locking system) 4/11/11/2
1021 monitor sensor) 2017/456 635
MAR‐ 3350.38 (locking T/ Schrader DG6W2D4 (tire TRC/LPD/
QUARDT system) 4/11/11/1 pressure monitor 2018/139
973 sensor)
 Technical data 415

Canada Malaysia
Man‐ Model Radio equipment
ufac‐ designa‐ approval number
turer tion
ADC ARS4-C IC: 4135A-ARS4C Manufac‐ Model designa‐ Radio
(radar sen‐ Manufac‐ Model designa‐ Radio turer tion equipment
sor) turer tion equipment approval
approval number
Bosc FR5CPCCF IC: 3887A-FR5CPCCF number
h (radar sen‐ Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar RALM/45A
sor) ADC ARS4-C (radar sen‐ SQASI/TA/ sensor) /0517/
sor) 19/2872 S(17-1576)
Veon 77V12BSM IC: 8436B-77V12BSM
eer (radar sen‐ Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar CIDF15000 Continen‐ RKE213E1 RAUU/28C
sor) sensor) 490 tal (antenna amplifier) /0915/
Antenna S(15-2703)
Veon 77V12CRN IC: 8436B-77V12CRN Bosch LRR3 (radar sen‐ RALM/35A
eer (radar sen‐ sor) /0716/ Continen‐ RKE223E1GNS RDDK/34B
sor) S(16-2324) tal (antenna amplifier) /1219/
Antenna S(19-5319)
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar RALM/66A
sensor) /0618/ Continen‐ CMKG1 (locking RFCP/13A
S(18-2468) tal Auto‐ system) /0220/
motive S(20-0197)
416 Technical data

Manufac‐ Model designa‐ Radio Manufac‐ Model designa‐ Radio Manufac‐ Model designa‐ Radio
turer tion equipment turer tion equipment turer tion equipment
approval approval approval
number number number
Continen‐ MARS Keyless RAAU/51C Hirsch‐ 920287B (locking RAUU/22C HUF HUF4761 (locking RAAU/16B
tal Auto‐ (locking system) /0417/ mann system) /0615/ system) /1112/
motive S(17-1034) S(15-1864) S(12-2053)
CIDF15000 Huf Bao‐ TSSRE4A (tire CIDF17000 LEOPOLD KK1 (locking sys‐ RAUU/27C
578 long pressure monitor 184 KOSTAL tem) /0815/
HELLA DM4 (locking sys‐ RDDK/41A sensor) S(15-2953)
tem) /0717/ Huf Bao‐ TSSSG4G6 (control RAQP/57A MAR‐ DC12A (locking RDDK/33A
S(17-2269) long unit) (tire pressure /0817/ QUARDT system) /0317/
CIDF15000 monitor sensor) S(17-2424) S(17-0669)
578
HUF HUF14632 (locking RAYN/25A MAR‐ DC12B (locking RAUU/62A
Hirsch‐ 920287A (locking RAUU/63A system) /0715/ QUARDT system) /0311/
mann system) /0311/ S(15-2385) S(11-0263)
S(11-0432)
 Technical data 417

Manufac‐ Model designa‐ Radio Manufac‐ Model designa‐ Radio Manufac‐ Model designa‐ Radio
turer tion equipment turer tion equipment turer tion equipment
approval approval approval
number number number
MAR‐ DC12K (locking RAUU/62A MAR‐ MK1 (locking sys‐ RAAU/14C Meta Sys‐ ITS/TPS (interior RAVG/18Q
QUARDT system) /0311/ QUARDT tem) /0615/ tem motion sensor) /0212/
S(11-0264) S(15-1057) S(11-2068)
MAR‐ MS2 (locking sys‐ RDDK/31A MAR‐ MK2(locking sys‐ RAAU/12C Meta Sys‐ MUW II (interior RAVG/17Q
QUARDT tem) /0217/ QUARDT tem) /0515/ tem motion sensor) /0212/
S(17-0405) S(15-1059) S(11-2067)
MAR‐ MS4 (locking sys‐ RDDK/25B MAR‐ 3350.38(locking RDDK/17B Schrader AG5SP4-D (tire RCDD/03A
QUARDT tem) /1019/ QUARDT system) /0819/ pressure monitor /0615/
S(19-0943) S(19-1082) sensor) S(19-2094)
MAR‐ MS5 (locking sys‐ RGLO/02A MAR‐ MU2(locking sys‐ RGLO/01A Schrader MFR (control unit) RAQP/62A
QUARDT tem) /0720/ QUARDT tem) /0720/ (tire pressure mon‐ /0419/S
S(20-2580) S(20-2579) itor sensor) (19-1694)
418 Technical data

Morocco Manufac‐ Model designa‐ Radio equip‐

Manufac‐ Model designa‐ Radio equip‐ turer tion ment
turer tion ment approval
approval number
number
Manufac‐ Model designa‐ Radio Bosch MRR1Rear (radar MR 9186
turer tion equipment AGREE PAR sensor) ANTR
approval L’ANRT 2014-04-22
number MAROC
Bosch MRRe14FCR MR 13900
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 RALM/31 ADC ARS4-A (radar MR 9490 (radar sensor) ANTR
(radar sensor) A/0316/ sensor) ANTR 2017-05-04
S(16-0727) 2014-07-23
Continen‐ RKE213E1 MR 10631
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar SQASI/TA/ ADC ARS4-B (radar MR 9778 tal (antenna ampli‐ ANTR
sensor) 19/2980 sensor) ANTR Antenna fier) 2015-07-16
2014-11-11
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar SQASI/TA/ Continen‐ RKE223E1GNS MR 21174
sensor) 19/2982 ADC ARS4-C (radar MR 20231 tal (antenna ampli‐ ANTR
sensor) ANTR 2019 Antenna fier) 2019-10-14
WITTE- SDHTAG3NFC(lock RDDK/43B
Velbert ing system) /0420/ Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar MR 20575 Continen‐ CMKG1 (locking MR 21701
S(20-1749) sensor) ANTR 2019 tal Auto‐ system) ANTR
motive 2019-12-05
Bosch LRR3 (radar sen‐ MR 5371
sor) ANTR
2010-02-02
 Technical data 419

Manufac‐ Model designa‐ Radio equip‐ Manufac‐ Model designa‐ Radio equip‐ Manufac‐ Model designa‐ Radio equip‐
turer tion ment turer tion ment turer tion ment
approval approval approval
number number number
Continen‐ MARS Keyless MR 13681 Huf Bao‐ TSSSG4G6 (con‐ MR 14319 MAR‐ DC12A (locking MR 13429
tal Auto‐ (locking system) ANTR long trol unit) (tire ANTR QUARDT system) ANTR
motive 2017-04-04 pressure monitor 2017-07-07 2017-03-03
sensor)
HELLA DM4 (locking sys‐ MR 14426 MAR‐ DC12B (locking MR 6698
tem) ANTR Huf Bao‐ TSSSG4G6b MR 19561 QUARDT system) ANTR
2017-07-28 long (control unit) (tire ANTR 2011-11-16
pressure monitor 2019-04-26
Hirsch‐ 920287A (locking MR 6700 sensor) MAR‐ DC12K (locking MR 6699
mann system) ANTR QUARDT system) ANTR
2011-11-16 HUF HUF14632 (lock‐ MR 10506 2011-11-16
ing system) ANTR
Hirsch‐ 920287B (locking MR 7260 2015-06-22 MAR‐ MS2 (locking sys‐ MR 13300
mann system) ANTR QUARDT tem) ANTR
2012-06-13 HUF HUF4761 (locking MR 7829 2017-02-15
system) ANTR
Huf Bao‐ TSSRE4A (tire MR 14320 2013-02-14 MAR‐ MS4 (locking sys‐ MR 19199
long pressure sensor) ANTR QUARDT tem) ANTR
(tire pressure 2017-07-07 LEOPOLD KK1 (locking sys‐ MR 10697 2019-03-25
monitor sensor) KOSTAL tem) ANTR
2015-08-05
420 Technical data

Manufac‐ Model designa‐ Radio equip‐ Manufac‐ Model designa‐ Radio equip‐ Manufac‐ Model designa‐ Radio equip‐
turer tion ment turer tion ment turer tion ment
approval approval approval
number number number
MAR‐ MS5 (locking sys‐ MR 23805 MAR‐ MU1 (locking sys‐ MR 19200 Schrader DG6W2D4 (tire MR 16355
QUARDT tem) ANRT QUARDT tem) ANTR pressure monitor ANTR
22/04/2020 2019-03-25 sensor) 2018-04-19
MAR‐ MK1 (locking sys‐ MR 10645 MAR‐ MU2 (locking sys‐ MR 23804 Schrader MC34MA4 (tire MR 6706
QUARDT tem) ANTR QUARDT tem) ANRT pressure monitor ANTR
2015-07-21 22/04/2020 sensor) 2011-11-17
MAR‐ MK2 (locking sys‐ MR 10987 Schrader AG5SP4-D (tire MR 10216 Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 MR 10436
QUARDT tem) ANTR pressure sensor) ANTR (radar sensor) ANTR 2015
2015-10-22 (tire pressure 2015-03-18
monitor sensor) Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar MR 20097
MAR‐ 3350.38 (locking MR 18817 sensor) ANTR 2019
QUARDT system) ANTR Schrader MFR (control MR 19527
2019-02-12 unit) (tire pres‐ ANTR Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar MR 20149
sure monitor sen‐ 2019-04-30 sensor) ANTR 2019
MAR‐ CMKG1 (locking MR 21701 sor)
QUARDT system) ANTR WITTE-Vel‐ SDHTAG3NFC MR 23310
2019-12-05 Schrader GG4T (tire pres‐ MR 14777 bert (locking system) ANRT
sure monitor sen‐ ANRT 10/03/2020
sor) 2017-09-20
 Technical data 421

Mexico

Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ turer nation ment approval turer nation ment approval
turer nation ment approval number number
number
Bosch LRR3 (radar IFETEL: Continen‐ RKE223E1 IFETEL:
ADC ARS4-A (radar IFETEL: sensor) RCPBOLR09-082 tal (antenna RLVCORK19-217
sensor) RCPCOAR14-119 8 Antenna amplifier) 4
1
Bosch MRR1Rear IFETEL: Continen‐ CMKG1 (lock‐ IFETEL:
ADC ARS4-B (radar IFETEL: (radar sensor) RCPBOMR14-09 tal Auto‐ ing system) RCPCOCM19-23
sensor) RLVCOAR15-000 22 motive 15
8
Bosch MRRe14FCR IFETEL: Continen‐ MARS Keyless IFETEL:
ADC ARS4-C (radar IFETEL: (radar sensor) RCPBOMR17-05 tal Auto‐ (locking sys‐ RLVDAMA18-182
sensor) RLVCOR19-1062 98 motive tem) 7
Bosch FR5CPCCF IFETEL: Continen‐ RKE213E1 IFETEL: Gentex EURO II (con‐ IFETEL:
(radar sensor) RCPBOFR19-135 tal (antenna RLVKARK15-1741 venience sys‐ RCPJOHO07-598
6 Antenna amplifier) tem) -A9
422 Technical data

Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
turer nation ment approval turer nation ment approval turer nation ment approval
number number number
Gentex MUAHL 5 IFETEL: HUF HUF14632 IFETEL: MAR‐ DC12B (lock‐ IFETEL:
(convenience RCPGEMU15-04 (locking sys‐ RLVHUHU15-120 QUARDT ing system) RLVMADC11-044
system) 48 tem) 4 6
HELLA DM4 (locking IFETEL: HUF HUF4761 IFETEL: MAR‐ DC12K (inte‐ IFETEL:
system) RLVHEDM17-10 (locking sys‐ RLVHUHU12-158 QUARDT rior motion RLVMADC11-044
tem) 7 sensor) 6
Hirsch‐ 920287A IFETEL:
mann (locking sys‐ RLVHI9211-0472 LEOPOLD KK1 (locking IFETEL: MAR‐ MS2 (locking IFETEL:
tem) KOSTAL system) RLVKOKK15-089 QUARDT system) RLVMAMS17-02
1 22
Hirsch‐ 920287B IFETEL:
mann (locking sys‐ RLVHI9212-0608 MAR‐ DC12A (lock‐ IFETEL: MAR‐ MS4 (locking IFETEL:
tem) QUARDT ing system) RLVMEDC17-034 QUARDT system) RLVMAMS19-04
8 49
Huf Bao‐ TSSRE4A (tire IFETEL:
long pressure mon‐ RLVHUTS17-080
itor sensor) 6
 Technical data 423

Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
turer nation ment approval turer nation ment approval turer nation ment approval
number number number
MAR‐ MS5 (locking IFETEL: MAR‐ MU1 (locking IFETEL: Schrader MFR (tire IFETEL:
QUARDT system) RLVMEMS20-09 QUARDT system) RCPMAMU19-13 pressure mon‐ RLVSCMF15-095
57 42 itor sensor) 9
MAR‐ MK1 (locking IFETEL: Meta Sys‐ ITS/TPS (inte‐ IFETEL: Schrader GG4T (tire IFETEL:
QUARDT system) RLVMAMK15-10 tem rior motion IFT/223/UCS/D pressure mon‐ RLVSCGG17-166
42 sensor) G-AUSE/ itor sensor) 5
4871/2016
MAR‐ MK2 (locking IFETEL: Schrader DG6W2D4 IFETEL:
QUARDT system) RLVMAMK15-10 Meta Sys‐ MUW II (inte‐ IFETEL: (tire pressure RLVSCDG18-04
43 tem rior motion IFT/223/UCS/D monitor sen‐
sensor) G-AUSE/ sor)
MAR‐ 3350.38 IFETEL: 5064/2016
QUARDT (locking sys‐ RCPMA3319-053 Schrader MC34MA4 IFETEL:
tem) 0 Schrader AG5SP4-D IFETEL: (tire pressure RCPSCMR14-06
(tire pressure RCPSCAG15-062 monitor sen‐ 2
monitor sen‐ 7 sor)
sor)
424 Technical data

Moldova

Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
turer nation ment approval Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ turer nation ment approval
number turer nation ment approval number
number
Veoneer 77GHz IFETEL: Continen‐ RKE213E1 MD OC TIP 024
MMRV1 RLVAU7717-0744 ADC ARS4-C MD OC TIP 024 tal (antenna A6500-19
(radar sensor) (radar sensor) A6632-19 Antenna amplifier)
Veoneer 77V12BSM IFETEL: Bosch FR5CPCCF MD OC TIP 024 Continen‐ RKE223E1GN MD OC TIP 024
(radar sensor) RLVVE7719-1063 (radar sensor) A6560-19 tal S (antenna A6648-19
Antenna amplifier)
Veoneer 77V12CRN IFETEL: Bosch LRR3 (radar MD OC TIP 024
(radar sensor) RCPVE7719-099 sensor) A6227-18 Continen‐ CMKG1 (lock‐ MD OC TIP 024
8 tal Auto‐ ing system) A6671-20
Bosch MRR1Rear MD OC TIP 024 motive
WITTE- SDHTAG3NFC IFETEL: (radar sensor) A5957-17
Velbert (locking sys‐ RCPWISD20-094 Continen‐ MARS Key‐ MD OC TIP 024
tem) 3 Bosch MRRe14FCR MD OC TIP 024 tal Auto‐ less (locking A5876-17
(radar sensor) A6004-18 motive system)
HELLA DM4 (locking MD 0C TIP 024
system) A6761-20
 Technical data 425

Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
turer nation ment approval turer nation ment approval turer nation ment approval
number number number
Hirsch‐ 920287A MD OC TIP 024 MAR‐ DC12B (lock‐ MD OC TIP 024 MAR‐ MK2 (locking MD OC TIP 024
mann (locking sys‐ A6652-20 QUARDT ing system) A6253-18 QUARDT system) A6552-19
tem)
MAR‐ DC12K (lock‐ MD OC TIP 024 MAR‐ 3350.38 MD OC TIP 024
Hirsch‐ 920287B MD OC TIP 024 QUARDT ing system) A6252-18 QUARDT (locking sys‐ A6398-19
mann (locking sys‐ A6514-19 tem)
tem) MAR‐ MS2 (locking MD OC TIP 024
QUARDT system) A6444-19 MAR‐ MU1 (locking MD OC TIP 024
HUF HUF4761 MD OC TIP 024 QUARDT system) A6570-19
(locking sys‐ A6449-19 MAR‐ MS4 (locking MD OC TIP 024
tem) QUARDT system) A6569-19 MAR‐ MU2 (locking MD OC TIP 024
QUARDT system) A6773-20
LEOPOLD KK1 (locking MD OC TIP 024 MAR‐ MS5 (locking MO OC TIP 024
KOSTAL system) A6440-19 QUARDT system) A6774-20 Veoneer 77GHz MD OC TIP 024
MMRV1 A5678-16
MAR‐ DC12A (lock‐ MD OC TIP 024 MAR‐ MK1 (locking MD OC TIP 024 (radar sensor)
QUARDT ing system) A6684-20 QUARDT system) A6551-19
426 Technical data

Mongolia

Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment
turer nation ment approval Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment facturer ignation approval number
number facturer ignation approval number
MAR‐ DC12K (lock‐ A19000372
Veoneer 77V12BSM MD OC TIP 024 Continen‐ CMKG1 A19000633 QUARDT ing system)
(radar sensor) A6508-19 tal Auto‐ (locking sys‐
motive tem) MAR‐ MS2 (locking A19000289
Veoneer 77V12CRN MD OC TIP 024 QUARDT system)
(radar sensor) A6506-19 Continen‐ MARS Key‐ A18000328
tal Auto‐ less (locking MAR‐ MS4 (locking A19000516
WITTE- SDHTAG3NF MD OC TIP 024 motive system) QUARDT system)
Velbert C (locking A6753-20
system) HELLA DM4 (lock‐ A18000329 MAR‐ MS5 (locking A20000085
ing system) QUARDT system)

MAR‐ DC12A (lock‐ A19000400 MAR‐ MK1 (locking A19000374

QUARDT ing system) QUARDT system)

MAR‐ DC12B (lock‐ A19000371 MAR‐ MK2 (locking A19000374

QUARDT ing system) QUARDT system)
 Technical data 427

Manufac‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment Manufac‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment
turer ignation approval number turer ignation approval number
HELLA DM4 (lock‐ 082/ MAR‐ DC12A 010/
ing system) ARCEP/DG/19 QUARDT (locking sys‐ ARCEP/DG/19
Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment tem)
facturer ignation approval number Hirsch‐ 920287A 097/
mann (locking sys‐ ARCEP/DG/19 MAR‐ DC12B 008/
MAR‐ MU1 (lock‐ A19000517 tem) QUARDT (locking sys‐ ARCEP/DG/19
QUARDT ing system) tem)
Hirsch‐ 920287B 098/
MAR‐ MU2 (lock‐ A20000086 mann (locking sys‐ ARCEP/DG/19 MAR‐ DC12K 009/
QUARDT ing system) tem) QUARDT (locking sys‐ ARCEP/DG/19
tem)
Niger HUF HUF4761 053/
(locking sys‐ ARCEP/DG/19 MAR‐ MS2 (lock‐ 014/
Manufac‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment
tem) QUARDT ing system) ARCEP/DG/19
turer ignation approval number
KATHREIN RKE213E1 029/ MAR‐ MS4 (lock‐ HOMO-0096/
Continen‐ RKE213E1 029/
(locking sys‐ ARCEP/DG/19 QUARDT ing system) ARCEP/DG/2019
tal (antenna ARCEP/DG/19
tem)
Antenna amplifier) MAR‐ MK1 (lock‐ 034/
LEOPOLD KK1 (locking 037/ QUARDT ing system) ARCEP/DG/19
Continen‐ MARS Key‐ 083/
KOSTAL system) ARCEP/DG/19
tal Auto‐ less (locking ARCEP/DG/19 MAR‐ MK2 (lock‐ 035/
motive system) QUARDT ing system) ARCEP/DG/19
428 Technical data

Manufac‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
turer ignation approval number turer nation ment approval turer nation ment approval
number number
MAR‐ 3350.38 015/
QUARDT (locking sys‐ ARCEP/DG/19 ADC ARS4-C (radar NCC/ Continen‐ RKE213E1 NCC/
tem) sensor) TSNI/WN/TA/ tal (antenna TSNI/WN/TA/
CERT/ Antenna amplifier) CERT/
MAR‐ MU1 (lock‐ HOMO-0095/ 3078/2019 0865/2015
QUARDT ing system) ARCEP/DG/2019
Bosch FR5CPCCF NCC/ Continen‐ RKE223E1GN NCC/
Nigeria (radar sensor) TSNI/WN/TA/ tal S (antenna TSNI/WN/TA/
Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ CERT/ Antenna amplifier) CERT/
turer nation ment approval 3282/2019 3372/2020
number Bosch MRR1Rear NCC/ Continen‐ CMKG1 (lock‐ NCC/
ADC ARS4-A (radar NCC/ (radar sensor) TSNI/WN/TA/ tal Auto‐ ing system) TSNI/WN/TA/
sensor) TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ motive CERT/
CERT/ 2089/2018 3440/2020
AB00388/2015 Bosch MRRe14FCR NCC/ Continen‐ MARS Keyless NCC/
ADC ARS4-B (radar NCC/ (radar sensor) TSNI/WN/TA/ tal Auto‐ (locking sys‐ TSNI/WN/TA/
sensor) TSNI/WN/TA/ CERT/ motive tem) CERT/
CERT/ 2042/2018 1670/2017
2062/2018
 Technical data 429

Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
turer nation ment approval turer nation ment approval turer nation ment approval
number number number
HELLA DM4 (locking NCC/ HUF HUF4761 NCC/ MAR‐ DC12K (lock‐ NCC/
system) TSNI/WN/TA/ (locking sys‐ TSNI/WN/TA/ QUARDT ing system) TSNI/WN/TA/
CERT/ tem) CERT/ CERT/
1830/2017 2884/2019 2626/2019
Hirsch‐ 920287A NCC/ LEOPOLD KK1 (locking NCC/ MAR‐ MS2 (locking NCC/
mann (locking sys‐ TSNI/WN/TA/ KOSTAL system) TSNI/WN/TA/ QUARDT system) TSNI/WN/TA/
tem) CERT/ CERT/ CERT/
3100/2019 0823/2015 1667/2017
Hirsch‐ 920287B NCC/ MAR‐ DC12A (lock‐ NCC/ MAR‐ MS4 (locking NCC/
mann (locking sys‐ TSNI/WN/TA/ QUARDT ing system) TSNI/WN/TA/ QUARDT system) TSNI/WN/TA/
tem) CERT/ CERT/ CERT/
3101/2019 1714/2017 3212/2019
HUF HUF14632 NCC/ MAR‐ DC12B (lock‐ NCC/ MAR‐ MS5 (locking NCC/
(locking sys‐ TSNI/WN/TA/ QUARDT ing system) TSNI/WN/TA/ QUARDT system) TSNI/WN/TA/
tem) CERT/ CERT/ CERT/
0829/2015 2627/2019 3635/2020
430 Technical data

Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Oman
turer nation ment approval turer nation ment approval Manu‐ Model designation Radio
number number facturer equip‐
ment
MAR‐ MK1 (locking NCC/ Veoneer 77V12BSM NCC/ approval
QUARDT system) TSNI/WN/TA/ (radar sensor) TSNI/WN/TA/ number
CERT/ CERT/
0739/2015 3069/2019 ADC ARS4-A (radar sen‐ TRA/TA-
sor) R/
MAR‐ MK2 (locking NCC/ Veoneer 77V12CRN NCC/ 2016/14
QUARDT system) TSNI/WN/TA/ (radar sensor) TSNI/WN/TA/
CERT/ CERT/ D080134
0740/2015 3068/2019 ADC ARS4-B (radar sen‐ TRA/TA-
MAR‐ 3350.38 NCC/ sor) R/
QUARDT (locking sys‐ TSNI/WN/TA/ 2210/14
tem) CERT/ D080134
2882/2019
ADC ARS4-C (radar sen‐ TRA/TA-
sor) R/
7769/19
D172338
 Technical data 431

Manu‐ Model designation Radio Manu‐ Model designation Radio Manu‐ Model designation Radio
facturer equip‐ facturer equip‐ facturer equip‐
ment ment ment
approval approval approval
number number number
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar TRA/TA- Continen‐ RKE213E1 (antenna TRA/TA- HELLA DM4 (locking system) TRA/TA-
sensor) R/ tal amplifier) R/ R/
7983/19 Antenna 2715/15 4548/17
D172338 D090258 D080134
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) TRA/TA- Continen‐ RKE223E1GNS TRA/TA- Hirsch‐ 920287A (locking TRA/TA-
R/ tal (antenna amplifier) R/ mann system) R/
1049/09 Antenna 8337/19 0210/11
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sen‐ TRA/TA- Continen‐ CMKG1 (locking sys‐ TRA/TA- D080353
sor) R/ tal Auto‐ tem) R/ Hirsch‐ 920287B (locking TRA/TA-
1849/14 motive 8642/19 mann system) R/
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar TRA/TA- D172338 0655/12
sensor) R/ Continen‐ MARS Keyless (lock‐ TRA/TA- D080353
4353/17 tal Auto‐ ing system) R/ Huf Bao‐ TSSRE4A (tire pres‐ TRA R/
motive 4158/17 long sure monitor sensor) 4516/17
D080134 D100428
432 Technical data

Manu‐ Model designation Radio Manu‐ Model designation Radio Manu‐ Model designation Radio
facturer equip‐ facturer equip‐ facturer equip‐
ment ment ment
approval approval approval
number number number
Huf Bao‐ TSSSG4G6 (tire pres‐ TRA R/ MAR‐ DC12A (locking sys‐ TRA/TA- MAR‐ MS4 (locking system) TRA/TA-
long sure monitor sensor) 4515/17 QUARDT tem) RD/ QUARDT R/
D100428 4056/17 7316/19
Huf Bao‐ TSSSG4G6b (tire TRA R/ D100428 D172249
long pressure monitor sen‐ 7506/19 MAR‐ DC12B (locking sys‐ TRA/TA- MAR‐ MS5 (locking system) TRA/TA-
sor) D100428 QUARDT tem) R/ QUARDT R/
HUF HUF14632 (locking TRA/TA- 0227/11 9324/20
system) R/ D080353 D100428
2665/15
MAR‐ DC12K (locking sys‐ TRA/TA- MAR‐ MK1 (locking system) TRA/TA-
HUF HUF4761 (locking sys‐ TRA/TA- QUARDT tem) R/ QUARDT R/
tem) R/ 0228/11 2848/15
0920/12 D080353 D080353
LEOPOLD KK1 (locking system) TRA/TA- MAR‐ MS2 (locking system) TRA/TA- MAR‐ MK2 (locking system) TRA/TA-
KOSTAL R/ QUARDT R/ QUARDT R/
3129/16 4136/17 2900/15
D080134 D080353
 Technical data 433

Manu‐ Model designation Radio Manu‐ Model designation Radio Manu‐ Model designation Radio
facturer equip‐ facturer equip‐ facturer equip‐
ment ment ment
approval approval approval
number number number
MAR‐ 3350.38 (locking sys‐ TRA/TA- Schrader MFR (tire pressure TRA R/ Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar TRA R/
QUARDT tem) R/ monitor sensor) 7464/19 sensor) 7706/19
7051/19 D090258 D172338
D172249 Schrader GG4T (tire pressure TRA TA- Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar TRA R/
MAR‐ MU1 (locking system) TRA/TA- monitor sensor) R/ sensor) 7707/19
QUARDT R/ 4686/17
D080134 D172338
7353/19
D172249 Schrader DG6W2D4 (tire pres‐ TRA TA- WITTE- SDHTAG3NFC (lock‐ TRA/TA-
sure monitor sensor) R/ Velbert ing system) R/
MAR‐ MU2 (locking system) TRA/TA- 5511/18 9150/20
QUARDT R/ D172249
9325/20
D100428 Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar TRA/TA-
sensor) R/
Schrader AG5SP4-D (tire pres‐ TRA R/ 2706/15
sure monitor sensor) 2380/15
D080134
434 Technical data

Pakistan

Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ turer nation ment turer nation ment
turer nation ment approval approval
approval number number
number
Continental RKE213E1 9.142/2016 Hirschmann 920287A 9.845/2013
ADC ARS4-A 9.9014/2019 Antenna (antenna (locking sys‐
(radar sen‐ amplifier) tem)
sor)
Continental RKE223E1GN 9.100169/20 Hirschmann 920287B 9.846/2013
ADC ARS4-B 9.1048/2018 Antenna S (antenna 19 (locking sys‐
(radar sen‐ amplifier) tem)
sor)
Continental CMKG1 (lock‐ 9.100175/20 HUF HUF14632 9.598/2015
ADC ARS4-C 9.9389/2019 Automotive ing system) 19 (locking sys‐
(radar sen‐ tem)
sor) Continental MARS Key‐ 9.213/2017
Automotive less (locking HUF HUF4761 9.790/2013
Bosch FR5CPCCF 9.198/2020 system) (locking sys‐
(radar sen‐ tem)
sor) HELLA DM4 (locking 9.409/2017
system)
 Technical data 435

Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
turer nation ment turer nation ment turer nation ment
approval approval approval
number number number
LEOPOLD KK1 (locking 9.118/2016 MARQUARDT MK1 (locking 9.486/2015 Veoneer 77V12BSM 9.9391/2019
KOSTAL system) system) (radar sen‐
sor)
MARQUARDT DC12A (lock‐ 9.131/2017 MARQUARDT MK2 (locking 9.497/2015
ing system) system) Veoneer 77V12CRN 9.9391/2019
(radar sen‐
MARQUARDT DC12B (lock‐ 9.829/2013 MARQUARDT MU1 (locking 9.100170/20 sor)
ing system) system) 19
MARQUARDT DC12K (lock‐ 9.830/2013 Veoneer 77GHz 9.9284/2019
ing system) MMRV1
(radar sen‐
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking 9.133/2017 sor)
system)
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking 9.100171/20
system) 19
436 Technical data

Paraguay

Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment
Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment facturer ignation approval number facturer ignation approval number
facturer ignation approval number
Bosch MRRe14FCR 2017-06-I-0000162 Conti‐ CMKG1 2020-02-I-0110
ADC ARS4-A 2019-05-I-0271 (radar sen‐ nental (locking sys‐
(radar sen‐ sor) Automo‐ tem)
sor) tive
Bosch MRR1Rear 2019-05-I-000236
ADC ARS4-B 2019-07-I-0353 (radar sen‐ Conti‐ MARS Key‐ 2017-05-I-0000136
(radar sen‐ sor) nental less (locking
sor) Automo‐ system)
Conti‐ RKE213E1 2016-02- tive
ADC ARS4-C 2019-11-I-0602 nental (antenna I-0000038
(radar sen‐ Antenna amplifier) HELLA DM4 (locking 2017-08-
sor) system) I_0000261
Conti‐ RKE223E1G 2019-12-I-0656
Bosch FR5CPCCF 2019-09-I-0508 nental NS (antenna Hirsch‐ 920287A 2016-5-I-000134 y
(radar sen‐ Antenna amplifier) mann (locking sys‐ 2011-06-I-0059
sor) tem)
 Technical data 437

Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment
facturer ignation approval number facturer ignation approval number facturer ignation approval number
Hirsch‐ 920287B 2017-04-I-0000119 LEO‐ KK1 (locking 2015-06-I-0000181 MAR‐ MK1 (locking 2020-07-I-0390 y
mann (locking sys‐ y 2012-05-I-0096 POLD system) QUARDT system) 2015-07-
tem) KOSTAL I-0000200
Huf Bao‐ TSSRE4A 2017-09- MAR‐ DC12A (lock‐ 2017-07-I-0000199 MAR‐ MK2 (locking 2020-07-I-0391 y
long (tire pressure I-0000328 QUARDT ing system) QUARDT system) 2015-07-I-0000201
monitor sen‐
sor) MAR‐ DC12B (lock‐ 2016-5-I-000144 y MAR‐ 3350.38 2019-04-I-000216
QUARDT ing system) 2011-06-I-0067 QUARDT (locking sys‐
HUF HUF14632 2020-06-I-0284 y tem)
(locking sys‐ 2015-08- MAR‐ DC12K (lock‐ 2016-5-I-000143 y
tem) I-0000226 QUARDT ing system) 2011-06-I-0068

HUF HUF4761 2017-12- MAR‐ MS2 (locking 2017-04-I-0000101

(locking sys‐ I-0000409 y QUARDT system)
tem) 2012-10-I-0178 MAR‐ MS4 (locking 2019-10-I-0581
QUARDT system)
438 Technical data

Philippines

Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment
facturer ignation approval number facturer ignation approval number Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment
facturer ignation approval number
Pana‐ DAIRSE Importer: Veoneer 77GHz 2015-07-I-000194
sonic Condor S.A.C.I MMRV1 ADC ARS4-A ESD-1409466C
Casa Central, J.B. (radar sen‐ (radar sen‐
Gorostiaga 315 y sor) sor)
Guaraníes, Asun‐ Veoneer 77V12BSM 2019-07-I-0399 ADC ARS4-B ESD-1409834C
ción, Paraguay, (radar sen‐ (radar sen‐
(595 21) 569 sor) sor)
7000, sac@con‐
dor.com.py Veoneer 77V12CRN 2019-07-I-0398 ADC ARS4-C ESD-1920226C
(radar sen‐ (radar sen‐
Schrader AG5SP4-D 2015-04-I-0000150 sor) sor)
(tire pressure
monitor sen‐ WITTE- SDHTAG3NF 2020-06-I-0326 Bosch FR5CPCCF ESD-1920531C
sor) Velbert C (locking (radar sen‐
system) sor)
 Technical data 439

Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment
facturer ignation approval number facturer ignation approval number facturer ignation approval number
Bosch MRR1Rear ESD-1408917C Veoneer 77GHz ESD-1510921C Conti‐ CMKG1 ESD-2021556C
(radar sen‐ MMRV1 nental (locking sys‐
sor) (radar sen‐ Automo‐ tem)
sor) tive
Bosch MRRe14FCR ESD-1716172C
(radar sen‐ Schrader AG5SP4-D ESD-1510376C Conti‐ MARS Key‐ ESD-1714865C
sor) (tire pressure nental less (locking
monitor sen‐ Automo‐ system)
Veoneer 77V12BSM ESD-1920160C sor) tive
(radar sen‐
sor) Conti‐ RKE213E1 ESD-1511856C HELLA DM4 (locking ESD-1715539C
nental (antenna system)
Veoneer 77V12CRN ESD-1920162C Antenna amplifier)
(radar sen‐ Hirsch‐ 920287A ESD-1105246C
sor) Conti‐ RKE223E1G ESD-1921015C mann (locking sys‐
nental NS (antenna tem)
Antenna amplifier)
440 Technical data

Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment
facturer ignation approval number facturer ignation approval number facturer ignation approval number
Hirsch‐ 920287B ESD-1206044C LEO‐ KK1 (locking ESD-1510698C MAR‐ MS5 (locking ESD-2022426C
mann (locking sys‐ POLD system) QUARDT system)
tem) KOSTAL
MAR‐ MK1 (locking ESD-1510644C
Huf Bao‐ TSSRE4A ESD-1715393C MAR‐ DC12A (lock‐ ESD-1714489C QUARDT system)
long (tire pressure QUARDT ing system)
monitor sen‐ MAR‐ MK2 (locking ESD-1510645C
sor) MAR‐ DC12B (lock‐ ESD-1105216C QUARDT system)
QUARDT ing system)
HUF HUF14632 ESD-1511236C MAR‐ 3350.38 ESD-1919198C
(locking sys‐ MAR‐ DC12K (lock‐ ESD-1105215C QUARDT (locking sys‐
tem) QUARDT ing system) tem)

HUF HUF4761 ESD-1206521C MAR‐ MS2 (locking ESD-1715652C MAR‐ MU1 (locking ESD-1919146C
(locking sys‐ QUARDT system) QUARDT system)
tem) MAR‐ MS4 (locking ESD-1919133C
QUARDT system)
 Technical data 441

Zambia

Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment
facturer ignation approval number Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment facturer ignation approval number
facturer ignation approval number
MAR‐ MU2 (locking ESD-2022425C Hirsch‐ 920287B ZMB/ZICTA/TA/
QUARDT system) Conti‐ RKE213E1 ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ mann (locking sys‐ 2019/7/11
nental (antenna 2019/3/11 tem)
WITTE- SDHTAG3NF ESD-2022599C Antenna amplifier)
Velbert C (locking HUF HUF4761 ZMB/ZICTA/TA/
system) Conti‐ MARS Key‐ ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ (locking sys‐ 2018/12/18
nental less (locking 2019/3/3 tem)
Automo‐ system)
tive LEOPOLD KK1 (locking ZMB/ZICTA/TA/
KOSTAL system) 2019/3/48
HELLA DM4 (lock‐ ZMB/ZICTA/TA/
ing system) 2019/3/4 MAR‐ DC12A ZMB/ZICTA/TA/
QUARDT (locking sys‐ 2019/5/16
Hirsch‐ 920287A ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ tem)
mann (locking sys‐ 2019/7/12
tem) MAR‐ DC12B ZMB/ZICTA/TA/
QUARDT (locking sys‐ 2019/5/17
tem)
442 Technical data

Serbia

Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment
facturer ignation approval number facturer ignation approval number Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
turer nation ment approval
MAR‐ DC12K ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ MAR‐ MU1 (lock‐ ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ number
QUARDT (locking sys‐ 2019/5/18 QUARDT ing system) 2019/7/124
tem) ADC ARS4-A (radar И011 14
Veoneer 77V12BSM ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ sensor)
MAR‐ MS2 (lock‐ ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ (radar sen‐ 2019/6/59
QUARDT ing system) 2018/9/30 sor) ADC ARS4-B (radar И011 14
sensor)
MAR‐ MS4 (lock‐ ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ Veoneer 77V12CRN ZMB/ZICTA/TA/
QUARDT ing system) 2019/7/123 (radar sen‐ 2019/6/60 ADC ARS4-C (radar И011 14
sor) sensor) 34540-328/19-3
MAR‐ MK1 (lock‐ ZMB/ZICTA/TA/
QUARDT ing system) 2019/3/20 Bosch FR5CPCCF И01119
MAR‐ MK2 (lock‐ ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ (radar sensor) 34540-400/19-0
QUARDT ing system) 2019/3/21 4
MAR‐ 3350.38 ZMB/ZICTA/TA/ Bosch LRR3 (radar 1-06-3454-190/
QUARDT (locking sys‐ 2019/3/6 sensor) 09
tem)
 Technical data 443

Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
turer nation ment approval turer nation ment approval turer nation ment approval
number number number
Bosch MRR1Rear 34540-840/17-3 Continen‐ MARS Keyless И005 17 Huf Bao‐ TSSRE4A (tire И005 17
(radar sensor) tal Auto‐ (locking sys‐ P1617052600 long pressure
motive tem) monitor sen‐
Bosch MRRe14FCR P1617068100 sor)
(radar sensor) Gentex EURO II (con‐ И005 14
venience sys‐ P1614085200 Huf Bao‐ TSSSG4G6 И005 17
Continen‐ RKE213E1 И005 18 tem) long (tire pressure
tal (antenna P1618107600 monitor sen‐
Antenna amplifier) HELLA DM4 (locking И005 20 sor)
system) P1620100100
Continen‐ RKE223E1GN И005 19 Huf Bao‐ TSSSG4G6b И005 19
tal S (antenna P1619151300 Hirsch‐ 920287A И005 18 long (tire pressure
Antenna amplifier) mann (locking sys‐ monitor sen‐
P1618084500
Continen‐ CMKG1 (lock‐ И005 20 tem) sor)
tal Auto‐ ing system) P1620007300 Hirsch‐ 920287B И005 18 HUF HUF14632 И005 18
motive mann (locking sys‐ (locking sys‐
P1618084400 P1618104600
tem) tem)
444 Technical data

Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
turer nation ment approval turer nation ment approval turer nation ment approval
number number number
HUF HUF4761 И005 18 MAR‐ MS4 (locking И005 19 MAR‐ MU1 (locking И005 19
(locking sys‐ P1618156300 QUARDT system) P1619129100 QUARDT system) P1619129200
tem)
MAR‐ MS5 (locking И005 20 MAR‐ MU2 (locking И005 20
LEOPOLD KK1 (locking И005 18 QUARDT system) QUARDT system)
KOSTAL system) P1620062300 P1620062200
P1618080200
MAR‐ MK1 (locking 34540-306/18-3 Meta Sys‐ MUW II (inte‐ И011 19
MAR‐ DC12A (lock‐ И005 17 QUARDT system) tem rior motion
QUARDT ing system) P1619045500
P1620044700 sensor)
MAR‐ MK2 (locking 34540-304/18-3
MAR‐ DC12B (lock‐ И011 11 QUARDT system) Schrader AG5SP4-D И005 15
QUARDT ing system) (tire pressure
MAR‐ 3350.38 34540-124/19-5 monitor sen‐
MAR‐ DC12K (lock‐ И011 11 QUARDT (locking sys‐ sor)
QUARDT ing system) tem)
MAR‐ MS2 (locking И011 17
QUARDT system)
 Technical data 445

Singapore
Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
turer nation ment approval
number
Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ ADC ARS4-A (radar DA103365
turer nation ment approval turer nation ment approval sensor)
number number
ADC ARS4-B (radar DA103365
Schrader MFR (tire И005 19 Schrader MC34MA4 И011 11 sensor)
pressure (tire pressure
monitor sen‐ monitor sen‐ ADC ARS4-C (radar DA103365
sor) sor) sensor)

Schrader GG4T (tire И005 17 Veoneer 77GHz И011 18 Bosch FR5CPCCF N3368-19
pressure MMRV1 (radar sensor)
34540-483/18-3
monitor sen‐ (radar sensor) Bosch LRR3 (radar N0380-15
sor) sensor)
Veoneer 77V12BSM 34540-327/19-6
Schrader DG6W2D4 И005 18 (radar sensor) Bosch MRR1Rear N0871-19
(tire pressure (radar sensor)
monitor sen‐ Veoneer 77V12CRN 34540-325/19-5
sor) (radar sensor) Bosch MRRe14FCR N1699-17
WITTE- SDHTAG3NFC И005 20 (radar sensor)
Velbert (locking sys‐ P1620047900
tem)
446 Technical data

Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
turer nation ment approval turer nation ment approval turer nation ment approval
number number number
Continen‐ RKE213E1 N2681-20 Hirsch‐ 920287B N1231-12 HUF HUF4761 N2797-12
tal (antenna DA105282 mann (locking sys‐ DA103365 (locking sys‐ DA103365
Antenna amplifier) tem) tem)
Continen‐ RKE223E1GNS N4939-19 HUF Bao‐ TSSRE4A (tire DA103787 LEOPOLD KK1 (locking N2292-15
tal (antenna DA107248 long pressure moni‐ KOSTAL system) DA103365
Antenna amplifier) tor sensor)
MAR‐ DC12A (lock‐ N1138-17
Continen‐ CMKG1 (lock‐ N4774-19 HUF Bao‐ TSSSG4G6 DA103787 QUARDT ing system)
tal Auto‐ ing system) long (tire pressure DA103787
DA103365
motive monitor sen‐ MAR‐ DC12B (lock‐ N0793-16
sor) QUARDT ing system)
Continen‐ MARS Keyless N1298-17 DA103365
tal Auto‐ (locking sys‐ DA103365 HUF Bao‐ TSSSG4G6b DA28467
motive tem) long (tire pressure MAR‐ DC12K (lock‐ N0726-16
monitor sen‐ QUARDT ing system) DA103365
HELLA DM4 (locking N3010-17 sor)
system) DA103365 MAR‐ MS2 (locking N1067-17
HUF HUF14632 N1934-20 QUARDT system) DA103787
Hirsch‐ 920287A N0812-11 (locking sys‐ DA105282
mann (locking sys‐ DA103365 tem)
tem)
 Technical data 447

Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manufac‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
turer nation ment approval turer nation ment approval turer nation ment approval
number number number
MAR‐ MS4 (locking G2709-19 MAR‐ MU2 (locking G2148-20 Veoneer 77V12CRN DA103365
QUARDT system) N2718-19 QUARDT system) DA103787 (radar sensor)
N2717-19 Meta Sys‐ ITS/TPS (inte‐ N2215-11 WITTE- SDHTAG3NFC N1755-20
DA103787 tem rior motion Velbert (locking sys‐
sensor) tem)
MAR‐ MS5 (locking G2147-20
QUARDT system) N2151-20 Meta Sys‐ MUW II (inte‐ N2216-11 South Africa
tem rior motion
DA103787
sensor)
MAR‐ MK1 (locking N2522-15
Schrader AG5SP4-D (tire DA105282
QUARDT system) DA103365 pressure moni‐
tor sensor) Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
MAR‐ MK2 (locking N2523-15
QUARDT system) facturer nation ment approval
DA103365 Veoneer 77GHz N2779-15
number
MMRV1 (radar DA103365
MAR‐ 3350.38 (lock‐ N0506-19 sensor) ADC ARS4-A (radar TA-2014/1637
QUARDT ing system) DA103787 sensor)
Veoneer 77V12BSM DA103365
MAR‐ MU1 (locking G2267-19 (radar sensor) ADC ARS4-B (radar TA-2014/1783
QUARDT system) DA103365 sensor)
448 Technical data

Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval
number number number
ADC ARS4-C (radar TA-2019/1595 Continen‐ RKE223E1 TA-2020/043 Gentex MUAHL 5 TA-2015/1386
sensor) tal (antenna (convenience
Antenna amplifier) system)
Bosch FR5CPCCF TA-2019/1200
(radar sensor) Continen‐ CMKG1 (lock‐ TA-2019/5405 HELLA DM4 (locking TA-2017/2518
tal Auto‐ ing system) system)
Bosch MRR1Rear TA-2014/212 motive
(radar sensor) Hirsch‐ 920287A TA-2011/374
Continen‐ MARS Keyless TA-2016/3500 mann (locking sys‐
Bosch MRRe14FCR TA-2017/2013 tal Auto‐ (locking sys‐ tem)
(radar sensor) motive tem)
Hirsch‐ 920287B TA-2013/1262
Bosch LRR3 (radar 1965/007009/ Gentex EURO II (con‐ TA-2005/614 mann (locking sys‐
sensor) 07 venience sys‐ tem)
Continen‐ RKE213E1 TA-2015/1438 tem)
Huf Bao‐ TSSRE4A (tire TA-2017/1393
tal (antenna long pressure moni‐
Antenna amplifier) tor sensor)
 Technical data 449

Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval
number number number
Huf Bao‐ TSSSG4G6 TA-2017/1391 LEOPOLD KK1 (locking TA-2015/595 MAR‐ DC12B (lock‐ TA-2011/370
long (control unit) KOSTAL system) QUARDT ing system)
(tire pressure
monitor sen‐ Meta Sys‐ ITS Master TA-2011/1636 MAR‐ DC12K (lock‐ TA-2012/1542
sor) tem (interior QUARDT ing system)
motion sensor)
Huf Bao‐ TSSSG4G6b TA-2019/1440 MAR‐ MS2 (locking TA-2016/3314
long (tire pressure Meta Sys‐ ITS Sensor TA-2011/1227 QUARDT system)
monitor sen‐ tem (interior
motion sensor) MAR‐ MS4 (locking TA-2019/843
sor) QUARDT system)
HUF HUF14632 TA-2015/1077 Meta Sys‐ MUW II (inte‐ TA-2019/261
tem rior motion MAR‐ MS5 (locking TA-2020/5765
(locking sys‐ QUARDT system)
tem) sensor)
MAR‐ DC12A (lock‐ TA-2017/312 MAR‐ MK1 (locking TA-2015/179
HUF HUF4761 TA-2012/1543 QUARDT system)
(locking sys‐ QUARDT ing system)
tem)
450 Technical data

Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval
number number number
MAR‐ MK2 (locking TA-2015/180 Schrader DG6W2D4 TA-2017/2933 Veoneer 77V12CRN TA-2019/1382
QUARDT system) (tire pressure (radar sensor)
monitor sen‐
MAR‐ 3350.38 (lock‐ TA-2018/3985 sor) WITTE- SDHTAG3NFC TA-2020/055
QUARDT ing system) Velbert (locking sys‐
Schrader MC34MA4 TA-2011/1370 tem)
Schrader AG5SP4-D TA-2015/072 (tire pressure
(tire pressure monitor sen‐
monitor sen‐ sor)
sor)
Veoneer 77GHz TA-2015/2087
Schrader MFR (tire pres‐ TA-2019/273 MMRV1 (radar
sure monitor sensor)
sensor)
Veoneer 77V12BSM TA-2019/1380
Schrader GG4T (tire TA-2017/3884 (radar sensor)
pressure moni‐
tor sensor)
 Technical data 451

South Korea Thailand

Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment

Man‐ Model Radio equipment Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment facturer ignation approval number
ufac‐ designa‐ approval number facturer ignation approval number
turer tion Conti‐ RKE213E1 SDoC
ADC ARS4-C A57013-19 nental (antenna
HUF HUF146 MSIP-CRM-HHF- (radar sen‐ Antenna amplifier)
32 (lock‐ HUF-14632 sor)
ing sys‐ Conti‐ RKE223E1G SDoC
tem) Bosch FR5CPCCF A57008-19 nental NS (antenna
(radar sen‐ Antenna amplifier)
MAR‐ MU1 R-R-MQU-MU1 sor)
QUA (locking Conti‐ CMKG1 SDoC
RDT system) Bosch LRR3 (radar A57006-15 nental (locking sys‐
sensor) Automo‐ tem)
tive
Bosch MRR1Rear A57005-14
(radar sen‐ Conti‐ MARS Key‐ SDoC
sor) nental less (locking
Automo‐ system)
Bosch MRRe14FCR A57003-17 tive
(radar sen‐
sor)
452 Technical data

Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment
facturer ignation approval number facturer ignation approval number facturer ignation approval number
HELLA DM4 (locking SDoC LEO‐ KK1 (locking SDoC MAR‐ MS5 (locking SDoC
system) POLD system) QUARDT system) A75004-20
KOSTAL
Hirsch‐ 920287A SDoC MAR‐ MK1 (locking SDoC
mann (locking sys‐ MAR‐ DC12A (lock‐ SDoC QUARDT system)
tem) QUARDT ing system)
MAR‐ MK2 (locking SDoC
Hirsch‐ 920287B SDoC MAR‐ DC12B (lock‐ SDoC QUARDT system)
mann (locking sys‐ QUARDT ing system)
tem) MAR‐ 3350.38 SDoC
MAR‐ DC12K (lock‐ SDoC QUARDT (locking sys‐
HUF HUF14632 SDoC QUARDT ing system) tem)
(locking sys‐
tem) MAR‐ MS2 (locking SDoC MAR‐ MU1 (locking A75002-20
QUARDT system) QUARDT system)
HUF HUF4761 SDoC
(locking sys‐ MAR‐ MS4 (locking SDoC MAR‐ MU2 (locking A75005-20
tem) QUARDT system) QUARDT system)
 Technical data 453

Togo
Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment
facturer ignation approval number
Continen‐ RKE213E1 No. 024/19
Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment tal (antenna
facturer ignation approval number facturer ignation approval number Antenna amplifier)
Meta MUW II (inte‐ RF test report: Veoneer 77V12CRN A57004-19 Continen‐ MARS Key‐ No. 040/19
System rior motion 149852-2R1TRFE (radar sen‐ tal Auto‐ less (locking
sensor) MC sor) motive system)
EMC test report: WITTE- SDHTAG3NF SDoC HELLA DM4 (lock‐ No. 039/19
149852-1R1TRFE Velbert C (locking ing system)
MC system)
Hirsch‐ 920287A No. 089/19
Safety report: mann (locking sys‐
149852TRFSAF tem)
Veoneer 77GHz A57008-16 Hirsch‐ 920287B No. 088/19
MMRV1 mann (locking sys‐
(radar sen‐ tem)
sor)
HUF HUF4761 No. 041/19
Veoneer 77V12BSM A57004-19 (locking sys‐
(radar sen‐ tem)
sor)
454 Technical data

Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment Ukraine
facturer ignation approval number facturer ignation approval number
KATHREI RKE213E1 No. 024/19 MAR‐ MK1 (lock‐ No. 021/19
N (locking sys‐ QUARDT ing system)
tem)
MAR‐ MK2 (lock‐ No. 022/19 Manu‐ Model designa‐ Radio
LEOPOLD KK1 (locking No. 060/19 QUARDT ing system) facturer tion equipment
KOSTAL system) approval
MAR‐ 3350.38 No. 016/20
number
MAR‐ DC12A No. 055/19 QUARDT (locking sys‐
QUARDT (locking sys‐ tem) ADC ARS4-A (radar UA RF:
tem) sensor) 1CONT0004
MAR‐ MU1 (lock‐ No. 100/19
MAR‐ DC12B No. 057/19 QUARDT ing system) ADC ARS4-B (radar UA RF:
QUARDT (locking sys‐ sensor) 1CONT0001
tem)
ADC ARS4-C (radar UA.TR.109.R.
MAR‐ DC12K No. 056/19 sensor) 0017-19
QUARDT (locking sys‐
tem) Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar UA RF:
sensor) 1BOSC0009
MAR‐ MS2 (lock‐ No. 008/19
QUARDT ing system) Bosch LRR3 (radar sen‐ UA.TR.109.R.
sor) 0031-19
MAR‐ MS4 (lock‐ No. 101/19
QUARDT ing system)
 Technical data 455

Manu‐ Model designa‐ Radio Manu‐ Model designa‐ Radio Manu‐ Model designa‐ Radio
facturer tion equipment facturer tion equipment facturer tion equipment
approval approval approval
number number number
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar UA.TR.109.R. Continen‐ MARS Keyless RTS.UKR. Huf Bao‐ TSSRE4A (tire UA
sensor) 0598-18 tal Auto‐ (locking system) 355-34/18 long pressure monitor 1.001.01856
motive sensor) 8-19-TE
Bosch MRRe14FCR UA.TR.109.R.
(radar sensor) 0030-19 Gentex EURO II (conveni‐ UA1.001.008 Huf Bao‐ TSSSG4G6 (con‐ UA
ence system) 806-15 long trol unit) (tire pres‐ 1.001.01858
Continen‐ RKE213E1 UKR. sure monitor sen‐ 6-19-TE
tal (antenna amplifier) 355-123/19 HELLA DM4 (locking sys‐ UA.TR.109.R. sor)
Antenna tem) 0325-18
Huf Bao‐ TSSSG4G6b (con‐ UA
Continen‐ RKE223E1GNS UA.R.TR. Hirsch‐ 920287A (locking UKR. long trol unit) (tire pres‐ 1.001.01928
tal (antenna amplifier) 052.682-19 mann system) 355-7/20 sure monitor sen‐ 9-19-TE
Antenna sor)
Hirsch‐ 920287B (locking UKR.
Continen‐ CMKG1 (locking UA1.001.021 mann system) 355-8/20 HUF HUF14632 (lock‐ UKR.
tal Auto‐ system) 175-20-TE ing system) 355-113/19
motive
456 Technical data

Manu‐ Model designa‐ Radio Manu‐ Model designa‐ Radio Manu‐ Model designa‐ Radio
facturer tion equipment facturer tion equipment facturer tion equipment
approval approval approval
number number number
HUF HUF4761 (locking UA1.001.018 MAR‐ MS4 (locking sys‐ UA.R.TR. Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar UA RF:
system) 653-19-TE QUARDT tem) 052.528-19 sensor) 1VEON2BS
M
LEOPOLD KK1 (locking sys‐ 1O094.0066 MAR‐ MK1 (locking sys‐ UA1.001.019
KOSTAL tem) 82-19 QUARDT tem) 233-19-TE Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar UA RF:
sensor) 1VEON2CRN
MAR‐ DC12A (locking UA.R.TR. MAR‐ MK2 (locking sys‐ UA1.001.019
QUARDT system) 052.307-19 QUARDT tem) 234-19-TE
MAR‐ DC12B (locking UA.R.TR. MAR‐ 3350.38 (locking UA1.001.018
QUARDT system) 052.308-19 QUARDT system) 888-19-TE
MAR‐ DC12K (locking UA.R.TR. Schrader AG5SP4 (tire pres‐ UA.TR. 028
QUARDT system) 052.309-19 sure monitor sen‐
sor)
MAR‐ MS2 (locking sys‐ UA1.001.019
QUARDT tem) 129-19-TE
 Technical data 457

Uzbekistan United Arab Emirates

Manu‐ Model designa‐ Radio

facturer tion equipment Manu‐ Model des‐ Radio equipment Manu‐ Model designa‐ Radio equip‐
approval facturer ignation approval number fac‐ tion ment approval
number turer number
HELLA DM4 (lock‐ UZ.SMT.
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 TEC/ DoC ing system) 01.319.2581135 ADC ARS4-A (radar TRA
(radar sensor) No VEON‐ sensor) ER58296/17,
EER.UKR. MAR‐ MS2 (lock‐ UZ.SMT. DA40068
355-3/19 QUARDT ing system) 01.319.2550607
ADC ARS4-B (radar TRA
NKRZi No- MAR‐ MS4 (lock‐ UZ.SMT. sensor) ER61136/18,
UA RF: QUARDT ing system) 01.319.2581337 DA40068/15
2VEONMRV
1 MAR‐ MS5 (lock‐ UZ.SMT. ADC ARS4-C (radar TRA
QUARDT ing system) 01.319.2581337 sensor) ER77062/19,
WITTE- SDHTAG3NFC UA.R.TR. DA40068
Velbert (locking system) 052.120-20
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar TRA
sensor) ER74533/19,
DA36758/14
458 Technical data

Manu‐ Model designa‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model designa‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model designa‐ Radio equip‐
fac‐ tion ment approval fac‐ tion ment approval fac‐ tion ment approval
turer number turer number turer number
Conti‐ RKE213E1 TRA Conti‐ MARS Keyless TRA Hirsch‐ 920287B (locking TRA
nental (antenna ampli‐ ER64693/18, nental (locking system) ER56005/15, mann system) ER42011/5,
Antenn fier) DA36975/14 Auto‐ DA44932/15 DA35219/14
a motive
Huf TSSRE4A (tire TRA
Conti‐ RKE223E1GNS TRA Gentex MUAHL 5 (conve‐ TRA Bao‐ pressure monitor ER57806/17,
nental (antenna ampli‐ E76442/19, nience system) ER41849/15, long sensor) DA36976/14
Antenn fier) DA65993/17 DA35176/14
a Huf TSSSG4G6 (con‐ TRA
HELLA DM4 (locking sys‐ TRA Bao‐ trol unit) (tire ER57807/17,
Conti‐ CMKG1 (locking TRA tem) ER56616/17, long pressure monitor DA36976/14
nental system) ER77964/20, DA44932/15 sensor)
Auto‐ DA0018994/0
motive 9 Hirsch‐ 920287A (locking TRA Huf TSSSG4G6b (con‐ TRA
mann system) ER52213/17, Bao‐ trol unit) (tire ER7307/19,
DA35219/14 long pressure monitor DA0086237/1
sensor) 2
 Technical data 459

Manu‐ Model designa‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model designa‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model designa‐ Radio equip‐
fac‐ tion ment approval fac‐ tion ment approval fac‐ tion ment approval
turer number turer number turer number
HUF HUF14632 (lock‐ TRA MAR‐ DC12B (locking TRA MAR‐ MS4 (locking sys‐ TRA
ing system) ER63716/18, QUARD system) ER0067828/11 QUARD tem) ER71616/19,
DA36976/14 T , T DA0018994/0
DA0018994/0 9
HUF HUF4761 (locking TRA 9
system) ER55496/17, MAR‐ MS5 (locking sys‐ TRA
DA36976/14 MAR‐ DC12K (locking TRA QUARD tem) ER80720/20,
QUARD system) ER0067829/11 T DA0018994/0
LEO‐ KK1 (locking sys‐ TRA T , 9
POLD tem) ER62622/18 DA0018994/0
KOSTAL 9 MAR‐ MK1 (locking sys‐ TRA
QUARD tem) ER64145/18,
MAR‐ DC12A (locking TRA MAR‐ MS2 (locking sys‐ TRA T DA0018994/0
QUARD system) ER53465/17, QUARD tem) ER52668/17, 9
T DA0018994/0 T DA0018994/0
9 9
460 Technical data

Manu‐ Model designa‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model designa‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model designa‐ Radio equip‐
fac‐ tion ment approval fac‐ tion ment approval fac‐ tion ment approval
turer number turer number turer number
MAR‐ MK2 (locking sys‐ TRA Schrad AG5SP4-D (tire TRA Schrad MC34MA4 (tire TRA
QUARD tem) ER64146/18, er pressure monitor ER37156/15, er pressure monitor ER37066/15,
T DA0018994/0 sensor) DA0047074/1 sensor) DA0047074/1
9 0 0
MAR‐ 3350.38 (locking TRA Schrad GG4T (tire pres‐ TRA Veon‐ 77GHz MMRV1 TRA
QUARD system) ER69280/19, er sure monitor sen‐ ER57985/17, eer (radar sensor) ER39759/15,
T 0018994/09 sor) DA0047074/1 DA0020858
0
MAR‐ MU1 (locking sys‐ TRA Veon‐ 77V12BSM (radar ER72324/19
QUARD tem) ER71833/19, Schrad DG6W2D4 (tire TRA eer sensor)
T DA0018994/0 er pressure monitor ER960528/18,
9 sensor) DA0047074/1
0
MAR‐ MU2 (locking sys‐ TRA
QUARD tem) ER81329/20,
T DA0018994/0
9
 Technical data 461

United States Vietnam

Man‐ Model Radio equipment

ufac‐ designa‐ approval number
turer tion
Manu‐ Model designa‐ Radio equip‐
fac‐ tion ment approval Bosc FR5CPCCF FCC ID: NF3-FR5CPCCF Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
turer number h (radar sen‐ facturer nation ment approval
sor) number
Veon‐ 77V12CRN (radar ER72323/19
eer sensor) Veon 77V12BSM FCC ID: WU877V12BSM Bosch FR5CPCCF 234/CVT-TT3
eer (radar sen‐ (radar sen‐
WITTE- SDHTAG3NFC TRA sor) sor)
Velbert (locking system) ER79695/20,
DA0018994/0 Continen‐ RKE213E1 C0274151118AF0
9 tal (antenna 4A2
Antenna amplifier)
Continen‐ RKE223E1GN C0007100120AF0
tal S (antenna 4A2
Antenna amplifier)
462 Technical data

Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval
number number number
Continen‐ CMKG1 (lock‐ Suntech VietNam HELLA DM4 (locking Suntech VietNam MAR‐ DC12B (lock‐ Suntech VietNam
tal Auto‐ ing system) Technology Com‐ system) Technology Com‐ QUARDT ing system) Technology Com‐
motive pany Limited pany Limited pany Limited
C0001070120AF0 B0625050419AF C0050080319AF
4A2 04A2 04A2
Continen‐ MARS Key‐ Mercedes-Benz Huf Bao‐ TSSRE4A (tire C0112200717AF0 MAR‐ DC12K (lock‐ Suntech VietNam
tal Auto‐ less (locking Vietnam Com‐ long pressure 4A2 QUARDT ing system) Technology Com‐
motive system) pany Limited monitor sen‐ pany Limited
B0748240419AF0 sor) C0049080319AF
4A2 MAR‐ DC12A (lock‐ Suntech VietNam 04A2
QUARDT ing system) Technology Com‐
pany Limited
C0048080319AF
04A2
 Technical data 463

Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval
number number number
MAR‐ MS2 (locking Suntech VietNam MAR‐ MS5 (locking Suntech VietNam MAR‐ MK2 (locking Suntech VietNam
QUARDT system) Technology Com‐ QUARDT system) Technology Com‐ QUARDT system) Technology Com‐
pany Limited pany Limited pany Limited
C0035150219AF0 C0141140520AF0 C0022180119AF0
4A2 4A2 4A2
MAR‐ MS4 (locking Suntech VietNam MAR‐ MK1 (locking Suntech VietNam MAR‐ 3350.38 Suntech VietNam
QUARDT system) Technology Com‐ QUARDT system) Technology Com‐ QUARDT (locking sys‐ Technology Com‐
pany Limited pany Limited tem) pany Limited
C0231240919AF0 C0021180119AF0 C0076150319AF0
4A2 4A2 4A2
Schrader AG5SP4 (tire C0002050119AF0
pressure 42A
monitor sen‐
sor)
464 Technical data

Eurasian Economic Union

Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
facturer nation ment approval Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ facturer nation ment approval
number facturer nation ment approval number
number
Schrader GG4T (tire C0170191017AF0 Bosch MRR1Rear —
pressure 4A2 ADC ARS4-A (radar — (radar sensor)
monitor sen‐ sensor)
sor) Bosch MRRe14FCR —
ADC ARS4-B (radar — (radar sensor)
Schrader DG6W2D4 C0078070518AF0 sensor)
(tire pressure 4A2 Bosch FR5CPCCF EAЭC N RU Д-
monitor sen‐ ADC ARS4-C (radar EAЭC N RU Д- (radar sensor) DE.PA01.B.
sor) sensor) DE.PA01.B. 77223/19
87137/19
Veoneer 77V12BSM A47/CVT-TT3 Continen‐ RKE213E1 —
(radar sen‐ Bosch FR5CPCCF — tal (antenna
sor) (radar sensor) Antenna amplifier)

Veoneer 77V12CRN A48/CVT-TT3 Bosch LRR3 (radar — Continen‐ RKE223E1GNS —

(radar sen‐ sensor) tal (antenna
sor) Antenna amplifier)
 Technical data 465

Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval
number number number
Continen‐ MARS Keyless — Huf Bao‐ TSSSG4G6 — LEOPOLD KK1 (locking —
tal Auto‐ (locking sys‐ long (tire pressure KOSTAL system)
motive tem) monitor sen‐
sor) MAR‐ DC12A (locking —
HELLA DM4 (locking — QUARDT system)
system) Huf Bao‐ TSSSG4G6b —
long (tire pressure MAR‐ DC12B (locking —
Hirsch‐ 920287A (lock‐ — monitor sen‐ QUARDT system)
mann ing system) sor) MAR‐ DC12K (locking —
Hirsch‐ 920287B (lock‐ — HUF HUF4761 (lock‐ — QUARDT system)
mann ing system) ing system) MAR‐ MS2 (locking —
Huf Bao‐ TSSRE4A (tire — HUF HUF14632 — QUARDT system)
long pressure moni‐ (locking sys‐
tor sensor) MAR‐ MS4 (locking —
tem) QUARDT system)
466 Technical data

Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine

number overview
Vehicle identification plate

Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐ Manu‐ Model desig‐ Radio equip‐
facturer nation ment approval facturer nation ment approval
number number
MAR‐ MS5 (locking — Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 —
QUARDT system) (radar sensor)
MAR‐ MK1 (locking — Veoneer 77V12BSM EAЭC N RU Д-
QUARDT system) (radar sensor) US.ЭM03.B.
00100/19
MAR‐ MK2 (locking —
QUARDT system) Veoneer 77V12CRN EAЭC N RU Д-
(radar sensor) US.ЭM03.B.
MAR‐ 3350.38 (lock‐ — 00102/19
QUARDT ing system)
WITTE- SDHTAG3NFC —
MAR‐ MU1 (locking — Velbert (locking sys‐
QUARDT system) tem)
Schrader AG5SP4-D (tire —
pressure moni‐
tor sensor)
 Technical data 467

Never exceed the maximum permissible gross

vehicle weight or the maximum gross axle
weight rating for the front or rear axle.
VIN in the engine compartment

Vehicle identification plate (USA only) Vehicle identification plate (Canada only)
1 Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight 1 Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight
2 Maximum permissible front axle load 2 Maximum permissible front axle load
3 Maximum permissible rear axle load 3 Maximum permissible rear axle load
4 Paint code 4 Paint code
1 VIN (vehicle identification number)
5 VIN (vehicle identification number) 5 VIN (vehicle identification number)
The maximum permissible gross vehicle weight
is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle
occupants, the fuel and the load. The maximum
gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight
that can be carried on one axle (front or rear
axle).
468 Technical data

Additional plates Operating fluids Operating fluids include the following:

Notes on operating fluids R Fuels
R Lubricants
& WARNING Risk of injury from operating R Coolant
fluids harmful to your health R Brake fluid
Operating fluids may be poisonous and harm‐ R Windshield washer fluid
ful to your health.
R Climate control system refrigerant
# Observe the text on the original con‐
tainers when using, storing or disposing Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz.
of operating fluids. Damage caused by the use of products that have
# Always store operating fluids sealed in not been approved is not covered by the
their original containers. Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures.
# Always keep children away from operat‐ The operating fluids approved by Mercedes-Benz
ing fluids. can be identified by the following inscriptions on
the container:
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental You can identify operating fluids approved by
1 Plate with information about emissions test‐ Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions on
ing, including confirmation of emissions pollution caused by environmentally irre‐
sponsible disposal the container:
guidelines at the U.S. federal level as well as R MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
for California # Dispose of operating fluids in an envi‐
R MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
2 VIN (vehicle identification number) ronmentally responsible manner.
3 Engine number (stamped into the crankcase)
 Technical data 469

Further information on approved operating flu‐ # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into Fuel
ids: contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Notes on fuel grades for vehicles with a gas‐
R In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for # Do not inhale fuel vapor. oline engine
Operating Fluids by entering the designation Observe the notes on operating fluids
# Keep children away from fuel.
- At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com (/ page 468).
# Keep doors and windows closed during
- In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app the refueling process. * NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
R At a qualified specialist workshop
If you or other people come into contact with Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
& WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel, observe the following: result in damage to the fuel system, the
fuel # Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with engine and the emission control system.
soap and water. # Only refuel with low-sulfur gasoline.
Fuels are highly flammable.
# If fuel comes into contact with your
# Fire, open flames, smoking and creation This fuel may contain up to 10% ethanol by
of sparks must be avoided. eyes, immediately rinse them thor‐
oughly with clean water. Seek medical volume. Your vehicle is suitable for use with
# Switch off the ignition and, if available, E10 fuel.
attention immediately.
the stationary heater, before and while Never refuel with one of the following fuels:
# If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten‐
refueling the vehicle.
tion immediately. Do not induce vomit‐ R Diesel
ing. R Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by
& WARNING Risk of injury from fuels
# Change immediately out of clothing that volume, e.g. E15, E85, E100
Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your has come into contact with fuel. R Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by
health. volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100
R Gasoline with additives containing metal
470 Technical data

If you have accidentally refueled with the * NOTE Premature wear through unleaded R At a qualified specialist workshop
wrong fuel: regular gasoline R On the https://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
# do not switch the ignition on.
Unleaded regular gasoline can cause the Notes on additives in gasoline
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. engine to wear more quickly and impair lon‐ Observe the notes on operating fluids
gevity and performance. (/ page 468).
If the available fuel is not sufficiently low in sul‐ If unleaded premium grade gasoline is
fur, this can produce unpleasant odors. unavailable and you have to refuel using * NOTE Damage from use of unsuitable
Only refuel with fuel that has at least the octane unleaded regular gasoline with 87 AKI/ additives
number specified in the information label in the 91 RON: Even small amounts of the wrong additive
fuel filler flap (/ page 205). # Only fill the fuel tank to half full with may lead to malfunctions occurring.
If you want maximum engine output: only unleaded regular gasoline and top up as # Only add cleaning additives recommen‐
refuel with premium-grade unleaded gasoline soon as possible with unleaded pre‐ ded by Mercedes-Benz to the fuel.
with an octane number of at least 91 AKI/ mium grade gasoline.
95 RON. # Do not drive at the maximum speed. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
As a temporary measure, if the recommended # Avoid sudden acceleration and engine
brand-name fuels with additives.
fuel is not available, you may also use regular speeds over 3000 rpm. In some countries, the fuel available may not
unleaded gasoline with an octane number of at have sufficient additives. Residue could build up
least 87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine output and increase fuel in the fuel injection system as a result. In this
consumption. Never refuel using gasoline with a case, in consultation with an authorized
lower octane number. Mercedes-Benz Center, mix the fuel with the
Further information on fuel is available at the fol‐ cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-
lowing locations: Benz. Observe the notes and mixing ratios indi‐
cated on the tank.
R At a gas station
 Technical data 471

Information on fuel grades for vehicles with # Only refuel using sulfur-free diesel fuel # Do not switch the ignition on.
a diesel engine that conforms to European standard # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
General notes EN 590, or an equivalent specification.
Observe the notes on operating fluids In countries without sulfur-free diesel The recommended fuel grade for your vehicle
(/ page 468). fuel, refuel using only low-sulfur diesel can be found on the information label in the fuel
fuel with a sulfur content less than filler flap (/ page 205).
& WARNING Risk of fire from fuel mixture 50 ppm.
Information on low outside temperatures
If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash Vehicle without diesel particulate filter: Refuel your vehicle with as much winter diesel
point of the fuel mixture is lower than that of # Refuel using only diesel fuel with a sul‐ fuel as possible at the beginning of winter.
pure diesel fuel. fur content less than 500 ppm. Before changing over to winter diesel fuel, the
# Never refuel using gasoline in diesel fuel tank should be empty, if possible. Keep the
# Only refuel using sulfur-free diesel fuel.
engines. fuel level low for the first refueling with winter
# Never mix gasoline with diesel fuel. Never refuel with one of the following fuels: diesel fuel, e.g. to reserve level. The fuel tank
R Gasoline can be filled as usual when next refueling.
* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel R Marine diesel Further information on fuel is available at the fol‐
lowing locations:
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could R Heating oil
R At a gas station
result in damage to the fuel system, the R Pure fatty acid methyl ester or vegetable
engine and the emission control system. oil R At a qualified specialist workshop

Vehicles with a diesel particulate filter R Paraffin or kerosene R On the https://www.mbusa.com (USA only)

If you have accidentally refueled with the

wrong fuel:
472 Technical data

Tank content and reserve fuel * NOTE Engine damage caused by an Quality and capacity of engine oil
incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi‐ MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval
Model Total capacity tives
Model Engine oil specifica‐
S 580 4MATIC 80.3 US qt # Do not use engine oils or oil filters other tions
(76.0 liters) than those which meet the specifica‐
tions necessary for the prescribed S 580 4MATIC 229.52
Of which reserve
service intervals. 229.61*
S 580 4MATIC 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) # Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in
order to achieve longer change intervals * Recommended for lowest possible fuel con‐
than prescribed. sumption (lowest SAE viscosity class in each
Engine oil case; observe possible restrictions of the
# Do not use additives. approved SAE viscosity classes).
Notes on engine oil # Have the engine oil changed after the To achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption,
Observe the notes on operating fluids prescribed intervals.
(/ page 468). it is recommended to use the engine oil specifi‐
cations marked in the table for the lowest SAE
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the viscosity class. Possible restrictions of the
oil change carried out at a qualified specialist approved SAE viscosity classes must be
workshop. observed.
The following values refer to an oil change,
including the oil filter.
Missing values were not available at time of
going to print.
 Technical data 473

Model Capacity Only use a brake fluid approved by Mercedes- * NOTE Damage caused by incorrect cool‐
Benz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval ant
S580 4MATIC 9.0 US qt (8.5 liters) 331.0.
# Only use coolant that has been pre‐
mixed with the required antifreeze pro‐
Notes on brake fluid Coolant
tection.
Observe the notes on operating fluids Notes on coolant Information on coolant is available at the fol‐
(/ page 468). Observe the notes on operating fluids lowing locations:
(/ page 468).
R In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to Operating Fluids 310.1
vapor pockets forming in the brake sys‐ & WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from
antifreeze - At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com
tem
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot - In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture
component parts in the engine compart‐ R At a qualified specialist workshop
from the air. This lowers the boiling point of
the brake fluid. If the boiling point is too low, ment, it may ignite.
vapor pockets may form in the brake system # Allow the engine to cool down before
* NOTE Overheating at high outside tem‐
when the brakes are applied hard. adding antifreeze. peratures
This causes the braking effect to be # Make sure that no antifreeze spills out
next to the filler opening. If an inappropriate coolant is used, the
impaired.
engine cooling system is not sufficiently pro‐
# Have the brake fluid renewed at the # Thoroughly clean off any antifreeze
tected against overheating and corrosion at
specified intervals. from component parts before starting high outside temperatures.
the vehicle.
# Always use coolant approved by
Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a
Mercedes-Benz.
qualified specialist workshop.
474 Technical data

# Observe the instructions in the Notes on windshield washer fluid * NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Oper‐ Observe the notes on operating fluids mixing windshield washer fluids
ating Fluids 310.1. (/ page 468). # Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB Win‐
Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified terFit with other windshield washer flu‐
& WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from
specialist workshop. ids.
windshield washer concentrate
Proportion of antifreeze concentrate in the Windshield washer concentrate is highly Do not use distilled or de-ionized water. Other‐
engine cooling system: flammable. It could ignite if it comes into wise, the fill level sensor may be triggered erro‐
R A minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection contact with hot engine component parts or neously.
down to approximately -35°F (-37°C)) the exhaust system. Recommended windshield washer fluid:
R A maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection # Make sure that no windshield washer R Above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit
down to -49°F (-45°C)) concentrate spills out next to the filler
R Below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit
Coolant capacity opening.
Missing values were not available at time of For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the informa‐
going to print. * NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting tion on the antifreeze container.
due to unsuitable windshield washer fluid Mix washer fluid with windshield washer fluid all
Model Capacity year round.
Unsuitable windshield washer fluid may dam‐
S 580 4MATIC 16.1 US qt age the plastic surface of the exterior light‐
(15.2 liters) ing. Refrigerant
# Only use windshield washer fluid which Notes on refrigerant
is also suitable for use on plastic surfa‐ Observe the notes on operating fluids
ces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB Winter‐ (/ page 468).
Fit.
 Technical data 475

* NOTE Damage due to incorrect refriger‐ erant compressor oil (PAG oil) is located on the
ant inside of the hood.

If a non-approved refrigerant is used, the cli‐

mate control system may be damaged.
# USA: use only R‑134a refrigerant.

# Canada: use only R‑1234yf refrigerant.

* NOTE Damage to the climate control

system due to incorrect refrigerant com‐
pressor oil Information label (example – Canada)
1 Hazard and service warning symbols
# Only use refrigerant compressor oil that 2 Refrigerant filling capacity
has been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Information label (example – USA/China)
1 Hazard and service warning symbols 3 Applicable standards
# Do not mix the approved refrigerant 4 PAG oil part number
compressor oil with a different refriger‐ 2 Refrigerant filling capacity
3 Applicable standards 5 GWP (global warming potential) of the refrig‐
ant compressor oil.
4 PAG oil part number erant used
Work on the climate control system may be car‐ 5 6 Refrigerant type
GWP (global warming potential) of the refrig‐
ried out only by a qualified specialist workshop. erant used Symbols 1 indicate the following:
All applicable regulations, as well as SAE stand‐ 6 Refrigerant type
ard J639, must be adhered to. R Possible dangers
R Having maintenance work carried out at a
The information label for the climate control sys‐
tem regarding the refrigerant type and the refrig‐ qualified specialist workshop
476 Technical data

Filling capacity for refrigerant and PAG oil R Optional equipment Vehicle dimensions
Missing values were not available at time of S 580 4MATIC
going to print.
Vehicle length 208.2 in
Model Refrigerant (5289 mm)
Canada: S 580 23.6 ± 0.4 oz Vehicle width including out‐ 83.0 in
4MATIC (670 ± 10 g) side mirrors (2109 mm)
USA: S 580 4MATIC 24.7 ± 0.4 oz Vehicle height 59.2 in
(700 ± 10 g) (1503 mm)
Model PAG oil Wheelbase 126.6 in
Height when opened (3216 mm)
USA, Canada: S 580 4.9 ± 0.4 oz
4MATIC (140 ± 10 g) Model 1 Height Turning radius 40.98 ft
when (12.49 m)
opened
Vehicle data S 580 4MATIC 73.0 in Weights and loads
Vehicle dimensions (1855 mm)
Please note the following for the specified vehi‐
The heights specified may vary as a result of the cle data:
following factors:
R Items of optional equipment increase the
R Tires
curb weight and reduce the payload.
R Load
Missing values were not available at time of
R Condition of the suspension
going to print.
 Technical data 477

Model Maximum roof load

S 580 4MATIC
478 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages You can hide low-priority display messages by

pressing the G back button or the left-hand
Introduction Touch Control. The display messages will then
Notes about display messages be stored in the message memory.
Display messages appear on the driver display. Rectify the cause of a display message as
Display messages with graphics are simplified in quickly as possible.
the Operator's Manual and may differ from the High-priority display messages cannot be hid‐
appearance on the driver display. The driver dis‐ den. The driver display shows these display mes‐
play shows high-priority display messages in red. sages continuously until the cause of the display
Certain display messages are accompanied by a message has been rectified.
warning tone.
Calling up saved display messages
Please act in accordance with the display mes‐
Driver display:
sages and follow the additional notes in the
4 Service 5 Message Memory: XX
Operator's Manual.
For some display messages, a symbol will also If there are no display messages, No Messages
be shown: will appear on the driver display.
R Õ Further information # Scroll through the display messages by swip‐
ing upwards or downwards on the left-hand
R ¨ Hide display message
Touch Control.
With the left-hand Touch Control, you can select # To exit the message memory: press the
the respective symbol by swiping to the left or back button G.
right. Press the Õ symbol to show further infor‐
mation on the central display. Press the ¨
symbol to hide the display message.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 479

Occupant safety
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

6
* The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 42).

& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system

Restraint System Malfunc- Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident.
tion Service Required # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

6
* The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 42).

& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system

Front Left Malfunction Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident.
Service Required (example) # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

6
* The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 42).

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the window curtain airbag
Left Window Airbag Mal- The window curtain airbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an
function Service accident.
Required (example) # Have the window curtain airbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
480 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Front Passenger Airbag Dis- * The front passenger airbag has been disabled even though an adult or a person of adult stature is on the front
abled See Operator's Man- passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system detects may be too low.
ual
& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a disabled front passenger airbag
If the front passenger airbag is disabled, the front passenger airbag will not be deployed in the event of an acci‐
dent and cannot perform its intended protective function.
A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior,
especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit.
# Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.

# Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat.
# Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 53).
# If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Front Passenger Airbag * The front passenger airbag will be enabled while the vehicle is in motion in the following situations:
Enabled See Operator's R Even when a child, a person of smaller stature or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is
Manual located on the front passenger seat
R Even when the front passenger seat is not occupied

The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 481

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

& WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is
enabled
If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is
enabled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident.
The child could be struck by the airbag.
# Ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.

NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or
SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.
# Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat.
# Check the status of automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 53).
# If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
PRE-SAFE Inoperative See * The PRE‑SAFE® functions are malfunctioning.
Operator's Manual # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

PRE-SAFE Impulse Side * The PRE‑SAFE® Impulse Side system is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered.
Inoperative See Operator's # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Manual
482 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

SmartKey
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Á
* Have SmartKey replaced.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Obtain a New Key

Á
* The SmartKey battery is discharged.
# Replace the battery (/ page 77).

Replace Key Battery

Á
* The SmartKey is currently undetected.
# Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.

# If the SmartKey is still not recognized, place it in the marked space for starting with the SmartKey
Key Not Detected (white (/ page 188).
display message)
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 483

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Á
* The SmartKey cannot be detected and may no longer be in the vehicle.
The SmartKey is no longer in the vehicle and you switch off the engine:
R You can no longer start the engine.
Key Not Detected (red dis‐ R You cannot centrally lock the vehicle.
play message)
# Ensure that the SmartKey is in the vehicle.

If the SmartKey detection function has a malfunction due to a strong radio signal source:
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.
# Place the SmartKey in the marked space for starting the engine with the SmartKey (/ page 188).

Á
* A warning tone also sounds. This message reminds you to take your SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.

Don't Forget Your Key

Place the Key in the * SmartKey detection is malfunctioning.
Marked Space See Opera- # Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.
tor's Manual
# Place the SmartKey in the marked space for starting the engine with the SmartKey (/ page 188).
484 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Lights
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

:
* The corresponding light source is defective.
# Drive on carefully.

# Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Check Left Low % LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding light appears only when all the light-emitting
Beam (example) diodes in the light are faulty.

:
* The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Malfunction See Opera-

tor’s Manual

:
* The light sensor for automatic driving lights is malfunctioning.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Automatic Headlamp Mode

Inoperative
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 485

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

:
* The active headlamps are malfunctioning.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Headlamps Inopera-

tive

:
* You are driving without low-beam headlamps.
# Turn the light switch to the L or à position.

Switch On Headlamps

:
* You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on.
# Turn the light switch to the à position.

Switch Off Lights

DIGITAL LIGHT Functions * The DIGITAL LIGHT system is malfunctioning. The lighting system will continue to work even without the functions
Limited of the DIGITAL LIGHT system.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

MULTIBEAM LED Functions * The MULTIBEAM LED system is malfunctioning. The lighting system will continue to work, but without the functions
Limited of the MULTIBEAM LED system.
486 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist * Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable.
Currently Unavailable See Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam
Operator's Manual Assist Now Available display message will appear.
# Drive on.

# Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist is available again.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist * Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning.

Inoperative # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist * Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is temporarily unavailable.

Plus Currently Unavailable Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam
See Operator's Manual Assist Plus Available Again display message will appear.
# Drive on.

# Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist Plus is available again.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist * Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is malfunctioning.

Plus Inoperative # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine.

# If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Hazard Warning Light Mal- * The hazard warning lamp switch is malfunctioning.
function # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 487

Vehicle
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The driver display is inoperative due to a failed software update.
The display message is shown every time the engine is started.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to a driver display malfunction

If the driver display has failed or malfunctioned, the function restrictions applying to safety relevant systems are
not visible.
The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired.
# Drive on carefully.

# Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and safely. Contact a qualified spe‐
cialist workshop.
If the driver display fails, you may not recognize function restrictions affecting systems relevant to safety or the
speed display, for example. The operating safety of the vehicle may be impaired (/ page 294).
# Have the vehicle checked by a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
488 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

d
* You are leaving the vehicle when it is in a ready-to-drive state.
# When you leave the vehicle, switch off the ignition, secure the vehicle against rolling away and take the Smart‐
Key with you.
Vehicle Ready to Drive # If you do not leave the vehicle, switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12 V
Switch the Ignition Off battery may discharge and it will then be possible to start the vehicle only with the aid of a second battery
Before Exiting (starting assistance).

Ù
* A power steering malfunction has occurred. Steering characteristics may be impaired as a result.
# Drive on carefully.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Steering Malfunction Drive
Carefully Service Required

Ù
* The power steering assistance is malfunctioning.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics

Steering Malfunction If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer.
Increased Physical Effort # If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.
See Operator's Manual # Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 489

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Ù
* The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is significantly impaired.

& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired

Steering Malfunction Stop If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized.
Immediately See Opera- # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
tor's Manual Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Ù
* The rear axle steering is temporarily unavailable. The turning radius may increase.
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine.

Rear Axle Steering Cur- If the display message does not disappear:
rently Malfunctioning # Drive on carefully.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Ù
* The rear axle steering is malfunctioning.
The rear axle has no steering capability.
The steering wheel may be tilted when you drive in a straight line.
Rear Axle Steering Malfunc- # Adapt your speed and drive on carefully.
tion Service Required
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
490 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Ù
* The rear axle steering is malfunctioning.
The rear axle has no steering capability.
The steering wheel may tilt considerably when you drive in a straight line.
Rear Axle Steering Malfunc- Depending on the steering wheel's tilting position, the steering wheel will also vibrate and a continuous warning
tion Stop Immediately tone will sound.

& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired

If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# When stopping, bear the enlarged vehicle width in mind.

Snow Chain Mode Maxi- * The maximum permissible speed for snow chain mode has been exceeded.
mum Speed Exceeded # Drive more slowly.

C
* At least one door is open.
# Close all doors.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 491

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

M
* The hood is open.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the hood unlocked
The hood may open and block your view.
# Never release the hood when driving.
# Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked.

# Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
# Close the hood.

N
* The trunk lid is open.

& DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the
vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.
# Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid.

# Never drive with the trunk lid open.

# Close the trunk lid.

Ambient Lighting Warning * The ambient lighting may not provide full visual warning support.
Support Inoperative # Lock the vehicle and unlock it again after a few minutes.
492 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# If the display message appears regularly, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

¥
* The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum.
# Add washer fluid (/ page 329).

Check Washer Fluid

¥
* Intensive cleaning of the windshield has been activated (/ page 167).

Intensive Cleaning Activa-

ted for 30 Seconds

Engine
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
To switch engine off, press * You have pressed the start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion.
and hold Start/Stop but- # Information about switching off the engine while driving (/ page 188).
ton for at least 3 seconds
or press 3 times.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 493

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

+
* The coolant level is too low.

* NOTE Engine damage due to insufficient coolant

Check Coolant Level See # Avoid long journeys with insufficient coolant.
Operator's Manual
# Add coolant (/ page 329).
# Have the engine cooling system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

ÿ
* The coolant is too hot.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the engine.

Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehi- & WARNING Risk of burns when opening the hood
cle Turn Engine Off
If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment, the
following situations may occur:
R You could come into contact with hot gases.
R You could come into contact with other hot, escaping operating fluids.

# Before opening the hood, allow the overheated engine to cool down.
# In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.
# Wait until the engine has cooled down.
494 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed.
# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that
the coolant temperature display remains below the red marking.

ÿ
* The fan motor is faulty.
# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that
the coolant temperature display remains below the red marking.

8
* The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.
# Refuel.

Fuel Level Low

8
* The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
# Close the fuel filler cap.

# If the fuel filler cap was already properly closed: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Fuel Filler Cap Open
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 495

Transmission
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Shift to P Only When Vehi- * It is possible to select the park position j only if the vehicle is stationary.
cle Is Stationary # To stop, depress the brake pedal.

# Shift the transmission to park position j when the vehicle is stationary.

Depress Brake to Shift * You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position j and into another transmission position.
from P # Depress the brake pedal.

# Select transmission position h, k or neutral i.

To Deselect P or N * You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position j or neutral i and into another transmission
Depress Brake and Start position.
Engine # Depress the brake pedal.

# Start the engine.

# Change the transmission position.

Depress Brake to Shift to D * You have attempted to select transmission position h or k.

or R # Depress the brake pedal.

# Select transmission position h or k.

Depress Brake to Shift to R * You have attempted to select transmission position k.

# Depress the brake pedal.

# Select transmission position k.

496 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Apply Brake To Park * A malfunction has occurred in the emergency power supply to park position j.
Service Required # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Until then, always select park position j manually before you switch off the engine.

# Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

Risk of Vehicle Rolling * The driver's door is not fully closed and transmission position h, k or neutral i is selected.
Away Driver's Door Open The vehicle may roll away.
Position P Not Selected
# Select park position j when switching off the vehicle.

Risk of Vehicle Rolling * The transmission is malfunctioning. Park position j cannot be selected.
Away Apply Brake to Park # Park the vehicle safely.

# Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away.

# On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the curb if it starts moving.

Risk of Vehicle Rolling * While the vehicle was at a standstill or driving at very low speed, neutral i was engaged with the engine running
Away N Activated Manually or the ignition switched on.
No Automatic Change to P
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to it rolling away
When the ignition is being switched off or the driver's door opened, automatic engagement of park position j
is deactivated.
The vehicle may roll away.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 497

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Be ready to brake.
# Do not leave the vehicle unattended.
# Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle is stationary.
# Engage park position j when the vehicle is stationary with the brake pedal depressed.
# To continue driving with the brake pedal depressed, select transmission position h or k.
N Automatically Activated * Neutral i was automatically engaged when the vehicle was rolling or being driven.
Please Shift to Transmis- % When you open the driver's door in neutral i, park position j will be engaged automatically.
sion Position Again
# Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a standstill.

# Engage park position j when the vehicle is stationary with the brake pedal depressed.

# To continue driving with the brake pedal depressed, select transmission position h or k.

Reversing Not Possible * The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission position k cannot be selected.
Service Required # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Transmission Malfunction * The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shifts to neutral i automatically.
Stop # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.

# Depress the brake pedal.

# Engage park position j.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

498 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Service Required Do Not * The transmission is malfunctioning. It is no longer possible to change the transmission position.
Change Transmission Posi- # If transmission position h is selected, consult a qualified specialist workshop and do not change the transmis‐
tion sion position.
# For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Stop Vehicle Leave Engine * The transmission is overheating. Pulling away may be temporarily impaired or not possible.
Running Wait Transmission # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir‐
Cooling cumstances.
# Leave the engine running.

# Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

Auxiliary Battery Malfunc- * There is a malfunction in the auxiliary battery.

tion # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Until then, always select park position j manually before you switch off the engine.

# Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 499

Brakes
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

F
* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To apply:
# Switch the ignition off and switch it back on.
(USA only) # Apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 212).

! If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
(Canada only) # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

Parking Brake See Opera- * The yellow ! indicator lamp and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp are lit. The elec‐
tor's Manual tric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To release:
# Switch the ignition off and switch it back on.

# Release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 212).

or
# Release the electric parking brake automatically (/ page 212).
If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:
# Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
500 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp is flashing.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
The electric parking brake could not be applied or released.
# Switch the ignition off and switch it back on.

To apply:
# Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 212).
To release:
# Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually.

If the electric parking brake cannot be applied or the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp
continues to flash:
# Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red F indicator lamp (USA only) or ! indicator lamp (Can‐
ada only) flashes for approximately ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It
then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
If the charge level is too low:
# Charge the 12 V battery.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 501

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

To apply:
# Apply the electric parking brake manually.

If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

To release:
# If the conditions for automatic release are fulfilled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically,
release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 212).

If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:

# Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
502 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

F
* The red F indicator lamp (USA only) or ! indicator lamp (Canada only) is flashing.
The electric parking brake is applied while you are driving:
R A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake has not been fulfilled (/ page 212).
(USA only) R You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake (/ page 213).

! #

#
Check the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake.
Release the electric parking brake manually.
(Canada only)
Please Release Parking
Brake
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 503

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

F
* The red F (USA only) or ! indicator lamp (Canada only) is lit.
You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the ignition switched off.
# Switch on the ignition.
(USA only)

!
(Canada only)
Turn On the Ignition to
Release the Parking Brake

$
* A malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function was activated.
A horn may also sound at regular intervals.
You cannot start the engine.
(USA only) # Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly until the display message disappears.

J
You can restart the engine.

(Canada only)
Brake Immediately
504 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

$
* There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level

(USA only) If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.

J
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

(Canada only) # Do not add brake fluid.

Check Brake Fluid Level

#
* The brakepads have reached the wear limit.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Check Brake Pads See

Operator's Manual
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 505

Driving systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ë
* The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is slipping or a condition for activation is not fulfilled.
# Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (/ page 220).

Off

é
* ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

ATTENTION ASSIST Inoper-

ative

é
* ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver
(/ page 221).
# If necessary, take a break.

ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a

Break!
506 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

P
* ATTENTION ASSIST has detected indicators of microsleep (/ page 221).
A warning tone will also sound.
# It is recommended that you take a break immediately.
ATTENTION ASSIST Nod- # Press the left-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.
ding Off Take a Break!

ç
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled.
# Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 226).

- - - mph

ç
* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC setting, the system will switch
to passive mode (/ page 223).

Suspended

ç
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC has deactivated automatically (/ page 226).

Off
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 507

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Active Distance Assist Cur- * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable.
rently Unavailable See The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 223).
Operator's Manual
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
# Drive on.

Active Distance Assist Inop- * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning.

erative Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Distance Assist Now * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again.
Available # Switch on Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 226).

Active Steering Assist Cur- * Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable.

rently Unavailable See The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 230).
Operator's Manual
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
# Drive on.

# Check the tire pressure if necessary.

Active Steering Assist Inop- * Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available.
erative # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
508 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Active Steering Assist Cur- * Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multiple emergency stops.
rently Unavailable Due to # Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the traffic conditions.
Multiple Emergency Stops
# Switch the ignition off and switch it back on.
Active Steering Assist is available once more.

Ø
* Your hands are not on the steering wheel. The Active Steering Assist will initiate an emergency stop (/ page 230).
# Put your hands on the steering wheel.

Information on canceling an emergency stop (/ page 233).

Beginning Emergency Stop

Ø
* Active Steering Assist has reached the system limits (/ page 230).
You have not steered independently for a considerable period of time.
# Take over the steering and drive on in accordance with the traffic conditions.

Active Emergency Stop * Active Emergency Stop Assist is temporarily unavailable.

Assist Currently Unavaila- # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
ble See Operator's Manual
Active Emergency Stop * Active Emergency Stop Assist is malfunctioning.
Assist Inoperative # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 509

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Active Lane Change Assist * Active Lane Change Assist is temporarily unavailable.
Currently Unavailable See The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 234).
Operator's Manual
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
# Drive on.

Active Lane Change Assist * Active Lane Change Assist is malfunctioning.

Inoperative # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Stop & Go Assist * Active Stop-and-Go Assist is temporarily unavailable. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist
Currently Unavailable See are still available.
Operator's Manual The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 223).
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
# Drive on.

Active Stop & Go Assist * Active Stop-and-Go Assist is malfunctioning.

Inoperative See Operator's Active Stop-and-Go Assist has been deactivated. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are
Manual still available.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Traffic Sign Assist Cur- * Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable.

rently Unavailable See Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
Operator's Manual
# Drive on.
510 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Traffic Sign Assist Inopera- * Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning.
tive # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine.

# If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Blind Spot Assist * Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable.
Currently Unavailable See The system limits have been reached (/ page 247).
Operator's Manual
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
# Drive on.

or
# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart
the engine.
Active Blind Spot Assist * Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.
Inoperative # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Lane Keeping Assist * Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable.
Currently Unavailable See The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 250).
Operator's Manual
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
# Drive on.

Active Lane Keeping Assist * Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning.

Inoperative # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 511

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

¸
* Front and corner radar sensors and/or lidar (hereafter "sensors") are malfunctioning. Possible causes:
R The sensors are dirty
R Heavy rain or snow

ð R Extended country driving without other traffic, e.g. in the desert

Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system,

ç
steering and drive system will continue to function normally.
# Drive on.

Ä
Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be avail‐
able again and the corresponding symbols will be switched off.
If the display message does not disappear:
Currently Unavailable # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
Radar Dirty # Clean all sensor covers from outside (/ page 215).

# Restart the engine.

512 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

á
* The view of the multifunction camera is restricted. Possible causes:
R Dirt on the windshield in the field of vision of the multifunction camera
R Heavy rain, snow or fog

ð R Condensation on the inside of the windshield: in certain weather conditions, condensation can form on the
inside of the windshield during cold times of year in particular.

Ä
% This condensation on the windshield is removed automatically within a short time with the aid of a heater. The
restriction is temporary.
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system,

¬ steering and drive system will continue to function normally.

# Drive on.

Ô Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be avail‐
able again and the corresponding symbols will be switched off.
If the display message does not disappear:
Currently Unavailable Cam- # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
era Dirty # Clean the windshield, especially in the position of the multifunction camera (/ page 215).

# Restart the engine.

Driver Camera View Cur- * The visibility of the driver camera is reduced. Possible causes:
rently Restricted See Oper- R Objects or stickers are projecting into the driver camera’s field of vision.
ator's Manual
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 513

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

R The driver camera is dirty.
# Keep the driver camera's field of vision free.
# Clean the driver camera if necessary. Please comply with the notes on caring for the interior (/ page 334).
Change the steering * The driver camera cannot capture your line of sight.
wheel/ seat position until # Change the steering wheel and seat position until six dots are visible on the top edge of the screen.
6 dots are visible on the
upper edge of the screen.
Driver Camera Inoperative * The driver camera is malfunctioning.
See Operator's Manual # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

ä
* AIRMATIC is functioning only to a limited extent. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.

* NOTE The tires on the front axle or the fenders could be damaged by large steering movements
Malfunction Drive at Max. # Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds.
50 mph # If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions, and
set a higher vehicle level if possible.
# Drive in a manner appropriate for the current level, but do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
514 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

¢
* AIRMATIC is functioning only to a limited extent. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.
# The current level is too high. Do not drive at speeds greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Maximum Speed 12mph

É
* You have pulled away despite the vehicle level being too low.
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level.
STOP Vehicle Level Too # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
Low
If the display message does not disappear and a warning tone also sounds, AIRMATIC is malfunctioning:
# Do not drive at speeds greater than 50 mph (80 km/h) and consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* NOTE The tires on the front axle or the fenders could be damaged by large steering movements
# Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds.
# If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions, and
set a higher vehicle level if possible.
# Set a higher vehicle level (/ page 254).
Depending on the malfunction, the vehicle will be raised.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 515

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

É
* The vehicle level is too low. The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level.
# Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

Vehicle Rising Please Wait

Active Parking Assist Limi- * Active Parking Assist’s maneuvering assistance is temporarily unavailable or only partially available.
ted Availability of Maneu- # Clean all sensors of the parking and camera system (/ page 333).
vering Assistance See
# If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Operator's Manual
PARKTRONIC Inoperative * Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning.
See Operator's Manual Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
# Continue driving while paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings.

or
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine.

# If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Parking Assist and * Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning.
PARKTRONIC Inoperative Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
See Operator's Manual
# Continue driving while paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings.

or
516 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine.
# If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!
* ABS and ESP® are temporarily unavailable.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be temporarily unavailable.
The brake system will continue to operate normally. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can

÷ increase.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning

Currently Unavailable See
Operator's Manual The wheels may lock during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization.
The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi‐
tion, other driving safety systems are switched off.
# Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph
(30 km/h).
# If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive care‐
fully.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 517

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!
* ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
The brake system will continue to operate normally. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can

÷ increase.

& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning

Inoperative See Operator's
Manual The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization.
The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi‐
tion, other driving safety systems are switched off.
# Drive on carefully.

# Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

÷
* ESP® is temporarily unavailable.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.

Currently Unavailable See & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning®

Operator's Manual
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems
are switched off.
518 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph
(30 km/h).
# If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive care‐
fully.

÷
* ESP® is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
The brake system will continue to operate normally. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
Inoperative See Operator's increase.
Manual
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems
are switched off.
# Drive on carefully.

# Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 519

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

T
* EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.

!
& WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning
The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization.

÷
The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi‐
tion, other driving safety systems are switched off.
# Drive on carefully.

Inoperative See Operator's # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Manual
Active Brake Assist Func- * Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package or Blind Spot Assist: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic func‐
tions Currently Limited See tion, Evasive Steering Assist or PRE‑SAFE® PLUS are temporarily unavailable or only partially available.
Operator's Manual The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 236).
# Drive on.
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
# If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart
the engine.
520 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Active Brake Assist Func- * Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering
tions Limited See Opera- Assist or PRE‑SAFE® PLUS are temporarily unavailable or only partially available.
tor's Manual # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Mercedes me connect
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Device Detected at Diag- * The vehicle functions for fault detection are restricted.
nostics Connection See At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system is malfunctioning.
Operator's Manual
# Observe the notes on the diagnostics connection (/ page 31).

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

G
* At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system or of the SOS emergency call system is
malfunctioning.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Inoperative
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 521

Battery
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

#
* The 12 V on-board electrical system is malfunctioning.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

12 V On-board Electrical
System Service Required

#
* The 12 V battery is no longer being charged and the charge level is too low.

* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving

Stop Vehicle See Opera- # Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
tor's Manual # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir‐
cumstances.
# Switch off the engine.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
522 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

#
* The engine is off and the charge level of the 12 V battery is too low.
# Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.

Switch on the engine to To charge the 12 V battery:

charge the 12 V battery. # Leave the engine running for a few minutes, or drive an extended distance.

#
* The 12 V battery charge level is too low.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir‐
cumstances.
Stop the vehicle. Leave the # Leave the engine running.
engine running to charge # If the display goes out: you can drive on.
the 12 V battery.
# If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Û
* The 48 V on-board electrical system is malfunctioning.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.

# Switch off the engine.

Stop Vehicle See Opera- # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
tor's Manual
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 523

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Û
* The 48 V on-board electrical system has function restrictions. The availability of convenience functions may be
restricted.
# Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

48 V Battery See Opera-

tor's Manual

Ý
* The 48 V battery is discharged. You have switched on the ignition while the 12 V battery was being charged with a
suitable charger or while another vehicle was providing starting assistance.
The discharged 48 V battery is charged automatically via the voltage converter. After a few minutes, the driver dis‐
Please Wait Charging 48 V play will show the Engine Can Now Be Started display message.
Battery… # Start the engine.

# Drive the vehicle for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery after disconnecting the charger
from the vehicle.

If the Engine Can Now Be Started display message does not appear after a few minutes:
# Try to start the engine again.
# If the engine does not start, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Cannot Start Engine See * The charge level of the 48 V battery is too low. You can no longer start the engine.
Operator's Manual # Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.
524 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Connect a suitable charger approved for Mercedes-Benz with sufficient charge output to the jump-start connec‐
tion point of the 12 V battery (/ page 348).
The 48 V battery is charged via the voltage converter in the vehicle.
Engine Can Now Be Started * The 48 V battery has been charged automatically via the voltage converter.
# Start the engine and drive the vehicle for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery.

Tire pressure monitor

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Tire Press. Monitor Cur- * There is interference from a powerful radio signal source As a result, no signals from the tire pressure sensors are
rently Unavailable being received. The tire pressure monitoring system is temporarily unavailable.
The tire pressure monitoring system will restart automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified.
# Drive on.

Tire Press. Monitor Inopera- * The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.
tive
& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning
The tire pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tires.
Tires with insufficient tire pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking.
# Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 525

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Tire Pressure Monitor Inop- * The wheels installed do not have suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitoring system is deactivated.
erative No Wheel Sensors # Install wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.

h
* There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or more wheels. No pressure value is displayed for the affec‐
ted tire.
# Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Wheel Sensor(s) Missing

h
* The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.
The wheel position is displayed. A warning tone will also sound.

Check Tires & WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure
R The tires can burst.
R The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly.
R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle.
# Observe the recommended tire pressures.

# Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.

# Check the tire pressure (/ page 360) and the tires.
526 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h
* The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the difference in tire pressure between the individual
wheels is too great.
# Check the tire pressure and add air, if necessary.

Please Correct Tire Pres- # When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure monitor (/ page 364).
sure

h
* The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position will be displayed.

& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a flat tire

Warning Tire Malfunction R The tires can overheat and be damaged.
R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle.
# Do not drive with a flat tire.
# Do not exceed the maximum permissible driving distance in emergency mode and the maximum permissi‐
ble speed with a flat MOExtended tire.
# Observe the notes on flat tires.

Notes in the event of a flat tire (/ page 338).

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
# Check the tires.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 527

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Tires Overheated * At least one tire is overheating. The affected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the
tires are displayed in yellow.

& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tires

Overheated tires can burst.
# Reduce speed so that the tires cool down.

Decrease Speed * At least one tire is overheating. The affected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the
tires are displayed in yellow.

& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tires

Overheated tires can burst.
# Reduce speed so that the tires cool down.
528 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Engine oil
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

5
* The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil

Check Engine Oil Level # Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.
(Add 1 quart)
# When next refueling, add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil (/ page 327).
Notes on engine oil (/ page 472).

5
* The engine oil level is too high.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with excess engine oil

Engine Oil Level Reduce Oil # Avoid long journeys with excess engine oil.
Level
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately and have the engine oil level reduced.

5
* The engine oil level is too low.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil

Engine Oil Level Low Stop # Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.
Vehicle Turn Engine Off
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 529

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir‐
cumstances.
# Switch off the engine.
# Add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil (/ page 327).
# Check the engine oil level.
Notes on engine oil (/ page 472).

5
* The oil pressure is too low.

* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient oil pressure

Engine Oil Pressure Stop # Avoid driving with insufficient oil pressure.
Vehicle Switch Off Engine
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir‐
cumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

5
* The electrical connection to the oil level sensor has been interrupted or the oil level sensor is faulty.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Engine Oil Level Cannot Be

Measured
530 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning and indicator lamps Driver display with driver camera ; Check Engine (/ page 535)
Overview of indicator and warning lamps # Electrical malfunction (/ page 535)
8 Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap loca‐
Some systems will perform a self-test when the tion indicator (/ page 535)
ignition is switched on. Some indicator and
warning lamps may briefly light up or flash. This F USA: electric parking brake (red)
behavior is non-critical. These indicator and (/ page 539)
warning lamps indicate a malfunction only if they ! Canada: electric parking brake (red)
light up or flash after the engine has been star‐ (/ page 539)
ted or during a journey. ! Electric parking brake (yellow)
Driver display (/ page 539)
Indicator and warning lamps: é USA: Recuperative Brake System
6 Restraint system (/ page 531) (/ page 539)
ü Seat belt (/ page 531) J Canada: brakes (yellow)
(/ page 539)
Ù Power steering (yellow)
(/ page 533) $ USA: brakes (red) (/ page 539)
Ù Power steering (red) (/ page 533) J Canada: brakes (red) (/ page 539)
Ù Rear axle steering (yellow) L Distance warning (/ page 542)
(/ page 533) ä AIRMATIC (/ page 542)
Ù Rear axle steering (red) ! ABS (/ page 543)
(/ page 533) ÷ ESP® (/ page 543)
ÿ Coolant temperature (/ page 535)
å ESP® OFF (/ page 543)
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 531

H Mercedes me connect
(/ page 546)
h Tire pressure monitoring system
(/ page 546)
T Parking lamps (/ page 154)
L Low beam (/ page 154)
K High beam (/ page 155)
#! Turn signal lights (/ page 155)
R Rear fog lamp (/ page 154)

Occupant safety
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

6
* The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 42).

& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system

Restraint system warning
lamp Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident.
# Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully.
# Comply with the messages on the driver display.
532 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

ü
* The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.
# Fasten your seat belt (/ page 46).

Seat belt warning lamp There are objects on the front passenger seat.
flashes # Remove the objects from the front passenger seat.

ü
* The red seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds once the engine has started.
In addition, an intermittent warning tone may sound.
The red seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts.
Seat belt warning lamp # Fasten your seat belt (/ page 46).
lights up
If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the red seat belt warning lamp may remain lit.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 533

Vehicle
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Ù
* The yellow power steering warning lamp is lit when the engine is running.
The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.
# Note the messages on the driver display.

Power steering warning

lamp (yellow)

Ù
* The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.

& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired

Power steering warning
lamp (red) If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Note the messages on the driver display.

534 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Ù
* The yellow rear axle steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The rear axle steering is malfunctioning.
# Note the messages on the driver display.

Rear axle steering warning

lamp (yellow)

Ù
* The red rear axle steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The rear axle steering is malfunctioning.

& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired

Rear axle steering warning
lamp (red) If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Note the messages on the driver display.

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 535

Engine
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ÿ
* The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
Possible causes:
R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning
Coolant warning lamp (red) R The coolant level is too low
R The air supply to the radiator is obstructed
R The radiator fan is faulty
R The engine coolant pump is faulty

If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded the maximum permissible temperature.

& WARNING Risk of burns when opening the hood

If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment, the
following situations may occur:
R You could come into contact with hot gases.
R You could come into contact with other hot, escaping operating fluids.

# Before opening the hood, allow the overheated engine to cool down.
# In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.
536 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the engine. Do not continue
driving under any circumstances.
# Note the messages on the driver display.
If the coolant temperature display is at the lower end of the temperature scale:
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
If the coolant temperature display is at the upper end of the temperature scale:
# Exit the vehicle and keep a safe distance from it until the engine has cooled down.

# Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed.

# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the
coolant temperature display remains below the red area.

ÿ
* The yellow coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
Possible causes:
R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning
Coolant warning lamp (yel‐ R The charge air, transmission oil or battery cooling is faulty
low)
R The radiator shutters are blocked or defective

# Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 537

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

;
* The yellow Check Engine warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system.
The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency mode.
Engine diagnosis warning In some states, legal requirements stipulate that you must immediately consult a qualified specialist workshop as
lamp soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up.
# Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.

#
* The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit.
There is a fault in the electrics.
# Note the messages on the driver's display.

Electrical malfunction warn‐

ing lamp

8
* The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while you are driving.
There has been pressure loss in the fuel system. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leak‐
ing.
Fuel reserve warning lamp # Close the fuel filler cap.

flashes
If the fuel filler cap has already been closed correctly:
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
538 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

8
* The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.
# Refuel.

Fuel reserve warning lamp

lights up
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 539

Brakes
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

F
* The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or is lit.
The yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp also lights up in the event of a malfunction.
# Note the messages on the driver's display.

Electric parking brake indi‐

cator lamp (red) (USA only)

!
Electric parking brake indi‐
cator lamp (red) (Canada
only)

!
The electric parking brake
(yellow) indicator lamp
540 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

é
*The yellow é warning lamp (USA only) or the yellow J brakes warning lamp (Canada only) is lit while the
engine is running.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction

Recuperative Brake System
warning lamp (USA only) If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired.

J # Drive on carefully.

# Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Brakes warning lamp (yel‐ The hill start assist may be malfunctioning.
low) (Canada only) # Adjust your speed and drive on carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front.
# If the driver's display shows a display message, observe it.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 541

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

$
* The red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
Possible causes:
R The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected.
Brake warning lamp (USA R There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
only)

J
# Note the messages on the driver's display.

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning
Brake system warning lamp If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking
(Canada only) characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations.
# Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level

If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Do not add brake fluid.

542 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Driving systems
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

L
* The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion.
The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected.
If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed.
Warning lamp for distance # Be prepared to brake immediately.
warning function # Increase the distance.

Function of Active Brake Assist (/ page 236).

ä
* The yellow AIRMATIC warning lamp is lit.
A malfunction has occurred in AIRMATIC.
# Note the messages on the driver display.

Suspension warning lamp

(yellow)

ä
* The red AIRMATIC warning lamp is lit.
A malfunction has occurred in AIRMATIC.

* NOTE The vehicle's driving characteristics will have changed significantly.

Suspension warning lamp
(red) # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Note the messages on the driver display.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 543

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Ä
* The Active Brake Assist yellow warning lamp is lit.
The system is restricted or unavailable.
# Note the messages on the driver display.

Active Brake Assist warning

lamp

Driving safety systems

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!
* The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ABS is malfunctioning.
If there is an additional warning tone, EBD is malfunctioning.
ABS warning lamp Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
# Note the messages on the driver's display.

& WARNING There is a risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning

The wheels may lock during braking.
544 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi‐
tion, other driving safety systems are switched off.
# Drive on carefully.

# Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

÷
* The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
One or more wheels has reached its grip limit (/ page 218).
# Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

ESP® warning lamp flashes

÷
* The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ESP® is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
ESP® warning lamp lights # Comply with the messages on the driver's display.
up
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems
are switched off.
# Drive on carefully.

# Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 545

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

å
* The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ESP® is deactivated.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be inoperative.
ESP® OFF warning lamp
& WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP® deactivated
ESP® does not act to stabilize the vehicle. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited.
# Drive on carefully.

# Deactivate ESP® only for as long as the situation requires.

If ESP® cannot be activated, ESP® is malfunctioning.

# Have ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Observe the notes on deactivating ESP® (/ page 218).

546 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Mercedes me connect
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

H
*At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system or of the SOS emergency call system is mal‐
functioning.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Mercedes me connect
warning lamp

Tire pressure monitor

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h
*The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and
then remains lit.
The tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
Tire pressure monitoring & WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning
system warning lamp
flashes The tire pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tires.
Tires with insufficient tire pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking.
# Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 547

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h
* The yellow tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.
The tire pressure monitoring system has detected tire pressure loss in at least one of the tires.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure

Tire pressure monitoring
system warning lamp lights R The tires can burst.
up R The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly.
R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle.
# Observe the recommended tire pressures.
# Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.

# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.

# Check the tire pressure and the tires.
548 Index

1, 2, 3 ... Acceleration Steering wheel buttons......................... 226

see Kickdown Storing a speed..................................... 226
3D driver display Switching off/deactivating.................... 226
Function/notes..................................... 273 Accident and Breakdown Manage‐
ment Switching on/activating........................ 226
3D instrument cluster Mercedes me connect........................... 307 System limitations................................. 223
see 3D driver display Active Emergency Stop Assist................. 233
Acoustic locking verification signal
4MATIC Activating/deactivating........................... 76 Active Lane Change Assist
Function................................................ 205 Activating/deactivating......................... 236
Activating a commuter route................... 300
12 V battery Function................................................ 234
see Battery (vehicle) Active Blind Spot Assist
Activating/deactivating......................... 250 Active Lane Keeping Assist
48 V on-board electrical system Brake application................................... 249 Activating/deactivating......................... 252
see EQ Boost technology Function................................................ 247 Activating/deactivating the warning..... 253
115 V socket System limitations................................. 247 Function................................................ 250
see Socket (115 V) Setting the sensitivity............................ 253
Active Brake Assist System limits......................................... 250
360° Camera Function/notes..................................... 236
Opening the camera cover (rear view Setting................................................... 240 Active light function.................................. 157
camera)................................................. 261 Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Parking Assist
Selecting a view..................................... 261 Active Emergency Stop Assist............... 233 Cross traffic warning............................. 270
Active Lane Change Assist.................... 234 Drive Away Assist.................................. 269
A Calling up a speed................................. 226 Exiting a parking space......................... 269
A/C function Function................................................ 223 Function................................................ 265
Activating/deactivating (MBUX mul‐ Increasing/decreasing speed................ 226 Maneuvering brake function.................. 271
timedia system)..................................... 177 Requirements........................................ 226 Parking.................................................. 267
Route-based speed adaptation.............. 228 System limitations................................. 265
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)............... 217
 Index 549

Active Service System PLUS Additives (engine oil) Air suspension

see ASSYST PLUS see Additives see AIRMATIC
Active Speed Limit Assist Additives (fuel) Air vents
Display.................................................. 227 see Fuel Adjusting (front).................................... 184
Function................................................ 227 ADS PLUS damping system Adjusting (rear)...................................... 184
Active Steering Assist see AIRMATIC Glove box.............................................. 185
Activating/deactivating......................... 232 Adverse weather light............................... 158 Air vents
Active Emergency Stop Assist............... 233 see Air vents
Active Lane Change Assist.................... 234 After-sales service center
see ASSYST PLUS Air-conditioning system
Function................................................ 230 see Climate control
System limits......................................... 230 Air bag
Reduced protection................................. 51 Air-recirculation mode.............................. 178
Active Traffic Jam Assist
Function................................................ 230 Air conditioning menu Air-water duct
Calling up.............................................. 177 Keeping free.......................................... 330
Adaptive cruise control
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Air distribution Airbag
Setting................................................... 175 Activation................................................ 42
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Belt airbag............................................... 46
Function................................................. 161 Setting (MBUX multimedia system)....... 177
Cushionbag............................................. 48
Switching on/off................................... 162 Air freshener system Front airbag (driver, front passenger)...... 48
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus see Perfume atomizer Installation locations............................... 48
Activating/deactivating......................... 163 Air inlet Knee airbag............................................. 48
Function................................................ 162 see Air-water duct Overview................................................. 48
Additives Air pressure PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp....... 53
Engine oil............................................... 472 see Tire pressure Protection................................................ 49
Fuel....................................................... 470 Rear airbag.............................................. 48
550 Index

REAR SEAT AIR BAG indicator lamps....... 58 Anti-lock braking system ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
Side airbag.............................................. 48 see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Activating/deactivating the interior
Window curtain airbag............................. 48 Anti-skid chains motion sensor....................................... 104
Airflow see Snow chains Arming/disarming the tow-away
Setting................................................... 175 alarm..................................................... 103
Anti-theft protection Deactivating the alarm.......................... 103
AIRMATIC Immobilizer............................................ 102 Function................................................ 102
Setting................................................... 254 Anti-theft protection Function of the interior motion sensor.. 103
Suspension........................................... 253 see ATA (anti-theft alarm system) The tow-away alarm function................. 103
Alarm Anticipatory occupant protection ATTENTION ASSIST
see Panic alarm see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu‐ Setting................................................... 223
Alarm system pant protection) System limits......................................... 221
see ATA (anti-theft alarm system) see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory ATTENTION ASSIST with microsleep
All-wheel drive occupant protection plus) detection
see 4MATIC Apple CarPlay® Function................................................ 221
Alternative route see Smartphone integration Attention assistant
see Route Assistance systems see ATTENTION ASSIST with micro‐
Ambient lighting see Driving safety system sleep detection
Setting (MBUX multimedia system)....... 165 ASSYST PLUS Augmented reality
Android Auto Battery disconnection periods.............. 325 Function on the Head-up Display........... 276
see Smartphone integration Displaying the service due date............. 324 Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Animals Function/notes..................................... 324 see Qualified specialist workshop
Pets in the vehicle.................................... 74 Regular maintenance work.................... 324 Authorized workshop
Special service requirements................ 324 see Qualified specialist workshop
 Index 551

Automatic distance control Automatic transmission Charging (Remote Online)..................... 189

see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC DIRECT SELECT lever............................. 201 Notes.................................................... 344
Automatic driving lights........................... 155 Drive program display............................ 199 Notes (starting assistance and
Drive programs...................................... 198 charging)............................................... 346
Automatic engine start (ECO start/ DYNAMIC SELECT button...................... 198 Replacing.............................................. 349
stop function)............................................ 195 Engaging drive position......................... 203 Starting assistance................................ 348
Automatic engine stop (ECO start/ Engaging neutral................................... 202 Belt
stop function)............................................ 195 Engaging park position.......................... 202 see Seat belt
Automatic front passenger front air‐ Engaging reverse gear........................... 202
Kickdown.............................................. 204 Belt airbag
bag shutoff Activation................................................ 42
Function of the automatic front Manual gearshifting............................... 203
Steering wheel paddle shifters.............. 203 Function/notes....................................... 46
passenger front airbag shutoff................. 51
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp....... 53 Transmission position display................ 201 Blind
Transmission positions.......................... 201 see Roller sunblind
Automatic front passenger front air‐
bag shutoff Blower
B see Climate control
see Automatic front passenger front
airbag shutoff Bag hook.................................................... 140 Brake Assist System
Automatic lateral support adjustment BAS (Brake Assist System)....................... 217 see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Setting................................................... 122 Battery Brake fluid
Automatic measures after an accident..... 60 see Battery (vehicle) Notes..................................................... 473
Automatic mirror folding function Battery (SmartKey) Brake force distribution
Activating/deactivating......................... 173 Replacing................................................. 77 EBD (electronic brake force distribu‐
tion)....................................................... 219
Automatic seat adjustment Battery (vehicle)
Setting................................................... 121 Charging................................................ 348
552 Index

Brakes C Paintwork.............................................. 332

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)............. 217 Plastic trim............................................ 334
Active Brake Assist................................ 236 Calls Power washer........................................ 331
BAS (Brake Assist System)..................... 217 Mercedes me........................................ 309 Real wood/trim elements..................... 334
Driving tips............................................ 192 Camera Rear view camera.................................. 333
EBD (electronic brake force distribu‐ see Driver camera Seat belt................................................ 334
tion)....................................................... 219 see Rear view camera Seat cover............................................. 334
HOLD function...................................... 220 see Surround view camera Sensors................................................. 333
Limited braking effect (salt-treated Car key Steering wheel...................................... 334
roads).................................................... 192 see SmartKey Surround view camera.......................... 333
New/replaced brakepads/brake Tailpipes................................................ 333
Car wash
discs...................................................... 190 Washing by hand................................... 331
see Care
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle....... 190 Wheels/rims......................................... 333
Post-collision brake................................. 60 Car wash (care)......................................... 330 Windows................................................ 333
Braking assistance Car-to-X-Communication Wiper blades......................................... 333
see BAS (Brake Assist System) Displaying hazard warnings................... 302 Carpet (Care)............................................. 334
Breakdown Care Change of address...................................... 28
Changing a wheel.................................. 380 Air-water duct........................................ 330
Change of ownership.................................. 28
Overview of the help functions................ 22 Automatic car wash............................... 330
Roadside Assistance............................... 28 Carpet................................................... 334 Changing a wheel
Tow-starting.......................................... 353 Decorative foil....................................... 332 Preparation........................................... 380
Towing away.......................................... 351 Display.................................................. 334 Raising the vehicle................................. 381
Transporting the vehicle........................ 352 EASY-PACK trunk box............................ 334 Changing a wheel
Breakdown Exterior lighting..................................... 333 see Emergency spare wheel
see Flat tire Headliner............................................... 334
 Index 553

Changing gears Securing on the rear seat........................ 69 Calling up the air conditioning menu..... 177
Manually................................................ 203 Top Tether............................................... 68 Control panel for 3-zone automatic
Changing hub caps.................................... 381 Children climate control....................................... 175
Avoiding dangers in the vehicle................ 61 Defrosting the windshield...................... 175
Charging Filling capacity for PAG oil..................... 476
Battery (vehicle).................................... 348 Basic instructions.................................... 60
Special seat belt retractor....................... 65 Front air vents....................................... 184
Mobile phone (wireless)......................... 149 Glove box air vent.................................. 185
USB port................................................ 146 Chock Immediate pre-entry climate control..... 183
Chauffeur mode Storage location.................................... 380 Information on the windshield heater.... 180
Information............................................ 113 Chock Inserting/removing the flacon (fra‐
Moving the front passenger seat into see Chock grance system)...................................... 179
the chauffeur position............................ 114 City lighting............................................... 158 Ionization............................................... 179
Moving the front passenger seat into Note....................................................... 175
the normal position................................ 116 Cleaning
Pre-entry climate control at depar‐
see Care
Child safety lock ture time................................................ 181
Rear doors............................................... 72 Climate control Rear air vents........................................ 184
Rear side windows................................... 73 Activating/deactivating......................... 176 Rear operating unit................................ 176
Activating/deactivating (rear operat‐ Refrigerant............................................. 474
Child seat ing unit)................................................. 177 Refrigerant filling capacity..................... 476
Attaching (notes)..................................... 64 Activating/deactivating the A/C Removing condensation from the
Basic instructions.................................... 60 function (MBUX multimedia system)...... 177 windows................................................ 178
Front-passenger seat (notes)................... 70 Activating/deactivating the synchro‐ Residual heat......................................... 178
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) (installing).............. 66 nization function (MBUX multimedia Residual heat (rear operating unit)........ 179
Notes on risks and dangers..................... 61 system).................................................. 178 Setting (MBUX multimedia system)....... 177
Rear airbag.............................................. 69 Air-recirculation mode........................... 178 Setting the air distribution..................... 175
Securing on the front passenger seat...... 71 Automatic control.................................. 177 Setting the airflow................................. 175
554 Index

Setting the fragrance system................. 179 Coolant (engine) Data acquisition

Setting the temperature........................ 175 Capacity................................................. 474 Vehicle.................................................... 35
Switching the rear window heater Check level............................................ 329 Data protection rights
on/off.................................................... 175 Notes..................................................... 473 Data storage............................................ 38
Ventilating the vehicle (convenience Cooling
opening).................................................. 93 Data storage
see Climate control Data protection rights............................. 38
Cockpit Copyrights Electronic control units........................... 35
Overview................................................... 6 License.................................................... 40 Online services........................................ 37
Coffee cup symbol Trademarks............................................. 40 Vehicle.................................................... 35
see ATTENTION ASSIST with micro‐ Cornering light........................................... 157 Daytime running lamp mode
sleep detection see Daytime running lights
Crosswind Assist
Collision detection (parked vehicle) Function/notes...................................... 219 Daytime running lights
Information............................................ 213 Switching on/off................................... 164
Cup holder
Combination switch.................................. 155 Switching the cooling/heating func‐ Deactivating the alarm (ATA).................... 103
Consumption indicator tion on/off............................................ 144 Dealership
Calling up.............................................. 200 Cushionbag.................................................. 48 see Qualified specialist workshop
Content sharing menu Customer Assistance Center (CAC)........... 33 Declaration of conformity
Overview............................................... 281 Wireless vehicle components.................. 30
Customer Relations Department............... 33
Control elements Decorative foil (cleaning instructions).... 332
Touch-sensitive........................................ 27 D Definitions (tires and loading).................. 374
Convenience closing................................... 93 Dashboard Destination entry
Convenience opening.................................. 93 see Cockpit Entering a POI or address...................... 299
 Index 555

Detecting inattentiveness Display (care)............................................. 334 é ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a

see ATTENTION ASSIST Display (driver display) Break!.................................................... 505
Diagnostics connection.............................. 31 Messages in the driver display.............. 279 : Automatic Headlamp Mode
Diesel Display (MBUX multimedia system) Inoperative............................................ 484
Low outside temperatures..................... 471 Home screen......................................... 281
Notes..................................................... 471 Operating the touchscreen.................... 282 Ø Beginning Emergency Stop........... 508
DIGITAL LIGHT Settings................................................. 278 $ Brake Immediately....................... 503
Assistance functions............................. 159 Display message $ Check Brake Fluid Level............... 504
Cornering light....................................... 157 Calling up (driver display)...................... 478 # Check Brake Pads See Opera‐
Intelligent Light System......................... 157 Notes..................................................... 478 tor's Manual.......................................... 504
Switching the Intelligent Light Sys‐ Display messages
tem on/off............................................ 160 + Check Coolant Level See Oper‐
ç - - - mph....................................... 506
Topographical compensation................. 158 ator's Manual........................................ 493
# 12 V On-board Electrical Sys‐
Digital Operator's Manual........................... 24 5 Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1
tem Service Required............................ 521
Dinghy towing quart).................................................... 528
see Tow-bar system Û 48 V Battery See Operator's : Check Left Low Beam (exam‐
DIRECT SELECT lever Manual.................................................. 523
ple)........................................................ 484
Engaging drive position......................... 203 : Active Headlamps Inoperative...... 485
h Check Tires.................................. 525
Engaging neutral................................... 202 é ATTENTION ASSIST Inoperative.... 505
Engaging park position.......................... 202 ¥ Check Washer Fluid..................... 492
P ATTENTION ASSIST Nodding
Engaging park position automatically.... 202 ÿ Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle
Engaging reverse gear........................... 202 Off Take a Break!................................... 506
Turn Engine Off..................................... 493
Function................................................ 201
556 Index

á Currently Unavailable Camera 8 Fuel Level Low.............................. 494 ¢ Maximum Speed 12mph............... 514
Dirty....................................................... 512 ! Inoperative See Operator's Á Obtain a New Key......................... 482
¸ Currently Unavailable Radar Manual................................................... 517 ç Off................................................ 506
Dirty....................................................... 511 ÷ Inoperative See Operator's ë Off................................................ 505
! Currently Unavailable See Manual................................................... 518 F Parking Brake See Operator's
Operator's Manual................................. 516 T Inoperative See Operator's Manual.................................................. 499
÷ Currently Unavailable See Manual................................................... 519 h Please Correct Tire Pressure........ 526
Operator's Manual................................. 517 G Inoperative................................... 520 F Please Release Parking Brake...... 502
Á Don't Forget Your Key.................. 483 ¥ Intensive Cleaning Activated Ý Please Wait Charging 48 V Bat‐
5 Engine Oil Level Cannot Be for 30 Seconds...................................... 492 tery…..................................................... 523
Measured.............................................. 529 Á Key Not Detected (red display Ù Rear Axle Steering Currently
5 Engine Oil Level Low Stop Vehi‐ message)............................................... 483 Malfunctioning...................................... 489
cle Turn Engine Off................................ 528 Á Key Not Detected (white dis‐ Ù Rear Axle Steering Malfunction
5 Engine Oil Level Reduce Oil play message)....................................... 482 Service Required................................... 489
Level...................................................... 528 6 Left Window Airbag Malfunc‐ Ù Rear Axle Steering Malfunction
5 Engine Oil Pressure Stop Vehi‐ tion Service Required (example)............ 479 Stop Immediately.................................. 490
cle Switch Off Engine............................ 529 ä Malfunction Drive at Max. 50 Á Replace Key Battery..................... 482
6 Front Left Malfunction Service mph....................................................... 513 6 Restraint System Malfunction
Required (example)................................ 479 : Malfunction See Operator’s Service Required................................... 479
8 Fuel Filler Cap Open..................... 494 Manual.................................................. 484
 Index 557

Ù Steering Malfunction Drive F Turn On the Ignition to Release Active Emergency Stop Assist Cur‐
Carefully Service Required.................... 488 the Parking Brake.................................. 503 rently Unavailable See Operator's
Ù Steering Malfunction Increased d Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch Manual.................................................. 508
Physical Effort See Operator's Manual.. 488 the Ignition Off Before Exiting............... 488 Active Emergency Stop Assist Inop‐
Ù Steering Malfunction Stop É Vehicle Rising Please Wait............ 515 erative................................................... 508
Immediately See Operator's Manual..... 489 h Warning Tire Malfunction............. 526 Active Lane Change Assist Currently
# Stop the vehicle. Leave the h Wheel Sensor(s) Missing.............. 525 Unavailable See Operator's Manual...... 509
engine running to charge the 12 V Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Active Lane Change Assist Inopera‐
battery................................................... 522 Unavailable See Operator's Manual....... 510 tive........................................................ 509
É STOP Vehicle Level Too Low......... 514 Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative....... 510 Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently
# Stop Vehicle See Operator's Active Brake Assist Functions Cur‐ Unavailable See Operator's Manual....... 510
Manual.................................................. 521 rently Limited See Operator's Manual.... 519 Active Lane Keeping Assist Inopera‐
Û Stop Vehicle See Operator's Active Brake Assist Functions Limi‐ tive......................................................... 510
Manual.................................................. 522 ted See Operator's Manual................... 520 Active Parking Assist and
ç Suspended................................... 506 Active Distance Assist Currently PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Opera‐
: Switch Off Lights.......................... 485 Unavailable See Operator's Manual....... 507 tor's Manual........................................... 515
: Switch On Headlamps.................. 485 Active Distance Assist Inoperative........ 507 Active Parking Assist Limited Availa‐
# Switch on the engine to charge Active Distance Assist Now Available.... 507 bility of Maneuvering Assistance See
the 12 V battery.................................... 522 Operator's Manual................................. 515
558 Index

Active Steering Assist Currently Apply Brake To Park Service Required... 496 Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See
Unavailable Due to Multiple Emer‐ Auxiliary Battery Malfunction................ 498 Operator's Manual................................ 480
gency Stops........................................... 508 Cannot Start Engine See Operator's Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See
Active Steering Assist Currently Manual.................................................. 523 Operator's Manual................................ 480
Unavailable See Operator's Manual....... 507 Change the steering wheel/ seat Hazard Warning Light Malfunction........ 486
Active Steering Assist Inoperative......... 507 position until 6 dots are visible on MULTIBEAM LED Functions Limited...... 485
Active Stop & Go Assist Currently the upper edge of the screen................. 513 N Automatically Activated Please
Unavailable See Operator's Manual...... 509 Decrease Speed.................................... 527 Shift to Transmission Position Again..... 497
Active Stop & Go Assist Inoperative Depress Brake to Shift from P............... 495 PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Opera‐
See Operator's Manual.......................... 509 Depress Brake to Shift to D or R........... 495 tor's Manual........................................... 515
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Depress Brake to Shift to R................... 495 Place the Key in the Marked Space
Unavailable See Operator's Manual...... 486 Device Detected at Diagnostics Con‐ See Operator's Manual.......................... 483
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative.. 486 nection See Operator's Manual............. 520 PRE-SAFE Impulse Side Inoperative
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Cur‐ DIGITAL LIGHT Functions Limited.......... 485 See Operator's Manual.......................... 481
rently Unavailable See Operator's Driver Camera Inoperative See Oper‐ PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Opera‐
Manual.................................................. 486 ator's Manual......................................... 513 tor's Manual.......................................... 481
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Inop‐ Driver Camera View Currently Reversing Not Possible Service
erative................................................... 486 Restricted See Operator's Manual......... 512 Required................................................ 497
Ambient Lighting Warning Support Engine Can Now Be Started.................. 524 Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away Apply
Inoperative............................................ 491 Brake to Park......................................... 496
 Index 559

Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away Driver's To Deselect P or N Depress Brake DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)..... 370
Door Open Position P Not Selected....... 496 and Start Engine.................................... 495 Drawbar
Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away N Acti‐ To switch engine off, press and hold see Tow-bar system
vated Manually No Automatic Start/Stop button for at least 3 sec‐ Drinking and driving.................................. 192
Change to P........................................... 496 onds or press 3 times........................... 492 Drive Away Assist...................................... 269
Service Required Do Not Change Traffic Sign Assist Currently Unavail‐ Drive position
Transmission Position............................ 498 able See Operator's Manual.................. 509 Inserting................................................ 203
Shift to P Only When Vehicle Is Sta‐ Traffic Sign Assist Inoperative................ 510 Drive program display............................... 199
tionary................................................... 495 Transmission Malfunction Stop............. 497 Drive programs
see DYNAMIC SELECT
Snow Chain Mode Maximum Speed Distance control
Driver camera
Exceeded............................................... 490 see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Activating/deactivating......................... 289
Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running DISTRONIC Overview............................................... 289
Wait Transmission Cooling.................... 498 see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Driver display
Tire Press. Monitor Currently Door 48 V on-board electrical system............ 278
Child safety lock (rear doors)................... 72 Displaying the service due date............. 324
Unavailable............................................ 524 Locking/unlocking (emergency key)....... 83 EQ Boost technology............................. 278
Tire Press. Monitor Inoperative.............. 524 Opening (from inside).............................. 80 Function/notes..................................... 273
Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative No Power closing function............................ 82 Notes on menus.................................... 274
Wheel Sensors...................................... 525 Unlocking (from inside)........................... 80 Operating.............................................. 273
Tires Overheated................................... 527 Door control panel...................................... 18 Overview of displays.............................. 279
Door control panel (rear passenger Driver display with driver camera.............. 12
compartment).............................................. 20
560 Index

Driver's display see AIRMATIC Drive programs...................................... 198

Indicator/warning lamps....................... 530 see ATTENTION ASSIST with micro‐ Function................................................ 198
Driver's seat sleep detection Operating (DYNAMIC SELECT switch).... 199
see Seat see Driving safety system Selecting the drive program.................. 199
see HOLD function
Driving safety system see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC E
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)............. 217 see Rear view camera
Active Brake Assist................................ 236 E10............................................................. 469
see Surround view camera
BAS (Brake Assist System)..................... 217 see Traffic Sign Assist Easy entry feature
Cameras................................................ 215 Function/notes..................................... 127
EBD (electronic brake force distribu‐ Driving tips Setting................................................... 128
tion)....................................................... 219 Drinking and driving.............................. 192
General driving tips............................... 192 Easy exit feature
ESP® Crosswind Assist.......................... 219 Function/notes..................................... 127
Overview................................................ 216 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle....... 190
Optimized acceleration.......................... 191 Setting................................................... 128
Radar and ultrasonic sensors................ 215
Responsibility........................................ 215 Drowsiness detection EASY-PACK trunk box
STEER CONTROL................................... 219 see ATTENTION ASSIST with micro‐ Adjusting the height to any position...... 140
sleep detection Care...................................................... 334
Driving system Installing/removing............................... 142
see Active Blind Spot Assist Dynamic handling control system
see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) EBD (electronic brake force distribu‐
see Active Emergency Stop Assist tion)
DYNAMIC SELECT Function/notes...................................... 219
see Active Lane Change Assist Configuring drive program I................... 200
see Active Lane Keeping Assist Displaying engine data.......................... 200 ECO Assist
see Active Parking Assist Displaying vehicle data.......................... 200 Function/notes...................................... 197
see Active Speed Limit Assist Drive program display............................ 199
see Active Steering Assist
 Index 561

ECO display Emergency engine start........................... 353 Engine oil

Function................................................ 197 Emergency key Additives................................................ 472
ECO start/stop function Locking/unlocking the doors.................. 83 Capacity................................................ 472
Automatic engine start.......................... 195 Checking the oil level with the driver
Emergency operation mode display................................................... 327
Automatic engine stop........................... 195 Starting the vehicle............................... 188
Method of operation.............................. 195 MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval................. 472
Switching off/on................................... 196 Emergency release Quality................................................... 472
Trunk lid (from inside).............................. 90 Topping up............................................. 327
Electric parking brake
Applying automatically........................... 211 Emergency spare wheel EQ boost
Applying/releasing manually................. 212 Notes.................................................... 386 Qualified specialist workshop.................. 32
Emergency braking................................ 213 Emergency Tensioning Devices EQ Boost technology
Releasing automatically......................... 212 Activation................................................ 42 Notes..................................................... 278
Electronic Stability Program Engine Operating safety...................................... 28
see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ECO start/stop function........................ 195 ESC (Electronic Stability Control)
Emergency Engine number...................................... 466 see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
First-aid kit (soft sided)......................... 338 Starting (emergency operation mode)... 188
Starting (Remote Online)....................... 189 ESP®
Overview of the help functions................ 22 Crosswind Assist................................... 219
Reflective safety vest............................. 337 Starting (start/stop button).................. 188
Starting assistance................................ 348 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Removing the warning triangle.............. 338
Switching off (start/stop button).......... 207 Activating/deactivating......................... 219
Setting up the warning triangle............. 338
Engine data Function/notes...................................... 218
Emergency braking.................................... 213
Displaying.............................................. 200 Exterior lighting
Emergency braking Care...................................................... 333
Engine number.......................................... 466
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
562 Index

Exterior lighting TIREFIT kit............................................. 340 Fuel

see Lights Flat towing Additives............................................... 470
Exterior mirrors see Tow-bar system Diesel.................................................... 471
Automatic mirror folding function.......... 173 E10........................................................ 469
Floor mats.................................................. 152 Fuel reserve........................................... 472
Automatic preselection (MBUX Inte‐
rior Assistant)........................................ 288 Fog light (extended range)....................... 158 Gasoline................................................ 469
Folding in/out........................................ 171 Foil covering Low outside temperatures..................... 471
Operating the memory function............. 129 Radar and ultrasonic sensors................ 215 Quality (diesel)....................................... 471
Parking position..................................... 172 Quality (gasoline).................................. 469
Folding table.............................................. 136 Refueling............................................... 205
Setting................................................... 171
Footrest Sulfur content....................................... 469
F Rear passenger seat.............................. 115 Tank content.......................................... 472
Fatigue detection Fragrance Function seat
see ATTENTION ASSIST with micro‐ see Perfume atomizer see Door control panel
sleep detection Free software.............................................. 40 Function seat (rear passenger com‐
Favorites Frequencies partment)
Adding................................................... 291 Two-way radio....................................... 388 see Seat (rear passenger compartment)
First-aid kit (soft sided)............................ 338 Front airbag (driver, front passenger)....... 48 Fuses
Before replacing a fuse.......................... 354
Flacon Front passenger seat
Dashboard fuse box.............................. 356
Inserting/removing............................... 179 Adjusting from the driver's seat............ 108 Fuse assignment diagram..................... 354
Flat tire Adjusting from the rear passenger Fuse box in the engine compartment.... 354
Changing a wheel.................................. 380 compartment........................................ 109 Fuse box in the front-passenger foot‐
MOExtended tires.................................. 339 Front passenger seat well........................................................ 357
Notes.................................................... 338 see Seat Fuse box in the trunk............................. 357
 Index 563

Notes.................................................... 354 Handling characteristics (unusual)......... 358 Head-up Display

Fuses HANDS-FREE ACCESS................................. 88 Augmented reality................................. 276
see Fuses Function................................................ 275
Handset Operating.............................................. 277
Stowage compartment (rear Operating (with augmented reality)....... 278
G passenger compartment)...................... 137 Operating the memory function............. 129
Garage door opener Hazard warning lights............................... 156 Switching on/off................................... 278
Clearing the memory............................. 211
Programming buttons............................ 209 Hazardous substances Headlamps
Resolving problems............................... 210 Information.............................................. 28 see Automatic driving lights
Synchronizing the rolling code............... 210 Head restraint Headliner (care)......................................... 334
Garage door openers Activating/deactivating neck heating.... 119 Heating
Opening/closing the door...................... 211 Attaching/removing the additional see Climate control
cushion (front)....................................... 118
Gasoline..................................................... 469 Attaching/removing the additional Help call
Gearshift recommendation...................... 204 cushion (rear passenger compart‐ see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
Genuine parts.............................................. 25 ment)..................................................... 119 High beam
Front (luxury head restraint).................. 117 Activating/deactivating......................... 155
Glide mode................................................. 204 Rear (folding into position/folding High beam
Glove box back mechanically)................................ 120 see Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Air vent.................................................. 185 Rear passenger compartment
(adjusting).............................................. 118 High-beam flasher..................................... 155
H Rear passenger compartment (lower‐ High-beam headlamps
Handbrake ing from the front).................................. 118 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus............. 162
see Electric parking brake Rear passenger compartment (luxury Highway mode........................................... 158
head restraint)....................................... 119
564 Index

Hill start assist.......................................... 221 Indicator/warning lamp Overview................................................ 157

HOLD function Overview............................................... 530 Topographical compensation................. 158
Function/notes..................................... 220 Individual drive program Interior lighting
Switching on/off................................... 220 Configuring........................................... 200 Adjusting............................................... 164
Home screen (central display) Selecting............................................... 199 Ambient lighting.................................... 165
Overview............................................... 281 Inside rearview mirror Reading lamp......................................... 164
Anti-glare mode (automatic).................. 172 Switch-off delay time............................. 167
Hood
Opening/closing................................... 325 Inside rearview mirror Interior motion sensor
see Outside mirrors Activating/deactivating......................... 104
I Function................................................ 103
Inspection
Identification plate see ASSYST PLUS Internet radio
Engine................................................... 466 see TuneIn
Instrument cluster
Refrigerant............................................. 474 see Driver display Ionization
Vehicle.................................................. 466 Activating/deactivating (MBUX mul‐
Intelligent Light System timedia system)..................................... 179
Ignition Activating/deactivating......................... 160
Switching on (Start/Stop button).......... 187 Active light function............................... 157 iPhone®
Ignition key Adaptive Highbeam Assist..................... 161 see Smartphone integration
see SmartKey Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus............. 162
Adverse weather light............................ 158 J
Immediate pre-entry climate control...... 183
Assistance functions............................. 159 Jack
Immobilizer................................................ 102 City lighting........................................... 158 Storage location.................................... 380
Indicator lamp Cornering light....................................... 157 Jump-start connection
see Indicator/warning lamp Fog light (extended range)..................... 158
General notes........................................ 346
Highway mode....................................... 158
 Index 565

K LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat Intelligent Light System......................... 157

anchor Light switch........................................... 154
KEYLESS-GO Installing.................................................. 66 Low-beam headlamps........................... 154
Deactivating............................................ 77 Parking lights......................................... 154
Locking/unlocking the vehicle................ 80 Level control system
see AIRMATIC Rear fog lamp........................................ 154
Problem................................................... 82 Responsibility for lighting systems........ 154
Unlocking setting..................................... 76 Light switch Setting the exterior lighting switch-
Kickdown Overview............................................... 154 off delay time........................................ 164
Using..................................................... 204 Lighting Standing lights....................................... 154
Knee airbag.................................................. 48 see Interior lighting Switching the Intelligent Light Sys‐
see Lights tem on/off............................................ 160
L Lights Switching the locator lighting on/off..... 164
Active light function............................... 157 Turn signal light..................................... 155
Labeling (tires)
see Tire labeling Adaptive Highbeam Assist..................... 161 Limited Warranty
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus............. 162 Vehicle.................................................... 35
Lamp Adverse weather light............................ 158
see Interior lighting Live Traffic Information
Automatic driving lights......................... 155 Switching the traffic information dis‐
Lamps (driver's display) City lighting........................................... 158 play on.................................................. 302
see Indicator/warning lamp Combination switch............................... 155
Cornering light....................................... 157 Load index (tires)...................................... 372
Lane detection (automatic)
see Active Lane Keeping Assist Fog light (extended range)..................... 158 Load-bearing capacity (tires)................... 372
Hazard warning lights............................ 156 Loading
Lane Keeping Assist High beam............................................. 155
see Active Lane Keeping Assist Bag hook............................................... 140
High-beam flasher................................. 155 Definitions............................................. 374
Highway mode....................................... 158 Notes..................................................... 133
566 Index

Roof luggage rack.................................. 143 M Setting the map scale............................ 302

Loading guidelines.................................... 133 MAGIC VISION CONTROL Massage program
Loading information table........................ 365 Windshield wipers................................. 170 Overview............................................... 122
Resetting the settings............................ 123
Loads Maintenance
Securing................................................ 133 Vehicle.................................................... 28 Massage programs
Selecting the front seats....................... 123
Locator lighting Maintenance
Activating/deactivating......................... 164 see ASSYST PLUS Massage settings
Resetting............................................... 123
Locking/unlocking Malfunction
Activating/deactivating the auto‐ Restraint system..................................... 42 Maximum load rating................................ 371
matic locking feature............................... 82 Malfunction message Maximum permissible load
Emergency key........................................ 83 see Display message Calculation example.............................. 367
KEYLESS-GO........................................... 80 Determining.......................................... 366
Maneuvering assistance
Unlocking/opening the doors from Maximum tire pressure............................ 371
the inside................................................ 80 Activating/deactivating......................... 272
Cross traffic warning............................. 270 MBUX Interior Assistant
Low-beam headlamps Drive Away Assist.................................. 269 Anticipatory exit warning....................... 286
Switching on/off................................... 154 Automatic preselection of the out‐
Maneuvering brake function.................... 271
Lubricant additives side mirror............................................. 288
see Additives Maneuvering brake function Switching the reading light for the
see Protection against collision driver and front passenger on/off
Luggage
Net hooks.............................................. 137 Map contact-free........................................... 287
Securing................................................ 133 Displaying online map contents............ 302 Switching the search light for the
Displaying weather information............. 302 driver on/off......................................... 287
Moving.................................................. 302
Selecting the map orientation............... 302
 Index 567

MBUX Interior Assistant (multimedia system) Unlocking the trunk lid............................ 90 Operating the front passenger seat
Calling up favorites with the V pose...... 288 Media and rear seats....................................... 132
Operating a function with the favor‐ Overview of the functions and sym‐ Menus (driver display)
ites pose............................................... 288 bols........................................................ 317 Notes..................................................... 274
Overview............................................... 284
Medical aids................................................. 33 Mercedes me app
MBUX multimedia system Information............................................ 312
Activating/deactivating snow chain Memory function
mode..................................................... 359 Function................................................ 128 Mercedes me calls
Activating/deactivating standby mode.. 215 Head-up Display — Calling up stored Arranging a service appointment........... 310
Collision detection (parked vehicle)....... 213 settings................................................. 129 Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Configuring display settings.................. 278 Head-up Display — Storing settings....... 129 Center................................................... 309
Configuring drive program I................... 200 Operating.............................................. 129 Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Driver camera........................................ 289 Outside mirrors — Calling up stored Center after automatic accident or
Home screen......................................... 281 settings................................................. 129 breakdown detection............................. 310
Notes.................................................... 280 Outside mirrors — Storing settings........ 129 Information............................................ 309
Operating the touchscreen.................... 282 Seat — Calling up stored settings........... 129 Making a call via the overhead con‐
Overview............................................... 280 Seat — Storing settings.......................... 129 trol panel............................................... 309
Setting route-based speed adaptation.. 230 Steering wheel — Calling up saved Transferred data..................................... 311
Setting the footwell temperature........... 178 settings................................................. 129 Mercedes me connect
Setting the rear climate control............. 178 Steering wheel — Saving settings........... 129 Accident and Breakdown Manage‐
MBUX Voice Assistant Memory function in the rear ment...................................................... 307
Function................................................ 283 passenger compartment Information............................................ 307
Voice prompting.................................... 283 Function................................................ 130 Transferred data.................................... 308
Operating rear seats.............................. 131 Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
Mechanical key
Inserting/removing................................. 77 Automatic emergency call..................... 315
568 Index

Information............................................ 314 Coupling the steering wheel heater O

Information on data transfer.................. 316 to the seat heating................................ 127
Manual emergency call.......................... 315 Enabling/disabling the rear airbag.......... 58 Occupant safety
Overview................................................ 314 see Airbag
Multimedia system see Automatic front passenger front
Message (driver display) see MBUX Interior Assistant (multi‐ airbag shutoff
see Display message media system) see Automatic measures after an accident
Message memory...................................... 478 see MBUX multimedia system see Child seat
Mirrors see Pets in the vehicle
N see Post-collision brake
see Exterior mirrors
Navigation see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu‐
Mobile phone Notes..................................................... 297 pant protection)
Wireless charging (rear passenger Overview............................................... 298
compartment)........................................ 151 see PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side
Switching on......................................... 298 see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory
Mobile phone Navigation occupant protection plus)
see Smartphone integration see Destination entry see Rear airbag
see Telephone see Map see Restraint system
Model series see Route see Seat belt
see Vehicle identification plate Neutral Oil
MOExtended tires..................................... 339 Inserting................................................ 202 see Engine oil
MULTIBEAM LED Nodding off On-board diagnostics interface
Intelligent Light System......................... 157 see ATTENTION ASSIST with micro‐ see Diagnostics connection
Multimedia system sleep detection Online services
Collision detection (parked vehicle)....... 213 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle......... 190 Data storage............................................ 37
 Index 569

Open-source software................................ 40 Outside mirrors Parking aid

Opening the trunk lid using your foot Anti-glare mode (automatic).................. 172 see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
HANDS-FREE ACCESS............................. 88 Overhead control panel Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Operating fluids Overview.................................................. 16 Activating.............................................. 264
Additives (fuel)...................................... 470 Adjusting warning tones........................ 265
Brake fluid............................................. 473 P Function................................................. 261
Coolant (engine).................................... 473 Paint code.................................................. 466 Switching off......................................... 264
Engine oil............................................... 472 System limitations................................. 261
Paintwork (cleaning instructions)........... 332
Fuel (diesel)........................................... 471 Parking assistance systems
Fuel (gasoline)....................................... 469 Panel heating see Active Parking Assist
Notes.................................................... 468 Setting................................................... 124
Parking brake
Refrigerant (air conditioning system)..... 474 Panic alarm see Electric parking brake
Windshield washer fluid......................... 474 Activating/deactivating........................... 76
Parking for an extended period................ 214
Operating safety Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
48 V on-board electrical system.............. 28 panel Parking lights............................................. 154
Declaration of conformity (wireless see Sliding sunroof Parking position
vehicle components)............................... 30 Parcel net hooks........................................ 137 Exterior mirrors..................................... 172
EQ Boost technology............................... 28 Storing the position of the front-
Information.............................................. 28 Park position passenger outside mirror using
Inserting................................................ 202 reverse gear........................................... 173
Operator's Manual Selecting automatically......................... 202
Vehicle equipment................................... 26 PASSENGER AIR BAG status display
Parking see Automatic front passenger front
Operator's Manual (digital)......................... 24 see Electric parking brake airbag shutoff
Optimized acceleration
Activating............................................... 191
570 Index

Payload Power washer (care)................................. 331 see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory

Calculation example.............................. 367 Pre-entry climate control (immediate).... 183 occupant protection plus)
Determining the maximum.................... 366 Profile
Pre-entry climate control at depar‐
Perfume ture time Notes.................................................... 290
see Perfume atomizer Function................................................. 181 Program
Perfume atomizer Setting................................................... 182 see DYNAMIC SELECT
Inserting/removing the flacon............... 179 Switching on/off................................... 182 Protecting the environment
Setting................................................... 179 PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant Notes....................................................... 25
Perfume vial protection) Protection against collision...................... 271
see Perfume atomizer Function.................................................. 58
Protection against collision
Period out of use PRE-SAFE® Sound................................... 58 see Drive Away Assist
Activating/deactivating standby mode.. 215 Reversing measures................................ 59
Standby mode function.......................... 214 Pulling away
PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side see Driving tips
Permitted towing methods...................... 350 Activation................................................ 42
Pets in the vehicle....................................... 74 Function.................................................. 59 Q
Plastic trim (Care)..................................... 334 PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occu‐ QR code
pant protection plus) Rescue card............................................ 35
Post-collision brake..................................... 60
Function.................................................. 59
Power closing function Reversing measures................................ 59 Qualified specialist workshop................... 32
Door........................................................ 82 Preventative occupant protection sys‐
Trunk lid.................................................. 85 R
tem
Power supply see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu‐ Radar and ultrasonic sensors
Switching on (Start/Stop button).......... 187 pant protection) Damage................................................. 215
 Index 571

Radio Rear fog lamp Refrigerator box

Overview of the functions and sym‐ Switching on/off................................... 155 Removing/installing.............................. 148
bols........................................................ 319 Rear passenger compartment seat Stowage compartment.......................... 149
Radio operating permits........................... 389 Seats..................................................... 110 Using..................................................... 147
Rain-closing feature REAR SEAT AIR BAG status display Refueling
Sliding sunroof........................................ 98 see Rear airbag Refueling the vehicle............................. 205
Reading lamp Rear view camera Remote Online
see Interior lighting Activating using GPS (surround view Charging the starter battery.................. 189
camera)................................................. 261 Cooling/heating the vehicle interior...... 189
Reading light Starting the vehicle............................... 189
Switching on/off with hand move‐ Care...................................................... 333
ments.................................................... 287 Function........................................ 255, 257 Reporting safety defects............................ 34
Opening the camera cover (360° Rescue card................................................. 35
Real wood (Care)....................................... 334 Camera)................................................. 261
Rear airbag Setting (surround view camera)............. 261 Reserve
Activating/deactivating........................... 58 Fuel....................................................... 472
Rear view camera
Points to remember when the rear see Surround view camera Residual heat
seat is occupied...................................... 56 Rear operating unit................................ 179
REAR SEAT AIR BAG indicator lamps....... 58 Rear window
Roller sunblind....................................... 100 Restraint system
Rear axle steering..................................... 195 Basic instructions for children................. 60
Rear window heater.................................. 175 Function in an accident........................... 42
Rear climate control
Setting (MBUX multimedia system)....... 178 Reflective safety vest............................... 337 Functionality............................................ 41
Refrigerant (air conditioning system) Malfunction............................................. 42
Rear doors (child safety lock).................... 72 Protection................................................ 41
Notes..................................................... 474
Reduced protection................................. 41
572 Index

Self-test................................................... 41 Route guidance with augmented real‐ Adjusting the front passenger seat
Warning lamp........................................... 41 ity from the rear passenger compart‐
Reverse gear Activating.............................................. 300 ment...................................................... 109
Inserting................................................ 202 Displaying street names and house Automatic seat adjustment.................... 121
numbers................................................ 300 Configuring the settings......................... 121
Rims (care)................................................. 333 Correct driver's seat position................ 105
Route-based speed adaptation
Roadside Assistance (breakdown)............ 28 Function................................................ 228 Massage program overview................... 122
Roll away protection Setting................................................... 230 Operating the memory function............. 129
see HOLD function Panel heating......................................... 124
Run-flat characteristics Rear passenger compartment footrest.. 115
Roller sunblind MOExtended tires.................................. 339 Resetting the settings............................ 123
Rear window.......................................... 100 Setting automatic lateral support
Side windows (electric)......................... 100 S adjustment............................................ 122
Sliding sunroof........................................ 95 Safety systems Setting options........................................ 18
Roof load.................................................... 476 see Driving safety system Setting the fully reclined position........... 112
Roof luggage rack Satellite radio Workout program overview.................... 122
Loading................................................. 143 Logging in.............................................. 322 Seat
Securing................................................ 143 Setting music and sport alerts.............. 322 see Chauffeur mode
Route Search light see Front passenger seat
Activating a commuter route................. 300 Switching on/off with hand move‐ Seat (rear passenger compartment)
Calculating............................................ 300 ments.................................................... 287 Setting options........................................ 20
Selecting a type.................................... 300 Seat Seat belt
Selecting an alternative route............... 300 Adjusting (electrically)........................... 105 Care...................................................... 334
Adjusting a reclining rear seat................ 111 Protection................................................ 43
 Index 573

Seat belt adjustment Selecting a gear Side windows

Activating/deactivating........................... 47 see Changing gears Child safety lock in the rear
Function.................................................. 47 Selector lever passenger compartment......................... 73
Seat belt warning see DIRECT SELECT lever Closing using the SmartKey.................... 93
see Seat belts Convenience closing............................... 93
Self-test Convenience opening.............................. 93
Seat belts Automatic front passenger front air‐ Opening with the SmartKey..................... 93
Activating/deactivating seat belt bag shutoff.............................................. 53 Opening/closing...................................... 91
adjustment.............................................. 47 Sensors (care)........................................... 333 Problem................................................... 94
Adjusting the height................................ 46 Roller sunblind (electric)........................ 100
Belt airbag............................................... 46 Service center
Fastening................................................. 46 see Qualified specialist workshop Size designation (tires)............................. 372
Reduced protection................................. 44 Service interval display Sliding sunroof
Releasing................................................. 47 see ASSYST PLUS Automatic features.................................. 98
Seat belt adjustment (function)............... 47 Setting the footwell temperature Closing.................................................... 95
Warning lamp.......................................... 47 Setting................................................... 178 Closing using the SmartKey.................... 93
Seat cover (Care)....................................... 334 Setting the map scale Opening................................................... 95
Opening with the SmartKey..................... 93
Seat heating see Map
Problem................................................... 98
Activating/deactivating......................... 123 Shift paddles Rain-closing feature................................. 98
Seat ventilation see Steering wheel paddle shifters
SmartKey
Activating/deactivating......................... 125 Shifting gears Acoustic locking verification signal.......... 76
Seats Gearshift recommendation................... 204 Battery.................................................... 77
Rear passenger compartment Side airbag................................................... 48 Deactivating functions............................. 77
(adjusting electrically)............................ 110 Energy consumption................................ 77
Features.................................................. 75
574 Index

Key ring attachment................................ 77 Sound menu Starting assistance

Mechanical key........................................ 77 Functions overview............................... 323 see Jump-start connection
Overview................................................. 75 Spare wheel Starting the engine
Panic alarm.............................................. 76 see Emergency spare wheel see Vehicle
Problem................................................... 79
Unlocking setting..................................... 76 Special seat belt retractor.......................... 65 Starting-off aid
Specialist workshop.................................... 32 see Hill start assist
Smartphone
see Smartphone integration Speed index (tires).................................... 372 STEER CONTROL
see Telephone Function/notes...................................... 219
Standby mode
Smartphone integration Activating/deactivating......................... 215 Steering
Overview................................................ 313 Function................................................. 214 Rear axle steering.................................. 195
Snow chain mode Standing lights.......................................... 154 Steering wheel
Activating/deactivating......................... 359 Adjusting (electrically)........................... 125
Start-off assist Care...................................................... 334
Snow chains.............................................. 359 see Optimized acceleration Operating the memory function............. 129
Socket (12 V) Start/stop button Steering wheel heater............................ 126
Rear passenger compartment............... 144 Parking the vehicle................................ 207 Steering wheel heater
Socket (115 V) Starting the vehicle............................... 188 Coupling to seat heating........................ 127
Rear passenger compartment............... 145 Switching on the power supply or Switching on/off................................... 126
ignition.................................................. 187
Software update Steering wheel paddle shifters................ 203
System updates..................................... 294 Start/stop function
see ECO start/stop function Storage areas
Sound see Storage space
PRE-SAFE® Sound................................... 58 Starter battery
Charging (Remote Online)..................... 189 Storage compartments
Wheels and tires.................................... 358 see Storage space
 Index 575

Storage space Suspension Telephone

Armrest................................................. 135 see AIRMATIC Connecting a mobile phone (Passkey)... 306
Center console...................................... 135 Suspension level (AIRMATIC) Connecting a mobile phone (Secure
Door...................................................... 135 Setting................................................... 254 Simple Pairing)...................................... 306
Glove box............................................... 135 Functions in the telephone menu.......... 307
USB ports.............................................. 135 Switch-off delay time Notes.................................................... 304
Exterior.................................................. 164 Operating modes................................... 306
Stowage compartment Interior................................................... 167
Handset (rear passenger compart‐ Telephone menu overview..................... 306
ment)..................................................... 137 Synchronization function Wireless charging (mobile phone in
Parcel net hooks.................................... 137 Activating/deactivating (MBUX mul‐ the rear passenger compartment)......... 151
timedia system)..................................... 178 Telephony operating modes
Sulfur content........................................... 469
System settings Bluetooth® Telephony............................ 306
Surround View Overview of the system settings
see Surround view camera Temperature............................................... 175
menu..................................................... 294
Surround view camera Temperature grade.................................... 369
Activating using GPS (rear view cam‐ T Through-loading feature
era)........................................................ 261 Tailpipes (care).......................................... 333 Locking.................................................. 139
Button.................................................... 261 Through-loading feature in the rear
Care...................................................... 333 Tank content
Fuel....................................................... 472 passenger compartment
Function................................................ 257 Opening................................................. 138
Setting (rear view camera)..................... 261 Reserve (fuel)........................................ 472
Technical data TIN (Tire Identification Number).............. 370
Suspension
Setting the suspension level (AIR‐ Information............................................ 387 Tire and Loading Information placard..... 365
MATIC).................................................. 254 Radio operating permits........................ 389 Tire characteristics................................... 372
576 Index

Tire inflation compressor Restarting the tire pressure monitor‐ Using..................................................... 340
see TIREFIT kit ing system............................................. 364 Tires
Tire information table............................... 365 Tire pressure monitoring system Characteristics...................................... 372
(function)............................................... 363 Checking............................................... 358
Tire labeling Tire pressure table................................. 361
Characteristics...................................... 372 Checking the tire pressure (manually)... 362
TIREFIT kit............................................. 340 Checking the tire pressure (tire pres‐
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN).... 370
Load index............................................. 372 Tire pressure monitor sure monitoring system)........................ 364
Load-bearing capacity........................... 372 Checking the tire pressure.................... 364 Definitions............................................. 374
Maximum tire load................................. 371 Checking the tire temperature.............. 364 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN).... 370
Maximum tire pressure.......................... 371 Function................................................ 363 Flat tire.................................................. 338
Overview............................................... 369 Restarting.............................................. 364 Installing................................................ 384
Speed rating.......................................... 372 Tire pressure table.................................... 361 Load index............................................. 372
Temperature grade................................ 369 Load-bearing capacity........................... 372
Tire Quality Grading.................................. 369 Maximum tire load................................. 371
Tire Quality Grading............................... 369
Tire size designation.............................. 372 Tire temperature Maximum tire pressure.......................... 371
Traction grade....................................... 369 Checking (tire pressure monitoring MOExtended tires.................................. 339
Tread wear grade................................... 369 system)................................................. 364 Noise..................................................... 358
Tire pressure monitoring system Notes on installing................................. 377
Tire load (maximum)................................. 371 (function)............................................... 363 Overview of tire labeling........................ 369
Tire pressure Tire tread................................................... 358 Removing.............................................. 383
Checking (manually).............................. 362 Replacing...................................... 377, 380
Checking (tire pressure monitoring Tire-change tool kit Replacing the wheel trim....................... 381
system)................................................. 364 Overview............................................... 380 Restarting the tire pressure monitor‐
Maximum............................................... 371 TIREFIT kit ing system............................................. 364
Notes.................................................... 360 Storage location.................................... 340 Rotating................................................. 379
 Index 577

Selection............................................... 377 Touch-sensitive controls............................. 27 Information............................................ 244

Snow chains.......................................... 359 Touchscreen Traffic Sign Assist
Speed rating.......................................... 372 Operating.............................................. 282 Function/notes...................................... 241
Storing.................................................. 380 Setting................................................... 244
Temperature grade................................ 369 Tow-away alarm
Activating/deactivating......................... 103 System limitations................................. 241
Tire and Loading Information placard.... 365
Tire pressure (notes)............................. 360 Function................................................ 103 Transmission position display.................. 201
Tire pressure monitoring system Tow-bar system......................................... 272 Transporting
(function)............................................... 363 Tow-starting............................................... 353 Loading guidelines................................. 133
Tire pressure table................................. 361 Vehicle.................................................. 352
Tire Quality Grading............................... 369 Towing away............................................... 351
Tread wear grade...................................... 369
Tire size designation.............................. 372 Towing eye
TIREFIT kit............................................. 340 Installing................................................ 353 Trim element (Care).................................. 334
Traction grade....................................... 369 Storage location.................................... 353 Trunk box
Tread wear grade................................... 369 Towing methods........................................ 350 see EASY-PACK trunk box
Unusual handling characteristics.......... 358 Trunk lid
Traction grade........................................... 369
Toll system Activating/deactivating the trunk lid
Windshield............................................. 174 Traffic information opening height restriction........................ 91
Switching on the display....................... 302 Closing.................................................... 85
Tool
see Vehicle tool kit Traffic Light Assistant Emergency release (from inside)............. 90
Traffic light data service........................ 245 HANDS-FREE ACCESS............................. 88
Top Tether.................................................... 68 Locking separately.................................. 90
Traffic light data service
Touch Control Messages on the driver's display........... 245 Opening................................................... 84
Driver display......................................... 273 Opening dimensions.............................. 476
Traffic light view Power closing function............................ 85
Operating.............................................. 282
Activating/deactivating......................... 244
578 Index

Unlocking (mechanical key)..................... 90 V Starting (start/stop button).................. 188

TuneIn Switching off (start/stop button).......... 207
Vehicle Towing................................................... 272
Calling up.............................................. 321 Activating/deactivating standby mode.. 215 Unlocking (from inside)........................... 80
Turn signal indicator................................. 155 Collision detection (parking).................. 213 Ventilating (convenience opening)........... 93
Turn signal light Correct use............................................. 33
Data acquisition...................................... 35 Vehicle data
Activating/deactivating......................... 155 Displaying (DYNAMIC SELECT).............. 200
Data storage............................................ 35
Two-way radios Diagnostics connection........................... 31 Roof load............................................... 476
Frequencies........................................... 388 Equipment............................................... 26 Turning circle......................................... 476
Notes on installation............................. 387 Limited Warranty..................................... 35 Vehicle height........................................ 476
Transmission output (maximum)........... 388 Locking (automatically)........................... 82 Vehicle length........................................ 476
Locking (from inside)............................... 80 Vehicle width......................................... 476
U Locking/unlocking (emergency key)....... 83 Wheelbase............................................. 476
Unlocking Locking/unlocking (KEYLESS-GO)........... 80 Vehicle data storage
see Locking/unlocking Lowering............................................... 385 Event data recorders............................... 39
Unlocking setting........................................ 76 Maintenance........................................... 28 MBUX multimedia system/Mercedes
Medical aids............................................ 33 me connect............................................. 38
Updates Parking for an extended period.............. 214
Important system updates.................... 294 Vehicle dimensions................................... 476
Problem notification................................ 33
USB port QR code rescue card............................... 35 Vehicle electronics
Rear passenger compartment............... 146 Qualified specialist workshop.................. 32 Notes..................................................... 387
Raising................................................... 381 Two-way radios...................................... 387
User profiles
Adding a user........................................ 291 Standby mode function.......................... 214 Vehicle identification number
Selecting user options........................... 291 Starting (emergency operation mode)... 188 see VIN
Starting (Remote Online)....................... 189
 Index 579

Vehicle identification plate Windshield............................................ 466 J Brakes warning lamp (yellow)

Paint code............................................. 466 Vision (Canada only)........................................ 540
VIN........................................................ 466 Removing condensation from the ÿ Coolant warning lamp (red).......... 535
Vehicle interior windows................................................ 178
Cooling or heating (Remote Online)....... 189 Windshield heater.................................. 180 ÿ Coolant warning lamp (yellow)..... 536
Vehicle key ! Electric parking brake indicator
see SmartKey W lamp (red) (Canada only)....................... 539
Vehicle maintenance Warning lamp F Electric parking brake indicator
see ASSYST PLUS see Indicator/warning lamp lamp (red) (USA only)............................ 539
Vehicle operation Warning system # Electrical malfunction warning
Outside the USA or Canada..................... 27 see ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
lamp...................................................... 537
Vehicle tool kit Warning triangle
Removing.............................................. 338 ; Engine diagnosis warning lamp.... 537
TIREFIT kit............................................. 340
Towing eye............................................ 353 Setting up.............................................. 338 å ESP® OFF warning lamp............... 545
Ventilating Warning/indicator lamp ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes.......... 544
Convenience opening.............................. 93 ! ABS warning lamp........................ 543 ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up........ 544
Ventilation Ä Active Brake Assist warning 8 Fuel reserve warning lamp
see Climate control lamp...................................................... 543 flashes................................................... 537
Vents J Brake system warning lamp 8 Fuel reserve warning lamp
see Air vents (Canada only)......................................... 541 lights up................................................ 538
VIN $ Brake warning lamp (USA only).... 541
Identification plate................................ 466 H Mercedes me connect warning
Seat....................................................... 466 lamp...................................................... 546
580 Index

Ù Power steering warning lamp h Tire pressure monitoring sys‐ Removing a wheel................................. 383
(red)...................................................... 533 tem warning lamp flashes..................... 546 Removing/installing hub caps............... 381
Ù Power steering warning lamp h Tire pressure monitoring sys‐ Wheel rotation........................................... 379
(yellow).................................................. 533 tem warning lamp lights up................... 547 Wheels
Care...................................................... 333
Ù Rear axle steering warning L Warning lamp for distance Checking............................................... 358
lamp (red).............................................. 534 warning function................................... 542 Checking the tire pressure (manually)... 362
Ù Rear axle steering warning REAR SEAT AIR BAG................................ 58 Checking the tire pressure (tire pres‐
lamp (yellow)......................................... 534 sure monitoring system)........................ 364
Warning/indicator lamps
Definitions............................................. 374
é Recuperative Brake System PASSENGER AIR BAG.............................. 53 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN).... 370
warning lamp (USA only)....................... 540 Warranty...................................................... 35 Flat tire.................................................. 338
6 Restraint system warning lamp.... 531 Washer fluid Installing................................................ 384
see Windshield washer fluid Load index............................................. 372
ü Seat belt warning lamp flashes.... 532
Load-bearing capacity........................... 372
ü Seat belt warning lamp lights Washing by hand (care)............................ 331
Maximum tire load................................. 371
up.......................................................... 532 Water tank Maximum tire pressure.......................... 371
ä Suspension warning lamp (red).... 542 see Air-water duct MOExtended tires.................................. 339
Weather information................................. 302 Noise..................................................... 358
ä Suspension warning lamp (yel‐ Notes on installing................................. 377
low)....................................................... 542 Web browsers
Overview................................................ 312 Overview of tire labeling........................ 369
! The electric parking brake (yel‐ Removing.............................................. 383
Wheel change Replacing...................................... 377, 380
low) indicator lamp................................ 539 Lowering the vehicle............................. 385 Replacing the hub cap........................... 381
Mounting a new wheel.......................... 384
 Index 581

Restarting the tire pressure monitor‐ Windows Replacing wiper blades (MAGIC
ing system............................................. 364 Care...................................................... 333 VISION CONTROL)................................. 170
Rotating................................................. 379 Windows Winter operation
Selection............................................... 377 see Side windows Activating/deactivating snow chain
Snow chains.......................................... 359 mode..................................................... 359
Speed rating.......................................... 372 Windshield
Defrosting.............................................. 175 Snow chains.......................................... 359
Storing.................................................. 380
Temperature grade................................ 369 Infrared reflective.................................. 174 Wiper blades
Tire and Loading Information placard.... 365 Radio waves........................................... 174 Care...................................................... 333
Tire characteristics................................ 372 Replacing the wiper blades.................... 168 Replacing............................................... 168
Tire pressure (notes)............................. 360 Replacing wiper blades (MAGIC Replacing (MAGIC VISION CONTROL).... 170
Tire pressure monitoring system VISION CONTROL)................................. 170 Wireless charging
(function)............................................... 363 Windshield Function/notes..................................... 149
Tire pressure table................................. 361 see Windshield Mobile phone......................................... 151
Tire Quality Grading............................... 369 Windshield heater..................................... 180 Mobile phone (rear passenger com‐
Tire size designation.............................. 372 partment)............................................... 151
Windshield heater
TIREFIT kit............................................. 340 Wireless vehicle components
see Windshield heater
Traction grade....................................... 369 Declaration of conformity........................ 30
Tread wear grade................................... 369 Windshield washer fluid
Notes..................................................... 474 Workout program
Unusual handling characteristics.......... 358
Overview............................................... 122
Wi-Fi Windshield washer system
Topping up............................................. 329 Workshop
Configuring........................................... 295
see Qualified specialist workshop
Window curtain airbag............................... 48 Windshield wipers
Activating/deactivating......................... 167
Window lifter
Replacing the wiper blades.................... 168
see Side windows